Handbook, 1968

THE UNI VERSIT У OF MELBOURNE

FACULTY OF ARTS AND BOARD OF STUDIES IN JOURNALISM

HANDBOOK, 1968

PUBLISHED BY THE UNIYERSITY

TABLE OF CONTENTS Page Officers of the University . . 5 Faculty of Arts в Teaching Staff .. .. 7 CHAPTER 1. GENERAL INFORMATION 11 Dates in 1968 .. 11 Matriculation Roll . 12 Selection and Enrolment 13 Fees 15 Part-time Students 15 Evening Lectures 15 Single Subjects .. 1в Examinations 1в Graduation 1в Student Counselling and Housing 1в Appointments Board . 17 Financial Assistance .. 17 Student Facilities .. 18 Residence . . 18 CHAPTER 2. REGULATIONS Bachelor of Arts: Ordinary Degree .. 20 Degree with Honours 25 Master of Arts .. .. 29 Doctor of Letters .. 31 Doctor of Philosophy .. 31 Diploma in Psychology 33 CHAPTER 3. COURSES IN ARTS Choice of Course ...... 34 Students with Interrupted Courses 34 Study Progress .. .. 35 Approval of Course. 35 Degree with Honours . 35 The Ordinary Degree 3в Majors . . 37 Combined Courses Law and Arts .. 41 Social Studies and Arts 42 Graduate Studies . .. . . 43 CHAPTER 4. DETAILS OF SUBJECTS Arabic .. 177 Bengali .. 144 Biblical Studies .. 170 Chinese • 193 Classical Greece and Classical Rome .. .. .. 48 Comparative Religion (see Middle Eastern Studies) .. 173 Criminology .. .. .. .. .. ▪ 53 Dutch . 103 East Asian Studies 200 Economics 55 English . 68 •

Fine Arts . . 78 French 84 Geography 95 German 99 Creek .. 46 Hebrew . 175 History • 116 History and Philosophy of Science • 133 Indian Studies .. .. • 140 Indonesian Studies . . 147 Italian .. ▪ 151 Islam (see Middle Eastern Studies ) ▪ 173 Japanese .. 198 Latin .. • 47 Mathematics . 158 Middle Eastern Studies .. . 172 Music .. ▪ 191 Philosophy .. ▪ 202 Political Science . • 216 Psychology .. • 223 Public Administration .. 218 Rhetoric .. • 69 Russian . .. • 233 Science Subjects .. .. .. • .. 245 Statistics .. • 240 Swedish . 105 CHAPTER 5. COMBINED HONOUR COURSES: Table of Contents . . ▪. 251 CHAPTER 6. SCHOLARSHIPS, BURSARIES, PRIZES, ETC. . 285 CHAPTER 7, DIPLOMA IN JOURNALISM: Regulation .. .. .. • 293 Details of Subjects . ▪ 294 TIME-TABLE OF LECTURES .. ▪ 296 OFFICERS OF THE UNIVERSITY}

Chancellor, SIR ROBERT MENZIES.

Vice-Chancellor, . PROFESSOR SIR GEORGE PATON. Vice-Chancellor Elect, PROFESSOR D. P. DERHAM. Deputy Vice-Chancellor, PROFESSOR E. S. HILLS. Vice-Principal, R. D. MARGINBON. Registrar, F. H. JOHNSTON. Registrar Elect, A. T. J. BELL. Deputy Registrar, F. G. ELFORD. Accountant, M. N. FERGUSON. Academic Secretary, S. H. SHEFFIELD. Secretary, Letters and Humanities, and Sćhools Liaison liker, J. E. WARFE. Secretary for Graduate Studies, L. R. D. PYKE. Librarian, K. A. LODEWYCKS. Olicer-in-Charge, Students' Records, E. FINN. Fees Clerk, H. SHUREY. Director, Student Health Service, DR. H. D. G. HETHERINGTON. Student Counsellor, J. W. FREDERICK. Secretary, Appointments Board, K. GRAVELL. Warden, University Union, VACANT. Sports Union Secretary, W. TICKNER.

OFFICERS 0F THE FACULTY OF ARTS

Of/iсе of the Dean Dean, PROFESSOR JACKSON. Associate Dean, PROFESSOR SIMON. Assistant Dean, R. R. PRIESTLEY. Sub-Dean, N. MILNE. Tutor to Arts students, MISS C. NORWOOD. Administrative Assistant, MISS I. OELSCHNER. Office Secretary, MRS. B. HEYWOOD. Assistant Oшее Secretary, MISS L. STRAUSS. Of}ice of the Registrar Secretary, H. G. HELMS. Associate Secretary, T. A. HAZELL. Assistant to the Secretary, MISS H. R. REILLY. liike Secretary, MRS. G. FORDYCE. All correspondence should be addressed to the Registrar.

t A complete list of Administrative Officers may be found in the University Calendar. 5 FACULTY OF ARTS DEPARTMENTS AND SCHOOLS LOCATION CLASSICAL STUDIES, Professor H. A. K. Hunt Old Arts Building CRIMINOLOGY (BOARD OF STUDIES ) 21 Royal Parade Mr. S. W. Johnston ECONOMICS (FACULTY OF ECONOMICS AND COMMERCE), New Commerce Building. Professor W. Prest Miss M. M. Bayne (Economic Geography) ENGLISH, Professor S. L. Goldberg Old Arts Building Professor V. Buckley FINE ARTS, Professor J. T. Burke New Arts Building FRENCH, Professor R F. Jackson New Arts Building GEOGRAPHY, Professor J. Andrews Redmond Barry Building GERMANIC STUDIES, Professor J. Smit New Arts Building 21 Royal Parade HISTORY, Professor R. M. Crawford Old Arts Building Professor J. R. Poynter Professor N. D. Harper HISTORY AND PHILOSOPHY OF SCIENCE, Bushey Miss D. Dyason INDIAN STUDIES, Mr. S. N. Ray Administration Annexe INDONESIAN STUDIES Administration Annexe ITALIAN, Mr. C. A. McCormick Administration Annexe MATHEMATICS, Professor E. R. Love New Arts Building

MIDDLE EASTERN STUDIES, Professor J. Bowman 25 Royal Parade MUSIC (FACULTY OF MUSIC), Conservatorium of Music Professor G. F. Loughlin ORIENTAL STUDIES, Professor H. F. Simon Microbiology Building PHILOSOPHY, Professor D. A. T. Gasking Old Arts Building POLITICAL SCIENCE, Professor A. F. Davies New Arts Building PSYCHOLOGY, Professor O. A. Oeser Redmond Barry Building RUSSIAN, Mrs. N. Chiistesen New Arts Building STATISTICS, Professor E. J. Williams New Arts Building FACULTY OF ARTS

Senior teaching staff for 1968

CLASSICAL STUDIES Professor Н. А. К. Hunt, B.A. ( Syd. ), М.А. (Oxon), Litt.D., Dip.Ed. Reader, G. Н. Gellie, М.А., B.Ed. Senior Lecturers, K. J. Mckay, . ., D.Litt. (Utrecht) J. R. C. Iartyn, . . (Cantab.)М А A. D. Pryor, B.A.М (Cantab.)А Lecturers, J. M. Carter, . . (Cantab. ) * P. J. Connor, B.A. ( МCantab.А and Me1b. ) R. D. Scott, B.A. ( Cantab. and leib.)

ENGLISH Robert Wallace Professor, S. L. Goldberg, B.Litt. (Oxon), B.A. Professor V. T. Buckley, М.А. Associate Professor K. L. Macartney, M. A. (Cantab.), B.A. Senior Lecturers, A. S. Cole, A.B. ( Bowdoin ), Ph.D. (Dublin) Н. Dow, A.B. (Harv.) E. Lloyd Jones, А.М. (stan.), М.А. Т. P. Dobson, . . (Cantab.), B.A. Mary T. Tomlinson,М А B.A. ( Cantab. and leib.) T. B. Tomlinson, B.A. ( Cantab. and W.A. ), LL.B. (W.A.) Lecturers, C. Waliace-Crabbe, M.A. Doreen Gil1am, M.A. (Lind.)

FINE ARTS

Professor J. T. Burke, O.B.E., М.A. (Lind. Yale and le1b.) Reader, F. A. Philipp, B.A. Lecturer, L. J. Course, B.A. Assistant Lecturer, B. J. Gilbert, В.А. FRENCH Professor R. F. Jackson, Chevalier de la Légion d'Honneur, Officier de l'Instruction Publique, B.A. (Syd.), М.А. Senior Lecturer in Philology, P. L. G. Canart, B.A. Senior Lecturers, S. J. Scott, М.А., Ph.D. Claire Н. Burger, . . A. H. M. Denat, L:М Аès-L., Dip. 'Et.Sup. (Toulouse), . . ((Yid) F. P. Just, D.U.P., B.A. д М А A. К. Holland, B.A. ( Syd. ), Dip. d'Etiules (Bordeaux), D.U.P. J. Garagnon, Ancien élève de l'Ecole Normale Supérieure, Agrégé des Lettres Classiques. G. D. Watson, B.A. (Adel.), D.U.P. Lecturers, Micheline Giroux, L.-bs-L., Dip.d'Et.Sup., C.A.P.E.S. C. B. Thornton-Smith, M.A., B.Ed., Ph.D, M. Ropert, L.-bs-L. Kathleen McPhee, М.А., Dip.Ed. Assistant Lecturers, T. R. Casey, М.А., Dip.Ed. Patricia А. Clancy, М.А., Ph.D. • On leave. FACULTY OF ARTS HANDBOOK GEOGRAPHY Professor J. Andrews, В.А. (Syd.), Ph.D. (Cantab.), М.А. Readers, Е. C. F. Bird, M.Sc. ( Lind. ), Ph.D. ( A.N.U. ) A. A. Wilcock, B.Sc., B.Ed. Sеniог Lecturers, T. М. Perry, B.A., Dip.Ed. (Syd.); Ph.D. (A.N.U. J. R. V. Prescott, B.Sc., М.А., Dip.Ed. (Dunehn), Ph.D. (Lend.; Lecturers, К. J. Fairbairn, М.А. (N.Z.) G. J. Missen, B.A., Dip.Ed. ( Syd. ), М.Ѕ. ( Wis. ) R. F. Parsons, B.Sc. (Adel.) GERMANIC STUDIES Professor ( й charge of Dutch and Germanic Philology ) J. Smit, Knight of the Order of Oranje Nassau, Litt.D. (Utrecht), M.A.} Reader in German, H. Wiemann, М.А., Ph.D. Reader in Dutch, R. P. Meijer, М.А. (Amst.), Ph.D. Senior Lecturer in Germaп, H. Maclean, M.A., Ph.D., Dip.Ed. Lecturers in German, Eva Ruff, М.А. C. Kooznetzoff, B.A., Dip.Ed. ( Q'1d ), Dr. Phi1. ( Heidel.) Lecturer in Dutch, K. де Graaff, B.A. ( Amst.) Lecturer in Swedish and Icelandic, Marianne Berggren, M.A. (Stockholm) Assistant Lecturers in German, . A. Hesse, Staatsexamen (Bonn), Dip.Ed ( Cologne ) Н H. J. Pott, B.A. Assistant Lecturer in Dutch, G. A. Verheijden, M.A. (Amst.) HISTORY Professor R. M. Crawford, B.A. ( Syd. ), M.A. (Oxon and Me1b. ) Ernest Scott Professor, J. R. Poynter, М.А. ( Oxon ), Ph.D. Professor of American Histoтy, N. D. Harper, М.А., B.Ed. Readers, D. E. Kennedy, Ph.D. ( Cantab. ), М.А. Senior Lecturers, Marion Gibbs, _ М.А., B.Litt. ( Окоп ) L. R. Gardiner, B.A. (Brist.), М.А. W. A. Bate, М.А. D. F. Mackay, D.Phil. ( Oxon ),_ М.А. W. Culican, М.А. ( Едin. ) I. G. Robertson, B.Phi1. (Oxon), B.A. L. Robson, М.A. (Tas.), Ph.D. (A.N.U.) Lecturers, Alison M. Н. Patrick, В.A. R. Isaac, В.А. ( Cape T. afd Oxon) P. F. Bourke, Ph.D. (Wis.), B.A., Dip.Ed. C. B. McCullagh, B.A. ( Syd. ), Ph.D. (Cantab.) R. T. Ridley, B.A. (Syd.) J. R. Parris, B.D. (Chicago), B.A. HISTORY AND PHILOSOPHY OF SCIENCE Reader-in-Charge, Diana Dyason, M.Sc. Reader, F. J. Clendinnen, B.A. Senior Lecturers, L. Trengove, B.D., M.Se., Ph.D. (Lend.) Elizabeth B. Gashing, B.Sc. (Liv.), М.А., Ph.D. Lecturers, J. C. Pottage, B.A. R. W. Ноше, B.Sc. Assistant Lecturer, Monica М. MacCallunx, B.A. • On leave. Т Acting Head of Department in 1968. Llsт OF втлFF INDIAN STUDIES Reader-in-Charge, S. Ray, М.А. (Calcutta) Senior Lecturer, J. T. F. Jordens, Ph.D. (Louvain ), Dip.Ed.* Lecturer, A. Mojumder, M.A., B.T. (Calcutta) INDONESIAN AND MALAYAN STUDIES Reader-in-Charge, Vacant. Lecturer, J. P. Sorumpaot, B.A. (Gadjah lada), M.A. (Exeter) ITALIAN Reader-in-Charge, C. A. McCormick, B.A. (Cantab.) Lecturers, Cordelia Gundolf, Dott. Lett. (Rome) G. A. A. Comin, B.A. (Syd. ) Mary E. Dwyer, B.A. (W.A. and Oxon) Assistant Lecturer, Clara Astu i, Dr. Phil. (Vienna) MIDDLE EASTERN STUDIES Professor J. Bowman, M.A., B.D. (Glas.), D.Phil. (Oxon), M.A. Senior Lecturer in Middle Eastern Studies, A. D. Hallam, M.A., B.D. (Leeds), B.A. Senior Lecturer in Biblical Archaeology, J. Thompson, B.A., B.Ed., М.Sc. (Q7d), М.А., Ph.D. (Cantab.) Senior Lecturer in Islamic Studies, A. K. Kazi, B.A., Ph.D. (Lind.), Maulvi Fazil (Pant.), Ulamiya (Al-Azhar, Cairo) Senior Lecturer in Comparative Semitic Philology, A. E. Murtonen, Ph.D., Th.D (Helsinki)* Lecturer in Hebrew, D. Peles, M.A. (Jews.) Lecturer in Comparative Religion, G. Bolster, M.A., B.D. (Edin.') * Lecturer in Arabic, N. Mirza, B.A. (Beirut and Lind.), Ph.D. (Dunelm) Lecturer, D. Broadribb, B.A. (Roch.), M.A. (Ill.), B.D. (U.T.S.), Ph.D. ORIENTAL STUDIES Professor H. F. Simon, В.А. ( Lind. ), М.А. Senior Lecturers, Tsai-Hsien Chang, В.А. ( Fu jen and Col.), М.А. ' ( Mich. ) W. В. Eggington, B.A. ( Loud. and leib.) Lecturers, R. Cheng-I King, B.A. (Peking) lao-Jan Chu, В.А. ( Tsing Hua), A.I.E. (Lund.) L. R. Oates, В.А. PHILOSOPHY Professor D. А. T. Gasking, B.A. ( Liv. ), М.А. ( Cantab. ), М.А. Reader, H. J. McCloskey, М.А., Ph.D. Senior Lecturers, D. L. Gunner, M.Litt. (Cantab.), М.А. M. J. Charlesworth, Ph.D. ( Louvain ), М.А. Mary A. McCloskey, М.А., Ph.D. J. T. J. Srzednicki, М.А., Ph.D. J. E. D'Arcy, D.Phil. (Iron), Ph.D. ( Universita Gregoriana, Rome), М.А. G. D. Marshall, М.А. (N.Z.), Ph.D.* Lecturers, V. I. Rice, М.А., Ph.D. J. R. Howes, B.A. (Oxon), М.А. W. K. Presa, М.А. С. А. J. Coady, B.A. ( syd. ), B.Phil. (Oxon), IA. L. J. O'Neill, B.A., М.А. L. J. Chipman, М.А. • On leave. FACULTY OF ARTS HANDBOOK POLITICAL SCIENCE Professor A. F. Davies, М.A. Reader, L. G. Churehward, М.A., Dip.Ed. Senior Lecturers, E. A. Huck, .A. L. Peres, M.Pub.Admin. ('arv.)М Lecturers, K. G. Armstrong, .A. (Oxon), B.A. D. F. Miller, B.A. М A. A. Staley; LL.B. PSYCHOLOGY Professor O. A. °eser, М.Sc. (S. Africa ), Dr. Phil. ( Marburg), Ph.D. (Cantab. ), М.A., F.B.Ps.S. Readers, F. N. Cox, М.Sc. (Yale), M.A., Ph.D. S. B. Hammond, В.А. (W.A.), Ph.D., A.B.Ps.S. P. Lafitte, В.Sc. (Land.), М.A., Litt.D., A.B.Ps.S. R. Taft, M.A. (Col.), Ph.D. (Calif.), B.А., A.B.Ps.S., F.A.P.A. Senior Lecturers, G. Gardner, B.A., Ph.D. ( Lend. ), M.A., A.B.Ps.S. A. R. Greig, B.A., A.B.Ps.S. A. C. Jeffrey, M.B., B.S., B.Sc., A.B.Ps.S. F. Кnopfehnacher, B.A. (Brist. ), Ph.D. (Lind.) P. D. Langley, В.A. (W.A.), B.Ed., A.B.Ps.S.* Patricia M. Leaper, M.A., Ph.D., A.B.Ps.S.* K. F. Taylor, B.A. (Manc. ), .A. (Lind.), Dip. Soc. Stud. (Lei . ), A.B.Ps.S. М ć K. W. Walsh, B.A., M.B., B.S., М.Sc., A.B.Ps.S. Lecturers, Margaret B. Gilchrist, М.A., A.B.Ps.S. C. W. Langley, .A. (Harv. ), B.A. L. Mann, Ph.D. М(Yale), M.A. Assistant Lecturers, Norma Grieve, M.A., Dip.Ed. Tamara Kotler, M.A. R. C. S. Trahair, B.A., Ph.D. RUSSIAN Senior Lecturer-in-Charge, Nina Christesen, B.A. (Q'ld ), M.A. Senior Lecturer in Russian Literature, D. Grishin ( Kand.nauk, formerly Docent, U. of Moscow), Ph.D. Senior Lecturer in Russian Philology, Zinaida Uglitzky (Kand.nauk, formerly Docent, U. of Voronezh), Ph.D. Lecturers, Margaret В. Travers, M.A., Dip. Slay. Studies (Oxon) I. Мeshakov-K rjakin, M.A. P. V. Cubberley,о M.A. (Glas.) • On leave.

10 CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION Dates in 1968

8 January Interviews (by appointment) with sub-dean for аÜ new students begin: see p. 35 'Approval of Courses', for details; see also Enrolmеnt', p. 13. 19 January Last day of enrolment for all students previously enrolled. 4 March Orientation Week for First-Year students begins with official welcome in Wilson Hall. 11 March First Term begins. Lecture Terms: 1st: 11 March-18 May 2nd: 11 June-10 August 3rd: 2 September-19 October 25 July Last day for entry for final examinations. 28 October Annual examinations begin. 18 November Final examinations (honours degree) begin.

(Dates, etc., are included in the pocket diary, published by Melbourne University Press and sold at the University Book Boom.)

Courses in Arts Bncnar oa of Awns (Oannvwnx DEGREE ). comprises ten subjects on a wide basis of general education, and is normally completed in three years. BncHu on or ARTS ( DECREE wrrи Horroves) covers four years and involves specialization in a particular school or in a combination of two schools (see regulation 3.5 and Details of Subjects). References to the postgraduate degrees of МAsтER or Aвтs, Docmo/t os PØ osopnx and DocroR os LETTØ will be found on pp. 29-33.

Combined Degrees including Arts Combined courses for degrees in Arts and other faculties are available. Students contemplating such a combined course should consult the deans or sub-deans of the appropriate faculties before commencing their course. Graduates in other faculties wanting to proceed to a degree in Arts must apply for selection in the Arts quota and should consult the sub-dean well in advance of the closing date for applications on 1 November 1987. Late applications are not accepted. Not less than six subjects must be completed before the degree can be obtained. Au students new to Arts who have been enrolled in another faculty in this University in a previous year must apply for selection not later than 1 November 1967. Students wishing to combine an Arts course with a course for another degree or diploma must satisfy the Arts faculty course requirement by passing in a language other than English at the Matriculation examination except that in special cases some discretion may be exercised by the faculty. Enquiries in such cases should be made of the sub-dean. In particular, dispensation from the language' pm-requisite is granted to graduates in another faculty and to those who have: qualified for the Diploma of Social Studies. Further information concerning these combined courses will be found on p. 41.. FACULTY OF ARTS HANDBOOK Matriculation Roll When beginning a course for a degree or diploma which requires matriculation, all students must pay the prescribed fee, make the prescribed declaration and sign the matriculation roll at the Students' Records like. The dates fixeд for matriculating in 1968 are 1 and 8 May and 13 June. Unless this is done no subjects passed can count towards a degree or diploma requiring matriculation. Before enrolling students should satisfy themselves that they are eligible to sign the matriculation roll. In order to be eligible to sign the matriculation roll, candidates must have— (a) satisfied the university entrance requirements of the Victorian Universities and Schools Examinations Board. Full information regarding the board's requirements and conditions of exemption may be obtained from the secretary of the board, 437 St. Kilda Road, Melbourne, Vic. 3004. (b) satisfied the special course requirements, if any, for their particular course. (c) been selected for and enrolled in their course, and (d) attained the age of seventeen years by 31 March of the year concerned. Foreign Language Pre-requisite In addition to satisfying university entrance requirements, candidates must also have satisfied the special course requirement for their course. For the Arts course the pre-re uisite is a pass at the matriculation examination in a language other than English. All students at school are strongly advised to include a language in their matriculation studies, even if at that stage they have no intention of entering the Arts course at this university. Even those who have firmlу decided to take an all-Science matriculation are advised to take a language to at least School Leaving standard in order to provide for a possible change of intention. In the great majority of cases the faculty has no alternative to ruling ineligible those who have not completed the pre-requisite. The chief, and virtually the only exceptions are indicated. below. (i) A candidate who fails at matriculation in the language but obtains marks in the compensatory range may be admissible. Eligibility in such cases is determined by use of a mathematical formula when applications for selection are being considered and no additional application is necessary. (ii) A candidate who has passed in a language to at least School Leaving standard and who has taken an all-Science matriculation (normally including Physics, Chemistry anд two Mathematics subjects) will usually be eligible for Arts under the provision for change of intention. This exception does not apply to students who take an Arts-type matriculation in preparation for courses such as Commerce or Law. (iii) A candidate who satisfies the faculty that English is not his native language and that he has passed in another language at an examination of reasonable standard or has received his secondary schooling in another language may be permitted to substitute English for a language other than English at matriculation. Enquiries in such cases should be directed to the Sub-Dean. (iv) Graduates of another faculty and holders of the Diploma of Social Studies are granted exemption from the pre-requisite. Holders of the university's Diploma of Physical Education and of certain other diplomas are eligible provided they have passed in a language to at least School Leaving. • standard. (v) A student with a distinguished record at matriculation and in the first year or more of a course in another faculty may be considered fot admission providing he has passed in a language to at least School Leaving standard prior to commencing the Arts course. Enquiries in such cases should be made of the Sub-Dean. A decision on eligibility and on credit for relevant subjects will be taken in the light of all the circumstances in the individual case. 12 CЕЕНАL ØORMATION (vi) In very few other quite special cases (e.g. a candidate with a School Leaving language who has taken matriculation under conditions which made it quite impossible for a language to be included), some discretion may be exercised by the faculty. Enquiries in such cases should be made of the Sub-Dean. The relevant part of the Regulation is on page 20.

Selection and Enrolment NEW STUDENTS Applications for selection must be lodged on the prescribed form available from the Victorian Universities Admissions Committee, P.O. Box 2754, C.P.O., Melbourne, Vic. 3001, and must be lodged not later than 1 November in the year preceding that for which admission is sought. After selection has been notified enrolments and payment of fees must be made by the date set out in the selection notice. Students should read the handbook carefully (particularly chapter 3) and attempt a preliminary selection of subjects. Before enrolment they must attend at the office of the sub-dean in the Old Arts building to complete an application for approval of the course proposed for the First Year. Advice on the choice of course and on the selection of subjects is obtainable from the oike of the sub-dean where members of staff will see students by appointment from 8 January ( or, if necessary, in December). Appointments may be made through the secretary (Phone 34 0484, Ext. 342 or 648 ). Students applying for selection in the Arts course for 1968 who were unable to attend the group discussions held in December may attend at one of the following times in January: Tuesday, at 10 a.m., 16 January; Thursday, at 2 p.m., 18 January. The forms to be completed after selection are as follows: (a) application for approval of course, to be lodged, after interview with the sub-dean, at the beginning of the First and Second Years, and when any change is made; (b) enrolment card for lectures (or, in the case of students outside the metropolitan area, for external studies)—this must be lodged afresh at the beginning of each year; (c) ( for students who have not previously signed the Matriculation Roll) application to matriculate. , (d) bank slip for the correct fees. It should be noted that in most courses for the degree of bachelor of Arts with honours the additional subjects must be taken in the First and Second Years. Most of the lectures are held in the Arts buildings. Directions to the variou' classrooms will be found on the indicator near the entrance by the clock tower in the first week of term. N.B.—Lack of accommodation has made it necessary to limit the number of Arts students enrolling in some subjects. Students, whether new to the Faculty or not, who wish to enrol for the following subjects in 1968— Biology, Chemistry parts IA or IB, Physics parts IA or IB or IT, Any subject in Psychology or Mathematics must therefore note that— (i) their enrolments will initially be treated as provisional only; (ii) these enrolments will not be accepted after the due date; (iii) a special application form must also be completed with the enrolment, or when accepting a place in the faculty quota. It is expected that virtually 13 FACULTY OF ARTS HANDBOOK all ap licants for those special subject quotas can be accommodated. Students are advised not to disqualify themselves by failing to apply for subjects they wish to take. ЕхтØлL SТUDENТs As from 1968 external enrolments from new students will not be accepted. Students previously enrolled in the Arts course may apply by 19 January to continue with external study. Should a student desire to transfer to internal study an application for selection must be made as for new students ( see p. 13). Enrolment for external study is permitted only in the subjects named below. In respect of each of these subjects a student must submit a special application form ( obtainable from the Registrar's 011ie or on written request to the Registrar). Enrolment for each subject is conditional upon approval by the faculty and the appropriate department. ExгEв AL SuвзEлs AvAn. ABLE IN 1968 Group I Greek I In these subjects the material of the lectures is not Latin I available and assistance is confined to the correction of the set work of the class. A few students with good results in Greek I or Latin I may be permitted by the Professor of Classics to complete a major externally. Dutch I Students with a good background in Dutch or German German I are occasionally permitted by the Germanic Studies Department to study externally. Lecture notes are not provided. Group 2 Philosophy IA Lecture notes are available in these subjects. Logic Modern Philosophy Political Philosophy may be available for external study in 1968. Pure Maths I Pure Maths II Group 3 History and Philosophy of Science I and II. or 4 These subjects may be available in 1968. Permission of the Head of the Department must be sought. Croup 4 Subjects of the Science Faculty which can be taken at approved Tech- nical Colleges. These are fairly limited and the Technical College in your district will know if its subject is recognized. Applied Maths I Applied Maths II Group 5 Biblical Studies I, II and III. Middle Eastern Studies A, B, and C. These subjects are offered by the Department of Middle Eastern Studies and notes are provided in all courses. Students resident in the metropolitan area or outside Victoria will not normally be accepted for external studies. The fees for external studies are ( except for annual registration, sports, union and S.R.C. fees ) the same as for lectures, and should be paid on the due dates each term. Any notes issued to external students are supplied free of charge. Country students taking a degree course must attend at the Registrar's office to sign the matriculation roll before sitting for their first year's examinations. Ρ. ЕІ вог Ø FOR Sтun тs CUØNTLy IN AST Aнтs Cоuкsв Previously enrolled undergraduates should enrol by 19 January. (All others, including Arts students who have formally withdrawn from the course or who have interrupted without formal leave of absence for at least two years or who have passed no subjects for the last five or more years, or who wish to transfer from external to internal study, shall be required to apply for selection as for "New Students"). They must inform the Sub-Dean of any proposed changes at any stage in their courses. Those entering the Second Year must attend at the office of the Sub-Dean to complete an application for approval of course for the Second and later years. Appointments may be made through the Secretary. 14 GENERAL INFORMATION LAER ENTØs These may in special circumstances be accepted on payment of an additional fee, but no candidate will be admitted to the annual examination in any subject, exce t with the special permission of the Professorial Board, who has not enrolled for that subject within one month after the beginning of first term. TERMINAL RE-ENROLMENT In order to maintain the accuracy of the University's records, every student will be required to fill in a special re-enrolment slip at the end of the first term, showing the subjects which he proposes to study for the remainder of the year. A student who does not wish to proceed with his course must notify Students' Records in writing immediately. ENROLMENT AFTER INTERRUPTION OF COURSES Students who have interrupted their course must consult the Faculty office before re-enrolment (see also refer. p. 34) . М.А. PRELIMINARY AND М.А. Enrolment must be made by the third week in first term. No enrolment from new or current candidates is valid without approval of the department concerned and the Faculty office. Candidates are required to enrol and pay fees in each year over which their course extends. Although a student may apply for permission to suspend his course for up to one year, the time over which these courses may extend is limited. Candidates are advised to make preliminary enquiries at the appropriate department. Fees When enrolling, students must consult the fees section of Studentš Records before payment of fees. Lecture fees are paid yearly in advance or in three terminal instalments, the first being paid on enrolment and the second and third on or before 17 May and 25 July respectively. Certificated teachers of the Education Department nominated by the Minister for Education are required to pay only half fees for lectures and external studies. Applications for this concession must be made to the Education Department before 1 April. All fees must be paid into the University's account at a branch of the National Bank of Australasia. A branch of the bank is located next to the Bookroom. Fees are subject to annual determination. In addition the precise charges for a student will depend upon the year of the course and the number and choice of subjects being taken. However, as a general guide, it may be assumed that the total fees for a four subject first year would be approximately $370. Part-time Students The course for the ordinary degree may be taken by part-time study. However, students should note the following provisions: (i) Except in special circumstances part-time students may not enrol in more than two subjects in any year. (ii) Where part-time students began their Arts course before 1966, the eight subjects comprising the two majors and sub-major must be completed within eight years except with special permission of the faculty. Those commencing their course after 1965 must complete the ten subjects of the degree within ten years. Applications for extension of timø should be made in writing to the Registrar. ( iii) Since their studies are likely to extend over a number of years, part-time students should take particular care to note any changes in regulations and to consult the 'sub-dean before changing their courses. The course for the honours degree is not normally available to part-time students. In some schools the first two years, but not the whole course, may be taken part-time by students providing they are able to attend the honours classes. Part-time students should also read the section on study-progress (p. 35). Evening Lectures Certain of these are held between 4 and 6 p.m.; some lectures are held on Saturday morning. Those held after 6 pan, are for the most part for pass only. For individual subjects see time-table at the end of the handbook. 15 FACULTY OF ARTS HANDBOOK "Single" Subjects This is a form of enrolment for students who do not wish to take a degree or diploma in the University. As the syllabus for single subjects differs from Matricula- tion studies, students are warned that the taking of single subjects is of no assistance in gaining selection for an Arts course. Intending students must complete a special application form obtainable from Students' Records office by 19 January. The applicant will be notified of the decision and, if successful, informed of enrolment procedures to be completed. It should be noted that in all subjects very few single subject entries can be accepted. Certificates showing single subjects passed at any annual examination may be obtained on application and payment of a fee to the Registrar.

Examinations Annual Examination. All candidates for the annual examination must have enrolled at the beginning of the year for lectures or for external studies, and must lodge an examination entry with the Registrar not later than 25 July. The entry must specify whether the candidate intends presenting for pass or honours in each subject, no candidate being permitted to enter for both pass and honours in the same subject. Candidates who take the honour paper in any subject, but fail to reach honour standard, are eligible to be granted a pass. A Urne-table of the annual examination will be available at the Registrar's оffice some weeks before the examination commences. No additional examination fee is payable by those who have paid full lecture fees in the subjects for which they present themselves, but candidates sitting at country centres must pay a supervision fee of $3 per subject. Examination numbers for candidates presenting at the University will be available at Students' Records during the week before the examination begins, and must be applied for by candidates in person. Candidates sitting at country centres will receive their numbers by post. Applications for special consideration, together with medical or other evidence, must be lodged before the commencement of the annual examination period or as soon thereafter as practicable. Applications lodged after the publication of results will not be considered. Any student in any faculty who fails at the examinations may be reported to the Professorial Board, and may be excluded from such course or courses as the Professorial Board shall specify or may be limited in any year to subjects specified by the faculty. Final examination in Arts (degree with honours), etc. Entries for the deal examination in Arts (degree with honours) must be lodged not later than Thursday, 25 July. Graduation The dates for conferring degrees in 1988 are as follows: Wednesday, 13 March Saturday, 23 March Saturday, 6 April Wednesday, 24 April Saturday, 17 August Saturday, 14 December Candidates for degrees and diplomas must lodge an application on the prescribed form, obtainable from the Students' Records Office, by the due date.

Student Counselling and Housing Counselling The staff of the Student Counselling Office (Mr. Jon Frederick, Miss Marjorie Ross, and Mr. Denis Kelynack) are available to help students and intending students with problems such as: 16 CFNE B r. INFORMATION choice of course or career difficulties in settling down to study adjustment to University life financial and accommodation problems personal difficulties. They are available in the usual University hours, preferably with, but if necessary without, an appointment. Matriculation students and others not yet enrolled should arrange an appointment by ringing 34-0484, ext. 409. The Student Counselling Office is located at 268 Elgin Street, Carlton, near tram stop 11 in Swanston Street. Housing The University Housing Office provides an accommodation service for students who require lodgings other than in colleges, halls of residence and hostels. Flats, full board, bed and breakfast, and rooms with the use of cooking facilities can be obtained through this office. The Housing Officer (Mrs. Beth Robieson) is available during the usual Univer- sity hours. Appointments can be made by ringing either 34-2023 or 34-0484, ext. 637, or by calling at the Housing Office, which is located at 255 Elgin Street, Carlton, opposite the Student Counselling Office. Appointments Board The Appointments Board provides the following free services: 1. Advice on Careers Long experience in matters relating to the employment and professional advance- ment of university men and women enables the officers of the Appointments Board to give reliable advice on professional careers. Careers handbooks may be obtained from the Appointments Board which also offers to students the use of a Careers library. 2. Employment Service (a) Students Employment. (Vacation Work, Part-time Work and Odd Jobs.) Undergraduates requiring vacation work should register early to give the board time to make the necessary arrangements; those wishing to work during the long vacation should register before the end of August. (b) Professional Employment The Appointments Board maintains a comprehensive register of professional vacancies which the secretary and assistant secretaries are glad at all times to discuss with graduates. This assistance is available also to those students who, for one reason or another, fail to complete their courses, and in these cases special effort is made to enable undergraduates to use their university training in employment. Financial Assistance Although it is the student's own responsibility to anange the finance needed to support him through the University, some financial assistance is available. Of the general scholarships offered for the whole period of a course the majority are awarded by the Commonwealth Government and the Victorian Education Depart- ment. A smaller number of other scholarships is also awarded at the commencement of University study and others are open to competition in later years of a course. In addition, annual exhibitions and prizes are awarded in a number of subjects. The University awards annually a limited number of bursaries, usually of $100 a year, and students may also apply for loans from the Studentš Loan Fund. Bursaries and loans are not normally offered in the First Year of a course. Applications for bursaries close mid-February. Some details of the above are given in the section of this Handbook under the heading "Scholarships, Bursaries, Prizes and Financial Assistance" commencing on p. 285. Students in financial need are advised to enquire at the Accounts Department. 17 FACULTY OF ARTS HANDBOOK Student Facilities Information about the Baillieu Library, the Union, the student health service, student housing, the book exchange and other facilities is given in the Orientation handbook which is distributed by the Students' Representative Council free of charge to new students before the beginning of first term. The handbook also contains information about clubs and societies, sporting activities and other aspects of student life at the University. On 4 March, the Students' Representative Council will arrange conducted tours of the main University buildings and opportunities for students to meet members of the teaching staff. Students receive a great deal of information about study at the University which may answer most of the practical questions which concern them before the beginning of term. The Colleges of the University There are ten residential colleges connected with the University, each of which provides additional teaching, mainly of a tutorial character. The resident colleges for rien are: Trinity College (Church of England) Ormond College (Presbyterian) Warden: Dr. R. L. Sharwood Master: The Rev. Dr. J. D. McCaughey Address: Рarkvillе, Vic. 3052. Address: Parkville, Vic. 3052. Queen's College (Methodist ) Newman College (Roman Catholic) Master: Dr. O. Parnaby Rector: V. Rev. M. M. Scott, S.J. Address: Рarkvillе, Vic. 3052. Address: Parkville, Vic. 3052. Whitley College (Baptist) Ridley College (Church of England) Principal: Rev. M. Himbury Principal: Dr. L. Morris Address: Parkvile, Vic. 3052. Address: Parkvillе, Vic. 3052. The resident colleges for women are: Janet Clarke Hall ( Church of England) St. Mary's College ( Raman Catholic) Principal: Dr. Eva G. Eden Principal: Mother Francis Frewin, Address: Parkville, Vic. 3052. I.B.V.M. Address: Parkville, Vic. 3052.

University Women's College ( Undenorninational) Principal: Mrs. Margaret Russell-Smith Address: Parkville, Vic. 3052. St. H1Øß College (Methodist-Presbyterian) Principal: Mrs. Marjorie Smart Address: Parkville, Vic. 3052. College teaching is available for non-resident as well as resident students. All the colleges have liberal provision for resident scholarships and non-resident exhibitions. The University fees do not Include college fees, which are payable to the colleges themselves. For further information regarding the colleges, students are referred to the sections printed in the University Calendar and to the heads of colleges. University Halls of Residence International House: Warden: S. G. MeL. Dimmick, Address: 241 Royal Parade, Рarkvillе, Vic. 3052. International House, a University Hall, provides a place of residence, education and corporate life for members of the University. Approximately equal numbers of its members are from Australia and overseas. Tutorial assistance is provided in the basic subjects of most faculties, for both non-resident and resident 18 GENERAL INFORMATION students. Scholarships and bursaries are available. International House provides for ` Associate membership which enables students who reside in the vicinity to be full members, coming to the House for meals and tutorials as well as enjoying all its facilities and privileges. Non-resident members are those attending tutorial classes only. Medley Hall: Warden: R. H. Wilkinson, Address: 48 Drummond Street, Carlton, Vic. 3053. Residence is available for Australian and overseas students, both men and women. The University fees mentioned above do not include fees for the halls of residence. For further information regarding halls of residence students are referred to the appropriate section of the University Calendar, and to the wardens of those institutions. Graduate House Warden: W. E. F. Berry Address: 224 Leicester Street, Carlton, Vic. 3053. A postgraduate hall of residence, accommodating 23 persons. Average weekly rental is $20, which includes all meals except week-day luncheon.- For higher degree - workers and academic visitors only.

19 Снлргвн 2 REGULATIONS Regulation 3.5—Degree of Bachelor of Arts 1. The degree of bachelor of Arts may be obtained either as an ordinary degree or as a degree with honours. 2. Candidates for the degree of bachelor of Arts must, after matriculating, pursue their studies for the ordinary degree for three years, and the degree with honours for four years, and pass examinations in accordance with the conditions prescribed. A candidate is deemed to be pursuing Ø First Year until he has received credit for at least three subjects of his course and thereafter to be pursuing his Second Year until he has received credit for six subjects of his course. A candidate must at the beginning of his First Year submit for the approval of the faculty his proposed course for the degree and must submit similarly any altera- tions subsequently proposed therein and any subjects in addition to such course in which he proposes to enter for examination. 3. No candidate may receive credit for any subject for the purposes of the degree of bachelor of Arts unless he has at least six months before presenting himself for such subject passed or obtained honours in a language other than English at the matriculation examination: Provided that the faculty may grant credit for such subjects as it may approve to a candidate who has pursued a course in this University towards a degree in Science, Agricultural Science, Medicine, Dental Science, Engineering or Architecture, or a course in another university, after such candidate has satisfied the faculty that he has reached a satisfactory standard in a language other than English: Provided that any candidate who is qualified to matriculate and who before commencing the First Year of the course for the degree of bachelor of Arts satisfies the faculty that he is capable of pursuing the studies of the said year, that he has reached a satisfactory standard in a language or languages other than English, and that he would suffer severe hardship if required to pass a language other than English at the matriculation examination the faculty may grant him special permission to enter upon his course without having passed or obtained honours in a language other than English at the said examination: Provided that if a candidate satisfies the faculty that English is not his native language and that he has an adequate knowledge1 of a language other than English, the faculty may permit him for the purposes of this section to substitute English for a language other than English. 4. Subject to dispensation by the faculty in special cases, no candidate shall be admitted to examination in any subject of the course or to the fin l examination fo1 the degree with honours unless he either: а (a) has attended such classes, submitted such written work and performed such practical, laboratory, field or clinical work as may be prescribed from time to time in the details of subjects for that subject or for the final examination; or (b) satisfies the faculty that he has had appropriate training elsewhere.

TØ ОнпптArY DECREE 5. A candidate shall pass at the annual examination in at least ten subjects in such manner as to comply with the following conditions, viz, he shall— (a) pass in two majors;' and (b) pass in at least one subject from each of at least four of groups 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5. a Evidence of "adequate knowledge" of a la gu ge other than English may be provided by a candidate's having passed in it at an examinationа ofа reasonable standard or having received his secondary schooling in that language. Ѕ For approved majors see p. 37. HEGULATIONs

6. A major consists of three subjects, approved by the faculty as affотдing a continuous and progressive course of study, passed in three separate years. Majors must accord with the gradation set out below and no major may include more than one grade 1 subject. 7. No candidate may receive credit for more than four subjects passed at any one examination. 8. The subjects of the course for the ordinary degree are those included in the following table:

Grade 1 Grade 2 Grade 3 GROUP 1 63-1. Arabic part I 63-2. Arabic part II 63-3. Arabic part III 50-1. Bengali part I 50-2. Bengali part II 50-3. Bengali part III 73-1. Chinese part I 73.-2. Chinese part II 73-3. Chinese part III 27-1. Dutch part I 27-2. Dutch part II 27-3. Dutch part III 20-1. French part I 20-2. French part II 20-3, French part III 26-1. German part I 26-2. German part II 26-3. German part III 1-1. Greek part I 1-2. Greek part II 1-3. Greek part III 82-1. Hebrew part I 62-2. Hebrew part II 62-3. Hebrew part III 54-1. Italian part I 54-2. Italian part II 54-3. Italian part III 74-1. Japanese part I 74-2. Japanese part II 74-3. Japanese part III 2-1. Latin part I 2-2. Latin part II 2-3. Latin part III 104-1. Russian part I 104-2. Russian part II 104-3. Russian part III 30-1. Swedish part I 30-2. Swedish part II 30-3. Swedish part III 52-1. Indonesian part I 104. Russian part IA 103. Russian (Reading Course)

GROUP 2 Criminology 186-1. Criminology A Economics 8. Economics A 219. Economics В Any two units of (Arts) 220. Economics C 1-6

216. Economic Geo- 217. Economic History 229. Economic History graphy part I A В Any two units of Economic History C 1-4

(Grade 2 or 3) 228. Economic Geo- graphy part II 223. Statistical Method

History (Grade 2 or 3) 33. Ancient History 36. American. History 34. British History 37. Australian History 35-1. European History 35-2. European History A B 38. Far Eastern History 39. Later British History 21 FACULTY OF ARTS HANDBOOK Grade i Grade 2 Grade 3

Political Scieпcв (Grade 2 or 3) 93-1. Modern Govern- 93-2. Modern Govern- 95. Political Sociology ment A rient 93-3. Modern ВGovern- ment C 94. International Rela- tions 96. Public Administra- lion Social Studies 209. Social History

GROUP 3 History and Philosophy of Science 44-1. History and Philo- 44-2. History and Philo- 44-3. History and Philo- sophy of Science sophy of Science sophy of Science part I part II part ш (Grade 2 or З) 382. History and Philo- sophy of Science (Science Course) Mathematics 384-1. Pure Mathematics 384-2. Pure Mathematics 384-3. Pure Mathematics part I part II part III

Philosophy (Grade 2 or 3) 77-1. Philosophy part IA 86. Contemporary 87. Aesthetics 77-2. Philosophy part IB European 88. Philosophy of Philosophy Religion 80-1. Epistemology, Logic and Methodology 81. Ethics 84. Greek Philosophy 85. Medieval Philosophy 78. Modern Philosophy 82. Political Philosophy 83. Problems of Philosophy 79. Rationalist Metaphysics

Gsюvr 4 Geography 23-1. Geography part I 23-2. Geography part II 23-3. Geography part III

History and Philosophy of Sсiепсв 44-1. History and Philo- 44-2. History and Philo- 44 . History and Philo- sophy of Sdenco sophy of Science З sophy of Science part I part II part III 22 REGULATIONS (Grade 2 or 3) 382. History and Philo- sophy of Science ( Science Course) Grade i Grade 2 Grade 3 Mathematics and Statistics 383-1. Applied Nathema- 383-2. Applied Nathema- 383-4. Applied Mathema- tics part I tics part I tics part III 386. - General Mathema- tics 410. Principles of Static- 410-1. Theory of Statistics 410-2. Theory of Statistics tics part I part II Psychology 100. Psychology part I 100-1. Psychology part 100-3. Psychology part IIA IIIA 100-2. Psychology part 100-4. Psychology part IIB IIIB

Sciencв 412. Biology Either 361-1. Chemistry part IA or 361-2. Chemistry part IB Engineering Study* 373-1. Geology part I Either 398-1. Physics part IA or 398-2. Physics part IB or 398-3. Physics part I T

GROUP 5 Area Studies 64-1. Biblical Studies 64-2. Biblical Studies 64-3. Biblical Studies part I part II part III 37. East Asian Studies part I (Grade 2 or 3) 47. Indian Studies A 48. Indian Studies В 48. Indian Studies C 52-2. Indonesian and 52-3. Indonesian and Malaysian Malaysian Studies A Studies В (Grade 2 or 3) 65-1. Middle Eastern 65-2. Middle Eastern Studies A Studies 65-3. Middle EasternВ Studies C Classics 3-1. Classical Greece 3-2. Classical Rome English 11-1. English part I 11-2. English part II 11-3. English part III 12. Rhetoric Not available in 1968. 23 FACULTY OF ARTS HANDBOOK Fine Arts (Grade 2 or 3) 17-1. Fine Arts A 17-2. Fine Arts B 17-3. Fine Arts C

Music (Grade 2 or 3) 70-1. Music 70-2. Music В л 70-3. Music C

No candidate may receive credit for both— French part I and French part IAs Russian part I and Russian part IA Russian part I and Russian (reading course) Russian part IA and Russian (reading course Economic Geography part I and Geography part I Later British History and Social History Pure Mathematics part I and General Mathematics Principles of Statistics and Theory of Statistics part I History and Philosophy of Science subjects may be taken as subjects ešłhet of Group 3 or of Group 4 but not of both. 9. Except with the special permission of the faculty no candidate may proceed to any of the subjects set out in the following table without completing the appropriate prerequisites:

Subject Pre-requisites Group l Chinese part II East Asian Studies part I Japanese part II East Asian Studies part I

Group 2 Criminology A Psychology part I Economics C 1-6 Economics B Economic History A A Grade 1 History subject or any two Arts subjects Statistical Method Economics A Any Grade 2 or 3 History A Grade I History subject` subject International Relations Modem Government A or any History subject4 Modem Government B Modern Government A Modem Government C Modern Government A or International Relations Political Sociology Any Grade 2 or 3 Political Science subject Social History A Grade 1 History subject or any two Arts subjects

Group 3 History and Philosophy of Any two subjects of Group 4 or a Group 4 sub- Science ( Science Course) ject and Epistemology, Logic and Methodology. Epistemology, Logic and A grade I Philosophy subject or any two Univer- Methodology sity subjects.

s FгеасЪ part IA was discontinued in 1966. 4 Special provision is made for students taking certain approved majors. 24 REGULATIONS Contemporary European Philosophy Ethics Creek Philosophy Medieval Philosophy Any one Philosophy subject. Modern Philosophy } Political Philosophy Problems of Philosophy Rationalist Metaphysics Aesthetics Philosophy of Religion Any two Philosophy subjects. Group 4 Subject Pre-requisites History and Philosophy of Science Any two subjects of Group 4 or a (Science Course) Group 4 subject and Logic Applied Mathematics part II Pure Mathematics part I Applied Mathematics part III Pure Mathematics part II Theory of Statistics part I Pure Mathematics part I Theory of Statistics part II Pure Mathematics part II Psychology part IIA Psychology part I Psychology part IIB Psychology part IIA prerequisite or concurrent Psychology part IAA Psychology part IIA Psychology part IIIB Psychology part IIIA prerequisite or concurrent Engineering Study An two University subjects Group 5 у Indian Studies B г Indian Studies C J Indian Studies A Indonesian and Malaysian Studies A Indonesian part I Indonesian and Malaysian Studies B Indonesian and Malaysian Studies A Fine Arts B or C Fine Arts A' 10. Except by special permission of the faculty a candidate must pass the ten subjects of the course within a period of ten years from the beginning of the academic year in which he passes in the first of such subjects. 11. Where an honour examination is provided in any subject of the course for the ordinary degree, a candidate may enter for and be classed at that examination. A candidate so entering may compete for the exhibition in a subject in accordance with the conditions prescribed therefor: Provided that no candidate may be awarded an exhibition at an examination when at that examination he is completing or might complete the course for his degree. 12. In any subject of the course for the ordinary degree which is not a subject of the course for the degree with honours the faculty may if it thinks fit prescribe that the examination shall be both for pass and for honours. 13. (a) A candidate who is taking or has taken the course for another degree in the University may also be admitted to the degree of bachelor of Arts if he has passed in at least six subjects of the Arts course approved for the purpose by the faculty in addition to the subjects required for such other degree. Provided that no candidate may be so admitted unless he has passed or received credit for at least 10 subjects. (b) A candidate who is taking or who has taken a course for the diploma of Social Studies and who wishes to take the course for the degree of bachelor of Arts shall submit for approval a course extending over at least four years and comprising at least thirteen subjects. (c) A candidate who is taking or has taken a course for the diploma in Journa- lism and who wishes to take the course for the degree of bachelor of Arts shall submit for approval a course comprising at least fourteen subjects. DECREE wrri Howwns 14. (a) A candidate for the degree with honours must pursue the studies and pass the examinations prescribed in the details of subjects either in an honour school or in a combined honour course approved by the faculty as equivalent to an honour school. Special provision is made for students taking certain approved majors. 25 FACULTY OF ARTS HANDBOOK (ь ) There shall be the following honour schools— A. Classical Studies B. History C. Philosophy D. Mathematics E. English Language and Literature F. French Language and Literature G. Germanic Studies H. Economics I. Political Science J. Middle Eastern Studies K. Psychology L. Mathematical Statistics M. Russian Language and Literature N. Fine Arts O. History and Philosophy of Science P. Geography Q. Chinese R. Italian Language and Literature S. Indian Studies 15. The subjects of the course must be passed in accordance with section 9 hereof so far as it is applicable and in accordance with such conditions as may be prescribed by the faculty in the details of subjects. 16. (a) A candidate in his First Year must pursue a course of studies of at least three subjects either as prescribed for that Year in the details of subjects for some honour school or combined honour course or approved by the faculty as preparatory to a choice among two or more such schools or courses and must reach such standard as may be prescribed in the details of subjects. Except with the special permission of the faculty no candidate shall take more than four subjects in his First Year. (b) The faculty may either in the details of subjects or by individual determination in special cases prescribe the conditions under which a candidate will be admitted to the work of the Second Year of an honour school or combined honour course. (c) A candidate must at the beginning of his Second Year be approved by the faculty as a candidate in a specified honour school or combined honour course must pursue to the satisfaction of the faculty the course of study prescribed for the Second. Third and Fourth Years of that school or courses must at such annual examinations and in such subjects as may be prescribed be placed in the class list and must be placed in the class list at the Øa1 examination. 17. The faculty may direct for any subject or part of a subject that the final examination shall be held at the same time as the annual examination. 18. In addition to the class lists for the final examination in each honour school there shall be a separate class list for the final examination in each combined honour course approved by the faculty. 19. No candidate may be placed in the class list at the final examination more than twice in the same school or combined honour course. 20. A candidate who has failed to obtain a place in the class list at any examination may- ( a) if of sufficient merit be given credit for particular subjects in the course for the ordinary degree and in the final examination may be allowed the ordinary degree either immediately or on the completion of such further work as the faculty may determine; (b) present himself and be classed at a subsequent examination. 21. Where a candidate desires to abandon the course for the degree with honours and to proceed with the course for the ordinary degree the faculty may prescribe what further work must be completed by the candidate to qualify him for admission to th' ordinary degree. • The faculty will allow changes to be made at the end of the Second Year only in special cases in which all the work req u ired for the school or combined course to which the change is made ham been covered in the preceding sections of the course. 28 REGULATIONS 22. A candidate for the ordinary degree may after completing his First Yeat apply to be approved under section 16 (a) hereof as a candidate for the degree with honours and the faculty shall prescribe what additional work shall be required of such candidate in order to complete his First Year as prescribed under section 16(a) and (b) hereof. 23. A person who has obtained the ordinary degree may with approval of the faculty be admitted as a candidate for the degree with honours. The faculty shall ( notwithstanding section 16 hereof) prescribe what further work must be completed by the candidate before he shall be admitted to the final examination. 24. A candidate who has been placed in the class list at the al examination in any school or combined honour course may subsequently with the approval of the faculty which shall prescribe what further work (if any) must first be completed by him present himself and be classed at the final examination in any other school or combined honour course. 25. The following awards may be made annually on the work of the Year— Open to competition among candidates taking such subjects in the First Year of their course: Greek part I ...... H. B. Higgins exhibition of $30 Latin part I . John Grice exhibition of $30 English part I (Ions) .. .. John Sanderson exhibition of $30 French part I Baillieu exhibition of $30 German part I .. .. .: Exhibition of $30 Dutch part I . Exhibition of $30 Russian part I ...... Exhibition of $30 British History ...... Marion Boothby exhibition of $30 Ancient History part I ...... Exhibition of $30 Modern Government A .. .. .. Exhibition of $30 Philosophy part IA or part IB Hastie exhibition of $30 Pure Mathematics part I ...... John MacFarland exhibition of $30 Applied Mathematics part I .. .. Dixson scholarship of $30 Psychology part I ...... Exhibition of $30 Open to competition among candidates taking such subjects in the First or Second Year of their course: Modern Government A .. .. .. Exhibition of $30 Economic History part A ...... Exhibition of $30 Open to competition among candidates taking such subjects in the Second Year of their course: Greek part II . Douglas Howard exhibition of $30 Latin part II ...... .. .. ...... Douglas Howard exhibition of $30 English Language part II and English Literature part II ...... . Edward Stevens exhibition of $308 Medieval French Language and Literature Mary Taylor scholarship of $30 Dutch part II ...... Exhibition of $30 Russian part II. . ...... Exhibition of $30 Pure Mathematics part I . . . Dixson scholarship of $40 Applied Mathematics part II .. .. Dixson scholarship of $40 Psychology part IIA ...... Exhibition of $30 Open to competition among candidates taking such subjects in the Third Year of their course: French part III .. ...... Mrs. William Smith exhibition of $30 Renaissance French Language and Literature or Advanced Medieval French Language and Literature . Mary Taylor scholarship of $30 German part III .. .. . .. .. Exhibition of $30 Open to competition among candidates taking such subjects in the Third or Fourth Year of their course: Comparative Philology ...... Exhibition of $30 • Also the Alexander SиtЬегlaпд prize of $5 (books). 27 . FACULTY OF ARTS HANDBOOK A Hastie exhibition in'Philosophy of $60 shall be open to competition among candidates in the Second Year of their course in the honours school of Philosophy. The R. G. Wilson scholarship in History of $60 shall be open to competition among candidates in the Third Year of their course, either in the school of History or in a combined course in which History forms a part. The Dixson scholarships in Pure Mathematics part III and Applied Mathematics part III of $70 each shall be open to competition among candidates in the Third Year of their course either for bachelor of Arts ( degree with honours ), in the school of Mathematics or in a combined course in which Mathematics forms a part, or for bachelor of Science or for bachelor of Engineering. Except with the approval of the faculty these scholarships shall not be awarded except to a candidate who is placed in the first class. Where no candidate in the Second Year of the honour school in Philosophy is placed in the first class the emoluments of the exhibition may with the approval of the faculty be awarded in whole or in part to a candidate who is placed in the first class in a combined honour course, of which Philosop hy subjects form part. Except as otherwise provided in the details of subjects for any honour school no exhibition may be awarded to any candidate who is not at that examination placed in the class list in two subjects of a course for the degree with honours. No exhibition may be awarded to any candidate in any subject which he is not at that examination passing for the first time. Except with the approval of the faculty no exhibition in any subject shall be awarded except to a candidate who is placed in the first class in that subject. Notwithstanding anything to the contrary in the preceding paragraph candidates taking Physics part IA, Chemistry part IA, Chemistry part IB, Geology part I or Biology who pass or obtain honours at that examination in not less than three approved subjects may compete for any prize or exhibition open for competition in such subjects in the course for the degree of bachelor of Science as set out in regulation 3.20.10, group 1. 26. At the final examination there shall be the following scholarships of $50 each in the named schools: A. Classical Studies .. R. G. Wilson scholarship B. History ...... Dwight final examination prize C. Philosophy ...... Hastie scholarship E. English Language and Literature ... .. .. .. Dwight final examination prize F. French Language and Literature . . .. .. Dwight final examination prize G. Germanic Studies R. G. Wilson scholarship H. Economics ...... Dwight final examination prize I. Political Science Dwight final examination prize J. Middle Eastern Studies R. G. Wilson scholarship K. Psychology Dwight final examination prize L. Mathematical Statistics Dwight final examination prize M. Russian Language and Literature . ...... R. G. Wilson scholarship N. Fine Arts .. . .. Dwight final examination prize O. History and Philosophy of Science .. .. Dwight final examination prize P. Geography . .. .. .. Dwight final examination prize Q. Chinese .. .. R. G. Wilson scholarship R. Italian Language and Literature ...... . R. G. Wilson scholarship The scholarship or prize in each school shall be open to competition amongst those candidates who are presenting themselves in that school for the first time. 27. Except with the approval of the faculty no scholarship in any honour school at the final examination shall be awarded except to a candidate who is placed in the first class in the final examination. Where for any scholarship in an honour school there is no candidate or there is no candidate who is placed in the first class at the final examination and the scholarship is not otherwise with the approval of the faculty awarded, the scholarship may with the approval of the faculty be awarded in whole or in part to a 28 REGULATIONS candidate who is placed in the first class in the finаl examination in any combined honour course of which subjects of such honour school form a part. Where there is more than one combined honour course in which subjects of the same honour school form a part and in which candidates have been placed in the first class, the scholarship may be divided between such combined honour courses: Provided that no candidate taking a combined honour course may at the one examination be awarded emoluments of greater value than twenty-five pounds. Where for any honour school there is no candidate or there is no candidate placed in the first class and the scholarship is not otherwise with the approval of the faculty awarded in either a pure school or a combined course, the said scholarship may be transferred with the approval of the faculty to any other school or schools or combined courses in which there are a number of candidates. placed in the first class at the final examination.

[TEMPORhEY RЕcuLАТio. Notwithstanding anything to the contrary contained in regulation 3.5, a candidate who before 31st March, 1964 has passed in Economics C or Public. Finance or Trade and Development as the third subject of a major in Economics will complete the third part of a second major by passing in two unit courses approved by the faculty. This temporary regulation shall expire on 31st March, 1968.] [TEIPonAl'v RЕcvr.АТroN 1. Notwithstanding the provisions of Regulation 3.5 Bengali part II and Bengali part III shall not be subjects of the course for the degree of bachelor of Arts until 1 January 1968 and 1 January 1969 respectively. 2. This temporary regulation shall expire on 2 January 1969.]

ETEMPOKAnY Авсиг.лтгох A candidate who obtained credit for any subject or subjects of the course before 31st March, 1966 may complete the course under the regulations in force on 31st March, 1965 except that, for the purpose of completing a qualification for the degree, a candidate who on 31st December, 1944, had credit for any subject or subjects of the course shall not without special permission of the faculty retain credit therefor after 31st March, 1968. This temporary regulation shall expire on 31st March, 1975.] Regulation 3.6—Degree of Master of Arts 1. A person may be a candidate for the degree of master of Arts if- ( a) he has completed the course for the degree of bachelor of Arts with honours, or (b) after completing the course for the degree of bachelor of Arts (ordinary degree) and obtaining the recommendation of the head (or heads) of the school (or schools) within which he proposes to pursue his studies for the degree of master of Arts he (i) pursues further studies for two years or such shorter period as the faculty approves and (ii) satisfies the faculty at a preliminary examination that he has the ability to pursue the advanced studies required for the degree of master of Arts, or (c) having completed the course for the degree of bachelor of Arts (ordinary degree) and having qualified for a degree of master or doctor in some other faculty, he satisfies the faculty of Arts of his ability to pursue the advanced studies required for the degree of master of Arts, or (d) being a graduate in some other faculty he satisfies the faculty of Arts at such preliminary examination as may be prescribed by the faculty of his ability to pursue the advanced studies required for the degree of master of Arts. 2. Before commencing the course each candidate must obtain the approval of the faculty. 3. The preliminary examination for a candidate who has completed the course for the degree of bachelor of Arts (ordinary degree) or is a graduate in some other 29 FACULTY OF ARTS HANDBOOK faculty shall be prescribed by the head (or heads) of the appropriate school (or schools) in the light of a candidate's proposed advanced studies, and may consist of selected papers at the final examination for the degree of bachelor of Arts with honours or of special papers of equivalent standard. A candidate who is admitted on grounds of having qualified for a'degree of bachelor of Arts with honours in another University may be required to complete such additional work as the head ( or heads) of the appropriate school (or schools) shall prescribe before submitting for examination. 4. A candidate shall enter his name with the Registrar not later than the end of the third week of the first term of the year in which he commences either the further studies leading to the preliminary examination or the advanced studies for the degree and shall re-enrol in each year over which the course may be extended. 5. A candidate shall pursue advanced studies and enter for examination in one, or, with the approval of the faculty, in two of the following schools— A. Classical Studies B. History C. Philosophy D. Mathematics E. English Language and Literature F. French Language and Literature G. Germanic Studies H. Economics L Political Science J. Middle Eastern Studies K. Psychology L. Mathematical. Statistics M. Russian Language and Literature N. Fine Arts O. History and Philosophy of Science P. Geography Q. Oriental Studies R. Italian Language and Literature or in such fields of study as the faculty may approve.1 8. A candidate shall ordinarily pursue his advanced studies through not leas than one academic year, but if any candidate be engaged in employment other than University study he may be required by the faculty to spend not less than two academic years in advanced studies. 7. (i) The examination in each school shall be prescribed by the Professorial Board in the details of subjects, and may be either wholly or in part by thesis and shall be held at a time or times to be fixed by the faculty. (ii) The candidate shall submit the subject of a thesis to the head (or heads) of the a propriate school (or schools) for approval not later than the end of thest term of the year in which the candidate begins the advanced studies. (iii) The thesis shall be submitted at such time as may be prescribed in the details of subjects: Provided that no candidate who is a bachelor of Arts ordinary degree only or who is a bachelor only in some other faculty who graduated as such without honours shall in either event present for examination until three years after the date when he qualifies so to graduate.

8. A candidate who satisfies the examiners shall be classified either as having . passed or as having been awarded first class or second class honours. 9. A candidate who has fulfilled the conditions prescribed and is a bachelor of Arts or a graduate in some other faculty of not less than one year's standing may be admitted to the degree of master of Arts. 10. Notwithstanding any statute or regulation to the contrary, candidates who at or before the examination held in the fourth term 1935 obtained first or second 1 The faculty Іхаs approved, for the purpose of this regulation, Social Studies, Indian Studies, Criminology and Music. 30 хнсцг.лтiохв class honours at the final examination for the degree of bachelor of Arts with honours, and who are bachelors of Arts of not less than two years' standing, may be admitted to the degree of master of Arts without further examination. Regulation 3.7—Degree of Doctor of Letters 1. A bachelor of Arts may at any time after seven years from the completion of his course for that degree become a candidate for the degree of doctor of Letters. 2. ' If the faculty is satisfied that a graduate in some other faculty has had an adequate training in letters the faculty may at any time after seven years from the completion of his course for a bachelor's degree admit him as a candidate for the degree of doctor of Letters. 3. Every candidate must submit for examination an original work,1 the subject, scope and character of which have been approved by the faculty, together with any other published or unpublished work which the candidate thinks appropriate. The examiners shall not certify that a candidate has passed the examination unless they are satisfied that the work submitted is effectively presented, and makes a substantial sustained and original contribution to learning. 4. A candidate shall not submit for examination work in respect of which a degree has been awarded in any university, or, without permission of the faculty, work which has previously been presented for any such degree. 5. If the principal work submitted by a successful candidate has not been published the degree shall not be conferred until it has been published in whole or in part in a form satisfactory to the faculty, unless for special reason exemption is granted by the Council on the recommendation of the faculty. 8. Candidates who have fulfilled the prescribed conditions may be admitted to the degree of doctor of Letters. I Three copies of work submitted must be lodged for examination.

Regulation 3.60-Degree of Doctor of Philosophy 1. A candidate for the degree of doctor of Philosophy must- ( a) (i) be a graduate of the University or of some other university or approved institution of university status recognized for the purposes of this regulation by the Professorial Board, and, if not a graduate of the University of Melbourne, matriculate in the University, save that— (ii) in special circumstances the Professorial Board may permit a person who is qualified to graduate in the University to be a candidate for the degree. However the theses of such a candidate submitted under section 6 of this regulation shall not be accepted for examination unless he has graduated in the University; (b) submit a proposed course of advanced study and research to be undertaken by him in a department of the University; (c) give satisfactory evidence of adequate training and ability to pursue the proposed course; (d) be of such standings as may be required by the Professorial Board for graduates in his faculty; (e) be accepted as such by the Professorial Board on the recommendation of the head of the appropriate department. 2. After being accepted he must pursue for at least two years a course of advanced study and research in the University under supervision prescribed by the Board; save that- ( a) in special circumstances the Board may grant permission for the candidate to spend not more than one year of his course in research at another institution provided that his work can be supervised in a manner satisfactory to the Board, or (b) when the head of the appropriate department recommends that it is essential for the candidate to obtain material for his course away from the University, the Board may grant permission for the candidate to absent himself from the University for such period as may be determined in each case, provided that supervision satisfactory to the Board can be maintained.

1Тhe minimum requirement of the Board is approved research experience for one full year or part-time approved research experience which, in the opinion of the Board, is equivalent to that gained in one full year. This requirement is included in the following specific statements of the pre-requisites of the several faculties. 31 FACULTY OF ARTS HANDBOOK 3. ( 1 ) The candidate shall be required during the course to devote his whole tine to his advanced study and research, save that- ( a) the Board may allow a candidate on application to undertake a limited amount of University teaching or outside work which in its judgment will not interfere with the continuous pursuit of the proposed course of advanced study and research; and (b) a member of the University staff may be accepted as a part-time2 candidate . . for the degree, whereupon the Board shall prescribe a minimum period for the duration of his course. (2) In special circumstances the Board may accept as a part-time2 candidate for the degree a person engaged in another regular occupation which in its opinion leaves the candidate substantially free to pursue his course in a department of the University. The Board shall prescribe for the duration of his course of advanced study and research a minimum period which in its opinion, having regard to the proportion of his time which he is able to devòte to the course in the appropriate University department,. is equivalent to the two years ordinarily required. 4. A candidate may be required during his course to attend lectures and practical work in subjects prescribed by the Board. 5. If the Board is of opinion that a candidate is not making satisfactory progress it may terminate his course or make such changes in the conditions of his candidature as it thinks fit. 6. On completing the course of advanced study and research a candidate must present a satisfactory thesis embodying the results of his research. The thesis shall be examined in manner provided in regulation 4.6 for the examination of theses for higher degrees. The candidate must also satisfy the examiners in such written, oral or practical examinations as may be required by the Board on the recommendation of the examiners. There shall be a panel of three examiners of whom two shall be external. The head of the appropriate department shall act as chairman of the panel but need not be one of the three examiners. If the head of the appropriate department is not an examiner he shall not have a vote.$ 7. Three copies of the thesis and a summary of 300-500 words must be sub- rutted. The thesis must be of standard format 4 approved by the Board.

Agriculture—B. Agr. Sc. рlиs one year of approved reaearcЬ experience. Applied Science—В.App.Sc. plus one year of approved research experience. Architecture—В. Arch. with Honours plus one year if approved research experience. Arts—M.A. with first or second class honours; B.A. with first or second class (Division A) honours together with one year's experience in approved post-graduate work. Dental Science—B.D.Sc. plus one year of approved research experience. Economics and Соmmеrce—M.Соm. or (in special cases approved by the Faculty) its equivalent, such qualifications to include at least one year of approved research experience. Education—M.Ed.; or B.Еd. with first class or high second class honours (or with equivalent performance) plus one year of approved research experience. Engineering—B.E. or В.Surv. plus one year of approved research experience. Law—LL.B. with honours (or, in special cases its equivalent) plue one year of approved research experience. Medicine—M.B., B.S. plus one year of approved research experience. Science—М.Se. (obtained as a result of at least two years approved research experience); or В.Sc. (Ions.) plus one additional year's approved research experience; or В.Sc. (Ord.) plus two years' approved research experience. The Faculty of Science would be prepared to accept as a sufficient pre-requisite in certain cases of full-time members of the Academic Staff, part-time research experience gained over two years providing such experience is more than equivalent to that gained in one full year. Veterinary Science—B.V.Sc. plus one year of approved research experience. 1 Normally candidates in the following categories only may be accepted on a part-time basis: (a) Full-time members of the University Staff who are able to devote a substantial proportion of their time to research. (b) Other persопв working full-time in University departments under the supervision of the Head of the Department and who are able to devote a substantial proportion of their time to research.

'The chairman of examiners shall facilitate consultation among the examiners and ‚ball prepare a comprehensive report on the result of the examination. 'See regulation 4.6, footnote 2. 32 REGULATIONS 8. A candidate in submitting his thesis shall state generally in a preface and specifically in notes the sources from which his information is derived, the extent to which he has availed himself of the work of others, and in general terms the portions of his work which he claims as original. When a candidate submits work carried out in collaboration with another person, he shall indicate his own share in the work. 9. A candidate may not present as his thesis any work for which a degree has been conferred on him in this or another university, but he will not be precluded from incorporating such work or any part thereof in his thesis: Provided that in his application for acceptance he has stated his intention of doing so and in presenting the thesis indicates the part of the work which has been so incorporated. 10. Candidates who have fulfilled the prescribed conditions may be admitted to the degree of doctor of Philosophy.

Regulation 3.64—Diploma in Psychology 1. A person may be a candidate for the Diploma in Psychology if— (a) he has qualified within the University or elsewhere for a degree approved for this purpose by the Faculty of Arts (hereinafter called the Faculty) on the recommendation of the Professor of. Psychology; (b) he has passed in a Psychology major or satisfies the Faculty, on the recommendation of the Professor of Psychology, that he has reached an equivalent standard; and (c) he has had (i) at least one year's relevant professional experience (e.g. as a psychologist or teacher), or (ii) equivalent experience accepted for this purpose by the Faculty on the recommendation of the Professor of Psychology. 2. A candidate for the Diploma in Psychology shall ppursue his studies for at least two years, attend such lectures and classes and perform such practical work as may be prescribed by the Faculty and pass the prescribed examinations. З. The subjects of the course shall be— Psychology of Counselling; Psychological Practice; Psychology in Education or Occupational Psychology. 4. The examinations in the several subjects shall be for both pass and honours, and shall include written work and field work as prescribed by the Faculty. 5. (a) The subjects of the course shall be taken in such order as the Professor of Psychology approves; (b) A candidate who passes in any subject or subjects shall be entitled to credit therefor. 6. A candidate who has fulfilled the requirements of this regulation and has passed in all the subjects of the course may be granted the Diploma in Psychology. CHATTER 3 COURSES IN ARTS Choice of Course An Arts course? One of the first questions for a new student to decide is whether to take a course in Arts or in another faculty. Some who have taken a mixture of Science and Humanities at the Matriculation Examination may be uncertain about making a choice even between Science and Arts. A frequently difficult choice may have to be made between Law or Commerce and Arts. Even when the main field of study has been selected some indecision about which degree course to take is possible. For example, most students wishing to specialize in Economics will take a course in the Commerce faculty but it is possible to take the honours school or a double major in Economics in an Arts course. Similarly, students may specialize in Mathematics for either Science or Arts. For some the solution is a combined degree, but such a course lengthens the period of time spent at the University and the student still needs to decide which degree he should aim at completing first. In cases of serious doubt, advice should be sought before applications for selection are submitted and enrolment completed. At school advice may well be sought in the first instance from the careers master or mistress. At the University the sub-deans of the relevant faculties may be consulted for information about the courses they administer. Students in doubt about whether or not to come to the University, or about which University course to do, may consult one of the student counsellors. Those concerned about employment openings may obtain information from the Appointments Board. Pass or Honours? The faculty offers two separate undergraduate courses, the pass course of three years leading to the ordinary degree and the honours course of four years leading to the degree with honours. A choice between the two is normally made at the beginning of the First Year; it is, however, possible to transfer from one course to the other at the end of the First Year. Since the ease and practicability of such transfers depend partly on the selection of First Year subjects (especially in changing from pass to honours ) careful thought should be given to the choice of course at the beginning. Although the correlation between results at the Matriculation examination and success at the University is imperfect, the first consideration on which to base a choice may well be results at the Matriculation examination. A student who obtains good honours at the Matriculation examination should at least consider taking honours. A student who obtains honours in no subject will usually take a pass course. However, the honours course is not restricted to those with distinguished school records nor to those who obtain first class honours at the University. Any student with moderately good results at the Matriculation examination who feels that he had not reached his full potential at school may well consider honours or at least select subjects which would facilitate a change to honours at the end of his First Year ( the taking of one subject at honours standard helps in this ). If sufficient promise is shown in the First Year of a pass course, it is usually possible to transfer to honours without loss of a year, although some additional work will normally be required in the Second Year. Candidates for scholarships and prizes are generally honours students and anyone who is interested in an academic career after graduation should take an honours course. It should be noted that in all cases admission to the Second Year of an honours school requires the approval of the head of the department concerned. Enquiries should be made well before the start of term. Students with Interrupted Courses All students proposing to interrupt a course must request permission in writing to the Sub-Dean of the Arts Faculty stating the period of proposed absence. Requests will be considered on the basis of previous academic performance. The maximum period of such interruption is 4 years. 34 COURSES IN ARTS Arts students who have interrupted their course for a period of five years or more must re-apply for selection (see instructions for new students, p. 13).

Study Progress The Faculty expects that students should be capable of at least a fifty per cent success rate in studying for the B.A. degree. Students who do not achieve this will normally be recommended to the Professorial Board for suspension from the course. This applies to the following classes of students: Full-time Students (a) Any student failing to gain at least one pass in the first year of his course; (b) Any student who within two years of the commencement of his course fails to obtain passes in four grade 1 subjects; (c) Any student who within four years of the commencement of his course fails to obtain passes in seven subjects. Part-time Students (a) Any student failing to pass three grade 1 subjects within three years of the commencement of his course; (b) Any student failing to pass six subjects within six years of the commencement of his course. The Faculty regards absence from an examination or withdrawal of an examination entry as the equivalent of a failure in the subject concerned. Non-enrolment in any year is treated in a similar way unless leave of absence from the course has been granted. Evidence to account for failure should be adequately documented. In the event of suspension students are advised to consult the Sub-dean about suitable preparation for re-admission.

Approval of. Course A. DEGREE. wrri 1oNoVBs The degree may be taken either in a pure school (e.g. Classical Studies) or in a combination of two schools ( e.g. Latin and Mathematics). Most of the subjects to be taken in each year are firmly prescribed and the course must be taken in the order set out in the details. Students should read carefully the regulations on p. 20 and the prescriptions in the details of the chosen course. A student who wishes, for special reasons, to substitute another subject for the one prescribed must obtain permission from the head or heads of the department or departments in which he is silting for honours, and consult the Sub-dean. The details of pure honours courses are set out under the heading of the relevant department. An index to the details of combined honours courses will be found зn p. 251. The following points should be noted: (i) The honours course is normally limited to full-time students. In some cases part-time students who can attend day classes may be permitted to take the first two years, but may not complete the degree by part-time study. (ii) All students must be approved by the faculty as candidates for the honours degree before being admitted to the Second Year of the course. Approval is usually given to students who have completed the First Year and obtained first or second-class honours in subjects prescribed at honours standard. (iii) A student who has not attempted honours but who, at the end of the First Year, wishes to enter an honours course, must make special application to the faculty through the sub-dean as soon as possible after the publication of examination results. If the application is granted the faculty will prescribe what further work must be completed before the student is allowed to proceed to the final examinations. 35 FACULTY OF ARTS HANDBOOK (iv) A change to another school or combined course at the end of the Second Year will usually require the taking of an additional year. (v) A change to the pass course after completion of the First Year can usually be arranged without loss of a year. Some special provision may be made for transfer to the pass course at the end of the Second Year and at the end of the Third Year. In all cases enquiries should be made of the sub-dean. (vi) Where in the following details of subjects a school requires `a sub- major', this is taken to mean two consecutive pants of an approved major (except that two parts of a 'mixed-major' are not acceptable).

В. THE ORDINARY DEGREE Structure of the Course The regulations governing a pass degree in Arts ( pp. 20-25) are complicated and will repay close study. Every student's choice of subjects, in any case, must be approved by the sub-dean before first term begins. However, a simplified account here may help each student to make a preliminary selection. 1. Every student must pass in TEN SumEcTs. The normal course is made up of four subjects in First Year and three in Second and Third Years. 2. Every student must include in his course two majors. A major is usually made up of three subjects in the one field of study, passed in three separate (preferably successive) years. 3. Every student must also satisfy the requirements of the Gnous' SYSтEм by passing at least ONE Suвj cт in Encu of Foul of the following groups: Gnour 1 A language other than English. Gaour 2 A subject in History, Economics, Political Science, Criminology. Gіоur 3 A subject in Philosophy, Pure Mathematics, History and Philo- sophy of Science. Gnous' 4 A subject in Applied Mathematics, Statistics, Psychology, History and Philosophy of Science, Geography, a Science subject. Gnus' 5 A subject in Biblical Studies, East Asian Studies, Indian Studies, Middle Eastern Studies, Classical Greece, Classical Rome, English, Rhetoric, Fine Arts, Music. After studying the regulations (pp. 20-33), the list of approved majors (later in this section) and the details of subjects, a student will plan a course to submit for approval. Obviously a great many courses would satisfy the regulations; the following admittedly unlikely combinations are printed only as samples, not as suggestions: 1st Major 2nd Major Remaining Subjects Arabic I 1968 English I 1968 Ancient History 1968 Arabic II 1969 English II 1969 Philosophy I 1968 Arabic II 1970 English III 1970 European History B 1969 Political Philosophy 1970

In this course the first major is in group 1, the second in 5. The remaining subjects must be chosen to cover two of groups 2, 3 and 4. 1st Major 2nd Major Remaining Subjects. Geography I 1968 Pure Mathema- French I 1968 tics I 1968 Geography u 1969 Pure Mathema- Rhetoric 1969 tics II 1969 Geography Ill 1970 Pure Mathema- Modern Government A 1968 tics III 1970 Indian Studies I 1970 38

COURSES IN ARTS In this course four groups are covered in the first eight subjects and the remainder may be chosen from any group.

1st Major 2nd Major Remaining Subjects Greek I 1968 Chinese I 1968 Biology 1968 Greek II 1969 Chinese II 1969 East Asian Studies I 1968 Greek III 1970 Chinese III 1970 Historry and Philo- sophy of Science 1989 Indonesian I 1970 In this course both majors are in group 1 and the remaining subjects are chosen to cover groups 3, 4 and 5. Providing four groups are covered in the course, more than one major may be taken in the one group.

1st Major 2nd Major Remaining Subjects Economics A 1968 Modern Govern- Pure Mathematics I 1968 ment A 1968 Fine Arts A 1968 Economics B 1989 Inter. Relations 1969 Geography I 1989 Economics C 1970 Modern Govern- Geography II 1970 ment C 1970

In this course both majors are in Group 2 and the remaining subjects have been chosen to cover groups 3, 4 and 5.

Approved Majors Note: (i) Some subjects may not be taken until others have been passed. For a list of these subjects and their prerequisites, see p. 24. (ii) The order in which the subjects comprising a major must be taken is established by reading across the page from left to right in the tables set out below. The subjects must be taken in separate years. (iii) Prior to 1966 two successive parts of a pure major comprised a sub- major. Students are strongly advised to plan a course which includes the first two parts of a third major. Such a course provides some insurance against a delay in completing the degree due to change of interest or to failure in the second part of a chosen major.

GROUP 1 Bengali I Bengali II Bengali III Greek I Greek II Greek III Latin I Latin II Latin III French I French II French III German I German II German III Dutch I Dutch II Dutch III Hebrew I Hebrew II Hebrew III Arabic I Arabic II Arabic III Russian I Russian II Russian III Italian I Italian II Italian III Chinese I Chinese II Chinese III Swedish I Swedish II Swedish III Japanese I Japanese II Japanese III Russian (Reading course Indonesian I 37. FACULTY OF ARTS HANDBOOK GROUP 2 Criminology Criminology A ( Psychology I must be passed Economics Maior Economics A (Arts) Economics B Any two units of Economics C 1-6f ( International Economics, Economic Development, Industrial Economics, Wel- fare Economics, Public Finance, Banking Finance) A candidate who proposes to take two majors in Economics ( six subjects) and to proceed to the preliminary examination for the degree of master of Arts in the school of Economics, must select as the three additional subjects Statistical Method and four units of Economics C 1-6 which were not included in the first major. Other candidates who propose to take two majors in Economics must select as the three additional subjects Economic History A and two of the following: Economic Geography I, Economic Geography II, Statistical Method, four units of Economics C 1-6f, Economic History B, two units of Economic History C f. The order in which these subjects are taken must comply with the regulations concerning pre-requisites and the grading of the subjects. If Economic Geography I is selected, it must be taken as the first subject of the second major, preferably at the same time as, or before, Economics A (Arts). Note: Economic History A may not be taken in the first year of the course. Economic Geography may not be taken in any Arts course which does not include a full major in Economics.

History British History European History B Australian History or or or Ancient History American History Far Eastern History or or or European History A Far Eastern History American History or or Australian History European History B or or Later British History Later British History Political Science Majors Modern Government A Modern Government B Modem Government C or International Relations or Political Sociology or Public Administration Modern Government A Public Administration International Relations or Modem Government B or Modern Government C or Political Sociology the t Any two of the units Economics C 1-б or of Economic History C 1-4 shall constitute eauiva:cnt of one subject. 38 COURSES IN ARTS Modern Government A International Relations Modern Government B or Modern Government C or International Relations or Political Sociology Social Studies Social History (Not approved as part of a major except for students who have passed it before 1965.) Note: Credit will not be given for both Social History and Later British History.

GROUP 3 History and Philosophy of Science Subjects offered by this department may be taken as either group 3 or group 4 subjects, provided that students taking more than one of these subjects indicate in which one of the two groups they place the subjects. Major History and Philosophy History and Philosophy History and Philosophy of Science I of Science II of Science III or History and Philosophy of Science (Science course) Science students or graduates who have passed History and Philosophy of Science (Science course) should consult the details of subjects in History and Philosophy of Science for additional majors.

Mathematics Pure Mathematics I Pure Mathematics II Pure Mathematics III

Philosophy A Philosophy major shall consist of three Philosophy subjects, taken in accordance with the prerequisites, and not including both of Philosophy IA and Philosophy IB. GROUP 4 Geography Major Geography I Geography II Geography III (Credit will not be given in the same course for Economic Geography I and Geography I).

History and Philosophy of Science Major History and Philosophy History and Philosophy History and Philosophy of Science I of Science II of Science III or History and Philosophy of Science (Science course) Mathematics and Statistics Applied Mathematics I Applied Mathematics II Applied Mathematics III Theory of Statistics I Theory of Statistics II (this sequence may not be started in the first year of the course) Principles of Statistics not as part of any major). 39 FACULTY OF ARTS HANDBOOK General . Mathematics ( does not fonn part of a major and may not be taken in addition to Pure Mathematics I). A candidate taking a major in Pure Mathematics or taking Pure Mathematics I and II may take as a major Applied Mathematics I Theory of Statistics I Theory of Statistics II

Psychology Psychology I Psychology IIA Psychology IIIA This is the only accepted major in Psychology. After first year subjects additional to the major may be Psychology IIB ( Second Year) and Psychology IIIB (Third Year). Science Biology ( Students who have not passed Physics and Chemistry at School Leaving Standard will find the Biochemistry part of Biology very difficult. If they have passed well in Matriculation Biology they should be successful. Others are advised to consider selecting another subject. ) Chemistry IA or IB Engineering Study (not to be taken in the first year of the course) Geology I Physics IA or IB or I T CROUP 5 Area Studies Biblical Studies I Biblical Studies II Biblical Studies III East Asian Studies I Indian Studies A Indian Studies B or C Middle Eastern Studies A Middle Eastern Studies B or C Classics Classical Rome ( does not form part of any major) Classical Greece

English English I English II English IIIf Rhetoric (may not be taken in a major, but may be taken in addition to other English subjects) Fine Arts Fine Arts A Fine Arts В or C Fine Arts C or B Music Music A Music В Music C 'MIXED' MAlins The following combinations of subjects have been approved. No other,combinations are acceptable as majors without the special permission of Faculty. Combinations of Groups 3 and 4 Majors Pure Mathematics I Theory of Statistics I Epistemology, Logic and Methodology History and Philosophy Theory of Statistics I Epistemology, Logic and of Science I Methodology t ln certain cases English III may be taken as the second part of a major. 40 COURSES IN ARTS (Provided that Pure Mathematics I shall be taken before Theory of Statistics L) History and Philosophy History and Philosophy Epistemology, Logic and of Science I of Science II Methodology Subject of group 4 History and Philosophy Epistemology, Logic and of Science Methodology (Science course) [Provided that two subjects of group 4 shall have been passed and subject to approval of the head of department of History and Philosophy of Science.] A candidate taking Pure Mathematics II as one of the additional subjects may take as a major: Pure Mathematics I Theory of Statistics I Theory of Statistics° II History and Philosophy Theory of Statistics I Theory of Statistics II of Science I Combination of Groups 1 and 5 Major Indonesian I Indonesian and Indonesian and Ма1ауап Studies A Malayan Studies B COMBINATIONS OF HISTORY, POLITICAL SCIENCE AND INDONESIAN STUDIES British History European History Bf or or European History A American History} International Relations or Far Eastern Historyf Modern Government A European History Bf or Economic. History Cl Modern Government C and 2 Modern Government A Modern Government B Australian History} Indonesian I Indonesian and Malayan Far Eastern History f Studies A or B or International Relations COMBINED COURSE FOB THE DEGREES OF BACHELOR OF ØTs AND BACHELOR OF LAW . A student who is admitted to a combined course for the degrees of B.A. (Ordinary) and LL.B. will receive credit in the B.A. course for Constitutional History and three other subjects in respect of the LL.B. degree. Credit for Constitutional History will become effective on passing that subject but the remaining credit will not become effective before the completion of the Third Year of the LL.B. course. The credit will be in Group 2 of the Arts course. A minimum of six Arts subjects must be completed and the degree designed to cover at least three of the five Groups. The six subjects are to be arranged to include at least one Arts major and one sequence of two parts of a major. The course should normally be taken in the following order: First Year Second Year Criminal Law Constitutional History I.L.M. Second part of major First part of major in Arts Second part of sequence First part of sequence in Arts Remaining subject of Arts course Fourth Year Third Year Third Year Law Third part of major Tort Fifth Year Contract Property Fourth Year Law Legal History t Note pre-requisite: a Grade I History subject. 41 FACULTY OF ARTS HANDBOOK A Bachelor of Laws who wishes to complete a B.A. (Ordinary) degree will receive similar credit. Special courses, usually of six years' duration, have been approved for students combining the B.A. (Honours) degree with LL.B. Enquiries should be made from the Sub-dean.

COMBINED CouRSE FOR BACHELOR OF ØTS, DIPLOMA OF SOØ STUDIES The following combined courses in . Arts and Social Studies have been approved: For students who take Social Studies, Course A Two majors to be chosen from the following: (1) Psychology I, Psychology IIA, Psychology IIIA (2) Social Organization A, Social History, Australian History or Social Organization B. (3) Any approved major of the Arts course. One approved sequence of two subjects to be chosen from the following. (1) Psychology I, Psychology IIA. (2) Social Organization A, Social History. (3) Any two consecutive parts of an approved major. Note: Social Organization A and Social History, and at least two parts of Psychology, must be included in the course to meet the requirements of the Dip- loma of Social Studies. Two Remaining subjects which shall be Social Biology and either one other Arts subject or Social Organization B, provided that at least one subject is taken from at least four groups of the Arts course, and that the course also complies with the requirements of the Diploma in Social Studies. The combined course is to be taken as follows:

First Year . Second Year Psychology I Social Organization A Social Biology Psychology IIA Two approved Grade I subjects Social Work I An approved Grade 2 subject Fourth Year Third Year Social Work III Social Work II Australian History Social History or Social Organization B 3rd Psychology Subject or 3rd Psychology subject. or An approved Grade 3 subject or An approved Grade 3 subject For students who take Social Studies, Course B First major: Psychology I, IIA, IIIA Second major: Economics. A, Economic History A, Economics B Remaining subjects: Social Biology, Psychology IIB, and two subjects chosen from two of Groups 1, 3 and 5.

COMBINED CОцRSE FOR BACHELOR OF ØTS (DEGREE WITH 1oNou1s), DreLOMA OF SocІAL STumEs Combined courses for the degree with honours in the schools of History, Philosophy, Psychology and Germanic Studies and the diploma of Social Studies have been approved. Details are included in the Social Studies handbook. 42 COURSES IN ARTS Graduate Studies (a) M.А. ØIMINARY Graduates with the degree of B.A. (Ord.) may in some instances be permitted. to study for M.A. This requires the passing of a preliminary examination. The length of time for the M.A. preliminary course varies according to the qualifications of the student in the appropriate school. In general, departments require that candidates have reached the standard of the B.A. (Honours) work in that school. Graduates of other faculties may in certain circumstances be admitted to M.А. preliminary courses without completing a В.А. All intending candidates should consult the appropriate department and also refer to enrolment procedures as indicated on p. 13.

Ρ (b) MASTER of Ап TS Candidates for this degree must either bave completed the course for the degree of bachelor of Arts with honours or, after completing the course for the ordinary degree, have pursued further studies for two years (unless this period be reduced by permission of the faculty in special circumstances) and have then passed a preliminary examination of the standard of the final examination for the degree with honours. The examination for the degree is usually in the form of a thesis. Intending М.A. Preliminary and M.A. students should consult the head of department concerned and obtain a special application form from the sub-dean's ofilce. Candidature must be approved by the department concerned and by the faculty before enrolment will be accepted. Candidates are required to enrol and pay fees in each year over which their course extends. Although a student may apply for permission to suspend his course for up to one year, the time over which these courses may extend is limited. In addition to the schools in which the examination may be taken as listed in the regulation, the faculty of Arts has approved for advanced studies such fields as Indian Studies Social Studies, Criminology and Music. No candidate can be admitted to the degree of master of Arts unless he is a graduate of at least one year's standing. The regulation is on p. 29. Details of the examination are printed under the beading of the relevant department. M.A. Examination In most departments examination is done by thesis, three ( 3 ) copies of which must be submitted to Studentš Records. Format of theses: (i) Generally should be on quarto size paper measuring 10ł4 in. x 8 in. but, where quarto is not suitable, on foolscap size paper measuring 13 in. x 8 in. (ii) Sheets should be numbered consecutively and clearly; interpolated sheets should be marked distinctly—e.g. 69 (a ), or as the case may require. ( iii) Folding diagrams or charts should be arranged so as to open out to the top and right. (iv) There should be a margin on the left hand side of at least 134 in. uniform on all sheets. (v) At least one copy, for deposit in the library, must be bound in such a manner that it will stand on the shelf as a book. All copies must have the pages firmly fastened within a cover. Spring-back folders must not be used. (lt is recommended that theses be bound by the Melbourne Univer- sity Press. ) (vi) A title page must show the title of the thesis, the degree for which it is submitted, and the full name of the author as well as a statement that the thesis is the candidate's own work and that he has quoted all source material used. - - (vii) The name of the author must be on the spine and it is desirable to show there also the title, abbreviated if necessary. 43 FACULTY OF ARTS HANDBOOK

(c) DoсrroR OF PØOSOPіY This in general is a degree for fui-time research workers. A candidate must be a graduate of this or some other University recognized for the purpose, must be of such standing as may be required by the Professorial Board for graduates in his faculty, and must be accepted as such by the Professorial Board on the recommendation of the head of the department concerned. He must pursue for at least two years a course of advanced study and research under a supervisor or supervisors appointed by the board, and on its completion must present a satisfactory thesis embodying the results of his research. (d) DOCTOR OF LETTØs This degree is gained by thesis only. The candidate must be a bachelor of Arts of at least seven years' standing, and must submit a thesis on an approved subject, together with any other published or unpublished work he thinks appropriate. The degree will not be awarded unless the examiners are satisfied that the work submitted is effectively presented, and makes a substantial, sustained and original contribution to learning. Three copies of the thesis submitted must be lodged for examination.

SPECIAL NOTE When enrolling, students should be careful to quote the NUMBERS as well as the names of the subject. These will be found preceding each subject name in the "Details of Subjects" on the following pages.

44 CiAPTEE 4 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS Subject to dispensation by the faculty in special cases, no candidate shall be admitted to examination in any subject of the course or to the final examination for the degree with honours unless he either: (a) has attended such classes, submitted such written work and performed such practical, laboratory, field or clinical work as may be prescribed by the head of the department concerned; or (b) satisfies the faculty that he has had appropriate training elsewhere. Details of subjects are arranged in alphabetical order of departments. The requirements for Honours and .A. candidates will be found immediately after the pass requirements in each section.М Students are recommended to buy books marked with an asterisk. DEPARTMENT OF CLASSICAL STUDIES Head of Department: Professor H. A. K. HUNT, B.A. (Syd. ), М.А. (Oxon), Litt.D., Dip.Ed. ORDINARY DEGREE (Details for the degree with honours are set out at end of this section.) Group 1 SUBJECTS OFFERED: Greek parts I, II and III Latin parts I, II and III Group 5 Classical Greece (not offered in 1968) Classical Rome

GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS Students are required to submit written work during the year. SYLLABUS The syllabus for each part of Greek and Latin includes: (1) Prescribed Authors; (ii) Unprepared Translation; ( iii) Historical, Literary and Cultural Studies. In addition Parts I and II study Accidence, Syntax and Prose Composition in regular classes and Part III as directed by the professor. Each examination on prescribed authors may include questions on section (iii) of the syllabus. BOOKS REQUIRED Students are required to own the following books in addition to those listed under each subject: For all subjects including Classical Rome and Classical Greece: *Harvey, P.—Oxford Companion to Classical Literature (O.U.P.) For Greek subjects: *Liddell and Scott—Greek-English Lexicon (Abridged Version) (0.U.P.), or preferably, for Honours, the unabridged version. *Bury, J. B.—History of Greece, revised by Meiggs. (3rd ed., Macmillan.) 45 FACULTY OF ARTS HANDBOOK *North and Hillard—Greek Prose Composition. (Rivington.) *Goodwin, W. W.—School Greek Grammar. (Macmillan.) For Latin subjects: *Lewis and Short-Latin Dictionary. (O.U.P.) or Smith, W.—Smaller Latin-English Dictionary. (Murray.) *Scullard, . H. From the Gracchi to Nero. (Methuen.) *Kennedy, НB. H.—Revised Latin Primer. (Longmans.) *Mountford, J. F.—Bradley's Arnold Latin Prose Composition. ( Longmans.) 1-1. GREEK PART I Mr. R. D. Scott Four lectures per week. Boos Prescribed textbooks for 1968: *Thucydides—Brasidas in Thrace. ( Hawthorn, Macmillan. ) *Scenes from Euripides' "Rhesus" and "Helen". (ed., Kennedy and Davis, Macmillan. ) ( Section from "Helen" only. ) *Xenophon—Anbasis II. (ed., Walpole, Macmillan.) (In association with prose composition.) Bryant and Lake—An Elementary Greek Grammar. (O.U.P.) or Rutherford—First Greek Grammar and Aceldence. (Macmillan.) Nash-Williams, A. 1.—An Introduction to Continuous Greek Prose. ( Маcmillan. ) EXAMINATION Two 3-hour papers ( one in Prose Composition and Unprepared Translation, and one in Prescribed Authors). 1-2. GREEK PART II Mr. P. J. Connor Three lectures and one tutoňal per week. BOOKS Prescribed textbooks for 1968: *Herodotus—Book VIII. (ed. K. Inde, Oxford Classical Texts, Vol. II.) *Demosthenes—O1ynthiacs. (ed., Macgregor, C.U.P.) *Aristophaпes—Frogs. (ed., Stanford, Macmillan.) Lysias—Orationes. (ed., Shuckburgh, illan.) (In association with prose composition.) Маст EXAMINATION Three 3-hour papers (one in Prose Composition and Unprepared Translation, one in Prescribed Authors, and one in Historical, Literary and Cultural Background). 1-3. GREEK PART III Mr. C. H. Gaie Four lectures and one tutorial per week. BooKS 1. Prescribed textbooks for 1968: *Herodotus—Book VIII l ° asprescribed *Demosthenes—Olynthiacs r for Part II *Aristophanes—Frogs J together with: *Aeschylus—Agaір.emпoп. (ed., Dennisten and Page, O.U.P.) 2. Books for Extensive Reading: *Lygias...Orationes. (ed., Shuckburgh, Macmillan.) *Xenophon—The Fall of Athens. (ed., Horn, Macmillan.) *Herodotus—Selections supplied by the department. 46 CLASSICAL ETUDIES EXAMINATION Three 3-hour papers ( one in General Translation from Greek, one in Prescribed. Authors, and one in Historical, Literary and Cultural Background).

2-1. LATIN PART I Mr. P. J Connor Four lectures or tutorial classes per week for the clay class, and three lectures for the evening class. BOOKS Prescribed tertbooks for 1968: *Vergib—Aeneid V. (ed., Williams, .U. .) *Cicero-Pro Caelio. ( ed., Austin, 0.U.P.)О Р *Caesar`Cioiu War III. (ed. Peskett, Pitt Press.) Vergil-The Aeneid. (Penguin.) EXAMINATION Two 3-hourap- ers ( one in Prose Composition and Unprepared Translation, and one in Prescribed Authors and Roman History). 2-2. LATIN PART II Mr. A. D. Pryor Four lectures or tutorials per week. BOOKS Prescribed textbooks for 1968: *HoraØpera. (ed., Garrod, Oxford Classical Texts.), Odes as prescribed by the professor. *Tacites—Annals XIV. (ed., Woodcock, Methuen.) *Petromus--Cena Trtmalchio . ( ed., Sedgwick, O.U.P.) and a selection from. Juvenal supplied by theпů department. *Livy—Book XXV. (ed., Moire, O.U.P.) (In association with prose composition.) EXAMINATION Three 3-hour papers (one in Prose Composition and Unprepared Translation, one in Prescribed Authors, and one in Historical, Literary and Cultural Background). 2-3. LATIN PART III Mr. J. R. C. Martyn Four lectures and one tutorial per week. BOOKS 1. Prescribed textbooks for 1968: *Horace—Odes. *Tacites-A nals XIV. *Petromus—Cerraп Trimalchionis as prescribed for Part II together with *Plautus—Miles Gloriosus. ( Hammond, O.U.P., New York.) 2. Books for extensive reading: *Cicero—De Amicitia. (ed., Gould and Whiteley, Modern School Classics, Macmillan.) *Suetonius—Nero. (ed., Rolfe, Loeb Classical Library, Suetonius, Vol. II.) *Pliny—Letters. (ed., Mynors, Oxford. Classical Texts.) *Seneca—Select Letters. (ed., Summers, Macmillan. ) *Cicero—Select Letters. (ed., Watson-Wemyss, Modern School Classics, Macmillan.) *Bock, A. E. R.—History of Rome. (Macmillan, 1965.) EXAMINATION Three 3-hour papers (one in General Translation from Latin, one in Prescribed Authors, and one in Historical, Literary and Cultural Background). 47 FACULTY OF ARTS HANDBOOK Group 5 3-1. CLASSICAL GREECE This subject will not be offered in 1968.

3-2. CLASSICAL ROME A course of two Iectures and one tutorial per week. SYLLABUS (a) Roman history from the earliest times to the death of Hadrian with particular emphasis on the evolution and structure of Roman society. (b) A special study of life in Rome during the Empire based on the reading of texts in translation and including the study of philosophic thought and education in this period. This special study will require the writing of a short essay. ( e ) Literature, involving detailed study of prescribed texts in translation. (d) Painting and the chief forms of Roman Art with some attention to the Greek antecedents and including a more detailed study of the Roman Forum and Roman relief sculpture. BOOKS Prescribed books: (a) History. *Scullard, H. H.—From the Gracchi to Nero. (Methuen.) *Soak, A. E. R. Eistory of Rome. (Revised by Sinniger, Macmillan, 1965.) (b) Social Life, Thought and Education in Imperial Rome. The Letters of the Younger Plinт y. ( trans. . Radice.) (Penguin.) * Juvenal—Satires. (trans. H. Creekmore.)т (Mentor.)В *Petronius—Satýricón. ( trans. W. Arrowsmith. ) ( Mentor. ) *Tacitus—The Апnals of Imperial Rome. ( trans. M. Grant.) (Penguin.) *Grant, M.—The World of Rome. (Mentor.) *Carcopino, J.-Daily Life in Ancient Rome. (Peregrine.) *Grant, F. C.—Ancient Roman Religion. (Liberal Arts, New York.) *Hadas, M. Essential Works of Stoicism. (Bantam Books, New York.) *Iarrou, H. I.-A History of Education in Antiquity. (Mentor.) Castle, E. B.—Ancient Education and To-day. (Pelican.) MacKendrick, P.—The Roman Mind at Work. (Anvil.) (c) Literature. *Lucretius—The Nature of the Universe. (trans. R. Latham, Penguin.) * Vergil—Aепеid. (trans. C. D. Lewis.) (Hogarth Press.) Tacitus—( as for History. ) (d) Art. *Toynbee, J. М. C.—The Art of the Romans. (Thames and Hudson.) Lists of books for reference will be issued during the course. EXAMINATION Two 3-hour papers. HONOURS DEGREE A. SCHOOL OF CLASSICAL STUDIES ( For possible combinations with this school see p. 251) 1. The course for the degree with honours in the school of Classical Studies comprises the following subjects: Greek parts I, II, III and IV Latin parts I, II, III and IV in accordance with the details set out below or, in the case of Greek part I, under the ordinary degree. A candidate in this school must take these subjects and two additional subjects. The choice of these subjects must be approved by the professor. All candidates in the school of Classical Studies are required to consult the professor of Classical Studiвs at the beginning of their course. 48 CLASSICAL STVDIES Except with the permission of the faculty, no candidate for honours in school A or Combined Courses may sit for examination without completing the essay work and exercises, and attending tutorial classes in the subjects of the school. 2. In their First Year, candidates will take Greek part I (pass or hofs), Latin part I ( hens ), and one of the additional subjects. Admission to the higher years of the course is conditional upon satisfactory performance in this First Year, and students must be approved by the faculty of Arts as candidates for the degree with honours before entering the Second Year of the honour school. A student who has not attempted honours in Latin part I but who, at the end of the First Year, wishes to enter the honour school, must make special application to the faculty ( through the sub-dean ) for permission to do so. If such permission is granted, the faculty will prescribe what further work must be completed before the student is allowed to proceed to the final examination. In their Second Year, candidates will take the honour courses in Greek part II and Latin part II, and the remaining additional subject, and in their Third Year, the honour courses in Greek part III and Latin part III, and in their Fourth Year the honour courses in Greek part IV and Latin part IV., Candidates for honours in School A are required to study Comparative Philology in either the Third or Fourth Year according to the year in which the lectures in this subject are delivered. In the alternate years, when lectures are not offered in Com- parative Philology, lectures will be given in Imperial Rome and Classical Philosophy as part of Latin part III or part IV and Greek part III or part. IV. Candidates for honours will be required, unless exempted by the professor, to submit one essay at the beginning of first term in each of their Second and Third Years. 3. Candidates will be examined in the subjects of Creek part II and Latin part II at the annual examination at the end of the Second Year. 4. At the end of the Third Year candidates will be examined in Unseen Trans- latimn from Greek and Latin. They will also be examined in special studies prescribed for the Third Year unless exempted by the professor as a result of satisfactory work during the first two terms. They will also take part I of the final examination. 5. The final examination in the school of Classical Studies will be held in two parts, part I at the end of the Third Year part II at the end of the Fourth Year. Part 1 1. Prescribed Creek texts. 2. Prescribed Latin texts. 3. Either Comparative Philology or Imperial Rome and Classical Philosophy ( according to the year in which lectures are given). Part II 1. Translation from extensive reading in Greek. 2. Translation from extensive reading in Latin. 3. Greek Unseen Translation. 4. Latin Unseen Translation. 5. Latin Literature. 6. Greek Literature. 7. Either Comparative Philology, or Imperial Rome and Classical Philosophy (according to the year in which lectures are given). As part of part II of the Bual examination each student must also complete and hand in, on the first day of the third term, an essay of not more than 9,000 words on an approved subject. GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS SYLLABUS The syllabus for each part of Greek I to III (hofs) and of Latin I to III (hens ) includes: (i) Prescribed Authors; (ii) Unprepared Translation; (iii) Historical, Literary and Cultural Studies. In addition Accidence, Syntax and Prose Composition is studied in regular classes in Parts I and II, and in Part III as directed by the professor. 49 FACULTY OF ARTS HANDBOOS Each examination on prescribed authors may include questions on section (iii) of the syllabus. In addition to the sections of the syllabus listed above, honours students are required to do the special studies listed below under the several subjects. BOOKS REQUIRED Students are required to own all the books for Latin or Greek set out in the general instructions for these subjects for the ordinary degree and also For Greek: *Smyth, H. W.—Greek Grammar. (Harvard U.P., 1959.) For Latin: *Woodcock, E. C.—A New Latin Syntax. (Methuen.) 1-1. GREEK PART I (Ions) Mr. R. D. Scott Three lectures and two tutorial classes per week. BOOKS Prescribed textbooks for 1968: *Euripides-Helen. (ed., Dale, O.U.P. ) *Demosthenes-Olynthiacs. (ed., Macgregor, C.U.P.) *Herodotus—Book VIII. (ed. K. Hude, O.C.T., Vol. I.) EXAMINATION Three 3-hour apers (one in Prose Composition, one in Unprepared Translation and one in Prescribed Authors).

1-2. GREEK PART II (Ions) Mr. A. D. Pryor Three lectures and one tutorial class weekly. BOOKS Prescribed textbooks for 1968: As for Greek part II (ordinary degree), omitting Lysias text. Special study: Additional reading for 1968: Selections from: *Homer—Odyssey XIII-XXIV. (ed., Stãnfomd, Macmillan.) EXAMINATION Four 3-hour papers ( one in Prescribed Authors, one in Prose Composition, one in Unprepared Translation and one in Historical, Literary and Cultural Background).

1-3. GREEK PART III (Ions) Professor H. A. K. Hunt Four lectures and two tutorial classes per week. BOOKS Prescribed textbooks for 1968: I. As for Greek part III (ordinary degree). II. Special studies prescribed by the professor. III. Additional reading for 1968: Selections from: *Homer—Odyssey XIII-XXIV. (ed., Stanford, Macmillan.) EXAMINATION. (a) For part I of the finаl examination: Prescribed Greek authors: one 3-hour paper. Classical Philosophy: one 3-hour paper. 50 Øввгслг, sтunØ (b) Annual examination: 1. Greek unprepared translation: one 3-hour paper. 2. One 3-hour paper in each Special Study, unless exempted by the professor as a result of satisfactory work during the first two terms.

1-4. GREEK PART IV Professor H. A. K. Hunt A course of tutorials and essay work throughout the year together with attendance at lectures as directed. SYLLABUS (i) Classical Philosophy. (ii) Greek Literature. (iii) A Special Study prescribed by the professor, bearing in mind the special interests of each student. Students in combined courses will be advised to choose a Greek or Roman topic which is relevant to their other main study. Each student must complete and hand in, on the first day of the third term, an essay of not more than 9,000 words on his special study. (iv) Unprepared translation. (v) Extensive reading in Greek texts prescribed by the professor. EXAMINATION. Relevant papers of part II of the final examination.

2-1. LATIN PART I (Ions) Mr. G. H. Genie Five lectures or tutorials weekly. Prescribed textbooks for 1988: *Vergil-Aeпeid V. (ed., Williams, O.U.P.) *Cicero—Pro Caelio. (ed., Austin, O.U.P.) *Horace—Opera. (.ed., Garrod, Oxford Classical Texts.) Selected Odes prescribed by the professor. * Vergil—The Aeneid. (Penguin.) Special study: Verse composition. Prescribed textbook: Cooper, C. G.-Introduction to the Latin Hexameter. (Macmillan.) EXAMINATION Three 3-hour papers (one in Prose and Verse Composition, one in Unprepared Translation and one in Prescribed Authors and Roman History).

2-2. LATIN PART II (Ions) Mr. А. D. Pryor Three lectures and two tutorial classes per week. BOOKS Prescribed textbooks for 1968: As for Latin part II (ordinary degree) omitting Livy text. Special studies: (i) Verse Composition. (1) Additional reading for 1988: *Vergil—Aeneíd VII-XII. ( ., Fairclough, Loeb ed., Vol. II Heine- mann.) ед (ш) Practical Criticism. FACULTY OF ARTS HANDBOOK EXAMINATION Four 3-hour papers (one in Prescribed Authors, one in Prose and Verse Com- position, one in Unprepared Translation and one in Historical, Literary and Cultural Background).

2-3. LATIN PART III (Ions) Mr. J. R. C. Martyn Four lectures and three tutorial classes per week. BOOKS I. Prescribed textbooks for 1968: As for Latin part III (ordinary degree). II. Special studies: (i) Special Studies prescribed by the professor. (ii) Practical Criticism. III. Additional reading for 1968: As for Latin part II honours sec. (ii). EXAMINATION (a) For part I of the finаl examination: Prescribed Latin authors: Imperial Rome. (b) Annual examination: 1. Latin unprepared translation. 2. One 3-hour paper in each Special Study, unless exempted by the professor as a result of satisfactory work during the first two terms.

2-4. LATIN PART IV Mr. G. H. Geiie A course of tutorials and essay work throughout the year together with attendance at lectures as directed. SYLLABUS (i) Imperial Rome. (ii) Latin Literature. (iii) A Special Study prescribed by the professor according to the plan set out under Greek IV. (iv) Unprepared translation. (v) Extensive reading in Latin texts prescribed by the professor. EXAMINATION. Relevant papers of part II of the final examination.

MASTER 0F ARTS 4-3. A. SCHOOL OF CLASSICAL STUDIES Candidates for the degree will proceed by thesis. Candidates will work under the direction of a member of the department of Classical Studies. They may be directed to attend any lectures or classes bearing on their work. An entry form for examination for higher degrees must be submitted to the Registrar. Theses must be submitted not later than 18 February, 1969. Three copies of each thesis (quarto, typewritten, double spaced) should be submitted, one of which will be deposited in the University Library. 52 CRIMINOLOGY DEPARTMENT Head of Department: Mr Ѕ. W. JOHNSTON, B.A., LL.B., Barrister-at-Law ORDINARY DEGREE Group 2 Criminology is the study of crime, and in particular the defining of the criminal policies of the nation-state. It is basically an empirical science; but, because everyday issues demand the drawing of sufficient conclusions from insufficient or contested data, Criminology embraces also the natural history of criminal policy. Criminology A is an introductory Criminology subject which may be taken towards an Arts degree, and also as an elective in a Law or Social Studies course. Students intending taking Criminology A as part of an Arts Course must first pass Psychology I. The two subjects cover groups 2 and 4 of the Arts course. The postgraduate diploma in Criminology may be taken after or in combination with an Arts course. There is some overlap in the subjects of the two courses, so that a candidate who plans a combined course from the beginning may expect to complete the diploma with about a year's work following the degree course. Candidates are referred to the Handbook of the Board of Studies in Criminology. 186-1. CRIMINOLOGY A A course of two lectures a week and a two-hour tutorial fortnightly throughout the year, with visits to police, court and correctional agencies on Wednesday after- noons and during vacations. Candidates may be required to submit analytical reports upon such visits. No correspondence courses are given. SYLLABUS 1. Preventing Juvenile Delinquency. Legal definitions of delinquency and pre- delinquency, Children's Welfare Act ss. 16-20, ages of responsibility, children's court procedures. The Glueck prediction tables. Avoidance and cure of delinquency in the family: role of the family, personality development, "acting out" behaviour, antisocial character disorders, multi-problem families, social class factors. Etiology of delinquency: multifactorial approaches, the development of an integrated theory and means of experimentation. Prevention: definition and criteria for evaluation, delinquency prevention in Melbourne, role of community agencies. 2. Sentencing and Treating the Insane Offender. Criminal responsibility, freewill and determinism, tests of insanity, psychopathy. Mental Health Act, nature and length of detention, treatment to enhance responsibility. 3. The Organization of Police, Forensic Medicine and Forensic Science Services in Australia. Selection of recruits, inservice training, promotion systems. Structure of the Victoria Police Force and other inspection agencies. Public attitudes to police and their effect on the policing role. Investigation of complaints against police. Police investigation and interrogation, the lawful use of force, statements, use of confessions, private investigation, assistance of counsel, detention and arrest, bail procedures, censorship, special measures for juveniles. Role of women police. Role and status of police surgeon. Children, female offenders, sex offenders, the insane. Suicide, murder and manslaughter cases. Special forms of criminal investigation, the expert witness, structure and functions of the police laboratory, status of police scientists, coroner and medical examiner systems, investigation of causes of death, toxicology, other scientific organizations used in the investigation of crime. 53 FACULTY OF ARTS HANDBOOK Books (a) Recommended for preliminary reading: Barry, J. V., Paton, G. W., and Sawer, G.—An Introduction to the Criminal Law in Australia. ( Macmillan, London, 1948. ) Brown, J. A. C.—Freud and the Post-Freudians. (Pelican A522, 1961. ) Mays, J. B.—Crinw and the Social Structure. ( Faber, 1963.) Stafford-Clark, D.—Psychiatry Today. ( Pelican A262, 1952.) Whitaker, B.—The Police. (Penguin .Special 5232, 1964.) ( b ) Prescribed texts: Giallombardo, R. Juvenile Delinquency: • A Book of Readings. (Wiley, N.Y., 1966.) or Wolfgang, M. E., Savitz, L., and Johnston, N.—The Sociology of Crime and Delinquency. (Wiley, N.Y., 1962.) *Johnston, N., Savitz, L., and Wolfgang, M. E.—The Sociology of Punishment and Correction. (Wiley, N.Y., 1962.) *Johnston, S. W., and Fox, R. G.—Correction Handbook of Victoria. (Crimino- logy Dept., U. of Melb., 1965.) *Tappan, P. W.—Crime, Justice and Correction. (McGraw-Hill, N.Y., 1960.) (c) Detailed reading guides will be supplied during the year. EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper, and written work as prescribed. MASTER OF ARTS Candidates will prepare a thesis on a subject approved by the head of the department, and will be advised as to suitable reading and fieldwork. They will work under the supervision of a member of the department, to whom they should. report regularly upon the progress of their work. Candidates may be required to take seminars on the subject of the thesis.

54 DEPARTMENT OF ECONOMICS

Head of Department of Economics: Professor W. PREST, M.A. (Leeds), M.A. (Com.) (Manchester), M.Com.. Professor of Economic History: Vacant. Senior Lecturer in Charge of Economic Geography: Miss MARY M. BAYNE, M.A., Dip.Ed. The subjects of this group may also be taken for the degree of bachelor of Commerce. Students who wish to qualify for both degrees should note the instructions concerning combined courses in the regulation in the faculty of Economics and Commerce handbook. The regulation concerning pre-requisites (p. 24) and the instructions concerning majors and sub-majors (p. 36) should be carefully noted. Particular attention is drawn to the regulation which states that Economic Geography part I and Economic Geography part II may not be taken in any course which does not include a major in Economics. Entries for external study will not be accepted for any subject of this group. Students will be required to submit essays and exercises, as set by the lecturers. These will be taken into account at the annual examination, and failure to submit written work may involve exclusion from the annual examination. ORDINARY DEGREE (Details of the honours degree are set out at the end of this section.) Group 2 SUBJECTS OFFERED: Economics A (Arts) Economic Geography part II Economics В Economic History A Economics C (1-6) • Economic History В Statistical Method Economic History C (1-5) * Economic Geography part I *Any two of these units shall constitute one subject.

8. ECONOMICS A (Arts) If Economic Geography Part I is being taken as part of the course it must be taken prior to or concurrently with this subject. A course of two lectures per week, with one tutorial class, throughout the year. SYLLABUS The nature of economics; the pricing mechanism; the consumer and the theory of demand; the firm, production and costs; competition and monopoly; theory of wages; national income, unemployment and inflation; money. The course will have special reference to Australia. BOOKS (a) Recommended for preliminary reading: Pen, J.—Modern Economics. (Pelican.) (b) Prescribed textbooks: *Lipsey, R. G.—Introduction to Positive Economics. (2nd ed., Weidenfeld & Nicolson. ) Collery, A. National Income and Employment Analysis. (Wiley Paperback.) *Downing, R. I.—National Income and Social Accounts. (M.U.P. ) 55 FACULTY OF AATS HANDBOOK * rm l, P. H., and Brunt, M.—The Structure of the Australian Economy. Ка (2ndе ed., Cheshire. )- Other publications as referred to in lectures. EXAMINATION. One 3-hour paper. 219. ECONOMICS B Economics A (Arts) must be passed before this subject is taken. A course of two lectures and one tutorial class per week throughout the yeas. SYLLABUS The principles of money and banking; theory of income, wages and employ ment; prices and economic fluctuations; balance of payments and international trade. BOОКS (a) Preliminary reading: Pen, J.—Modern Economics. (Pelican.) Lipsey, R. G. Introduction to Positive Economics. (Weidenfeld & Nicolsoп. or Stonier, A. W., and Hague, D. C.-Textbook of Economic Theory. (Longmans. Prescribed textbooks: •Keynes, J. 1.—General Theory of Employment, Interest aд п Mons y. (Mac- millan.) *Ackley, G.—Macroeconomic Theory. (Macmillan Maruzen. ) or *McDougall, D. M., and Dernbur , T. F.-Macro-Economics. (McGraw-Нill, Inteational Student Edition.) B. International Monetary Co-operation 1945-65. (Latest ed., Hutchinson's University Library.) *Harcourt, G. C., karmel, P. H., and Wallace, R. 1.—Economic Activity. (C.U.P.) *Arndt, H. W., and Harris, C. P.—The Australian Trading Banks. (3rd ed., Cheshire.) Day, A. C. L.—Outline of Monetary Economics. (O.U.P.) *Perkins, J. O. N.—Anti-cyclical Policy in Australia. (2пд ed., M.U.P.) Sayers, R. S.-Modern Banking. (8th ed., 0.U.P.) Other publications as referred to in lectures. EXAMINATION. One 3-hour paper.

220-1. ECONOMICS Cl INTERNATIONAL" ECONOMICS Economics B must be passed before this subject is taken. A course of one lecture per week and one tutorial every two weeks throughout the year. SYLLABUS Basic theory of international trade. The balance of payments under conditions of equilibrium and of growth. Aims and methods of state intervention with special reference to Australian conditions. Current problems of the world economy. BOOКS (a) Recommended for preliminary reading: Harrod, R. F. International Economics. (4th ed., C.U.P.) Kerman, P. B. International Economics. ( Prentice-Hall Paperback.) (b) Prescribed textbooks: *kindieberger, C. P.—International Economics. (3rd ed. Irwin.) Reitsma, A. J.—Trade Protection in Australia. (Univ. of Queensland.) Corden, W. M.—Recent Developments in the Theory of International Trade (Special Papers in International Economics, No. 7, Princeton Univ.) Haberler, G.—A Survey of International Trade Theory. (Rev. ed., Special Papers in International Economics, No. 1, Princeton University.) Report of the Committee of Economic Enquiry. (Vernon Report) (Govt. Printer, Canberra.) *Johnson, H. G.—Economic Policies towards Less Developed Countries. (Allen & Unwin, 1967.) 56 ECONOMICS United Nations—Towards a New Trade Policy for Development. (Prebish Re- port, U.N., New York, 1964. ) Other publications as referred to in lectures. EXAMINATION., One 2-hour paper. 220-2. ECONOMICS C2 ECONOMIC DEVELOPMENT Economics must be passed before this subject is taken. A course ofВ one lecture per week and one tutorial every two weeks throughout the year. SYLLABUS Theories of economic development; capital formation, foreign trade, planning of growth and case studies of economic development problems in developing countries. BOOKS (a) Recommended for preliminary reading: *Lewis, W. A.—The Theory of Economic Growth. (Allen & Unwin, Paperback.) Bhagwati, J.— The Economics of Underdeveloped Countries. (World University Library.) (b) Prescribed textbooks: *Lewis, W. A.—The Theory of Economic Growth. ( Allen & Unwin, Paperback.) *Higgins, B.-Economic Development. ( Constable, 1959.) Meier, G. M., and Baldwin, R. E.—Economic Development. ( Wiley, Paperback.) Meier, G. M.—Leading Issues in Development Economics. ( Oxford Paperback.) indl ber er, C. P.—Economic Development. (2nd ed., McGraw-Hill Paper- К backе .) *Myint, 1—The Economics of the Developing Countries. (3rd ed., Oxford Paperback.) Agarwala, A. N., and Singh, S. P.—The Economics of Underdevelopment. (O.U.P. ) Other publications as referred to in lectures. EXAMINATION. One 2-hour paper. 220-3. ECONOMICS C3 ECONOMICS OF THE FIRM Economics B must be passed before this subject is taken. A course of one lecture per week and one tutorial every two weeks throughout the year. SYLLABUS Theories of competition, monopoly and market structure. The structure of Australian industry. The control of monopolies and restrictive practices. Empirical studies of cost and revenue functions. The growth of the firm. BOOKS (a) Recommended for preliminary reading: Bain, J. S. Price Theory, Chs. I-IV. ( Wiley Paperback.) (b) Prescribed texts: *B í , . S.—Рrice Theory. (Wiley Paperback.) *Caves,а п Ј R—American Industry: Structure, Conduct, Performance. ( Prentice- Hall.) Watson, D. S.Price Theory and its Uses. ( Houghton-Iflin.) Stigler, G. J.—The Theory of Price. (3rd ed., Macmillan.) Bain, J. S. Industrial Organization. (Wiley,) Hunter, A. (ed. )—The Economics of Australian Industry. (M.U.P.) Penrose, E.—The Theory of the Growth of the Firm. (Blackwell.) Other publications as referred to in lectures. EXAMINATION One 2-hour paper. 57 FACULTY OF ARl3 HANDBOOS 220-4. ECONOMICS C4

WELFARE ECONOMICS ' (This subject will not be offered in 1968.) 220-5. ECONOMICS C5 PUBLIC FINANCE Economics B must be passed before this subject is taken. A course of one lecture per week and one tutorial every two weeks throughout the year. SYLLABUS Public finance and government policy; public finance in relation to income distribution, stability, resource allocation and growth; government revenue and the theory of taxation; the national debt; government expenditure; problems of federal finance. BOOKS (a) Recommended for preliminary reading: Eckstein, 0.—Public Finance. (2nd ed., Foundations of Modern Economics Series, Prentice-Hall.) (b ) Prescribed textbooks: *Due, J. F.—Government Finance. (3rd ed., Irwin.) *Downing, R. I., Arndt, H. W., Boxer, A. H., and Mathews, R. L.—Taxation in Australia. (M.U.P. ) Prest, A. R.РиЫ iс Finance. ( 3rd ed., Weidenfeld and Nicolson.) Musgrave, R. A. The Theory of Public Finance. (McGraw-Hill, International Student edition. ) Commonwealth Payments to or for the States. ( Govt. Printer, Canberra.) Maxwell, J. A.—Commonwealth—State Financial Relations in Australia. ( M.U.P., 1967.) The Budget Speech. (Govt. Printer, Canberra.) Other publications as referred to in lectures. EXAMINATION. One 2-hour paper. 220-6. ECONOMICS C6 BANKING AND FINANCE Economics B must be passed before this subject is taken. A course of one lecture per week and one tutorial every two weeks, throughout the year. SYLLABUS Monetary theory and policy; techniques of central banking control; banks and other financial institutions ( with special reference to Australia ); international monetary arrangements and institutions. BOOKS (a) Recommended for preliminary reading: Arndt, H. W., and Harris, C. P.—The Australian Trading Ranks. (3rd ed., Cheshire.) Perkins, J. O. N.—Anti-cyclical Policy in Australia. (2nd ed., М.U.Р. ) Sayers, R. L.—Modern Banking. (6th ed., O.U.P. ) Tew, B. International Monetary Co-operation, 2945-65. (Hutchinson Univer- sity Library.) (b) Prescribed textbooks: *Newlyn, W. T.—Theory of Money. (O.U.P.) Report on the Working of the Monetary System. Cmd. 827. (Radcliffe Report, H.h.S.O. ) Scammell, W. M. International Monetary Policy. (2nd ed., Macmillan.) Machlup, F.Plans for the Reform of the International Monetary Systвm. (Rev. ed., Special Paper in International Economics. No. 3, Princeton Univ.) 58 ECONOMICS Triffin, R. :Gold and the Dollar Cršsis. ( Yale Paperbound.) Hirst, R. R. and Wallace, R. H. (Eds.)—Studies in the Australian Capital Mar- ket. (Cheshire. ) Other publications as referred to in lectures. EXAMINATION. One 2-hour paper. 223. STATISTICAL METHOD Economics A must be passed before this subject is taken. A course of two lectures per week, with tutorial and practice classes throughout the year. SYLLABUS Statistics as a scientific method of economic study; methods of collecting statistical data; sampling; survey of Australian official statistics; classification; graphs; averages and their characteristics; dispersion and skewness; frequency distributions; regression and correlation; elementary treatment of probability; significance test for large and small samples; analysis of time series; index numbers; special studies of methods and data exemplified by Australian statistics of national income and prices. BOOKS *Karmel,'P. H.—Appied Statistics for Economists. (Pitman.) or *Mills, F. C.—Statistical Methods. ( Pitman, 1956.) or *Chou, Y.—Applied Business and Economic Statistics. ( Holt, Rinehart and Winston.) *Downing, R. I.—National Income and Social Accounts. ( M.U.P. ) *Moser, C. А.—Sиruвy Methods in Social Investigation. (Heinemann.) *Australian National Accounts *Labour Report. (Latest issue, Govt. Printer, Canberra.) Other texts and publications as referred to in lectures. EXAMINATION Two 3-hour papers. Before admission to the examination candidates must have, satisfactorily completed the practical work. 218. ECONOMIC GEOGRAPHY PART I This subject must be taken before or at the same time as Economics A. A course of two lectures and one tutorial class per week throughout the year. SYLLABUS A study of world maps using criteria indicative of levels of economic development, e.g., national ` product and energy consumption per capita; demographic characteristics; the agricultural labour force, etc. World agricultural resources (including climate), types of farming and farm problems in the world economy. Energy and other industrial resources, and the location of industry. Selected manufacturing industries, their location pattern, structure, and importance in the economy. Geo- graphical and commodity patterns of world trade trends and problems. A study of Australia's resources and their utilization, including farming and manufacturing, and their place in the national economy. Australian trade, its composition, direction and problems. BOOKS Prescribed textbooks: No one book satisfactorily covers the whole course. Particular reference will be made to the following: Alexander, John W.-Economic Geography. ( Prentice-Hall, 1963.) Alexanderson, G.—Geography of Manufacturing. (Prentice-Hall, 1967.) Estall, R. C., and Buchanan, R. O. Industrial Activity and Economic Geo- graphy. (rev. ed., Hutchinson, U.L., 1968.) Fryer, D. W. World Economic Development. (McGraw-Hill, 1965.) Ginsburg, N.—Atlas of Economic Development. (U. of Chicago Press, 1961.) Manners, G. The Geography of Energy. (Hutchinson, U.L., 1984.) Mountjoy, A. B. Industrialization and Underdeveloped Countries. (Rev., Hutchinson, U.L., 1968.) Wadham and Wood—Land Utiliхatiоп in Australia. (4th ed., M.U.P., 1964.) EXAMINATION. One 3-hour paper. 59 FACULTY OF ARTS HANDBOOK

228. ECONOMIC GEOGRAPHY PART II A course of two lectures and one tutorial class per week throughout the year. SYLLABUS A study of resources and their development in selected Asian countries and New Guinea. Influence of natural resources, climatic conditions and topography on economic activity; population movements and problems; types of agricultural development; processes of industrialization; transport; international trade; inter- governmental co-operation irs developmental schemes. BOOКS (a) Prescribed textbooks: *Ginsburg, N. (ed.)—The Pattern of Asia. (Constable.) (b) Recommended for reference: Allen, G. C.—Japan's Economic Expanrion. ( O.U.P., 1965.) rrill, . Economic Development: With Spec al reference to Asia. (Macmillan, Ве 1964.)К ł Eckstein, A.—Communist China's Economic Growth and Foreign Trade. ( McGraw-Hill, 1966.) Economic Bulletin for Asia and the Far East. Quarterly and Annual Survey, recent issues. ( United Nations. ) Fisher, C. А.—South-East Asia. ( 2nd ed., Methuen, 1966. ) Hughes, T. J., and Luard, D. W. T.—The Economic Development of Communist China. (2nd ed., O.U.P., 1961.) Lewis, J. P.-Quiet Crisis in India. ( Doubleday, 1964.) Spate, O. H. K., and Learmonth, A. T. A. —India and Pakistan. ( 3rd ed., 1967'.) Trewartha, G. T.-Japan: A Geography. ( Methuen, 1965.) EXAMINATION. Two 3-hour papers.

217. ECONOMIC HISTORY A A course of two lectures per week, with one tutorial class, throughout the year. Students are required to prepare exercises and essays as set by tutors and lecturers. SYLLABUS The course comprises: (1) The Rise of Europe. An outline of the major European economic developments in the period c. 1500-1800; a discussion in some detail of the development of industrial capitalism in Britain. (2) The Expansion of Europe in the World. The impact of European civilization on other countries since 1800. Particular attention will be given to the changing place of Great Britain in the world economy. BOOКS (a) Recommended for preliminary reading: Court, W. H. B.—A Concise Economic History of Britain from 1750 to Recent Times. (C.U.P.) Heaton, H. Economic History of Europe. (rev. ed., Harper & Row or J. Weatherhill), Chapters 11-17. (b) Prescribed textbooks: Clapham, J. H.—The Economic Development of France and Germany. (C.U.P.) Court, W. H. B.—British Economic isto 1870-1914 Commentary and Documents. (C.U.P.) Н гу *Deane, Phyllis, and Cole, W. A.-British Economic Growth 1688-1959. (C.U.P.) Harrison, A.—The Framework of Economic Activity. (Macmillan, London.) *Heaton, H.—Economic History of Europe. (rev. ed., Harper & now or J. Weatherhill.) Rostow, W. W.—The British Economy of the Nineteenth Century. (O.U.P.) (c) Lists of references will be issued during the year. EXAMINATION. One 3-hour paper. 60 ECONOMICS 229. ECONOMIC HISTORY B THE ECONOMIC HISTORY OF AUSTRALIA This subject may not be taken before Economic History A. A course of two lectures per week with tutorial classes throughout the year. SYLLABUS The economic history of Australia, 1788 to 1960, with particular attention to new themes. BOOKS No books are prescribed but the following are recommended: Barnard, A. (ed.)—The Simple Fleece. ( M.U.P., 1962.) Blainey, G. N.—The Rush that Never Ended. (M.U.P., 1963.) Blainey, G. N.-The Tyranny of Distance. ( Sun Paperback, 1966.) Butlin, N. G.-Investment in Australian Economic Growth, 1861-1900. (C.U.P., 1964.) Butlin, S. J.—Australia and New Zealand Bank. (Longmans, 1961.) Fitzpatrick, B.—The British Empire in Australia. (M.U.P. ) Greenwood, G. (ed.)—Australia: A Social and Political History. (Angus and Robertson, 1955.) kiddie, 1.—Men of Yesterday. ( М.U.P., 1961.) Shann, E. O. G. Economic History of Australia. (C.U.P. or Georgian House.) Articles in Historical Studies of Australia and New Zealand, Economic Record, Business Archives and History. EXAMINATION. One 3-hour paper.

230. (1-5) ECONOMIC HISTORY C When enrolling for this subject students are required to select two of the following units and state the numbers of the units chosen. (For example: 230-1, 230-4.) Economics B must be passed before this subject is taken. A course of two lectures per week with tutorial classes throughout the year. SYLLABUS (i) The Economic History of Asia since 1850. The economic history of Asia since 1850 with special reference to Japan, China, India, Indonesia and some other countries of South Eastern Asia. The course is intended to meet the requirements of students who seek an appraisal of Asia's changing position in the world economy since 1850. (ii) The Economic History of Imperial Russia and the Soviet Union. Economic development of Russia in comparison with western development since the Industrial Revolution. Emancipation of serfs. The Revolutions. Economic development of the Soviet Union and its present economic position. ( iii) The Economic History of the United States since 1850. The economic history of the United States since 1850, with special reference to the reasons for the growth of the economy, fluctuations in the rate of economic growth and the changing role of government. (iv) International Economy since 1850. The development of an international economy since 1850. (v) The Economic History of Britain. since 1700. An examination of the growth of an industrial society in Britain in the eighteenth afd nineteenth centuries—the factors involved in this process and the social and economic consequences. FACULTY OF ARTS HANDBOOK Books (а) Recommended for preliminary reading: (i) Allen, G. C.—A Short Economic History of Modern Japan, 1867- 1937. (Rev. ed., Allen & Unwin, 1962.) Beckmann, G. C.—The Modernization of China and Japan. (Harper, 1962.) Anstey, V.—Economic Development of India. (Longmans, 1952.) Robequain, C. E.—Malaya, Indonesia, Borneo and the Philippines. (Longmans, 1959.) (ii) Holzman, F. D.—Readings on the Soviet Economy. ( Rand McNally & Co., Chic., 1962.) Bergson, A.—Soviet Economic Growth. ( Row, Evanston, Ill., 1953.) (iii) North, D. C.—Growth and Welfare in the American Past. (Prentice- Hall, 1966.) (iv) Ashton, T. S.—The Industrial Revolution 1760-1830. (H.U.L. ) Plumb, J. Н.—England in the 18th Century. (Pelican.) Thompson, D. England in the 19th Century. (Pelican.) (b) Prescribed text-books: (i) Lockwood, W. W.—The Economic Development in Japan: Growth and Structural Change, 1868-1938. ( O.U.P., 1955.) Allen, G. C., and Donnithorne, A. G.—Western Enterprise in Far Eastern Economic Development: China and Japan. (Allen & Unwin, 1954.) Teng Ssu-yu and Fairbank, J. K.—China's Re.spon.se to the West. ( Harvard U.P., 1954. ) Hughes, T. J., and Luard, D. E.—The Economic Development of Communist China, 1949-1960. (O.U.P., 1961.) Kuznets, S., Moore, W. E., and Spengler, J. J. (eds.).—E onomiс Growth: Brazil, India, Japan. ( Duke U.P., 1955.) с Allen, G. C., and Donnithome, A. G., Western Enterprise in Indo- nesia and Malaya. (Allen & Unwin, 1957.) (ii) Nove, A.—The Soviet Economy. (Allen & Unwin, 1961.) (iii) Kroos, H. E.—American Economic Development. (Prentice-Hall, 1966.) Harris, S. E. (ed. )—American Economic History. (McGraw- i11, 1961.) Н (iv) No specific text-book is recommended. A list of books will ba supplied during the course of the year. (v) Deane, P., and Cole, W. A., British Economic Growth 1688-1959. (C.U.P.) Mitchell, B. R., and Deane, К—Abstract of British Historical Statis- tics. (C.U.P., 1962.) Chambers, J. D.—The Workshop of the World. (O.U.P., Lind., 1981..) (c) Reference books: Detailed lists of references will be issued during the year. EXAMINATION. Two 2-hour papers.

HONOURS DEGREE H. SCHOOL OF ECONOMICS (For possible combinations with this school see p. 251) 1. The course for the degree with honours in the school of Economics comprises the following subjects: Economic History A Economics parts I, II, III and IV Statistical Method 62 ECONOMICS History of Economic Theory or Mathematical Economics An approved Grade I subject. together with one of the following sequences of subjects: ( 1 ) British history or European History A, Economic History part В or Australian History, Economic History part C or American History; (2) Pure Mathematics part I, Pure Mathematics part II and Theory of Statistics part I; ( 3 ) Philosophy part I, Logic and either Modern Philosophy or Political Philosophy; (4) Modern Government A, Modern Government В and either Modern Government C or Political Philosophy; (5) Three parts of Psychology; in accordance with the details set out below, and for the ordinary degree. 2. In his First Year, a candidate should take the honours courses in Economic History A, and Economics part I; the first of the additional sequence of subjects and the approved Grade I subject. This First Year is regarded as a preliminary year of study, and admission to the higher years of the course is conditional on satisfactory performance in this year. Students must be approved by the faculty of Arts as candidates for the degree with honours before entering the Second Year of the honours school. The professor of Economics will normally recommend approval for candidates who have gained at least second class honours in Economic History A, and Economics part I. Other candidates who wish to continue in the honours school should consult the professor of Economics, who will be guided in his recommendations by the merits of the case. A student who has not attempted honours in Economic History A, and Economics A, but who, at the end of the First Year, wishes to enter the honours school, must make special application to they faculty through the sub-dean for permission to do so. If suchedmission is granted, the faculty will prescribe what further work must be completed before the student is allowed to proceed to the final examination. 3. The faculty will not admit to the honours school a candidate who has previously graduated Bachelor of Commerce (honours degree) or Bachelor of Com- merce (ordinary degree). 4. In their Second Year, candidates should take Economics part II, Statistical Method and the second part of the additional sequence of subjects. They must be classed' in Economics part II and must give evidence of ability to complete the work of the Third and Fourth Years satisfactorily before being permitted to proceed. 5. In their Third Year, candidates should take Economics part III and the third part of the additional sequence of subjects. The annual examination in Economics part III consists of five papers and is the first part of the final examination. Before the end of their Third Year, candidates must select a subject for the essay, required as part of the final examination. The subject selected must be approved by the professor of Economics. The major part of the work for the essay should be undertaken during the long vacation between the Third and Fourth Years and the essay should be submitted at the beginning of the third term of the year of the final examination. 6. In their Fourth Year candidates should take Economics part IV and either History of Economic Theory or Mathematical Economics. 7. The final examination in the school of Economics consists of the essay in accordance with section 5 above and five papers, including two on either History of Economic Theory or Mathematical Economics. 217. ECONOMIC HISTORY A (Ions) Weekly discussion classes throughout the year in addition to pass lectures. SYLLABUS More advanced work on certain aspects of the syllabus prescribed for the ordinary degree. BOOKS As for the ordinary degree. Bibliographies for honours work will be provided from time to time. EXAMINATION. Two 3-hour papers. 63 FACULTY OF ARTS HANDBOOK 229. ECONOMIC HISTORY B (Ions) Weekly discussion classes in addition to the lectures and tutorials for the ordinary degree. SYLLABUS As for the ordinary degree, with additional study of selected topics in Australian economic history. Books A detailed bibliography will be issued at the beginning of the course. EXAMINATION. One 3-hour paper.

230. ECONOMIC HISTORY PART C 1-5 (Ions) Discussion classes in addition to the lectures and tutorials for the ordinary degree. SYLLABUS As for the ordinary degree, with additional study of selected topics. BOОКS A detailed bibliography will be issued during the year. EXAMINATION. One or two 2-hour papers. 8-1. ECONOMICS PART I ( Ions) A course of two lectures per week, with tutorial classes, throughout the year. SYLLABUS The organization of productive resources; forms of business enterprise; joint stocks companies; efficiency and costs; diminishing returns and economies of scale; the determination of price and output; competition and monopoly; factor markets. The course will have special reference to Australia. BOOКS (a) Recommended for preliminary reading: Beacham, A.—Economics of Industrial Organization. (2nd ed., Pitman.) Robertson, D. H., and Dennison, S.—Control of Industry. (Nisbet, C.U.P.) ( b ) Prescribed text-books: *Lipsey, R. G.—Introduction to Positive Economics. (Weidenfeld and Nicolson.) or Stoner, A. W., and Hague, D. C.—Textbook of Economic Theory. (Longman. ) Bruns, G. R.—The Stock Exchange. ( Obtainable at University Bookroom. ) Rowe, J. W. F. Primary Commodities in International Trade. (C.U.P. Paper- back.) *Каrmеl, P. H., and Brunt, M.—Structure of the Australian Economy. (2nd ed., Cheshire. ) *Robinson, E. A. G.—Monopoly. ( Nisbet.) *Tew, B.—Wealth and Income. (Revised ed., M.U.P.) Other publications as referred to in lectures. EXAMINATION. One 3-hour paper. 2. ECONOMICS PART II (Ions) A course of 4 lectures per week with tutorial and discussion classes throughout the year. SYLLABUS A more advanced treatment of the topics prescribed for Economics B in the course for the ordinary degree together with a general survey of economic principles. BOOКS As prescribed for Economics B together with the following: Stonier and Hague—Textbook of Economic Theory. (Longman.) 64 ECONOцICS Mãrshall, A.—Principles of Economics. (Macmillan.) Hicks, J. R.-Value and Capital. (O.U.Р.) Robbins, L. C.—Essay on Nature and Significance of Economic Science. (Mac- millan.) Wickstead, P. H.-Commonsense of Political Economy, 2 Vols. ( Routledge. ) Pigou, A. C.—Economics of Welfare. (Macmillan.) Carlson. S.—Pure Theory of Production. (King.) Parry Lewis, J.—An Introduction to Mathematics for Students of Economics. ( Macmillan Fapermac. ) Kleppner, D., and Ramsey, N. Quick Calculus. (Wiley.) EXAMINATION, Two 3-hour papers.

з. ECONOMICS PART III (Ions) A course of lectures and discussion classes throughout the year. SYLLABUS (i) The equilibrium of the firm; monopolistic competition and price policy; the trade cycle; public finance. (ii) Special topics in Applied Economics. Books (i) For part (i) of the syllabus: Chamberlin, E. H.—Monopolistic Competition. ( Harvard UP.) Hicks, J. R.—A Contribution to the Theory of the Trade Cycle. (O.U.P.) Matthews, R. C. O. Trade Cycle. (C.U.P. ) Harrod, R. F.—Towards a Dynamic Economics. (Macmillan.) Musgrave, R. A.—Theory of Public Finance. (MćGraw-Hill Paperback.) Penrose, E.—The Theory of the Growth of the Firm. ( Blackwell. ) Patinkin, D.-Money, Interest and Prices. (2nd ed., IIarper and Row.) Surveys of Economic Theory. American Economic Association and Royal Economic Society, Vols. I and II. (Macmillan. ) (ii) For part (ii) of the syllabus: Machlup,- F.-Plans for the Reform of the International Monetary System. (Rev. ed., Special Papers in International Economics, No. 3, Princeton Univ.) Scammell, W. M. International Monetary Policy. (2nd ed., Macmillan.) McArthur, Norma—Introducing Population Statistics. (O.U.P.) Hirschman, A. 0.—Strategy of Economic Development. (Yale Paperbound.) Demography Bulletin. ( Govt. Printer, Canberra.) Population Studies. (United Nations, New York.)

4. ECONOMICS PART IV A course of lectures and discussion classes throughout the year. SYLLABUS The nature and methods of economics; welfare economics; the theory of capital and economic development; international trade. BOOKS Robbins,. L.— Nature and Significance of Economic Science. (Macmillan.) Graaf, J. de V.—Theoretical Welfare Economics. (C.U.P.) Robinson, J.—Accumulation of Capital. (Macmillan.) Wicksell, K.-Lectures on Political Economy, Vol. I. (Routledge. ) Meade, J. E.—Balance of Payments. (O.U.P.) Kindleberger, C. P. International Economics. (Irwin.) Robertson, Sir D.—Lectures on Economic Principles. (Fontana.) Hicks, J. R.—Capital and Growth. (Oxford.) Surveys of Economic Theory. American Economic Association and Royal Economic Societу, Vols. I and II. (Macmillan.) 65 FACULTY OF ARTS HANDBOOK 231.. HISTORY OF ECONOMIC THEORY Economics part II and Economic History A must be passed before this subject is taken. A course of two lectures per week, with tutorial classes throughout the year. SYLLABUS This subject is intended as an introduction to the history of economic theory in its relation to policy. It discusses the ways in which issues ofolićy have stimulated economic thinking and the ways in which, in turn, economic doctrine has been applied to practical issues. While the major stages in the development of economics (in the technical sense) will be discussed, the aim will be to treat these throughout in relation to their historical environment. Some particular subjects which may be discussed are: (1) "Mercantilism". The beginnings of "modern" economic thinking in the seventeenth century; its characteristics. Some "mercantilist" problems: the balance of trade; national power; usury and interest; unemployment and idleness. (2) English "Classical" Thought and Policy. The concept of the economic system as a whole, as developed during the eighteenth century. Adam Smith and the natural harmony of interests. Central problems, c. 1800-1850; the pressure of population ( Malthus ); inflation and deflation, the Corn Laws, the growth of the national debt ( Ricardo) ; colonial development and the exportation of capital; economic crises and the business cycle. (3) Economic Nationalism. ( Friedrich List; David Syme.) (4) "Socialist" Thought. Radical opinion in England, c. 1815-1850 (Thomas Hodgskin; Robert Owen). Marx's theory of capitalist development. (5) Economic Theory and Policy in the Later Nineteenth Century. The theory of marginal utility and its implications for policy. Controversies concerning scope and method. The beginnings of "Welfare Economics". (6) The Keynesian Revolution". The problem of unemployment in the inter-war period. The development of Keynes's ideas, 1920-1936, and his place in the history of economic thought. For the honours degree there will be more emphasis on analytical questions than for the pass degree. BOOKS (a) Recommended for preliminary reading: Keynes, J. M. Essays in Biography. (New ed., Mercury Books, 1961.) (b) Prescribed textbooks: *Smith, A.—The Wealth of Nations. (Everyman.) Sгаf£a, P. (ed.)-The Works and Correspondence of David Ricardo, Vol. I. ( C.U.P.) (e) No formal book on the history of economic thought is prescribed, but one of the following will be useful: Roll, E.—A History of Economic Thought. (Faber.) Taylor, O. H.—A History of Economic Thought. (McGraw-Hill.) Bibliographies will be issued during the year. EXAMINATION. For the honours degree, two 3-hour papers

235. MATHEMATICAL ECONOMICS Economics B and Pure Mathematics part I or General Mathematics must be passed before this subject is taken. A course of two lectures per week throughout the year. Lectures in this subject will be given only if there are sufficient students offering. Intending candidates should consult the Sub-Dean of the Faculty of Economics and Commerce. SYLLABUS Selected aspects of economic theory treated in a mathematical way. 66 ECONOMICS BOOKS (a) Recommended for preliminary reading: Allen, R. G. D.—Mathematical Analysis for Economists. (Macmillan.) (b) Prescribed text-books: *Allen, R. G. D.-Mathematical Economics. (Macmillan.) EXAMINATION. One 3-hour paper.

MASTER OF ARTS 9-4. H. SCHOOL OF ECONOMICS A M.A. by Thesis. 1. Candidates who have passed the Preliminary Examination, and also, if they so elect, those who have qualified for the degree of B.A. with Honours in Economics, may proceed to the М.A. degree by pursuing original research on an approved topic for at least one academic year. Candidates should, if possible, submit their research topic to the head of the department for approval at the beginning of the year in which they commence their research. Each candidate will be assigned to a supervisor with whom he must consult regularly. 2. Candidates are required to present the results of their research in the form of a thesis of about 50,000 words or, on the recommendation of the head of the department, a series of papers. Three copies ( quarto, typewritten, double-spaced ) of the thesis must be submitted and, if passed by the examiners, one will be deposited in the University Library. An entry form for examination for higher degrees must he submitted to the Registrar. B M.A. by Course of Advanced Studies. I. Candidates who have been awarded first or upper second class honours in the final examination for the degree of B.A. with Honours in the School of Economics, or who have been admitted with an equivalent qualification, may, with the approval of the head of the department, proceed to the degree of M.A. by pursuing a course of advanced studies extending over at least one year for full-time students and two years for part-time students. Candidates should seek approval for their proposed course of study by the last Friday in January of the year in which they commence their course. Each candidate will be assigned to a supervisor with whom he must consult regularly. 2. The course of advanced studies will include: ( i ) a weekly post-graduate seminar, extending over one academic year and requiring the submission of two satisfactory seminar or examination papers. (The topics to be covered in the seminar will include two of the following: Econometrics, Monetary Economics, Industrial Economics, Social Economics, Economic Development and International Economics. Further particulars may be obtained from the department); and (ii) Further postgraduate seminar work, or one of the following subjects not already taken as part of the candidate's undergraduate course: Mathematical Economics, Theory of Statistics Part I, History of Economic Theory, or another subject approved by the head of the department; and (iii) An article for publication or a short thesis, which may incorporate further development of the candidate's B.A. Honours essay, or may relate to one of his seminar topics.

67 DEPARTMENT OF ENGLISH Robert .Wallace Professor of English: Professor S. L. GOLDBERG, BLitt. (Oxon), B.А. Professor of English: Vacant. Personal Chair in English: Professor V. T. BUCKLEY, M.A. ORDINARY DEGREE (Details for the honours degree are set out at the end of this section.) Group 5 The major in English is English I, II, III. Rhetoric may not be taken as u part of the major, but may be taken in addition to other English subjects. Note: No books have been asterisked, as all prescribed texts are essential books which the student should if possible possess.

11-1. ENGLISH PART I Ir. T. P. Dobson A course of two lectures and one tutorial class a week. SYLLABUS An introductory study of various kinds of poetry, fiction and drama. Students should do as much as possible of their reading for this subject before lectures begin. BOOKS (a) Prescribed texts: Ballads—The Oxford Book of Ballads; or Border Ballads. (Penguin Poets.) Donne—Poems as selected in class. Pope-Poems as selected in class. (One-volume Twickenham edition, or Every- man.) Hopkins—Poems and Prose. (ed., W. H. Gardner.) (Penguin.) Eliot, T. S.—Collected Poems 1909-1962. The poems by Hopkins and Eliot set for special study will be found, along with some introductory information, in the departmental anthology, Three Modern Poets. (University Bookroom. ) Five novels of growth and discovery: Eliot, G.—The Mill on the Floss. Dickens—Great Expectations. Dostoevsky—Crime and Punishment. (Penguin.) Mark Twain—Huckleberry Finn. Conrad—Lord Jim. Three modern novels: Waugh, E.—Decline and Fall. Huxley, A.—Brave New World. Heller, J.—Catch 22. Aeschylus—Agamemnon. (Trans. MacNeice, Faber.) Shakespeare—Henry IV (Parts I and II) and Macbeth. Miller—The Crucible. Beckett, S.—Waiting for Godot. (b) Recommended for reference: Allen, W.—The English Novel. (Penguin.) Harvey (ed. )—The Oxford Companion to English Literature. 68 ENGLISH Legouis, E., and Cazarnian, L.—History of English Literature. (Dent.) Mack, Dean, and Frost—Modern Poetry. ( Prentice-Hall.) Quiller-Couch, A. (ed.) —The Oxford Book of English Verse. The Shorter Oxford English Dictionary, or The Concise Oxford Dictionary ( Fifth Edition) . ESSAY WORK Students are required to submit the prescribed essays, details of which will be supplied during the year. Essays and tutorial work will be taken into account at the examination. Students who fail to submit the required essays by the due dates may not be given credit for the subject. No tutorial assistance can be provided for external students in this subject, but lecture notes over most of the syllabus are available. Set written work will be corrected. EXAMINATION: Two 3-hour papers. 12. RHETORIC Mr. H. Dow A course of two lectures a week, with tutorial classes. SYLLABUS A study of the technique and style of English prose, linked with a study of the practical problems of English expression. BOOKS (a) Recommended for preliminary reading: Dow, G. М.—Un ommon Common Sense. (Cheshire.) Cowers, E.—The Completeć Plain Words. (Penguin.) Potter, S.—Our Language. ( Penguin. ) Vallins, G. H.—Good English: Ilow to Write It. (Pan Books.) Vallins, G. H.—Better English. (Pan Books.) ( b ) Prescribed texts: Defoe, Swift, Johnson, Hazlitt, R. L. Stevenson and others—Selections in cyclostyled booklets, from English Dept. (A fee of $2 will be charged to cover this and other cyclostyled material issued during the year.) Ρ Ρ Ρ Л Iacа ulа y, T. В.—Essays. ( ed., H. Trevor-Roper, Fontana Library.) Huxley, T. H.—Selections from the Essays. (ed. A. Castell, Crofts Classics.) Shaw, Bernard—Preface to Saint Joan. (Penguin.) Russell, Bertrand—In Praise of Idleness. ( Unwin Bõoks. ) (c) Recommended for reference: The Concise Oxford Dictionary. (5th ed.) The Shorter Oxford English Dictionarij. Fowler, II. W., and F. G. The King's English. (O.U.P.) Fowler, H. W.—Modern English Usage. (O.U.P.) Partridge, E.—Usage and Abшsage. ( Hamilton. ) Partridge, E.—You Have a Point There. (Hamilton.) WRITTEN WORK Students are required to submit written work periodically throughout the year. Written and tutorial work will be taken into account at the examination. Students who fail to submit the required written work by the due dates may not be given credit for the subject. EXAMINATION. Two 3-hour papers. 11-2. ENGLISH PART II Professor V. T. Buckley A course of two lectures and one tutorial class a week. SYLLABUS A study of nineteenth and twentieth century poetry and fiction. The poems to be studied will be selected in class from the authors listed below. (a) Prescribed texts: Auden and Pearson (eds. )—Restoration and Augustan Poets. (Viking Portable ed.) в9 FACULTY OF ARTS HANDBOOK Blake ( Oxford Standard Authors or Viking Portable ed.). Coleridge ( Modern Library) . Wordsworth ( Modern Library) . English Poetry in the 19th Century: Romantic and Victorian Poetry, ed. Frost ( Prentice-Hall. ). Students are however strongly advised to get collected or good selected editions of Byron and Browning. Hopkins—Poems and Prose. (Penguin.) Yeats, W. В.—Selected Poetry. (St Martin's Library.) ( Honours students are advised to buy, instead, the Collected Pоеms, Macmillan.) Eliot, T. S.—Four Quartets. Auden, W. Н.—Selected Poems. (Penguin.) Hope, A. D.—Collected Poems. (Angus and Robertson.) Lowell, R.—Selected Poem.s. (Faber.) Austen—Mansfield Park and Emma. Bronte–.-Wuthering Heights. Melville—Moby Dick. Dickens—Great Expectations. Eliot, G: Middlemarch. James—Portrait of a Lady. Conrad—The Shadow-Line and Heart of Darkness. Joyce—A Portrait of the Artist as a Young Man. (Penguin.) (Also in The Essential Joyce, Penguin.) Lawrence—The Rainbow. (b) Other prescribed reading: Wordsworth—Preface to the Lyrical Ballads. (2nd ed., Modern Library ed. of Poems.) Coleridge—Biographia Literaria. (Modern Library ed. of Poems.) Arnold, Matthew—Critical works in The Portable Matthew Arnold. (Viking Press.) Eliot, T. S.—Selected Prose. (Peregrine.) Note: Authors and works to be studied in the 18th and 19th century anthologies will be specified in class. Critical writings in addition to those prescribed in Section (b) will be recommended in class. ESSAY WORK Students are required to submit three essays, details of which will be supplied during the year. Essays and tutorial work will be taken into account at the examination. Students who fail to submit the required essays by the due dates may not be given credit for the subject. No tutorial assistance can be provided for external students in this subject, but lecture notes over most of the syllabus are available. Set written work will be corrected. EXAMINATION. Two 3-hour papers.

11-3. ENGLISH PART III Mr. C. Wallace-Crabbe A course of three lectures and one tutorial class a week. ( Students who have passed in English B may count a pass in English Part II as the third part of a major.) SYLLABUS (a) A study of English poetry and prose from Chaucer to the eighteenth century, together with EITHER (b, i) Further work on drama, mainly English; OR (b, ii) A selection of American and Australian literature. Students are not required formally to choose between the optional sections of the course. Details of lecture and tutorial. arrangements will be posted on the Depart- mental notice-board at the beginning of the year. 70 ENGLISH (a) Compulsory section. Texts for study are: Chaucer—The Canterbury Tales, as selected in class. Spenser—as selected in class. The Metaphysical Poets. (ed., Helen Gardner. ) Shakespeare—pleasure for Measure, King Lear, Twelfth Night. - Two seventeenth-century plays: Jonson—Volpone. Middleton—The Changeling. - - - *Two seventeenth-century prose works: Bacon—Essays. Browne—Religio, Medici. (* Required reading for Honours students only.) Milton—Paradise Lost. Dryden—Absalom and Achitophel, part I; MacFlecknoe. Pope—as selected-in class. (The one-volume Twickenham ed. or the Everyman. The selection in Penguin Poets is not adequate.) Swift—Gullicer's Travels. - Johnson—as selected in class. The following two will together provide a usable selection: B. . Bronson (ed. ), Samuel Johnson: Rasselas, Poems and Selected Prose.Н (Holt, Rinehart and Winston) plus S. C. Roberts (ed.), Samuel Johnson: Lives of the Poets. (Fontana.) (b) Optional section-EITHER: (i) Further work on drama. Texts for study are: Sophodes—Antigоne. ( Penguin. ) Euripides-The Trojan Women. (University of Chicago or Penguin.) Everyman and I'lediaeval Miracle Plays. (ed., Cawley, Everyman.)—plays to be selected. г"Iarlowe —Ta m burhżle. - - Ѕhakеѕреаге—ІащІеt, Corio/anus. Webster—The White Devil. - Tourneur—The Revenger's Tragedy. Wycherley—The Country Wife. or (ii) A selection of American and Australian literature. Texts for study are: Mark Twain—Huckleberry Finn. Henry Jцnes—The Bostonians. F. Scott Fitzgerald—The Great Gatsby. Patrick White—The Tree of Man. Saul Bellow—Herzog. Modern American poetry—as selected in class. The following two books will be required: Mack, Dean and Frost (eds.), Modern Poetry (Prentice-Hall) and George P. Elliott (ed.), Fifteen 1'lodern American Poets (Rinehart). ESSAY WORK Students are required to submit three essays, details of which will be supplied during the year. Essays and tutorial work will be taken into account at the examination. Students who fail to submit the required essays by the due dates may not be given credit for the subject. Na tutorial assistance can be provided for external students in this subject, but lecture notes over most of the syllabus are available. Set written work will be corrected. EXAMINATION. Two 3-hour papers.

HONOURS DEGREE E. SCHOOL OF ENGLISH _ LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE (For possible combinations with this school see p. 251) The First Year is regarded as a preliminary year of general study. Before entering on their Second Year as candidates for the degree with honours, students will require the permission of the Faculty of Arts to do so. Normally this will be 71 FACULTY OF ARТS HANDBOOK given only to those who have gained a first or a second class honour in English Part I. Any student who, not having been awarded a first or second class honour in English Part I wishes to enter the Honours School, must apply through the Sub-Dean to the Faculty for permission to do so. If permission is granted, the Faculty will prescribe what further work he is to do. Any student who wishes to transfer from a Combined Honours School to the School of Pure English must apply, through the Sub-Dean, for permission from the Head of the Department of English. Any student who wishes to repeat any course in the Honours Sćhool in English must apply, through the Sub-Dean, for permission from the Head of the Depart- ment of English. All students who have completed the Second Year in the Honours School of English, must apply, through the Sub-Dean, for approval by the Head of the Department of English to proceed into their Third Year. Normally this will be given only to students who have gained first or second class honours in Part ii of their honours English course (or courses) and who have progressed satisfactorily in their additional subjects. * * s The test prescribed for English Part I ( Honours ), and the tests in Practice of Criticism for English Literature Part II and Part III, are a compulsory part of the examination in each subject. The tests in Practice of Criticism will normally take place at the end of Third Term, before the beginning of the Examination Тerrn: ф ф s All students taking Part II of the Final Examination are required to submit a thesis by the first day of the Second Term of the year in which they are taking Part II of the Final Examination, or at such other time as is set down in the details of the Combined Honours Courses. This thesis forms part of the Final Examination. The subject of the thesis must be approved by the Head of the Department by the end of the first week of the Third Term of the student's Third Year. Work on the thesis should begin in the long vacation. The thesis itself should be between 8,000 and 10,000 words in length; any thesis significantly longer or shorter will not be accepted. It should be typewritten, double- spaced, on quarto paper. Two copies must be submitted. PURE ENGLISH SCHOOL 1. The course for the degree with honours in the school of English Language and Literature comprises the following subjects: English part I ( Honours ) English Literature parts II and III English Language parts II and III English Language and Literature part IV in accordance with the details set out below. Candidates must take these six subjects and at least three approved additional subjects, one of which must be a language other than English. Two of these additional subjects should be chosen so as to constitute a sub-major.* 2. In their First Year, candidates will take. English part I ( Honours) and at least two additional subjects, of which one will normally be the language other than English. In their Second Year, they will take English Literature part II, English Language part II, in which subjects they are required to be classed, and the remaining additional subject. In their Third Year, they will take English Literature part III and English Language part III; and in their Fourth Year, English Language and Literature part IV. 3. The final examination will be held in two parts, part I at the end of the Third Year, part II at the end of the Fourth Year. PART I (1) Poetry and Prose from Spenser to Johnson. (2) The 19th and 20th century Novel or Australian and American Literature.f (3) Practice of Criticism (dating). Compulsory Class Test. (4) Middle English. (5) Elementary Old Norse or Early English Lyric Poetry. • Sее Approval of Course. Degree with Honours, note (VI), p. 35. 72 ENGLISH PART II Six papers, which shall include: (1) Thesis on an approved subject. (2) At least one of: (a) Aspects of Poetry, 1500 to 1800. (b) Literature and Thought, e. 1830-1880, OR Literature and Thought, e. 1870-1925. § (3) ` Mediaeval Literature. (4) At least one of: (a) Literary Criticism. (b) Studies in Drama, chiefly Creek, 17th century, and modern. (c) Old English Poetry. (d) Old Norse Texts and Civilization. e) History of the English Language. NB. Some of the above papers may not be available in any particular year. Those that are to be available, together with suggested reading for each, will be listed on the Departmental notice-board before the end of the preceding year. Numbers may have to be limited in any of these classes.

ENGLISH IN COMBINED COURSES (A) English in combined honours courses will normally consist of English part I ( Honours) and English Literature parts II, III and IV. In their First Year, candidates will take English part I (Honours) and either one or two additional subjects. One of these additional subjects must, except in combination with a language school, be a language other than English. In their Second Year, candidates will take English Literature part II, in which they are required to be classed, and the remaining additional subject. In their Third Year, they will take papers 1 and 2 of part I of the final examination in the school of English Language and Literature and the class test in the Practice of Criticism. In their Fourth Year, they will take three papers which must include ( 1 ) and at least one paper from (2). ( в ) Candidates may take English Language as part of a combined honours course, provided that they give evidence of their ability to do so. The English subjects of the course are then: English part I ( Honours ). English Language parts II, III and IV. In their First Year, candidates will take English part I (Honours), and one of the two additional subjects. In their Second Year, they will take English Language part II, afd the remaining additional subject. In their Third Year, they will take papers 4 and 5 of part I of the final examinations. In their Fourth Year, they will take three papers, which must include (1), (3), and one of (4c), (4d), (4e).

13. ENGLISH PART I (HONOURS ) A course of three or four lectures a week, with tutorial work. SYLLABUS (i) The course in Literature prescribed for English part I (ordinary degree). Honour students are expected to read widely. (ii) Outline of the development of the English Language to the present day, together with the study of certain" fourteenth century texts, to be selected from: Sisam, K. (ed.)—Fourteenth Century Verse and Prose (with vocabulary). ( О.U.Р.) § Available only to students who have taken English Language III. t Numbers in either of these classes may have to be limited. FACULTY OF ARTS HANbЩOОК This section of the course may not be available in 1968. If it is not, an announcement will be made early in 1968, and extra reading will be prescribed under Section (i) of the course. BOOKS ( a ) Preliminary reading: Potter, S.—Our Language. (Pelican.) Barber, C. The Story of Language. (Pan.) (b) Recommended for reference: Sheard, J. A.—The Words We Use (Deutsch.) Baugh, A. C. History of the English Language. (Routledge & Kegan Paul.) ESSAY WORK Students are required to do special essay and other written work. EXAMINATION. Two 3-hour papers on section (i) of the syllabus, and a compulsory test in section (ii ), if this section is available. 14-1. ENGLISH LITERATURE PART II A course of four lectures a week, with tutorial work, and an additional weekly class in the practice of criticism. SYLLABUS (i) The course in Literature prescribed for English part II (ordinary degree). (ii) Older Forms of Narrative The Homeric Epic. The Song of Roland. (Penguin translation.) The Norse Saga, with special reference to: The Story of Burnt Njal. (Trans. C. W. Dasent, Everyman.) Laxdaela Saga. ( Trans. M. Press, Temple Classics.) Medieval Romance, with special reference to: Aucassin and Nicolette. (Everyman. ) Marie de France. (Everyman, French Medieval Romances.) Chrétien de Troyes. (Everyman, Arthurian Romances.) Malory-Morte d'Arthur. Dante—The Divine Comedy. (Temple Classics translation.) Chaucer—The Canterbury Tales. The following works are recommended for reference: Ker, W. P. Epic and Romance. (Macmillan.) This is the most important reference book. Phillpotts, B.—Edda and Saga. (H.U.L. ) Lewis, C. S.—The Allegory of Love. (Clarendon. ) Coghill, N.—The Poet Chaucer. (H.U.L. ) ESSAY WORK. Students are required to do two essays on section (i) of the syllabus. EXAMINATION. Three 3-hour papers, and a test in the practice of criticism.

13-1. ENGLISH LANGUAGE PART II A course of two lectures a week with tutorial work. SYLLABUS (i) A study of Old English with prescribed texts and unprescribed translation. (ii) A short course of lectures on Anglo-Saxon England. . Students taking English Language part II as part of a combined honours course should attend lectures and sit for the examination in section (1) of English Literature part II. BOOKS (a) Prescribed texts: Wyatt, A. J.—Anglo-Saxon Reader. (C.U.P.) Mitchell, R. B.—A Guide to Old English. (Blackwell.) 74 ENGLISH (b) Recommended for reference: Brook, G. L.-English Sound Changes. (Manchester U.P.) Zesmer, D.—A Cuide to English Literature. (Barnes & Noble.) Whitelock, D.—The Beginnings of English Society. (Pelican. ) Blair, P. H.—An Introduction to Anglo-Saxon England. (C.U.P.) ESSAY WORK will be required on section (ii) of the syllabus. EXAMINATION. One 3-hour paрer, and a short test in grammar.

14-2. ENGLISH LITERATURE PART III A course of lectures, seminars and tutorial work throughout the year. SYLLABUS (i) Section (a) (omitting Chaucer) of the course prescribed for English Part III (ordinary degree). (ii) One of the following two subjects: (a) Australian and American Literature. Works from the two literatures will be studied concurrently throughout the year. - . Details of this course will be posted on the departmental notice-board at the beginning of the year. Preliminary reading will be required. (b) The 19th and 20th century Novel. Details of this course will be posted on the Departmental notice-board at the beginning of the year. Preliminary reading will be required. (iii) Seminars in the Practice of Criticism (dating). WRITTEN WORK. Students are required to do two essays on section (i) of the syllabus, and to present at least one seminar paper each on section (ii, a or b). EXAMINATION. (a) One 3-hour paper on section (i) of the syllabus. (b) One 3-hour paper on section (ii) . (c) A compulsory class test on section (iii).

13-2. ENGLISH LANGUAGE PART III A course of lectures amounting to about four hours a week. SYLLABUS ( i) A study of Middle English. Dickins and Wilson—Early Middle English Texts. (Bowes & Bowes.) Langland—Piers Plowman. (ed. E. S. Olszewska, U.T.P. ) Silam, К. (ed. )-Fourteenth Century Verse and Prose. (O.U.P.) Chaucer, G.—The "Dream Poems", with special reference to The Parlement of Foul ys. (ed., D. S. Brewer, Nelson.) The "Scottish Chaucerians". (Roneoed sheets.) Ford, B.—The Age of Chaucer. ( Pelican Guide to English Literature, Vol. I. ) Together with one of the following two subjects: (ii) A study of Early English lyric poetry. Anglo-Saxon Reader. (ed., Wyatt or Sweet. ) Dickins and Wilson—Early, Middle English Texts. ( Bowes & Bowes. ) Gordon, I. L. (ed.)—The Seafarer. (Methuen's O.E. Library.) Davies, R. T. ( ed. )—Mediaeval English Lyrics. ( Faber Paperback.) (iii) Elementary Old Norse. Gordon, E. V. Introduction to Olcl Norse. (rev. ed., O.U.P., 1957.) Snorri Sturluson—Mdkonar Saga G"a. (English Dept.) ESSAY WORK will be required on section (i) of the Syllabus. EXAMINATION (a) One 3-hour paper on section (i) of the syllabus. (b) One 3-hour paper on section (ii) or (iii). 75 FACULTY OF ARTS HANDBOOK 13-4. ENGLISH LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE PART IV (SCHOOL E) A course chiefly of seminar work throughout the year. SYLLABUS Six papers, which shall include: ( 1 ) Thesis of 8,000-16,000 words on an approved subject. (2) At least one of: (a) Aspects of Poetry, 1500 to 1800. (b) Literature and Thought, c. 1830-1880, OR Literature and Thought, c. 1870-1925. * ( 3 ) Mediaeval Literature. (4) At least one of: (a) Literary Criticism. (b) Studies in Drama, chiefly Greek, 17th century, and modern. * (c) A study of Old English, chiefly poetry, with special reference to: Beowulf—( ed., Klaeber, Heath.) Anglo-Saxon Reader—( ed., Wyatt or Sweet)_ * (d) Old Norse Texts and Civilization. Zoëga, G.—A Concise Dictionary of Old Icelandic. (Clarendon.) Gordon, E. V. Introduction to Old Norse. (Rev. ed., O.U.P., 1957.) Typescript texts. (English Department.) * (e) History of the English Language. * Available only to students who have taken English Language III. NB. Some of the above papers may not be available in any particular year. Those that are to be available, together with suggested reading for each, will be listed on the Departmental notice-board before the end of the preceding year. Numbers may have to be limited in any of these classes. EXAMINATION. Each of the above papers, other than (1), will be of three hours. 14-3. ENGLISH LITERATURE PART IV ( COMBINED COURSES ) A course chiefly of seminar work throughout the year. SYLLABUS Three papers, which must include (1) and at least one paper from (2) as set out in the details for Part IV of English Language and Literature above. EXAMINATION. Each of the above papers, other than (1), will be of three hours. 13-3. ENGLISH LANGUAGE PART IV ( COMBINED COURSES) A course of four to five classes a week. SYLLABUS Three papers, which must include (1), (3), and one of (4c), (4d), (4e), as set out in the details for Part IV of English Language and Literature above. EXAMINATION. Each of the above papers, other than (1), will be of three hours. MASTER OF ARTS 15-4. E. SCHOOL OF ENGLISH LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE 1. Enrolment. Candidates must complete two formal applications--one for the Sub-Dean of the Faculty and the other for the Department of English—seeking permission to enrol, whether for the degree of M.A. or for the preliminary course qualifying pass-degree students to enter upon the M.A. 76 ENGLISH If permission is granted, candidates must enrol at the Students' Records Office, re-enrol for each subsequent year of their approved course and, when appropriate, lodge an entry fonn for examination for higher degrees. 2. Preliminary Course (for candidates with pass degrees). Students should apply, both to the Sub-Dean and the Department of English, on the appropriate forms not later than the end of February in the year in which they propose to begin. Students should consult the Department about details of their course, but generally they will be required to take only one paper from those set for Part I of the Final Honours Examination and two papers from those available for Part II, together with a thesis on an approved subject as required for Part II. However, all proposed courses must be approved by the Head of the Department. 3. M.А. Course. Candidates may choose, with the approval of the I-lead of the Department, to fulfill the requirements for the degree of М.A. in one of two ways: (i) Prepare a thesis of about 50,000 words on a subject approved by the Head of the Department. Students will work under a supervisor nominated by the Department, to whom they are required to report regularly on their work. Three copies of the thesis (quarto, typewritten, double-spaced) should be submitted. Candidates may also be examined on the subject of their thesis. (ii) (a) Sit a special examination in one of the following subjects, provided that it is available for Part II of the Final Honours Examination and provided that no student may repeat a course he has taken as part of his B.A., or his l.A. Preliminary Course. 1. Aspects of Poetry, 1500-1800, 2. Literature and Thought, e. 1820-1880. 3. Literature and Thought, e. 1870-1925. 4. Old English Poetry. 5. Old Norse Texts and Civilization. 6. History of the English Language. 7. Such other papers as may be provided from time to time. ( Ь ) In addition, prepare a thesis of about 25,000 words on a subject approved by the Head of the Department. Other requirements for this thesis are those set out above under (i) concerning the longer thesis. DEPARTMENT OF FINE ARTS Head of Department: . Professor J. T. BURKE, О.B.E., М.A. (Lend., Yale and le1b. ) ORDINARY DEGREE (Details for the honours degree are set out at the end of this section.) Group 5 SUBJECTS OFFERED: Fine Arts A, B, C. No external tuition is available in these subjects. The major is Fine Arts A, B and C. 17-1. FINE ARTS A Professor J. T. Burke A course of two lectures per week, with one tutorial class, throughout the year. No external enrolments are accepted in this subject. SYLLABUS A survey of the Western tradition in art up to the present day, with an introduction on Greek and Roman art and a special study of the art of the Modern Move- nient and the Bauhaus. Students are required to submit written work and study visual material. BOOKS The following is a basic list. Fuller bibliographies will be supplied during the course. Students are recommended to buy the books marked with an asterisk. (a) Preliminary reading and textbooks: Combi-kb, E. H. 3.—The Story of Art. ( Phaidon, 1966.) *Janson, H. W.—A History of Art. ( Thames & Hudson, 1962.) Richter, G. M. A.—A Handbook of Greek Art. (Phaidon, 1965.) (b) Prescribed for reference: *Murray, P., and L.—A Dictionary of Art and Artists. (Pelican, 1964.) Pelican History of Art, ed., Pevsner, N., (the relevant volumes for illustrations. and text). Propylaen Kunstgeschichte series, ( for illustrations; text in German). Wölftlin, 1.— Principles of Art History. ( Dover. ) Panofsky, E.—Studies in Iconology (the introductory chapter ). ( Harper. Torch Books, 1962.) Clark, K.—The Nude. ( Pelican, 1966.) *Clark, К.—Lапdscape into Art. (Pelican, 1966.) *Pevsner, N.—An Outline of European Architecture. ( Pelican, 1963. ) Fry, 1.—Last Lectures. ( Sect. 1-5.) ( Beacon Press, 1962. ) Wölfflin, 1.—Renaissance and Baroque. (Fontana Library, 1964.) *Hoff, U.—Catalogue of European Paintings before 1800, National Gallery of Victoria, 2 vols. (1961.) Quarterly Bulletin of the National Gallery of Victoria, vols. 1-12, (1945-58.) Annual Bulletin of the National Gallery of Victoria, vol. 1- (1959- .) EXAMINATION Two 3-hour written papers and a visual examination. The latter will be based on the illustrations in the relevant chapters of Janson' s A History of Art. Written work as prescribed by the department. 78 FINE ARTS 17-2. FINE ARTS B Mr. F. A. Philipp A course of two lectures per week, with one tutorial class, throughout the year. No external enrolments are accepted in this subject. Fine Arts В will be given every year. Students who wish for good reasons to take this subject without having previously taken Fine Arts A must obtain the permission"of the lecturer in charge of the subject and must undertake a course of preliminary reading prescribed by the Department. SYLLABUS A study of the art of the Renaissance in Italy, with an introduction on Italian Medieval art. The tutorial class will be given mainly to the study of primary and written sources. Students are required to submit written work. BOOKS Monographs and works of reference are not included here; sectional bibliographies will be issued through the year to supplement this basic list. Students are strongly recommended to acquire as much visual reference material as possible. Books which students will be permitted to take into the examination room are marked with a double asterisk: extracts from these books may also be used in the examination. (a) Recommended for preliminary reading: *Ovid—Metamorphoses. ( Pelican or any other ed. ) Huizinga, J. .The Waning of the Middle Ages. ( Pelican. ) Waddell, 11.—The Wandering Scholars. (Pelican.) *Panofsky, E.—Studies in Iconology (the introductory chapter). (O.U.P., 1939; Harper Torch Books, 1962. ) *Panofsky, E.—Meaning in the Visual Arts (of which the introductory chapter only is identical with the above) . ( Doubleday, 1955.) Heer, F.—The Medieval World, 1100-1350. ( Mentor. ) Wall, B. Italian Art, Life and Landscape. (Elek. ) Murray, P. and L.—The Art of the Renaissance. (Thames and Hudson.) The New Cambridge Modern History, vol. I. ( C.U.P. ) *Burckhardt, J.-The Civilization of the Renaissance in Italy. (Phaidon.) (b ) Prescribed textbooks: Primary sources `*Holt, E. G.—A Documentary History of Art. 2 vols. (Doubleday, 1958.) This is a new edition of Literary Sources of Art History. (Princeton, 1947.) * *Ghiberti—Commentarii. * *Alberti—Ten Books on Architecture. ( Tiranti, 1955. ) **Alberti—On Painting. (ed., J. R. Spencer, 1956, Routledge.) (0.P.) **Vasari, G.—Lives of the most eminent painters, sculptors and architects. ( Everyman Nos. 784-7, reprinted 1962, or at least a selected edition such as that edited by Betty Burroughs, Allen & Unwin, 1960. ) **Maelehose, L. S. ( ed. )—Vasari: "On Technique". (Dover.) **Leonardo—The Paragone. (ed. Richter, O.U.P. ) **Leonardo—Treatise on Painting. (Trans. and annotated by A. P. McMahon, Princeton, 1957 or any other edition.) or IacCurdy—The Notebooks of Leonardo da Vinci. or Richter, J. P.—The Literary Works of Leonardo da Vinci. **Michelangelo, a Self Portrait, ed., R. C. Clements (Prentice-Hall) and/or **Complete Poems and Selected Letters of Michelangelo. (Modern Library.) Michelangelo—Poetry. ( Any edition.) **Michelangelo—Letters. (The best edition is that of E. H. Ramsden, Peter Owen, 1963.) Secondary sources *Panofsky, E.—Studies in Iconology. (Harper Torch Books, 1962. ) The Renaissance, Six Essays. (Harper Torchbooks. ) Meiss, M. Painting In Florence and Siena after the Black Death. (Harper Torchbooks. ) 79 FACULTY OF ARTS HANDBOOK.

* Wölf lin, Н.—Clássiс Art. ( Phaidon. ) *Dewald, E. T. Italian Painting, 1200-1600. ( Holt, Rinehart & Winston, 1961.) *Gould, C.—An Introduction to Italian Renaissance Painting. (Phaidon.) White, J.—The Birth and Rebirth of Pictorial Space. Pope-Hennessy, J. Italian Gothic Sculpture. ( Phaidon, 1958.) Pope-Hennessy, J. Italian Renaissance Sculpture. ( Phaidon, 1958.) Pope-Hennessy, J.—Italian High Renaissance and Baroque Sculpture. 3 vols. (Phaidon, 1963.) Chastel, A.—Art et humanisme d Florence au temps de Laurent le Magnifique. Panofsky, E.—Renaissance and Renascences in Western Art. (2 vols., Copen- hagen, 1960.) Wittkower, R.—Architectural Principles In the Age of Humanism. (Warburg and Courtauld Institutes, and reprint by Tiranti. ) Friedlander, W Mаnnеrism in Italian Painting. (Columbia U.P., 1957). Studies in Western Art, ed. Meiss, 1963, vols. 1 and 2. (Princeton.) *Kristeller, P. O.—Renaissance Thought. 2 vols. (Harper Torch Books.) Berenson, B.-Italian Pictures of the Renaissańće. 4 vols. (Phaidon.) Schevill, F.—Medieval and Renaissance Florence. (Harper Torch Books.) EXAMINATION. Two 3-hour papers and a visual test to be taken earlier than the written papers. Written work as prescribed by the Department.

17-3. FINE ARTS C Professor J. T. Burke A course of two lectures per week, with one tutorial class, throughout the year. This subject is not available for external tuition. Fine Arts C will be given every year. Students wishing to take this subject without having previously taken Fine. Arts A must obtain the permission of the lecturer in charge of the subject and must undertake a course of preliminary reading prescribed by the Fine Arts Department. SYLLABUS A study of European art ( 1714-20th century) with special reference to (a) English art in the 18th century, (b) Neo-Classicism, (c) certain aspects of the Modern Movement. Students are required to submit written work. Books The following is a basic list only. Students are recommended to buy the books marked with an asterisk. Note: A Modem Movement bibliography will be supplied in fist term. (a) Recommended for preliminary reading: *Kimball, Fiske—The Creation of the Rococo. ( New York, the Norton Library, 1964, 1st ed. 1943, Paperback.) Wittkower, R.—Architectural Principles in the Age of Iwnanisin. (London,. Alec Tiranti, 1952.) Especially Part IV, Section 7: "The Break-away from the Laws of Harmonic Proportion in Architecture". *Kaufmann, Emil—Architecture in the Age of Reason. ( Cambridge, U.S.A.; Harvard University Press, 1955.) Novotny, Fritz—Painting and Sculpture in Europe 1780 to 1800. (The Pelican History of Art, 1960.) *Hitchcock, H. R.—Architecture, Nineteenth and Twentieth Centuries. (Pelican History of Art, 1958.) (b) Prescribed textbooks: Primary Sources Hogarth, William—The Analysis of Beauty. (ed. Joseph Burke, Oxford, 1955.) Reynolds, Sů Joshua-Discourses. (ed. R. Wark, California, Huntington Library, 1959.) 80 FINE ARTS Burke, Edmund—A Philosophical Enquiry into the Origin of our Ideas of the Suiime and Beautiful. (ed. J. T. Boulton, London, Routledge and Kegan Paul, 1958. ) Mason, Eudo C.-The Mind of Henry Fuseli: Selections from his writings. ( London, Routledge and Kegan Paul, 1951.) Costello, Jane—France and England, 1600-1750. (Paperback series.) Sources and Documents in the History of Art Series. ( New Jersey, Prentice-Hall. ) On order in advance of publication. Eitner, Lorenz-Nee-Classicism and Romanticism. ( Paperback series.) Sources and Documents in the History of Art Series. (New Jersey, Prentice-Hall.) On order in advance of publication. Secondary Sources Summerson, John—Architecture in Britаiп, 1530-1830. (Penguin, Harmonds- worth, 1963. Rev. ed., 1963.) Kimball, F.—Thе Creation of the Rococo, 1943. ( Norton, New York, 1964.) Clark, K.—The Gothic Revival. (Constatee, 1928. Penguin, 1964.) Honour, H.—Chinoiserie: The Vision of Cathay. (London, J. Murray, 1961.) Hussey, Christopher-The Picturesque: Studies in a Point of View. (Pitman, London, 1927.) Kaufmann, E.—Architecture in the Age of Reason. (Cambridge, U.S.A., Harvard U.P., 1955.) Irwin, David—English Neoclassical Art: Studies to Inspiration and Taste. (London, Faber and Faber, 1966.) Novotny, F.—Painting and Sculpture in Europe, 1780-1880. (Penguin, Harmonds- worth, 1960.) (Pelican History of Art.) Hitchcock, H. Russell—Architecture, Nineteenth and Twentieth Centuries. (Penguin, Harmondsworth, 1958.) (Pelican History of Art.) EXAMINATION Two 3-hour papers and a visual examination. Written work as supplied by the Department.

HONOURS DEGREE N. SCHOOL OF FINE ARTS ( For possible combinations with this school see p. 251) 1. The course for the degree with honours in the School of Fine Arts comprises the following subjects: 1. Fine Arts A 2. Fine Arts $ 3. Fine Arts C 4. Fine Arts D 5. (a) Ancient History (hens) or European History A (hus); or (b) English Part I (bons) (see note 1); or ( e) First part of an approved honours sub-major. 6. (a) Honours History C or Honours History E or Honours I-Iistory ; or ( b ) English Literature Part II; or В (c) Second part of an approved honours sub-major. 7. Aesthetics. Note 1 Students who take one of the subjects listed in 5 (a) in the first year must take one of those listed in 6 (a) in the second year. Students who take the subject in 5 (b) in the first year must take the subject in 6 (b) in the second year, and cor- respondingly for any other approved honours sub-major. Note 2 Candidates for the degree with honours must also take either (a) Three additional subjects, including at least Part I of a foreign language provided it is not already part of an honours sub-major being taken under 5 and 6 above; or 81 FACULTY OF ARTS HANDBOOK (b) two additional subjects only, if both these subjects are foreign languagges or Parts I and II of a foreign language (assuming in both cases that the honours sub-major is not taken in a foreign language). Students who have completed the First Year must be approved by the Faculty of Arts as candidates for the degree with honours before entering the Second Year of the honours school. The professor of Fine Arts will normally recommend such approval for candidates who have gained first or second class honours in Fine Arts A and in their Grade I honours subjects. 2. The subjects of the course should be taken in the following order: First Year: (a) Fine Arts A (hes). (b) Ancient History ( hens) or European History A (hoes) or English Part I ( hens) or first part of an approved honours sub-major. (c) Part I of a foreign language (see Note 2 above), or first additional pass subject. Second Year: (a) Fine Arts В (hens) or Fine Arts C (hofs). * (b) Honours History C or Honours History E or Honours History В or English Literature Part II or second part - of an approved honours sub-major. (c) Second additional pass subject (see Note 2 above). Third Year: (a) Fine Arts C ( hofs ) or Fine Arts (hofs). ( b ) Aesthetics. В (c) Third additional pass subject, if required (see Note 2 above). Fourth Year: (a) Fine Arts D. (b) Thesis. The final examination in the School of Fine Arts will be divided into two parts: Part I will consist of one 3-hour paper in Aesthetics and the examination prescribed for the third year Fine Arts honours subject (Fine Arts or Fine Arts C, whichever is given that year) as set out below. В Part II will consist of a thesis on an approved subject, together with one 3-hour paper in each of the following: (1) Classical Art or Italian Renaissance Art, or the subject read in Fine Arts C, whichever subject has not been examined in Part I. (2) Fine Arts D. 17-1. FINE ARTS A As for the ordinary degree, with a special study on the iconography and stylistic. sources of Rembrandt's religious paintings. Tutorial guidance will be offered (two hours per week). EXAMINATION Three 3-hour papers and a visual examination. Students qualifying in these examinations may be required to take an additional oral examination.

17-2. FINE ARTS В As for the ordinary degree. Students must attend a two-hour weekly seminar, and ( during one or two terms) an additional course of lectures ( one hour per week) on a subject complementary to their main course; these will be arranged during the. year. Italian Some knowledge of the Italian language would be of great assistance to students of Fine Arts В. EXAMINATION Three 3-hour papers and a visual examination, two papers as for the ordinary degree but at a higher standard, the third paper on the additional honours work. • This subject will be examined at the end of second year. The result will be taken into consideration at the Final Honours examination. 82 PANE А1тs 17-3. FINE ARTS C As for the ordinary degree. An additional weekly seminar throughout the year, and an additional weekly lecture during one or two terms, in which some special aspects of the course will be studied. EXAMINATION Three 3-hour papers and a visual examination, two papers as for the ordinary degree but at a higher standard. The third will be devoted to the honours lectures and seminar work.

17-4. FINE ARTS D A seminar for Final Year students throughout the year. SYLLABUS A study of the history and method of art history and art criticism.

THESIS A thesis from 9,000-12,000 words in length, on a topic which must be approved by the beginning of the third term of the third year, must be submitted by the first day of the third term of the fourth year. MASTER OF ARТS 18-4. N. SCHOOL OF FINE ARTS Candidates are required to prepare a thesis on an approved subject. They will work under the supervision of a member of the Fine Arts department, to whom they must report regularly on the progress of their work. They may also be required to attend seminars or lectures bearing on their subject. An entry form for examination for higher degrees must be submitted to the Registrar. Three copies of each thesis (quarto, typewritten, double-spaced) should be submitted, one of which will be deposited in the University Library. The attention of candidates is drawn to the recommendations of the Professorial Board on the format of theses (regulation 4.6, in the University Calendar). DEPARTMENT OF FRENCH

Head of Department:

Professor R. F. JACKSON, Chevalier de la Légion d'Honneur, °Lacier de l'instruction Publique, B.A. (Syd. ), M.A.

ORDINARY DEGREE ( Details for the honours courses are set out at the end of this section.)

Group 1 SUBJECTS OFFERED French I, II, III BOOKS OF REFERENCE The following books are recommended for reference throughout the course: Dictionaries Mansion, J. E.-Harrap's Standard French and English Dictionary, 2 vols. ( Haггap. ) Dictionnaire de l'Académie Française. ( Paris, Hachette. ) Robert, P.—Dictionnaire alphabétique et analogique de la langue française, 6 vols. ( Paris, P.U.F. ) Litt é, E.-- г Dictionnaire de la langue f rапçаis . ( Paris, Hachette. ) Grand Larousse encyclopédique. ( Paris, Larousse,е 1960. ) Dictionnaire usuel. ( Paris, Quillet-Flammarion, 1963. ) Grammars Mansion, J. E.—A Grammar of Present-Day French. ( Наггар.) Heath's New Practical French Grammar. (Hanap. ) Grevisse, M.—Le Bon Usage. ( Paris, Geuthner, 1964. ) Hanse, Joseph—Dictionnaire des difficultés grammaticales et lexicologiques. ( Brussels, Baude, 1949.) Le Bidois, B. et R.—Syntaxe du français moderne, 2 vols. (Paris, Picard, 1967.) Martinon, P.—Cотmeпt on parie en français. (Paris, Larousse, 1927.) . All students should possess *Harrav's Shorter French and English Dictionary and *A Grammar of Present-Day French by J. E. Mansion. First year students should also possess *Thimann, I. C.—A French Vocabulary for Advanced Level. (Hanap, 1964.) After First Year honour students will need to possess Maurice Grevisse's *Le Bon Usage.

20-1. FRENCH PART I A course of three lectures, one tutorial class, and one language Iaboratory session per week throughout the year. This course, which assumes that students have passed in French at the matriculation examination, is a prerequisite for French part II. 84 FßENC1:š SYLLABUS (f) A study of nineteenth century French literature and its historical background. (ii) Translation of prescribed texts with some literary commentary; an introduction to French versification; unseen translation into English. (iii) Translation into French; composition in French; grammar and syntax. (iv) Dictation, conversation. (v) Theory and practice of phonetics. ESSAY WORK Students are required to submit an essay in English, on the 19th century literature. Books (a) Recommended for preliminary reading: Knight, R. C., and George, F. W. A.—Advice to the Student of French. (Black- well, 1955.) Brogan, D. W.—The French Nation. (Hamish Hamilton, 1957.) Ritchie, R. France. ( Methuen, 1963.) Roe, F. C.—Modern France. An Introduction to French Civilization. (Longmans, 1961.) ( b ) Prescribed textbooks: For translation and literary study— *Balzac, H. de—Le Père Doriot. (Carnier.) Ρ *Stendhа l.—Le Rouge et le Noir. (Garnier. ) *Lagarde, A. et Michard, L.—XIX sidcle. (Bordas.) The sections prescribed for translation in these three books will be indicated on the departmental notice-board. For literary study— "Constant, B.—Adolphe. (Call. "Le Livre de Poche", Gallimard. ) *Musset, A. de—Lorenzaccio and Un caprice, ed. M. Shaw. (U. of Lend. P.) *Flaubert, C.—Madame Revery. (Coll. "Le Livre de Poche", Gallimard. ) Maupassant, G. de—Selected Short Stories. ed. J. H. Matthews. (Univ. of Lend. P.) EXAMINATION Two 3-hour papers, the first on unseen translation into English, composition, prescribed texts, and versification; the second on part (i) of the syllabus; terminal tests in translation into French, dictation and theory of phonetics; oral test in reading and conversation. The tests in translation into French, theory of phonetics, and dictation and all oral tests must be completed before the written examination. Class work will be taken into account in the determining of examination results.

20-2. FRENCH PART II A course of four lectures per week, with one tutorial class, throughout the year. SYLLABUS (i) The literature of the 17th century studied in a generai course and a course of explication de textes. (ii) Translation and literary study of prescribed 20th century texts; unseen translation into English. (iii) Background course on aspects of the civilization of the Ancien Régime. (iv) Translation into French. (v) Dictation, conversation. 85 FACULTY 0F лнтв HANDBOOK ESSAY WORK Students are required to submit an essay in French and an exercise in explication on the literature of the 17th century. ROOKS (a) Recommended for preliminary reading: Ritchie, R.—France, Chaps. 1-4. ( Methuen, 1963. ) Lough, J.—An Introduction to Seventeenth Century France. ( Longmans, 1954.) ( b ) Prescribed textbooks: For reading and literary study- *Lagarde, A., et Michard, M.—XVII° siècle. ( Paris, Bordas.) For explication— *Corneille, P.—Le Cid. ( Classiques Larousse.) *Pascal, B.—Les Репsées. ( Classiques Gamier. ) *La Fontaine—Fables. ( Classiques Carnier.) *Madame de La Fayette—La Princesse de Clèves. (Ed. N. S. Wilson, Harrap, 1958.) *Racine, J.—Britannicus. (Classiques Larousse.) Phèdre. ( Classiques Larousse.) *Molière-L'Еcоle des Femmes. (ed. W. D. Howarth, Blackwell's French Texts.) Dom Juan. ( Classiques Larousse.) For translation and literary study— *Proust, M.—Un Amour de Swann. (Coll. "Le Livre de Poche", Gallimard.) °Gide, A.—La Porte étroite. (Hanap. ) *Malraux, A.—La Condition humaine. (Coll. "Le Livre de Poche", Gallimard.) EXAMINATION Three 3-hour papers (the first on part (ii) of the syllabus; the second and third on the literature of the 17th century); terminal tests in translation into French -and dictation; a class test on part (iii) of the syllabus at the end of second term; and an oral test (reading and conversation on general and literary topics) in third term. Class work will be taken into account in the determining of examination results.

20-3. FRENCH PART III A course of five lectures per week, with one tutorial class, throughout the year. SYLLABUS (i) The literature of the 18th century studied in two courses, one devoted to the philosophes, the second to the novelists and dramatists. (ii) Translation and literary study of prescribed 20th century texts; unseen translation into English. ( iii) A background course on contemporary French civilization. (iv) Translation into French. (v) Dictation, conversation. ESSAY WORK Students are required to submit essays in French and an exercise in explication on the literature of the 18th century. BOOKS (a) Recommended for preliminary reading: Anderson, H. S.—Europe in the Eighteenth Century. (Longmans.) Ritchie, R.—France. Chs. V-VI. ( London, Methuen, 1946.) Lough, J.—An Introduction to Eighteenth Century France. (Longmans, 1960.) (b) Prescribed textbooks: For background reading- *Lagarde, A. et Michard, L.—XVIII° siècle. ( Paris, Bordas, 1951.) 86 FRENCH For literary study- *Fontenelle—Oeцvres choisies. ( Classiques Larousse.) *Montesquieu—Lettres persanes. ( Coll. Garnier-Flammarion. ) *Voltaire—Lettres philosophiques. ( Classiques Garnier. ) *Rousseau—Du Contrat social ou principes du droit politique, suivi de Discours. Lettre d d'Alembert sur les spectacles. (Classiques Garnier. ) *Diderot—Entretien entre d'Alembert et Diderot. (Coil. Garnier-Flammarion.) *Marivaux—Thédtre. (Coll. du Flambeau, Hachette, 1951.) *Voltaire—Romans et Contes. (Paris, Garnier.) *Diderot—Le Neveu de Rameau. (ed. Jean Fabre, Geneva, Droz. ) *Laclos—Les Liaisons dangereuses. (Paris, Carnier.) *Beaumarchais-Le Mariage de Figaro. (Paris, Bordas.) For translation and literary study— *Sartre, J.-P.—Les Mouches. (Hanap, 1963.) *Camus, A.— L'Exil et le Royaume. (Paris, Gallimard.) *Butor, M.—La Modification. (Paris, Coll. "Le Monde en 10-18", Union Générale d'Editions. ) EXAMINATION Three 3-hour papers (the first on part (ii) of the syllabus; the second and third on the literature of the 18th century); terminal tests in translation into French and dictation; and, in third term, a written test on contemporary French civilization and an oral test (reading and conversation on 18th century literature and contemporary French civilization). Class work will be taken into account in the determining of examination results.

HONOURS DEGREE

F. SCHOOL OF FRENCH LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE

( For possible combinations with this school see p. 251)

1. The course for the degree with honours in the school of French Language and Literature comprises the following subjects:

French parts I, II, III, IV, and Medieval French Language and Literature Renaissance French Language and Literature Advanced Medieval French Language and Literature in accordance with the details set out below and as set out for the ordinary degree. Candidates for the degree with honours must also take three additional subjects at pass or honour standard including the two parts of a sub-major.* It is recommended that at least one of the additional subjects should be a Philosophy or a History subject. It will be assumed, especially in the philological sections of the course, that students have a fair working knowledge of Latin, which is really an indispensable background to the study of French. 2. In their First Year, candidates in the honour school will take the honour course in French part I, and two additional subjects ( one of which will normally form part of a sub-major) approved by the professor of French. The First Year is regarded as a preliminary year of general study, during which students will be expected to build a solid linguistic foundation for the honour work of the later years and to acquire reasonabie correctness and fluency in spoken and written French. Admission to the higher years of the course is conditional upon satisfactory performance in this First Year, and students must be approved by the faculty of Arts as candidates for the degree with honours before entering the Second Year of the honour school. The professor of French will normally recommend such approval for See Approval of Course, Degree with Honours, note (VI), p. 35. 87 FACULTY OF ARTS HANDBOOK candidates who have gained at least second class honours in French part I. Other candidates who wish to continue in the honour school must interview the professor of French, who will be guided in his recommendation by the merits of the case. A student who has completed the First Year of the course for the ordinary degree, and has passed in French part I may, with the permission of the faculty, enter the honour school. Such a student must make special application to the faculty, through the sub-dean, and, if permission is granted, the faculty will prescribe what further work must be completed before the student is allowed to proceed to the final examination. 3. In their Second Year, candidates will take the honour course in French part II, Medieval French Language and Literature, and the second part of their sub-major or the remaining additional subject. In order to proceed to the Third Year, they will require to be "recommended to proceed" at the end of the Second Year. 4. In their Third Year, candidates will take the honour courses in French part III, and either Renaissance French Language and Literature or Advanced Medieval French Language and Literature, according to the year in which the lectures in these subjects are delivered. In their Fourth Year, candidates will take the honour course in: French part IV, and either Renaissance French Language and Literature or Advanced Medieval French Language and Literature, whichever subject is given in that year. The Third and Fourth. Years have been planned as a continuous course of study, but candidates will sit for a preliminary final examination, both written and oral, at the end of the Third Year. Students should utilize the long vacation at the end of the Third Year to cover a major part of their Fourth Year reading. 5. The final examination in the school of French Language and Literature will be based on recorded class work of the Third and Fourth Years and on the following series of tests:

(a) At the end of the Third Year:

A. Formal Examination Papers: (1) French Literature of the 18th century. (2) The Special Literary Study. (3) Renaissance French Literature or Advanced Medieval French Literature. (4) Renaissance French Language and Texts or Studies in Linguistics. B. Class Tests and Essays: (1) Class tests in advanced unseen translation from English into French. (2) Class tests in advanced unseen translation from French into English. (3) Essays and explications on the French Literature of the 18th century. (4) Oral test in French.

(b) At the end of the Fourth Year: A. Formal Examination Papers: (1) Modern French Literature, first paper. (2) Modern French Literature, second paper. (3) Renaissance French Literature or Advanced Medieval French Literature. (4) Renaissance French Language and Texts or Studies in Linguistics.

B. Class Tests: (1) Advanced oral test in French. (2) Class test in advanced unseen translation into French. (3) Class test on the social and intellectual history of France since 1870. C. A thesis on an approved topic (not necessarily 20th century), to be prepared under the guidance of a supervisor and submitted early in third term. . . 88 FRENCH 20-1. FRENCH PART I (lions) A course of four lectures, one tutorial class and one language laboratory session per week throughout the year. SYLLABUS (i) A study of nineteenth century French literature and its historical background. (ii) A special literary study. (iii) Translation of prescribed texts; an introduction to French versification; unseen translation into English. (iv) Translation into French; composition in French; grammar and syntax. (v) Dictation, conversation. (vi) Theory and practice of phonetics. ESSAY WORK Candidates will be required to submit short essays in English on the 19th century literature. BOOKS (a) Recommended for preliminary reading: As for French Part I (ordinary degree). (b) Prescribed textbooks: As for French Part I ( ordinary degree ), together with the following for special literary study: *Baudelaire, C.-Les Fleurs du Mal. ( Coll. "Les Classiques de la civilisation française", Didier.) *Balzac, H. de—La сousine Bette. (Garnier. ) *Balzac, H. de—César Birotteau. (Garnier. ) Special literary subject: (i) A study of the poetry of Baudelaire based on selected poems. (ii) A study of the novels of Honoré de Balzac based particularly on the following— *La cousine Bette. (Garnier.) *César Birotteau. (Carnier.) EXAMINATION Three 3-hour papers; (the first on unseen translation into English, composition, prescribed texts and versification; the second on part (i) of the syllabus; the third on the special literary study); tests and class work as for the ordinary degree, with special stress on spoken French.

20-2. FRENCH PART II (lions) A course of five lectures, a seminar, and a special tutorial class per week throughout the year. SYLLABUS (i) French literature of the 17th century studied in two courses of lectures: (a) Theatre; (b) Prose and Poetry. (ii) Special literary study: Baudelaire and Rimbaud. (iii) Contemporary French authors (study in seminars of selected texts). (iv) A background course on aspects of the civilization of the Ancien Régime. (v) Advanced unseen translation into English. (vi) Advanced unseen translation into French. (vii) Spoken French. ESSAY WORK Candidates will be required to submit essays and explications during the year on the 17th century literature. 89 FACULTY OF ARTS HANDBOOK Books (a) Recommended for preliminary reading: Seventeenth century— As for French part II (ordinary degree) and in addition the following: Borgerhoff, E. B. 0.—The Freedom of French Classicism. (Princeton University Press, 1950.) Moore, W. G.—Frenćh Classical Literature, an Essay. (O.U.P., 1961. ) For the special literary study— Brooks, C., and Warren, R. P.—Understanding Poetry. (Holt.) Raymond, M. De Baudelaire au surréalisme. ( Paris, Corti, 1947.) Fairlie, A.—Baudelaire: "Les Fleurs du Mal". ( Arnold, 1960.) Bonnefoy, Y.-Rimbaud par lui-m@me. ( Paris, Editions du Seuil, 1961.) ( b ) Prescribed textbooks: Seventeenth century— For part (i) (a) of the syllabus: Tristan L'Hermite.—La Mariane. (ed. J. Madeleine, Société des Textes Français Modernes, 1917. ) *Comeille. Le Cid. ( Classiques Larousse.) Polyeucte. ( Classiques Larousse.) *Racine:Britannicus. ( Classiques Larousse.) Phèdre. ( Classiques Larousse. ) *Corneille—Le Menteur. (Classiques Larousse.) *Molière—L'Ecole des Femmes. (ed. W. D. Howarth, Blackwell's French Texts.) Dom Juan. ( Classiques Larousse.) Le Misanthrope. (ed. G. Rudler, Blackwell's French Texts.) For Part (i) (b) of the syllabus: *Descartes.—Discours de la Méthode. (Garnier, 1960.) *Pascal—Les Pensées. ( Classiques Carnier.) *La Rochefoucauld—Maximes. ( Classiques Larousse.) *La Bnryère.—Les Caractères. ( Coll. Garnier-Flammarion.) *Saint-Simon.—Mémoires. (Classiques Larousse.) *Madame de La Fayette.—La Princesse de Clèves. (ed. N. S. Wilson, Hanap, 1958.) Guilleragues.—Lettres portugaises. ( Classiques Carnier.) *La Fontaine—Fables. ( Classiques Garnier. ) *Boileau. Le Lutrin et l'Art poétique. ( Classiques Larousse. ) For the special literary study: *Baudelaire, C.—Les Fleurs du Mal. (Garnier, 1959.) *Rimbaud, A.—Oeuvres. (Garnier, 1960.) EXAMINATION Students will sit for one 3-hour paper on part (iii) of the syllabus. The literature of the 17th century will be examined by essays and explications during the year. There will be terminal tests in unseen translation into French, a class test on the civilization of the 17th and 18th centuries at the end of second term, and, in third term, an oral test (reading and conversation on section (i) of the syllabus.) Seminar work will be taken into account in determining the examination results.

20-5. MEDIEVAL FRENCH LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE A course of three lectures per week throughout the year. SYLLABUS (i) Studies in Old French Literature with special reference to the epic cycles and the lyrical poetry. Studies in selected aspects of medieval French culture. (ii) Outline history of the French language with a study of Old French texts. 90 FBENCS Books (a) Recommended for preliminary reading: Ρ Dauzat, A.-Lв Cénie de lи langue française. (Payot.) . Voretzsch, K.—Introduction to the Study of Old French Literature. (Stichert.) (b) Prescribed textbooks: *Bourdillon "(ed.)—Aucassin et Nicolette. ( Manchester Univ. Press.) *Ferran, A. et Decahors, E.— Morceaux choisis de la littérature française. Tome I: Le Moyen Age (Les Editions de l'Ecole, Paris, 1949.) *Paris, G. et Langlois, E.—Chrestomathie du moyen lige. (Hachette. ) BACKGROUND COURSE A course in the folklore of the Middle Ages, open to all students of French, is an integral part of the preparation for the examinations in Medieval French Language and Literature. EXAMINATION Two 3-hour papers (one on part (i) of the syllabus, the other on part (ii) ), a class test in unseen translation from Old French.

30-3. FRENCH PART III (Ions) A course of five lectures, two seminars, and a special tutorial class per week throughout the year. SYLLABUS (i) French literature of tho 18th century ( advanced treatment of the syllabus set for French part III, ordinary degree). ( ii) Special literary study: Baudelaire and Rimbaud. ( iii ) Contemporary French authors ( study in seminars of selected texts). ( iv) A background course on contemporary French civilization. (v) Advanced unseen translation into English. (vi) Advanced unseen translation into French. ( vii) Spoken French. ESSAY WORK Candidates will be required to submit essays and explications on the 18th century literature during the year. BOOKS ( a) Recommended for preliminary reading: For the study of the eighteenth century—as for French part III ( ordinary degree ). For the special literary study—as for French part II (honours). (b) Prescribed textbooks: For the study of the 18th century-as for French part III (ordinary degree ). For the special literary study—as for French part II (honours) For the seminars on 18th century and contemporary authors: texts to be announced during the preceding long vacation. For the study of contemporary French civilization-as for French part III (ordinary degree). EXAMINATION Two 3-hour papers (the first on part (i) and the second on part (ii) of the syllabus); terminal tests in advanced unseen translation into French; and, in third term, a written test on contemporary French civilization, a test in advanced unseen translation from French into English, and an oral test (reading and conversation on 18th century literature and contemporary French civilization). Seminar work will be taken into account in determining the examination results. 91 FACULTY OF ARTS HANDBOOK 20-6. RENAISSANCE FRENCH LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE A course of two or more lectures per week throughout the year. Lectures will be given in 1968 and thereafter in alternate years. SYLLABUS (i) Studies in 16th century French literature with special reference to Rabelais, Sceve, du Bellay, Ronsard and Montaigne. Studies in selected aspects of Renaissance French thought and culture. (ii) A general study of the development of the French language in the 16th century, with special emphasis on semantic problems. вooks (a) Recommended for preliminary reading: Crawford, R. i.—The Renaissance and other Essays. (M.U.P.) Tilley, А.—Studies in the French Renaűsance. (C.U.P. ) (b) Prescribed textbooks: *Rabelais, F.—Pages choisies. (Colin.) *Montaigne, М.—Seleсted Essays. (eds. Tilley and Boase, Manchester Univ. Press.) *Ronsard, P. de—Poèmes. (Blackwell's French Texts.) EXAMINATION Two 3-hour papers, one on part (i) of the syllabus and the other on part (ii); a glass test in unseen translation from Renaissance French.

20-4. FRENCH PART IV A course of five lectures or seminars and a special tutorial class per week throughout the year. SYLLABUS (i) French literature of the 20th century. (ii) The social and intellectual history of France since 1870. (iii) Spoken French. (iv) Advanced unseen translation into French. ESSAY WORK Each candidate will be required to prepare under the guidance of a supervisor and submit early in third term a thesis in French on an approved topic of his choice (not necessarily a 20th century topic). ORAL WORK Candidates will be expected to achieve considerable fluency and correctness in spoken French, and will present themselves for a viva voce examination of honours scope at the end of the year. BOOKs (a) Recommended for preliminary reading: For section (i) of the course: Bгée, G., and Guiton, 1.—An Age of Fiction. (Chatto & Windus, 1958.) Raymond, 1.—De Baudelaire au surr&zllaine. (Paris, Corti, 1940.) Warren, A. and Wellek, R.—Theory of Literature. (Peregrine.) , Boisdeffre, P. de—Les écrivains f rапçаis d'aujourd'hui. (Coll. ` Que sais-je?", Paris, P.U.F., 1963.) For section (ii) of the course: Brogan, D. W.—The Development of Modern France. (Hamish Hamilton, 1949.) Thomson, D. Democracy in France Since 1870. (4th ed., O.U.P., 1964.) Brombert, V. The Intellectual Fiero. (New York, Lippincott, 1961. ) Albérès, R. M.—L'Aventure intellectuelle du XXe siècle. 92 FRENCH

Touchard, J. (ed.)—Hłstoire des idées politiques. 2 vols. (Paris, P.U.F., 1959.) Hoffmann, J. et al. France: Change and Tradition. (Gollancz, 1963.) (b) Prescribed textbooks:. A reading list will be sent to honours students early in the preceding long vacation. EXAMINATION Two 3-hour papers, one on the novel (to be done in French), the second on poetry and the drama; the thesis (above mentioned) on a selected topic; oral examination of one half-hour on the year's work; class tests in advanced translation into French and on part (ii) of the syllabus.

20-7. ADVANCED MEDIEVAL FRENCH LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE A course of two or more lectures per week throughout the year. Lectures will be given in 1969 and thereafter in alternate years. SYLLABUS (i) Studies in Old French Literature. Evolution of the Arthurian and Grail legends. The chief Celtic and British-Latin sources. Special study of the work of Chгétien de Troyes. (ii) Comparative Semantics, an exploration of meaning and change of meanin on historical and geographical principles, with particular reference to Old French and more generally to Romance and Germanic languages. Homonymic conflicts, ailments of language and remedies. Linguistic geography, with special application to Walloon and regional French, and study of `dialectal texts. BOOKS (a) Recommended for preliminary reading: Loomis, R. S. and others—Arthurian Literature in the Middle Ages. (O.U.P., 1959.) Sturtevant, E.—An Introduction to Linguistic Science. ( New Haven, 1950. ) Dauzat, A.-Les Patois. ( Delagrave.) Dauzat, A.-La Géographie linguistique. (Flammarion. ) On, J. Words and Sounds in English and French. ( b ) Prescribed textbooks: Dialectal texts, to be provided by the department. BACKGROUND COURSE A course in the folklore of the Middle Ages, open to all students of French. This course is an integral part of the preparation for the examinations in Advanced Medieval French Language and Literature, EXAMINATION Two 3-hour papers, one on part (i) of the syllabus and the other on part (ii) .

МАSТЕK 0F ARТS 21-4. F. SCHOOL 0F FRENCH LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE • Candidates will, under supervision, prepare a thesis in French on an approved subject, and will be required to report to their supervisor regularly during the year. They will be advised as to a suitable course of reading, and may be required to pass an oral examination covering the general field of their research. 93 FACULTY OF ARTS HANDBOOK An entry form for examination for higher degrees must be submitted to the Registrar. Theses should normally be submitted not later than the end of February. Three bound copies of each thesis ( quarto, typewritten, double spaced) should be submitted, one of which will be deposited in the University Library, and one in the French Seminar Room collection. In. certain cases candidates may also be required to pass a written and oral examination on subjects approved by the professor of French.

94 DEPARTMENT OF GEOGRAPHY Head of Department: Professor J. ANDREWS, B.A. (Syd. ), Ph.D. (Cantab.), M.A. ORDINARY DEGREE ( Details for the honours degree are set out at the end of this section.) Group 4 The major is Geography parts I, II and III. Geology I does not form part of any major in Geography, but may be taken in addition to Geography subjects. Admission to the examination in Geography subjects is conditional upon performance of the prescribed practical and field work. A laboratory fee of $2 and an excursion fee of $4.50 must be paid by students enrolled for Geography part I. A laboratory fee of $2 must be paid by students enrolled for Geography part II and Geography part III. The fees must be paid to the University Branch of the National Bank, using a specially stamped bank slip obtained from the Geography Department. Students enrolled for Geography part II and Geography part III will pay excursion expenses prior to the excursions. 23-1. GEOGRAPHY PART I Dr. E. C. F. Bird, Mr. A. A. Wilcock, Ir. K. Fairbaim, and others. A course of two lectures, one tutorial class and three hours' practical work per week throughout the year, with three days' field work. SYLLABUS World patterns in physical geography and human activities. The physical basis of resources. The concepts of development and under-development. The relations between resources and development and the different processes of development in the major geographical areas in the modern period. The practical work will consist largely of the study of maps and map techniques as instruments in geographic investigation. A laboratory fee of $2 and an excursion fee of $4.50 must be paid by students enrolled for Geography Part I. The fees must be paid to the University Branch of the National Bank using a specially stamped bank slip obtained from the Geography Department. Books Prescribed textbooks: *Aп atlas, e.g. Bartholomew, J.-Advanced Atlas of Modern Geography. (Meikle- john. ) or Lewis, C., and Campbell, J. D.—The Oxford Atlas. (O.U.P.) or Fullard,_H., and Darby, H. C.—The University Atlas. (Philip.) Ρ *Strа hler, A. N. Introduction to Physical Geography. (Wiley.) EXAMINATION, Two 3-hour papers ( one of which may be early in second term. )

23-2. GEOGRAPHY PART II` Professor Andrews, Mr. G. J. Missen and others. A' course of two lectures and not more than three hours' tutorial and supervised work per week throughout the year. Four days' field work. SYLLABUS Two of the following three courses, depending on the staff situation: Regions and regionalism: detailed comparative study of the regional geography of some of the following areas: Australia, U.S.A., South-eastern Asia, Africa and Europe. The theory of regionalism. Biogeography: a geographical synthesis of the environmental relationships of living organisms. Students will be required to submit written work. 95 FACULTY OF ARTS HANDBOOK Books Students should possess the following references: *C.S.I.R.O. The Australian Environment. (C.S.I.R.O., Melbourne.) *Fisher, C. A.—South-East Asia. (Methuen, 1964.) Reading lists will be given in class. EXAMINATION. Two 3-hour papers (one of which may be early in second term

23-3. GEOGRAPHY PARТ III Dr. T. M. Perry, Dr. J. R. V. Prescott, Mr. G. J. Missen and Mr. k. Fairbairn A course of three lectures and three hours' supervised work per week throughout the year. Four days' field work. Students will be required to submit written work. SYLLABUS Three of the following courses depending on the staff situation. Economic Geography, particularly location theory. Population Geography; Urban Geography. Regional Geography of Europe. Biogeography. BOOKS Reading lists covering source materials, reference books, and periodical articles will be given in class. EXAMINATION. Two 3-hour papers.

1ONOURS DEGREE P. SCHOOL OF GEOGRAPHY ( For possible combinations with this school see p. 251) 1. The course for the degree with honours in the school of Geography comprises the following subjects: (i) Geography I, II, III and IV, with one additional lecture per week for two terms in Geography I and with one additional tutorial hour per week throughout the year and additional written work in both Geography II and III. (ii) Political Geography, and Exploration and Settlement. ( iii) Five other approved subjects selected from the subjects of the degree of Bachelor of Arts, ordinary degree (preferably in History, Economics, Government or Geology part I) and comprising either one major with a sequence or two additional subjects, or two sequences and one additional subject. 2. The order in which the above subjects are taken must be approved by the head of the department of Geography. Geographical Exploration and Settlement must be taken in the Second Year of the course and Political Geography in the Third Year unless permission to vary this order is granted by the faculty. No subject other than Geography IV may be taken in the fourth year. A laboratory fee of $2 and an excursion fee of $4.50 must be paid by students enrolled for Geography part .I (Ilons. ). A laboratory fee of $2 must be paid by students enrolled for Geography part II ( Ions.) and Geography part III (Ions.). The fees must be paid to the University Branch of the National Bank, using a specially stamped bank slip obtained from the Geography Department. Students enroiled for Geography part II (Ions.) and Geography part III (Ions.) will pay excursion expenses prior to the excursions. 23-1. GEOGRAPHY PART I (Ions) A course of two lectures, one tutorial class, and three hours' practical work per week throughout the year, with three days' field work (as for the ordinary degree) with one additional honours lecture per week for two terms and additional written work. SYLLABUS As for the ordinary degree. 96 GEOGRAPHY Books As for the ordinary degree. EXAMINATION As for the ordinary degree. Candidates for the honours degree must be classed as of honours standard.

23-2. GEOGRAPHY PART II (Ions) A course of two lectures, one tutorial class, and three hours' supervised work per week throughout the year, with one additional tutorial class per week throughout the year and additional written work for honours candidates. Four days' field work. SYLLABUS As for the ordinary degree. The tutorial class and additional written work for honours candidates will be concerned with more specialized topics in either the economic or the historical geography of the regions being studied. BOOks As for the ordinary degree. Additional references, particularly to periodical literature, will be given in class. EXAMINATION As for the, ordinary degree, with some compulsory questions for honours candidates. Candidates for the honours degree must be classed as of honours standard.

23-3. GEOGRAPHY PART III ( Ions ) A course of three lectures and three hours' supervised work per week throughout the year. Four days field work. SYLLABUS As for the ordinary degree. Candidates for honours will be given individual assignments for additional and more detailed work. BOOKS As for the ordinary degree. Additional references, particularly to periodical literature, will be given in class. EXAMINATION As for the ordinary degree, with some compulsory questions for honours candidates. Candidates for the honours degree must be classed as of honours standard.

23-4. GEOGRAPHY PART IV This course will involve the preparation of a thesis on an approved topic, based upon individual field work. Seminars will be held on the specialisms involved, and on geographic methodology and research techniques. BOOKS Reading lists will he provided for the seminars. EXAMINATION. Two 3-hour papers and a thesis.

23-5. POLITICAL GEOGRAPHY Dr. J. R. V. Prescott A course of lectures and seminars, equivalent to approximately three hours per week throughout the year, with written work. SYLLABUS A study of theory and selected area studies in political geography. Staťes as geographical entities; space relations, resources, and national power; frontiers and boundaries; geographic sectionalism in national affairs; regional differentials in population and production; internal and external political geography of Australia. 97 FACULTY OF ARTS HANDBOOK Rooks Reading lists will be given in class. EXAMINATION. One 3-hour paper. 23-6. EXPLORATION AND SETTLEMENT Dr. T. M. Perry A course of lectures and seminars, equivalent to approximately three hours per week throughout the year, with written work. SYLLABUS An introductory study of the state of geographical knowledge in medieval and renaissance times and its development during the age of great maritime discoveries. The exploration of the American and Australian continents. The effect on the new lands of the contemporaneous expansion of the European economies and of trans- oceanic trade and migration. The processes of "Western" colonization with particular reference to the problem of new settlers in unfamiliar environments, their increasingly effective use of the land and its resources, the development of settlements with varying forms and functions, and the evolution of distinctive regional "cultural" land- scapes. A special study will be made of the settlement and development of parts of North America and Australia. Books Book lists will be supplied in class. EXAMINATION. One 3-hour Daper. MASTER OF ARTS 24-4. P. SCHOOL OF GEOGRAPHY Candidates are required to prepare a thesis on a subject approved by the head of the department. They will work under the supervision of a member of the department, to whom they should report regularly upon the progress of their work. An entry form for examination for higher degrees must be submitted to the Registrar. Three copies of each thesis (quarto, typewritten, double-spaced) should be submitted, one of which will be, deposited in the University Library. Candidates may also be examined orally on the subject of the thesis.

98 DEPARTMENT OF-GERMANIC STUDIES Acting lead of Department Professor J. SMIT, Knight of the Order of Oranje. Nassau, Litt.D. (Utrecht), М.A. ORDINARY DEGREE (Details for the honours course are set out at the end of this section.) Group 1 SUBJECTS OFFERED: German parts I, 1I, III Dutch parts I, II, III Swedish parts I, II, iII

26-1. GERMAN PART I. Miss E. Ruff The course assumes that students have reached pass standard in German at the matriculation examination. A course of four lectures per week throughout the year, together with one tutorial class. Besides the course for day students there will be an evening course with the syllabus as set out below; lectures on item (ii) (Monday, 4.15) for day and evening students combined. - SYLLABUS (i) Phonetics, Dictation, Grammar, translation at sight, composition and conversation. (One lecture, one tutorial.) - - . (ii) (a) Introduction to the history of the German language. l (b) Outlines of German history from 1740-1914. J ( one lecture) (iii) Study of selected works, prose and verse, illustrative of German literature, history and civilization at specific periods. ( Two lectures. ) With a view to the oral test students are required to study in detail ten of the prescribed poems and to concentrate, under the lecturer's guidance, on one drama or one prose work selected from the list prescribed for discussion. The quality of the work of the candidate throughout the course will be taken into account at the annual examination. BOOKS (a ) Prescribed textbooks: f *Frenzel, H. A., and E.—Daten deutscher Dichtung. Chronologischer Abriss der deutschen Literaturgeschichte. Band I, II. (Deutscher Taschenbuchverlag, Munchen, 1962. ) f *Dickins, E. P.—Cerman for Advanced Students. ( O.U.P., 1963.) , *Russon, L. J.—Complete German Course for First Examinations. (Longmans, London, 1955.) or *Russon, A. and L. J.—Advanced German Course. (Longmans, Lend., 1965.) or f*Schulz-Griesbach—Grammatik der deutschen Sprache. (Max Hueber Verlag, Munchen, 1965.) f*Brockhaus Illustrated Dictionary. German-English, English-German. (Pitman, Lend., 1960. ) f Duden—S ynonymwörčerbuch. ( Bibliographisches Institut, Mannheim, 1964. ) f Farrell, R. B.—A Dictionary of German Synonyms. (C.U.P. Paperback, latest ed.) f Wasserzieher, E.—Woher? (Bonn, F. Diimmlers Verlag, 1959, or later ed.) (A short etymological dictionary.) t These books will be used in later years. 99 FACULTY OF ARTS HANDBOOK *Deutschland erzählt. (ed. . von Wiese. Fischer Taschenbuch No. 500, Frank- furt.) В f *Deutsche Landschaften. ( illustrated.) (ed., H. KnüЬе1, Hanap, 1962. ) f*Germany and Surrounding Territories—A Map Survey. ( Available from the Department.) (b) Prescribed for discussion in class: f *Goethe, J. W.—Goethes Werke, Band I. (ed., E. Trunz, Christian Wegner Verlag, Hamburg, 1962 or later ed. ) *Goethe, J. W.—"Urfaust", 1775. ( ed., Samuel, Macmillan, 1958.) *Goethe, J. W.—Goethe in Str ssburg und Wetzlar (1816). (ed., G. C. Houston, Blackwell.) а *Droste-Hülshoff, A.—Die Jud nb h . (1842.) ( ed., J. R. Forster, Harr p, 1955.) е ис е п *Fontane, T.—Irrungen Wirrungen. (1887.) (Ullstein Biieherei, No. 89.) *Mann, Т.—Топiо Kтögеr. (1903 ). (ed., Wilkinson, Blackwell.) * fk , F.—Das Urteil und andere Erzählungen. ( Fischer Taschenbuch No. 19, Ка Frankfurt.)а *Brecht, B.—Mutter Courage und ihre Kinder. (1941). (ed. H. F. Brookes and C. E. Fraenkel.) ( Heinemann, Lend., 1960.) *Diirrenmatt, F. Der Besuch der alten Dame. ( 1956 ) . (ed. P. . Ackerman.) ( Methuen, Lind., 1961.) К *Andersch, .—Sansibar oder der letzte Grund. (1957.) (ed. W. G. Hesse, Hanap,А Lind., 1964.) EXTERNAL STUDIES Country students should get in touch with the head of the department of Germanic Studies at the beginning of the academic year. They are required to submit evidence of the progress of their work during the year, and should make every effort to discuss once a term in person their work with the lecturers in their respective subjects. The department of Germanic Studies will offer advice and information of a general nature as to courses for external students. Written work (translations and essays) sent to the department will be corrected and returned. EXAMINATION Two 3-hour papers (the first on translation and composition, the second on prescribed authors) ; oral test of twenty minutes. 26-2. GERMAN PART II Dr. H. Maclean, Mr. H. J. Pott A course of five lectures per week (one of which is optional), with one tutorial class, throughout the year. There will also be an evening course. SYLLABUS (i) Course of lectures on History of German Literature from Aufklärung to Romanticism (two hours per week), illustrated by texts. (ii) Study of Goethe's Faust and Hofmannsthal's Der Tor and der Tod (1893) . (iii) Advanced language study. (iv) Course of lectures on Old and Middle High German Literature, 750-1350. ( One hour per week; optional for Pass students.) With a view to the oral test each student is required to concentrate, under the lecturer's guidance, on two authors treated during the year. BOOKS (a) Vacation Reading: Students are required to read during the preceding long vacation Goethe's Faust, parts I and II, Lessings Emilia Galotti, Goethe's Tasso and Goethe's Wilhelm Meisters Lehrlahre. (b) Prescribed texts and textbooks: *Goethe—Faust, parts I and II. (ed. Thomas, Heath; Trunz, Hamburg, Вйchег der Neunzehn.) t These books will be used in later years. 100 GERMANIC STUDIES *Hofmannsthal, H. von—Der Tor und der Tod. (ed. Gilbert, Blackwell.) 1963.) (See Part I.) *Diсldns, E. P.—German for Advanced Students. (O.U.P., f *Schulz-Griesba h—Grammatik der deutschen Spraćhe. ( See Part I.) f*Frenzel, H. A.,ć and E.—Daten deutscher Dichtung. Band I, II. (Deutcher Taschenbuchverlag, München, 1962.) { Braak, Ivo—Poetik in Stichworten. ( Verlag Ferdinand Hirt, Kiel, 1966.) *Kayser, W.—.-Kleine deutsche Versschule. (Franke, Bern, 1960, or DAL? Taschenbücher, Band 306.) . (c) Prescribed for discussion in class and tutorial: *Lessing, G. E.—Emilia Galetti. ( Reclam. No. 45, or any other edition.) *Goethe, J. W. von—Goethes Werke, Band I ( see Part I). *Goethe, J. W. von-Tasso (1790 ). ( Reclam. No. 85, or any other edition.) *Goethe, J. W. von—Wilhelm Meisters Lehrjahre (1796). (Goldmann, No. 527/8.) *Goethe, J. W. von—Hermann und Dorothea (1797). (Reclam, No. 55, or any other edition.) Samuel, R. H.—Goethe: Hermann und Dorothea. ( Studies in German Literature, No. 4, Arnold, London, 1967. ) *Schiller, F.—Don Carlos. ( 1787.) (Reclam. No. 38/38а. ) *Schiller, F.—Kabale und Liebe. (1784.) (Reclam. No. 33 or ed. Wilkinson and Willoughby, Blackwell, 1945. ) * ülderlin, F Selected Verse. (ed., M. Hamburger, Penguin, 1901.) *NovalisН —Heinrich von Ofterdingen (1800) etc. ( Rowohlt Klassiker No. 130-1.) *Kleist, H. von—Der zerbrochene Krug. (1806.) (Reclam. No. 91, or ed. R. H. Samuel, Macmillan, Lend., 1950.) *Hoffman, E. T. A. Der goldene Topf (1814). (Bedlam, No. 101/02.) *Märicke, E.—Gedichte. (1838.) ( Reclam. No. 7661.) *Eichendorff, J. Aus dem Leben eines Taugenichts (1826 ). ( Reclam, No. 2354 or any other edition.) *Eichendorff, J.—Gedichte. ( Reclam, No. 7925/25А. ) *Heine, 1.—Die romantische Schule. ( Reclam. Nos. 8163-65, or any other full edition.) (d) A list of books recommended for further reading will be distributed by the Department EXTERNAL STUDIES Country students are required to submit evidence of the progress of their work during the year and should make every effort to discuss once a term in person their work with the lecturers in their respective subjects. EXAMINATION Two 3-hour papers (the first on Faust I and II including translation into Eng- lish, the second on literature including prescribed authors); oral test of twenty minutes. 26-3. GERMAN PART III Dr. H. Wiemann, Mr. .1. Hesse. A course of five lectures per week, with one tutorial class, throughout the year. Students who wish to study Middle High German texts may attend the relevant course for part II (bons). Evening courses will be given. SYLLABUS (i) Course of lectures on History of German Literature from 1830 to Expressionism (twо hours per week), illustrated by texts. (ii) Study of the German navel from the mid-nineteenth century. to the present. (iii) Background to modern Germany. (iv) Advanced language studies, including stylistic analysis. With a view to the oral test each student is required to concentrate, under the lecturer's guidance, on one lyrical poet of the period mentioned, one novel or work prescribed for discussion, and one work of literary criticism. t Tbis will be used in German part III also. . 101 FACULTY OF ARTS HANDBOOK Rooks (a) Vacation reading: Students are required to read duňng the preceding long vacation Kelle s Der griine Heinrich, Stifter's Nachsommer, Thomas Mann's Buddenbrooks and as manyř as possible of the other novels mentioned under (d). (b) Prescribed textbooks: *Frenzel, H. A., and E.-Daten deutscher Dichtung. ( See Part IT.) *Jude, Wilhelm K.-Kleine Deutsche Stillehre. ( kesselrings he Verlagsbuch- handlung, Wiesbaden, Bamberg, 1959.) с *Schneider-Deutsche Kunstprosa. (Quelle und Meyer, Leipzig, 1928.) (Available from the department.) Braak, Ivo-Poetik in Stichworten. ( See Part IL) (c) The following works will form the basis of the course on History of Literature ( see above syllabus (i) ) : *Büchnег, G. Dantoпs Tod, Leonce und Lena, Lenz, Woyzeck in "Theater, Briefe, Dokumente", DTV, Munich, No. 70, 1965. * 1, F.-Maria Magdalena. (1844.) (Reclam. No. 3173 or Blackwell, ed. НеЬЬеG. Brychan Rees, 1965.) * 1, F.-Herodes und Mariamne. (1849.) (Reclam. No. 3188 or Blackwell, НеЬЬеed. Edna Purdie, 1943.) *Ibsen, H.-"A Doll's house" (1879) in A Doll's House and Other Plays. (Penguin, 1965.) *Hauptmann, Gerhart-Bahnwärter Thiel. (1892.) ( Reclam. No. 6617.) *Hauptmann, Gerhart-Die Weber. (1892.) (Ullstein-Bücher Sonderreihe, ed. Hans Schwab-Felish, 1963. ) *Wedekind, F.--"Frühlings Erwachen" in Frühlings Erwachen und Der Marquis von Keith. ( Dramen.) (Goldmann, No. 889, 1962.) *Brecht, B.-Der kaukasische Kreidekreis. (1945.) ( Edition Suhrkamp.) *Brecht, B.-Der gute Mensch von Sezuan. (1940.) ( Edition Suhrkampp. ) *Rilke, R. M.-Werke in drei Bänden, Band I: Gedicht-Zyklen, Insel Verlag. (In Bücher der Neunzehn, Frankfurt, 1966.) *Rilke, R. M. Die Aufzeichnungen des Malte Laurids Brigge. (1910.) (Im Insel Verlag, Frankfurt.) *Rilke, Rainer-Ma a-In Selbstzeugnissen und Bilddokumenten. (No. 22. Rowohlt, Hamburg.)ň *George, Stefan-In Selbstzeugnissen und Bilddokumenten. (No. 44. Rowohlt, Hamburg.) *Hofmannstal, Hugo von-Kleine Dramen. (1893-1899.) ( Grossband, No. 750.) ( Insel-Bücherei. Im Insel Verlag.) ( Enthaltend: Der Tod des Tizian, Der Tor und der Tod, Idylle, Der weisse Fächer, Der Kaiser und die Hexe, Das kleine Welttheater, Die Frau im Fenster, Das Bergwerk zu Falun. *Mann, T. Der Tod in Venedig. (1913.) ( Fisher-Bücherei, No. 54, Frankfurt. *Mann, .-Mario und der Zauberer. (1930.) ( Reclam. No. 8200, Leipzig.) *Pinthus,Т k.-Menschheitsdämmerung, Ein Dokument des Expressionismus. ( Rowohlt Taschenbücher, No. 5/56.) (d) The following works will form the basis of the course on the German novel ( see above syllabus (ii)) : *Кеlleг, G. Der griiпе Heinrich ( 1855/1880). (Goldmanns Gelbe Taschen- bücher, Nos. 778-780.) *Stifter, A.-Der Nachsommer. (1857). (Goldmanns Gelbe Taschenbücher, Nos. 1378-1380.) *Raabe, W.-Stopfkuchen (1891). (Rowohlts Rotations Romane, No. 100.) *Fontane, T.-Ef fi Briest. (1894.) *Mапп, T.-Buddenbrooks (1901). ( Fischer Bücherei, Exempla Classica, No. 13.) *Каfkа, F.-Der Prozess (1925) (Fischer Bücherei, Exempla Classica, No. 3.) *Böll, H.Billard um halbzehn (1959) (kiepenheuer und Witsch, Köln. ) *Johnson, U.-Mutmassungen über Jakob (1959) . (Fischer Bücherei, No. 457.) EXTERNAL STUDIES Country students are required to submit evidence of the progress of their work during the year and should make every effort to discuss once a term in person their work with the lecturers in their respective subjects. 102 свАмлNтс sтanІЕs EXAMINATION Three 3-hour papers (the first: Stylistic analysis and Essay; the second: History of German Literature; the third: Novel and Background to Modern Germany). Oral testof twenty minutes. 27-1. DUTCH PART I Professor J. Smit, Mr. G. Verheyden A course of four lectures per week, together with one tutorial class, throughout the year. SYLLABUS (i) Pronunciation, grammar and idiom. (ii)- Translation into English and into Dutch. ( iii) Conversation and discussion of prescribed texts. (iv) Outline of Dutch history and civilization. The course is planned to attain a standard comparable with that of other First Year language subjects, but in its early stages it is adapted to the needs of those previously unacquainted with the language. Such students must get in touch with the head of the department during the preceding long vacation, and are strongly advised to attend the four weeks' summer course in February, 1967. With a view to the oral test, each student is required to concentrate, under the lecturer's guidance, on three works selected from the list under ( c). Students are advised to attend the introductory course of lectures on structure and history of the Germanic Languages in German part I ( first term only). (See section (ii (a) of syllabus of German part I.) The quality of the work of the candidate throughout the year will be taken into account at the annual examination. BOOKS " (a) Prescribed textbooks: *Smit, J., and Meijer, R. P.-Dutch Grammar and Reader. (M.U.P,, 1963.) Buiskool, H. E.—Korte Samenvatting van de Spellingvooгsohriften 1955. . ('s Gravenhage, Martinus Nyhoff, 1955. ) •Renier, F. G.—Dutch-English and English-Dutch Dictionary. (Routledge and Kegan Paul.) ( For students taking part I only. ) •ten Bruggencate-Broers English-Dutch and Dutch-English Dictionary. ( Wolters, Groningen.) (For students taking the whole course.) or Broers-Smit—English-Dutch and Dutch-English Dictionary. ( Wolters, Gronin- gen.) (b) Students are required to read three of the following books: Elsschot, W.—Kaas. ( Any edition. ) van het Reve, G. K.—De ondergang van de familie Boslowits and Werther Nieland. (Any edition. ) Alberts, A.—De Eilanden. ( Amsterdam, 1954. ) Den-neat, M. De tienduizend dingen. ( Amsterdam, 1955. ) Koolhaas, A.—Poging tot instinct. ( Amsterdam, 1956. ) Koolhaas, A.Vergeet niet de leeuwen te aaien. ( Amsterdam, 1957.) den Doolaard, A.—De Druivenplukkers. ( Querido, Amsterdam.) Bomans, G.=De Avonturen van Bill Clifford. ( Amsterdam-Brussel, 1948.) Bakker, P. Iеugd in de Pijp. ( Amsterdam, 1946.) Romijn Meijer, 1.—Onder Schoolkinderen. (Amsterdam, 1963.) (c) Recommended for reference: Schöffer, I.—A Shorč History of the Netherlands. ( Amsterdam, 1956.) Geyl, P.—The Revolt of the Netherlands. ( London, Williams & Norgate, 1945.) Renier, G. H.—The Dutch Nation. ( Allen & Unwin. ) Landheer, B. (ed.)—The Netherlands. ( California Press, 1943.) Vlekke, B. H. M.—Evolution of the Dutch Nation. (New York, 1945.) Stapel, F. W.—De Oostindische Compagnie en Australië. (Amsterdam, 1937.) EXTERNAL STUDIES, See the regulations set out at the end of German part I. EXAMINATION Two 3-hour papers (the first on translation and grammar, the second on prescribed texts, composition and history); oral test of fifteen minutes; dictation. 103 - FACULTY OF ARTS HANDBOOK 27-2. DUTCH PART II Professor J. Smit A course of four lectures per week, with one tutorial class, throughout the year. SYLLABUS (i) Grammar and idiom. (ii) Translation of advanced texts into English and into Dutch. Composition. (iii) Conversation and discussion of prescribed texts. (iv) Outline of Dutch literary history. BOOKS (a) Prescribed textbooks: As for Dutch part I and *Elsschot, Willem—Villa des Roses. (Any edition.) *Hildebrand—Camera Obscura. ( Any edition. ) *de Vooys, C. G. N.Historische Schets van de Nederlandse Letterkunde. (ed. Wolters, Groningen.) (b) Students are required to read three of the following books: van der Leeuw, A.Ik en mijn Speelman. ( Any edition.) de Vries, T.—Het Eiland van de Zwarte Godin. ( den Haag, 1955.) Carmiggelt, S.—Tussen Mal en Dwaas. (Amsterdam, 1949.) Couperus, L.—De Stille Kracht. ( Any edition.) Last, J.—Huis zonder Vensters. (in: Acht Werken, Amsterdam.) de Wit, A.—Orpheus in de Dessa. ( Any edition.) Helman, A.—De Stille Plantage. ( Any edition.) Wolff-Bekker, E., and Deken, A.—Sara Burgerhart. ( Wereldbibliotheek, Amster dam.) Busken, Huet, C.—Het Land van Rembrandt. ( Elsevier, Haarlem.) Bontekoe—Journael. ( Dietse Letteren, Meulenhoff, Amsterdam.) van Schendel, A.—De Waterman. (Any edition.) Nieuwenhuys, R.—Bij het scheiden van de markt. ( Amsterdam, 1960. ) Koolhaas, A.Er zit geen spek in de val. ( Amsterdam, 1958. ) Mahieu, Vincent—Tjies. ( Den Haag, 19G0. ) Vestdijk, S. De Koperen Tuin. (Den Haag, 1950.) Vestdijk, S.—St. Sebastiaan. ( Den Haag, 1948.) Holsbergen, J. W.—De Handschoenen van het Verraad. ( Amsterdam, 1958,) Daum, P. A.—Goena-Coena. ( Any edition.) Daum, P. A.Indische Mensen in Holland. ( Any edition.) (c) Recommended for reference (available in the general or departmental libraries) : Brandt Corstius, J. C.Geschiedenis van de Nederlandse Letterkunde. (Spec- trum, Zeist, 1959.) Haantjes, J., and Smit, W. A. P.—Panorama der Nederlandse Letteren. (Amster- dam, 1948.) Knuvelder, G.—Beknopt handboek tot de Geschiedenis der Nederlandse Letter- kunde. ('s-Hertogenbosch, 1962.) Knuvelder, G.—Handboek tot de Geschiedenis der Nederlandse Letterkunde. 4 vols. ('s-Hertogenbosch.) Knuvelder, G.Handboek tot de moderne Nederlandse Letterkunde. (2nd ed., 's-Hertogenbosch, 1964. ) Greshoff, J.—Harvest of the Lowlands. ( New York, 1945.) Barnouw, A. J.—Coming After. (New Brunswick, 1948.) Lyrical Holland. (Amsterdam-Groningen, 1954.) EXAMINATION Two 3-hour papers (the first on translation and the essay, the second on Dutch literature); oral test of fifteen minutes. 104 GERMANIC STUDIES, 27-3. DUTCH PART III Professor J. Smit A course of three lectures per week, with one tutorial class, throughout the year SYLLABUS (i) Advanced language study. (ii) Conversation and discussion of prescribed texts. ( iii) Selected texts of medieval, seventeenth century and modern Dutch authors. with historical background. BOOKS (a) Prescribed textbooks: *de Vooys, C. C. N.—Historische Schets van de Ned rlandse Letterkunde. (ed Wolters, Groningen. ) е (b) Prescribed texts: *De Raaf en Griss—Een Nieuwe Bundel, Vol. V. (ed. Brusse, Rotterdam.) *Beatrijs. (Wolters, Groningen.) *Nieuwenhuys, R.—Ziet, de Dag komt aan. ( Amsterdam, 1959. ) (c) Students are required to read four of the following books: Coenen, F.—Onpersoonlijke Herinneringen. ( Utrecht, z. J.) Emants, 1.—Een Nagelaten Bekentenis. ( Amsterdam, 1951.) van Moerkerken, P. H. De Verwildering. ( van Kampen, Amsterdam.) Bordewijk, F.—Bint. (Bilthoven, 1937. ) Bordewijk, F.—Karakter. ( Rotterdam, 1946.) de Vries, T.—De Postkoets. ( Amsterdam, 1943. ) Gijsen, M. Joachim van Babylon. ('s-Gravenhage, 1951.) Walschap, G.—Celibaat. ( Brussel, 1942. ) Vestdijk, S.—Terug tot Ina Damman. ( Rotterdam, 1934.) Marsman, H.—De Dood van Angèle Degroux. ( Querido, Amsterdam.) Slauerhoff, J.—Het Leven op Aarde. ( Rotterdam, 1950.) Ter Braak, M.—De Pantserkrant. (Any edition.) Aafjes, B.-Verzamelde Gedichten. (Amsterdam, 1948.) Aafjes, B.Een Voetreis naar Rome. (Amsterdam, 1947.) Heiman, A.—De Rancho der X Mysteries. (Any edition. ) Vestdijk, S.—Lier en Lancet. ( Rotterdam, 1939. ) Greshoff, J.—Nieuwe Nederlandse Dichtkunst, Vols. I and II. (Pretoria, 1942.) Elsschot, Willem—Lijmen. ( Any edition. ) . Vestdijk, S.—Het Vijfde Zegel. (den Haag, z. j.) van het Reve, G. K.—De Avonden. ( Any edition. ) Hermans, W. F.—De Tranen der Acacias. ( Any edition. ) Hermans, W. F. De donkere Kamer van Damocles. ( Any edition.) Hermans, W. F.-Nooit meer slapen. ( Any edition. ) dit Perron, E.—Het Land van Herkomst. (Any edition.) Couperus, L.—Boeken der Kleine Zielen. ( Аву edition.) ( d) Recommended for reference: See tinder Dutch part II(c) and: Barnouw, A. J.Vondel. ( New York, 1927.) Weevers, T. Poetry of the Netherlands in its European Context, 1170-1930. ( London, The Athlone Press, 1960. ) Baur, F. (ed. )—Geschiedenis van de Letterkunde der Nederlanden. ('s-Her- togenbosch, 1939.) EХAAINATION Three 3-hour papers (the first on translation, the second being the essay and the third on Dutch literature) oral test of fifteen minutes. 30-1. SWEDISH PART I Miss M. Berggren A course of three lectures per week and one tutorial class. SYLLABUS (i) Pronunciation, grammar and idiom. (ii) Translation into English and into Swedish. Composition. 105 FACULTY OF ARTS HANDBOOK ( iii) Conversation and discussion of prescribed texts. (iv) Outline of . the cultural history of Sweden with special emphasis on the nineteenth and twentieth centuries. The course is planned to attain a standard comparable with that of other First Year language subjects, but in its early stages it is adapted to the needs of those previously unacquainted with the language. Such students must get in touch with the Head of the Department during the preceding long vacation, and are strongly advised to attend the four weeks summer course in February, 1968. Students are required to submit written work during the year. This is taken into account in assessing the final examination results. Any work submitted after the due date will not be accepted unless it is accompanied by a medical -certificate or other appropriate documentary evidence giving reasons for late submission. BOOKS ( a ) Prescribed textbooks: *Hildeman, N. G., and Beite, A. 1.—Learn Swedish. (Almquist och Wiksell, Stockholm, 1961.) *Hildeman, N. G., Hildeman, P. A., Olsson, I.—Practise Swedish. (Almquist och Wiksell, Stockholm, 1963. ) *Facts about Sweden. ( The Swedish Institute, 1967.) *Harlock, W. E.—Svensk-Engelsk Ordbok. ( Stockholm, 1959.) *Beite, A-1.—Basic Swedish Grammar. (Almquist och Wiksell, 1963.) (b) Students are required to read the following books: Higelin, Siv (Ed.)—Från Fakiren till Jolo (with sep. vocabulary). (Folkuniversi- tetet, Stockholm, 1963.) Lagerkvist, P Gdst hos verkligheten. (Aldus & Delfin.) Strindberg, A.—Fröken Julie. (Aldus, Stockholm, 1961.) (c) Recommended for reference: Andersson, I.—A History of Sweden. (Weidenfeld and Nicolson, 1956.) Gustafson, A.—A History of Swedish Literature. EXAMINATION Two 3-hour papers (the first on prescribed authors, the second on translation,. composition and grammar); oral test of fifteen minutes.

30-2. SWEDISH PART II Miss M. Berggren A course of three lectures per week and one tutorial class, throughout the year. SYLLABUS (i) Grammar and idiom. (ii) Translation of advanced texts into English and Swedish. Composition. ( iii) Conversation and discussion of prescribed texts. (iv) Nineteenth Century Literature. Books (a) Prescribed textbooks: As for Swedish Part I and- *Björkhagen I.—Моdern Swedish Grammar. (Svenska Bokförlaget, 1962.) *Кärre-Lindkuist-Nöjd-Redira—Engelsk-Svensk Ord boIc. (Norstedt, Stockholm,. 1949.) *Vdr litteratur och dess historia, del III. (Svenska Bokförlaget, 1956.) (b) Students are required to read the following books: *Bergman, Hj.—Flickan i frack. (Svenska Bokförlaget, Stockholm, 1961.) *Lagerlöf, S.—En herrgЛrdssägen. (Svenska Bokförlaget, Stockholm, 1958.) *Strindberg, A. Gustav Vasa. (Cleerups, Lund, 1963.) *Tideström, G.—Lyrik frdn vdr egen tid. (Gleerups, Lund, 1961.) 106 GERMANIC sTuDIEs (c) Recommended for reference: Ny Illustrerad Svensk Litteraturhistoria, Tigerstedt, E.N. ed. (Stockholm, 1955-58.) Schück, H. and Warburg, K.—Iliu$frerad Svensk Litteraturhistoria. (Stock- holm, 1926-52.) EXAMINATION Two 3-hour papers; oral test of fifteen minutes.

30-3. SWEDISH PART III Miss M. Berggren A course of three lectures per week and one tutorial class throughout the year. SYLLABUS (i) Advanced language study. ( ) Conversation and discussion of prescribed texts. Composition. ( iii)й Eighteenth Century Literature. BOOKS Prescribed textbooks: *Var litteratur och dess historia, del II. ( Svenska Bokförlaget, 1956. ) *Вellmaп, C. ( 1740-1795 )—Fredmans Epistlar. ( Prisma, 1982. ) *Strindberg, A. (1849-1912 )—Spöksonaten. ( Gleerups, 1963. ) *Lidman, S. ( 1923.)—HjortronlaØ. ( Aldus, 1961.) Students are required to study five of the following books. Those marked with an asterisk are compulsory. Bergman, H.—Clownen Jac. ( Delfin, 1963.) Dagerman, S.—Bröllopsbesvdr. ( Stockholm, 1954. ) *Freding, G.-Ur Gustaf Friidings diktning, utg. Carlholm (Svenska Bokförlaget, 1959.) I3ellström, G.-Snörmakare Lekholm far en idé. ( Bonniers, 1962.) Johnson, E.—Hans nades tid. ( Bonniers, 1963.) Lagerkvist, P.—Dvdrgen. (Delfin, 1963.) - Lagerlöf, S.-Gösta Berlings saga. ( Bonniers, 1961.) Lo-Johansson, I.—Mdna dr död. (Delfin, 1961.) - Martinson, H.—Nässlorna Norma. (Bonniers, 1935.) Moberg, V.—BrudarØ krilla. (Bonniers, 1963.) Lidman, S. Tjärdale . (Stockholm, 1964.) Lidman, S.-Regnspiren.п (Delfin, 1963.) Rydberg, V.—SingDa11a. (Svenska Bokförlaget, 1959.) Siwertz, 5.—Mälarpirater. (Bonniers, 1952.) *Strindberg, A. Svenska öden och äventvr, I. (Aldus, 1961.) *Strandberg, A: Tkinstekvinnans son. I. (Svenska Bokförlaget, 1960.) Soderberg, H.—Martin Bircks ungdom. (Svenska Bokförlaget, 1960.) EXAMINATION Two 3-hour papers; oral test of thirty minutes.

SWEDISH FOR HONOURS STUDENTS OF GERMANIC STUDIES See subject 30-4., page 111

HONOURS DEGREE. G. SCHOOL OF GERMANIC STUDIES (For possible combinations with this school see p. 251) 1. The course for the degree with Honours in the School of Germanic Studies comprises the following subjects: (a) German Honours parts I, II, III, IV. (b) Dutch Honours parts I, II, III, IV. 107 FACULTY OF ARTs HANDBOOK (c) German Renaissance and Baroque Texts. Advanced Middle Dutch. Germanic Philology. Swedish for Honours students (Comparative Scandinavian Literature). (d) Two additional subjects selected from the subjects for the Ordinary Degree or the Degree with Honours. 2. These subjects must be selected in accordance with one of the following patterns: Course A Course В Course C First Year L German I (Hon.) 1. Dutch I (Hon.) 1. German I (Hon.) 2. Dutch I (Hon.) 2. German I (Hon.) 2. Dutch I (Hon.) 3. First additional 3. First additional 3. First additional subject. subject. subject. Second Year 1. German II (Hon.') 1. Dutch II (Hon.) 1. German II (Hon.) 2. Dutch II (Hon.) 2. German II (Hon.) 2. Dutch II (Hon.) 3. Second additional 3. Second additional 3. Second additional subject. subject. subject. Third Year ]. German III (Hon.) 1. Dutch III (Hon.) 1. German III (Hon. ) (including special (including special omitting special literary study) literary study) literary study) 2. German Renaissance 2. Advanced Middle 2. Dutch III (Hon.) and Baroque Texts Dutch ( omitting special OR OR literary study) Swedish for Honours Germanic 3. German Renaissance Students Philology and Baroque Texts OR Advanced Middle Dutch OR Germanic Philology OR Swedish for Honours students. Fourth Year 1. German IV (Hon.) 1. Dutch IV (Hon.) 1. German IV (H . ) оп 2. Germanic Philology 2. Advanced Middle 2. Dutch IV (Hon.) Dutch (omitting either OR the Dutch or Germanic Philology German special subject). Note: Germanic Philology will be available in alternate years. In the year when it is not offered, German Renaissance and Baroque Texts, Advanced Middle Dutch and Swedish for Honours students will be available. Students in all courses may therefore take these subjects in either their Third or Fourth Year according to what is being. offered in the particular year. 3. Viva Voce examinations will be held at the end of each year. Students taking Course A will be examined at the annual examination at the end of the Second Year in Dutch II only, those taking Course B in German II only, and students in Course C will have no formal examination in either German II or Dutch II. Oral examinations, class tests and essays on the various aspects of Part II Honours Course will however be given. 108 GERMANIC STUDIES The final examination will be held in two parts, part I at the end of the Third Year and part II at the end of the Fourth Year, and will comprise the following papers: Final Honours part I at the end of Third Year— Course A Course B (1) Stylistic Analysis and Essay. (1) Unseen Dutch translation. (2) History of German Literature. (2) Dutch essay. (3) Novel and Background to Modern (3) Modern Dutch Literature. Germany. (4) Advanced Middle Dutch (4) A special literary study. Language and Literature. Examination by essay or viva (5) A special literary study. voce. Examination by essay and (5) }German Renaissance and viva voce. Baroque Texts.

}Swedish for Honours students. Course C (1) Stýlistic Analysis and Essay. (2) History of German Literature. ( 3 ) Novel and Background to Modern Germany. (4) Unseen Dutch Translation. (5) Dutch Essay. (6) History of Dutch Literature. (7) }German Renaissance and Baroque Texts. OR }Advanced Middle Dutch Language and Literature. OR }Swedish for Honours students. OR fGermanic Philology. Final Honours part II at the end of Fourth Year— Course A Course B (1) Special German subject, to be ( 1 ) Special Dutch subject, to be defined each year; examination defined each year; examination by essay and viva voce. by essay and viva voce. (2) German texts for critical study. (2) Dutch texts for critical study. ( 3 ) ` f Germanic Philology. ( 3 ) fGermanic Philology. Course C ( 1 ) German texts for critcial study. (2) Dutch texts for critical study. (3 ) Special German or Dutch subject, as under courses A and B. A thesis in German or Dutch of approximately 10,000 words based on independent work during the preceding eight months will be submitted before the end of the third term on a subject approved by the heads of the German and Dutch sections of the School of Germanic Studies. f These courses will be available in alternate years. Comments: Admission to the higher years of the Honours Course is conditional upon satisfactory performance in the First Year and students must be approved by the Faculty 109 FACULTY OF ARTS ØBOOS of Arts as candidates for the degree with Honours before entering the Second Year of the Honours School. The head of the Department of Germanic Studies will normally recommend such approval for candidates who have gained at least second class honours in German I and Dutch I. Other candidates who wish to continue in the Honours School should interview the head of the Department of Germanic Studies, who will be guided in his recommendations by the merits of the case. A student who has completed the First Year of the course for the ordinary degree and has passed in German I_ and Dutch I, may, with the permission of the Faculty, enter the Honours School. Such a student must make special application to the Faculty through the Sub-Dean, and if permission is granted, the Faculty will prescribe what further work must be completed before the student is allowed to proceed to the final examination.

26-1. GERMAN PART I (Ions) A course of five lectures per week, with tutorial classes, throughout the year. SYLLABUS As for the ordinary degree, together with a course on some aspects of the German classical drama from Lessing to Kleist. BOOKS As for the ordinary degree, together with the following prescribed textbooks: *Lessing, G. E.—Nathan der Weise. (1779.) (ed. Peter Demetz, "Nathan der Weise": Deutung und Dokumentation, Ullsteinbuch No. 5025, Verlag Ull- stein, Frankfurt, 1966, contains a full text of play; or any other edition.) Lessing, G. E. Die Erziehung des Menschengeschlechts. (1780.) ( Issued by the department of Germanic Studies. ) *Goethe—Iphigenie auf Tauris. (1787.) (ed., Jenkins, Nelson, 1958.) Stahl, E. L.—Goethe: Iphigenie auf Tauris. (Studies in German Literature. No. 7, Arnold, London, 1961.) Euripides—Alcestis, Iphigenia in Tauris, etc. (Penguin), or Iphigenie bei den Teurem. (Reclam, No. 737.) *Schiller—Wilhelm Tell. (1804.) (ed., Garland, Hanap, 1950, or any other edition. ) *Kleist, H. von—Prinz Friedrich von Homburg. (1810.) (ed. Samuel, Hanap, 1962.) Schiller—Der Kampf mit dem Drachen. Ballade. (Issued by the department of Germanic Studies. ) EXAMINATION Three 3-hour papers (the first and second as for the ordinary degree, the third on the additional authors prescribed for honours); oral test of twenty minutes.

26-2. GERMAN PART II ( Ions ) A course of six lectures per week, with one tutorial class, throughout the year. SYLLАВUs As for the ordinary degree, Courses i-iii, together with Course iv and the study of Middle High German texts. BOOKS Asher, J. . A Short Descriptive Grammar of Middle High German. (O.U.P., 1967.)А f *Lexer, M.Mittelhochdeutsches Taschenwörterbuch. (S. Hirzel, Stuttgart, latest ed.) *Wehrli, M. Minnesang vom Kůrenberger bis Wolfram. (Francke Verlag, Bern.) *Walther von der Vogelweide—Gedichte. (ed., P. Wapnewski, Fischer Bücherei No. 732. ) *Gottfried von Strassburg—Tristan und 'so d. (ed., F. Ranke, Weidmann, Berlin- Frankfurt, latest ed.) Weber, G.—Gottfried von Strassburg. (Sammlung Metzler, Stutt art, 1962.) Hatto, A. T.—Gottfried von Strassburg: Tristan. (Penguin, 1960. *Die Osterspiele von Innsbruck und Muri. (Reclam. Nos. 8660/61.) 110 GERMANIC вт[тлтЕв EXAMINATION There will be no formal examination at the end of the Second Year. Class tests will be given on the above courses. Oral test of thirty minutes. Students taking course B will have to sit for the annual examination in German part II (pass). f These books will be used in later years. 26-3. GERMAN PART III (Ions) (SCHOOL OF GERMANIC STUDIES ) A course of seven lectures per week together with one tutorial class throughout the year. SYLLABUS As for the ordinary degree, together with a study of Renaissance and Baroque Texts and Special literary study. For prescribed texts and reference books see German part III pass. Special Literary Study. (Subject for 1968: Die Deutsche Novelle and Kurz- geschichte.) BOOKS Bennet, E. K.—A History of the German Novelle. (revised and continued by H. M. Waidson, C.U.P., 1981.) *Wiese, B. von—Novelle. (Sammlung Metzler, Realienbiicher: Abt. E. Poetik 127, Stuttgart, 1963.) A list of the Novellen to be read will be provided by the lecturer in the subject. German Renaissance and Baroque Texts (see below, Course 138). EXAMINATION Final Examination, Part I. Four 3-hour papers ( the first three as for the ordina degree, the fourth on Renaissance and Baroque Texts; the special literary study will be examined by essays during the year; oral test of 30 minutes. Candidates are required to prepare under the lecturer's guidance for the thesis which forms part of the final examination of the school. 26-5. GERMAN RENAISSANCE AND BAROQUE TEXTS$ (SCHOOL OF GERMANIC STUDIES ) One seminar per week throughout the year with such assistance as is needed. SYLLABUS Selected texts from 1400 to 1700. BOOKS Тер1, J. von—Der Ackermann aus Böhmen. (ca 1401.) ( Reclam. 7666.) Luther, M.—An den christlichen Adel deutscher Nation. Von der Freiheit eines Christenmenschen. Sendbrief vorn Dolmetschen. (1520/1530.) (Reclam. 1578/78а.) . Historia von D. Johann Fausten. (1587.) (Reclam 1515/16.) Bidermann, J.—Cenodoxus. Deutsche Ubersetzung von J. Meichel. (1635.) ( Reclam. 8958/9.) Gryphius, A.—Catharina von Georgian. (1657.) (ed., W. Flemming, Tubingen, Max Niemeyer, 1955.) Lohenstein, D. C. von—Cleopatra. (1661.) (Reclam. 8950/51.) Grimmelshausen, H. J. C. von—Der abenteuerliche Simplicisslmus teutsch. (1669.) (Reclam. 761-66/66a-f. ) Deutsche Barock Lyrik. (ed., H. Cysarz, Reclam. 7804/05.) 30-4. SWEDISH FOR HONOURS STUDENTS OF GERMANIC STUDIES} (COMPARATIVE SCANDINAVIAN LITERATURE) One seminar of two hours per week throughout the year. SYLLABUS As for Swedish part I (with the exception of Higelin: Fran Fakiren till Jola.), see.. 178-1. and in addition a comparative study of Scandinavian Literatures at speci- Ž Offered iň 1969. 111 FACULTY OF ARTS HANDBOOK fic periods with special reference to other Germanic literatures. For Honours students in the Department of Germanic Studies only. BOOKS Prescribed textbooks in addition to Swedish Part I: *Ibsen, H.—A Doll's House or The Lady from the Sea. (English translation, Penguin, 1965.) Jacobsen, J. P.—Marie Grubbe. (English translation, American-Scandinavian Foundation, New York, 1962.) or Anderson-Nexф, 1.—Ditte. (English translation, Heinemann, 1922.) or Hallmundurson, H. (ed. )—An Anthology of Scandinavian Literature. (Collier Books, 1965.) EXAMINATION Two 3-hour papers (the first on prescribed authors, the second on translation, composition and grammar); oral test of fifteen minutes.

26-4. GERMAN PART IV (SCHOOL OF GERMANIC STUDIES) Professor R. H. Samuel, Dr. C. Kooznetzolf A course of three lectures per week throughout the year with such tutorial assistance as needed. SYLLABUS (i) Texts for critical study: Friedrich Nietzsche. BOOKS *Nietzsche, F.—Werke in 3 Bä d n. (ed., K. Schléchta, Hanser Verlag, Мiffnchen, 1961. ) Copies available fromг е the Department. *Kaufmann, W. Nietzsche. Philosopher, Psychologist, Antichrist. ( Meridian Books, 1.25, New York, 1956.) *Fink, E.-Nietzsches Philosophie. ( Urban-Bücher. Kohlhammer, Stuttgart' 1960.) *Frenzel, I.—Friedrich Nietzsche in Selbstzeugnissen und Bilddokumenten. ( Rowohlt Monographien 115, Hamburg, 1966.) *Würzbach, F.—Nietzsche. Sein Leben in Selbstzeugnissen, Briefen und Berichten. ( Goldmann Taschenbuch 1753-54, München. ) ( ii) Special subject. A. For students wishing to specialize in mediaeval German language and literature. (a) loris von Craún. (ed., Ulrich Pretzel, Max Niemayer, Tübingen, 1962. ) (b) Das Nibelungenlied. BOOKS *Mettke, H.—Mittelhochdeutsche Grammatik. ( Niemeyer, Halle, 1964.) *Lexer, M.-Mittelhochdeutsches Taschenwörterbuch. ( Hirzel, Stuttgart, 1959 or later ed.) *Des Minnesangs Friihling.. ( Neubearbeitet von C. von Kraus, 33rd ed., Hirzel, Stuttgart, 1962. ) *Das Nibelungenlied. (ed., H. de Boor, Brockhaus, Wiesbaden, 1957 or later ed.) B. For students wishing to specialize in modern German literature: Frank Wedekind and Bertold Brecht. BOOKS Wedekind, F.—Prosa, Dramen, Verse. 2 Bände. (Langen-Müller, München, 1964.) Brecht, B. Friihe Stücke. (Baal, Trommeln in der Nacht.) (Deutscher Taschen- buch Verlag.) Die drei Johanna—Stücke. (Fischer Biicherei. ) Die Dreigroschenoper. (Rohwolt-Verlag.) Aufstieg und Fall der Stadt Mahagonny. (Edition Suhrkamp. ) Mutter Courage and ihre Kinder. (Edition Suhrkamp. ) 112 GERMANIC sтuniвs Herr Puntila und sein Knecht Matti. (Edition Suhrkamp. ) Leben des Galilei. (Edition Suhrkamp, ) Der kaukasische Kreidekreis. (Edition Suhrkamp. ) Der gute Mensch von Sezuan.- (Edition Suhrkamp. ) (iii) Germanic Philology. (See course No. 142.) EXAMINATION Two 3-hour papers (the first on above (i), the second on Germanic Philology); the special subject will be examined by essays during the year; thesis in German; oral test of thirty minutes. 27-1. DUTCH PART I (Ions) Dr. R. P. Meijer A course of five lectures per week, with tutorial assistance throughout the year. SYLLABUS As for the ordinary degree, together with a study of modern Dutch prose and poetry. BOOKS As for the ordinary degree, together with the following prescribed books: *van Straten, Hans-Toen bliezen de Poortwachters. (Amsterdam, 1959.) van het Reve, G. K.—De laatste Jaren van mijn Grootvader. (Verzameld Werk, A'dam, 1956.) Friedericy, H. J.-De Raadsman. (Amsterdam, 1959.) Vestdijk, S.—Else Böhler, Duits dienstmeisje. (Any edition.) EXAMINATION Three 3-hour papers (the first and second as for the ordinary degree, the third on additional translation); oral test of fifteen minutes.

27-2. DUTCH PART II (lions) A course of five lectures per week, with tutorial assistance throughout the year. SYLLABUS As for the ordinary degree, together with a study of the nineteenth century author Ed. Douwes Dekker (Multatuli) and the novelist Louis Couperus. BOOKS As for the ordinary degree, together with the following prescribed texts: *Douwes, Dekker, E. ( Multatuli)—Max Havelaar. ( Any edition.) Knavelder, G. Handboek tot de Geschiedenis der Nederlandse Letterkunde, vol. III (2nd ed.), pp. 365-386; vol. IV (2nd ed.,) pp. 110-125. Couperus, L.—Van Oude lfensсhen de Dingen die voorbijgaan. (Any edition.) Couperus, L.-Eline Vere. (Any edition.) EXAMINATION There will be no formal examination at the end of the Second Year. Class tests will be given in unseen translation and literature. Oral test of thirty minutes. Students taking course A will have to sit for the annual examination in Dutch part II (pass).

27-3. DUTCH PART III (Ions) ( SCHOOL OF GERMANIC STUDIES ) A course of six or seven lectures per week, with tutorial assistance throughout the year. SYLLABUS (i) Study of selected texts of medieval and seventeenth century Dutch authors. (ii) Studу of Dutch poetry from 1880 to the present. ( ш ) Advanced language study. (iv) Special literary study. Subject for 1968: The modern novel. (v) Advanced Middle Dutch. (vi) A course of lectures on the history of the Dutch language. 113 FACULTY OF ARTS HANDBOOK Books Prescribed textbooks: de Vooys, C. G. N.—Geschiedenis van de N d la ds Taal, 5th ed. (Wolters, Groningen, 1952. ) е вг в е van Loey, A. C. Н.—Schönfelds Historische Grammatica van het Nederlands. 5th ed. (Zutfen, 1951.) Lecoutere-Grootaers, C. P. F.-Inleiding tot de Taalkunde en tot de Geschiedenis van het Nederlands. 6th ed. (Groningen en Leuven, 1959.) For prescribed texts and reference books (i ), (ii) and ( iii ), see Dutch part III pass. Additional material and a bibliography will be provided by the lecturer in the subject. Candidates are required to prepare under the lecturer's guidance for their major essay which forms part of the final examination of the school. 27-5. ADVANCED MIDDLE DUTCH ( SCHOOL OF GERMANIC STUDIES ) A course of one lecture per week throughout the year with such assistance as is needed. SYLLABUS Study of the Middle Dutch epic Van den Vos Reinaerde. Prescribed texts: *Van den Vos Rei a rde. (Wolters, Groningen.) Bouman, A. C.-пMiddelnederlandseе Bloemlezing met Grammatika. ( Thieme, Zutphen. ) Hellinga, W. Gs.—Van den Vos Reinaerde. (Tjeenk Willink, Zwolle.) van Loey, A. C. H.Middelnederlandse Spraakkunst, 2 vols. ( Groningen, Antwerpen, 1955.) Further material and bibliography will be provided by the lecturer in the subject. 27-4. DUTCH PART IV ( SCHOOL OF GERMANIC STUDIES ) A course of three lectures per week. SYLLABUS (i) Special subject, P. C. Hooft ( 1581-1647 ). (ii) A study of Dutch poetry from 1920 to 1950. (iii) Germanic Philology.. BOOKS Prescribed textbooks: Zaalberg, C. A.—Uit ft's Lyriek. ( Zwolle, 1965.) van Tricht, H. W.—P. нооC. Hooft. (Arnhem, 1951.) Hooft, P. C. (ed. Stoett, F. A. )—Gedichten. (Amsterdam, 1899.) Marsman, H.Verzameld Werk. 4 vols. (Amsterdam, 1947.) Slauerhoff, J.-Gedichten, 2 vols. ( den Haag, 1947.) Achterberg, G.—Verzamelde Gedichten. ( Amsterdam, 1963.) Roland Holst, A.—Verzamelde Gedichten. (Bussum= s-Gravenhage, 1948.) van den Bergh, H.—Verzamelde Gedichten. ( den Haag, 1954.) Nijhoff, 1.—Verzameld Werk, 3 vols. (Dagmen, den Haag, 1954-1981.) EXAMINATION Two 3-hour papers (the fast on Dutch Poetry from 1920 to 1950, the s cс пd on Germanic Philology); a thesis in Dutch of not less than 5,000 words; the special subject will be tested by essay and by viva voce; oral test of thirty minutes. 26-6. GERMANIC PHILOLOGY A course of one or two lectures per week throughout the year. SYLLABUS • Elementary Gothic. An outline of the development of the principal West Ger manic languages. 114 GEЯMANIC STUDIES Books Prescribed textbook: 'Wright, j.—Grammar of the Gothic Language. (O.U.P.) A bibliography will be provided by the lecturer. EXAMINATION. One 3-hour paper.

29-4. MASTER OF ARTS C. SCHOOL OF GERMANIC STUDIES A preliminary examination in either Icelandic or Gothic in addition to German Renaissance and Baroque Texts or Swedish for Honours Students. Students of Dutch may choose instead of Icelandic an intensive study of 16th century Dutch language, literature and civilization. The preliminary examination may be passed before or immediately after the the submission of the thesis. For details the head of the department should be consulted. The thesis will be prepared, under supervision, on an approved subject, and must be written in either German or Dutch. Candidates are expected to pass an oral test covering the general field of their research. Research students are required to attend the research seminar held by the department. An entry form for examination for higher degrees must be submitted to the Registrar. Three copies of each thesis (quarto, typewritten, double-spaced) should be submitted, one of which will be deposited in the departmental library, another in the University Library. Each copy should be provided with a summary in English up to 1500 words in length. 31. OLD NORSE (ICELANDIC) No tuition in Old Norse (Icelandic) will be given in the Germanic Studies Department in 1968. Students in the Germanic Studies Department who want to do Old Norse in 1968 are advised to consult the English Department where they can take part in courses 13-2 or 13-3.

115 DEPARTMENT OF HISTORY Professor of Нistотy: Professor R. M. CRAWFORD, B.A. (Syd.) , M.A. (Oxon and Melb. ) Ernest Scott Professor of History Professor J. R. POYNTER, M.А. ( Oxon ), Ph.D. Personal Chair in American History: Professor N. D. HARPER, M.А., B.Ed. ORDINARY DEGREE ( Details for the honours degree are set out at the end of this section.) Students are advised to watch the notice boards in the department of History. No external enrolments are accepted. Group 2 Majors: One of Ancient History, British History, European History A, followed by . Two of American History, Australian History, Far Eastern History, Later British History, European History B. For combinations of History with Political Science, see p. 40. Pre-requisites: A Grade I History subject (i.e. Ancient History, British History, European History A) is a prerequisite for all other History subjects. Students who take a History major or follow a History Honours course are expected to possess an historical atlas. The following atlas is prescribed: Fullard, H., and Treharne, R. F.—Muir's Historical Atlas, Medieval and Modern. (9th ed., Philip.) Note: In all the subjects in the School of History the written work prescribed is compulsory, and students may be excluded from examinations for failure to submit it by the due date.

33. ANCIENT HISTORY Mr. W. Culican, Mr. R. Ridley A course of two lectures and one tutorial per week throughout the year. Students will be required to submit written work during the course. . SYLLABUS A study of the development of Ancient Middle-Eastern and Mediterranean society in selected periods. Introductory lectures will be given on the contribution of archaeology to our knowledge of the ancient world and on the growth of scholarship in Ancient History. Special attention will be given to three main subjects: (i) Early Dynastic history and chronology in the Old World as elucidated by the earliest records of Mesopotamia and Egypt. (ii) Soćial and political history in Mycenaean times. (iii) Political and economic history of Greece to ЗOO B.С. BOOKS (a) Recommended for preliminary reading: Emery, W. B.—Archaic Egypt. (Pelican.) Forrest, W. G.-The Emergence of Greek Democracy. (World University. Library.) Kitto, H. D. F.-.---The Greeks. (Pelican.) Samuel, A. E.—The Mycenaeans in History. (Spectrum book.) 116 (b) Prescribed textbooks: *Herodotus and Thucydides in translation. Lives translation. *Hignett 'C - A Histoтy of the Athenian Constitution. (Oxford, 1962.) Macmillan, 1961.) *Вury, J. B. A History of Greece. (3rd ed. Jones, A. H. M.—Athenian Democracy. (Blackwell, 1964.) *Gardiner, A. H. Egypt of the Pharaohs. ( Oxford, 1961. ) *Gydd, C. J.—The Dynasty of Agade. (Cambridge Ancient History fasc.) *kirk, G. S. The Homeric Poems as History. (Cambridge Ancient History fasc.) Hawkes, J., Woolley, L. Prehistory and the Beginning of Civilisation. (Allen and Unwin, 1963.) EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper with questions under the following headings: The Bronze Age; Archaic Greece; 5th Century Greece; 4th Century Greece. Written work done during the year will be considered in determining the final result.

34. ВRIТISH HISTORY Dr. D. E. Kennedy, Ir. J. R. Parris A course of two lectures and one tutorial per week throughout the year. SYLLABUS The history of England within the period 1485-1700, with special regard to the period from 1603-1660. Students will be required to submit written work during the course. The Rosemary Merlo Prize for the best essay in the subject will be awarded annually. BOOKS (a) Recommended for preliminary reading. Bindoff, S. T.—Tudor England. ( Penguin. ) Trevelyan, G. M. England under the Stuarts (1603-1714). (Penguin.) (b) Prescribed textbooks: *Stephenson, C., , and Marcham, F.—Sources of English Constitutional History. (Harper.) Elton, G. R.—The Tudor Constitution. ( C.U.P. ) Kenyon, J. P.—The Stuart Constitution. ( C.U.P. ) Elton, G. R. England Under the Tudors. ( Methuen.) Tanner, 1. R.-English Constitutional Conflicts of the Seventeenth Century. ( C.U.P. ) Hill, Christopher—The Century of Revolution 1603-1714. (Nelson.) (c) Further reading will be suggested during the course. EXAMINATION. One 3-hour paper. Written work done during the year will be considered in determining the result. 35-1. EUROPEAN HISTORY A Mr. L. R. Gardiner, Dr. C. B. McCullagh, Mr. J. R. Parris A course of two lectures and one tutorial per week throughout the year. SYLLABUS A survey of European history between the fourth and the mid-seveńteenth centuries which will concentrate on: (a) the development of government in Germany and France; (b) the development of Church government and relations between Church and State; (c) movements of Europeans overseas. Students will be required to submit written work during the course. The Felix Raab Prize for the best essay in the subject will be awarded annually. 117 FACULTY oF ARTs HANDBOOK Books Prescribed textbooks: ( a) Recommended for preliminary reading: Moss, H. S. B.—The Birth of the Middle Ages. ( Oxford Paperback.) (b) General textbooks: *Davis, R. H. C.—A History of Medieval Europe from Constantine to St. Louis. ( Longmans. ) Wallace=Hadrill, J. M.—The Barbarian West, 400-1000. ( Hutchinso s Univer- sity Library.) . ů *Waley, D.—Later Medieval Europe from St. Louis to Luther. (Longmans.) *Elton, G. R.—Reformation Europe 1517-1559. (Collins Fontana Library.) Parry, J. H.—Europe and a Wider World 1415-1715. (Hutchinson.) (c) Special Studies: *Easton, S. C., and Wieruszowsld, H.—The Era of Charle utg e. (Anvil. Paper-- back, Van Nostrand.) п п *Strayer, J. S. Feudalism. (Anvil Paperback, Van Nostrand.) *Barraclough, G.—The Origins of Modern Germany. (Blackwell. ) Fawtier, R.—The Cарetian Kings of France. (Macmillan Papermac.) (d) Source readings: *Cantor, H. F. (ed. )-The Medieval World 300-1300. (Macmillan.) *Tierney, B.—The Crisis of Church and State 1050-1300. (Prentice-HaIl.) *Bainton, R. 1.—Age of Reformation. (Anvil Books, Van Nostrand.) EXAMINATION. One 3-hour paper. Written work done during the year will be considered in determining the result.

36. AMERICAN HISTORY Professor N. D. Harper, Dr. P. F. Bourke A course of two lectures and not more than one tutorial per week throughout the year. Prerequisite: a grade I History subject. SYLLABUS The social and economic history of the United States from the American Revolution to 1941. Little attention will be paid to state political history, and federal political problems will be considered in relation to major questions of social development or national history. Some emphasis will be placed on western expansion, the causes of the Civil War and American foreign policy. Students will be required to submit written work during the course. BOOKS (a) Prescribed for preliminary reading: Nye, R. B., and Morpurgo, J. E. History of the United States. (Pelican.) Blum, J. et al.—The American Experience. (Macmillan.) ( b ) Prescribed textbooks: *Morison, S. E., and Commager, H. S.—Growth of the American Republic. (O.U.P.) *Fine, S. and Brown, G. S.—The American Past. (Macmillan, N.Y.) Turner, F. J.—The Frontier in American History ( Holt.) . or Turner, F. J.—Frontier and Section. ( Spectrum Books. ) *Alexander, F. ,ving Frontiers. ( M.U.P.) ( О.Р. ) *Hacker, L. M.,М and Kendrick, B. B.—The United States since 1865. (Crofts.) Bailey, T. A.—Diplomatic History of the United States. (Crofts.) Hofstadter, R.—Great Issues in American History. 2 Vols. (Vintage.) Killington, R. A.—The Westward Movement in the United States. (Anvil: Van Nostrand.) A supplementary reading guide will be issued at the beginning of first term. EXAMINATION. One 3-hour paper. Written work done during the year will be considered in determining the result. 118 FIISTORY 37. AUSTRALIAN HISTORY Bate, Dr. L. L. Robson Prerequisite: a grade I History subject. A course of two lectures per week and one tutorial per fortnight throughout the year. Students will be required to submit an essay and two class papers during the course. SYLLABUS The history of Australia, 1788-1939. The course will consist of two main sea tions: a study—largely comparative—of the Australian colonies in the nineteenth century ( with emphasis on the period after 1850 ), and an examination of selected social and political problems in the Commonwealth period. BOOKS (a) Recommended for preliminary reading:" *Crawford, R. 1.—Australia. ( Hutchinson.) Clark, C. M. H.—А History of Australia, vol. I. (M.U.P.) *Clark, C. M. H.—А Short History of Australia. ( Mentor Books. ) Hancock, W. K.—Australia. ( Jacaranda Press. ) La Nauze, J. A.—"The Study of Australian Нiыtoгy, 1929-1959." (Reprint from Historiсal Studies, Australia and New Zealand, separately available in Bailliеu Library. ) Shaw, A. G. L.—The Story of Australia. (Faber. ) Kiddie, Margaret—Men of Yesterday, A Social History of the Western District of Victoria. ( M.U.P. ) Grattan, C. Hartley-The Southwest Pacific to 1900. (U. of Michigan P., 1963.) The South-West Pacific since 1900. (b ) Prescribed textbooks: *Clark, C. M. H. (ed. )—Select Documents in Australian History. 2 vols., 1788- 1850, 1851-1900. (Angus & Robertson.) *Clark, C. M. H. (ed. )—Sources of Australian History. (World's Classics.) Greenwood, G. (ed. )—Australiы—A Social and Political Нtstотy. (Angus & Robertson.) Collan, R.—Radical and Working Class Politics. A Study of Eastern Aиstгаlia 1850-1910. (M.U.P. ) Deakin, A.—The Federal Story. ( M.U.P., paperback, 1964. This edition is essential. ) (c) Reference books: Reading guides will be issued during the course. EXAMINATION. One 3-hour paper. Written work done during the year will be considered in determining the result. 38. FAR EASTERN HISTORY Mr. P. A. Rule Prerequisite: a grade I History subject. A course of two lectures and not more than one tutorial per week throughout the year. Students will be required to submit written work during the course. SYLLABUS A course in modern Chinese history with particular emphasis on the intrusion of the West and the Chinese response to it. The course will begin with a preliminary analysis of traditional Chinese culture and society. BOOKS (a) Suggested preliminary reading: Bodde, D.—China's Cultural Tradition. (Source Problems in World Civilizations Series.) (Rinehart.) Fairbank, J. K.—The United States and China. (Harvard U.P.) 119 FACULTY OF ARTS HANDBOOK (b) Prescribed textbooks: Fairbank, J. K., and Teng Ssu-yii—China ś Response to the West. (Harvard U.Р.) Reischauer, E., Fairbank, J. K., and Craig, A. 1.—East Asia: The Modern Transformation. (Allen & Unwin.) or Beckmann, G.—The Modernization of China and Japan. (Harper & Row.) (c) Recommended for reference: Detailed reading guides will be issued during the year. EXAMINATION. One or two 3-hour papers. A 2-hour paper may be set in second term. Written work done during the year will be considered in determining the result. 39. LATER BRITISH HISTORY Dr. D. F. Mackay Prerequisite: a grade I History subject. A course of two lectures and not more than one tutorial per week throughout the year. SYLLABUS The history of England from 1760 to 1940, with emphasis on social, political and economic changes in the period. The course will include a study of some aspects of the development of the empire and the relationship between Britain and the colonies. Students will be required to submit written work during the course. BOOKS (a ) Prescribed for preliminary reading: Kitson Clark, G. S. R.-An Expanding Society. ( M.U.P. ) Chambers, J. D.—The Workshop of the World. ( Home University Library.) (b) Prescribed textbooks: *Briggs, A.—The Age of Improvement 1783-1867. (Longmans.) *Ensor, Sir Robert—England 1870-1914. (O.U.P.) *Mowat, C. L. Britain Between the Wars 1918-1940. (Methuen.) Bennett, G. (ed. ) —The Concept of Empire: Burke to Attlee 1774-1947. (A. and C. Black. ) Keith, A. B. (ed. ) —Selected Speeches and Documents on British Colonial Policy 1763-1917. (O.U.P. ) (c) Reference books: Reading guides will be issued during the year. EXAMINATION. One 3-hour paper. Written work done during the year will be considered in determining the result.

35-2. EUROPEAN HISTORY B Professor J. R Poynter, Mrs. A. Patrick, Ir. R. Isaac Prerequisite: a grade I History subject. A course of two lectures and not more than one tutorial per week throughout , the year. SYLLABUS A study of political change in Europe between the outbreak of the French Revolution and the outbreak of the Second World War, with emphasis on the origins, course and results of revolutionary movements. Lectures during first term will be devoted to the French Revolutionary and Napoleonic period; those during second term to France, Germany and Russia to 1914, with emphasis on liberal, nationalist and socialist influences, and on the causes and results of the international crisis of 1914; and those during third term mainly to the origins and course of socialist revolution in Russia and nationalist revolution in Germany and Italy between 1917 . and 1939. 120 HISTORY Students will be required to submit written work during the year. This will consist of one short paper (1,200 words) , one essay ( 2,500 words ), one class test (to be written in class, about 1,000 words) and several brief class papers of not more than 800 words to be based on weekly tutorial reading. Class papers will be arranged in tutorials; the dates on which all other written work must be submitted will be announced early in first term. Books (a) Recommended for preliminary reading: Shaw, A. G. L.—Modern World IiLsiory. (Cheshire.) (b) Recommended for reference: Full reading guides will be distributed in lectures. The following works, to which extensive reference will be made during the year, are available in paperback editions, and students may find them useful to own. Those asterisked will be required for work in tutorials. *Cоbbаn, A.—A History of Modern France, 3 vols. (Pelican.) *Rudé, G.—Revolutionary Europe. (Fontana.) *Thomson, D.—Europe since Napoleon. (Pelican.) Lefebvre, G.—The Coming of the French Revolution. (Vintage Books.) Hampson, N.—A Social History of the French Revolution. (Routledge and kegan Paul.) Palmer, R. R.—Twelve who Ruled. (Atheneum.) Mayer, J. P. (ed. )—Recollections of Alexis de T ocqueville. (Meridian.) Robertson, P.--Revolutions of 1848: a Social History. (Harper Torchbooks. ) Rinkley, R. C.—Re lism and Nationalism, 1852-71. ( Harper Torchbooks. ) Taylor, A. J. P.—Bismarck,а the Man and the Statesman. (Cray Arrow.) Wilson, Е. To the Finland Station. (Fontana.) Trotsky, L.—The Russian Revolution. (Anchor Books. ) Seton-Watson, 1.—The Decline of Imperial Russia. (Praeger.) Chamberlin, W. 1.—The Russian Revolution, vol. I. (Universal Library.) Schapiro, L. S.—Тhe Communist Party of the Soviet Union. (Vintage Books.) Bullock, A. flitler: a Study in Tyranny. (Pelican.) Hibbert, C.— l ussolini. (Pelican.) Wiskemann, E.—Europeг of the Dictators, 1919-45. (Fontana.) EXAMINATIONS. Two 3-hour papers. Written work done during the year will be considered in determining the result.

209. SOCIAL HISTORY ( DEPARTMENT OF SOCIAL STUDIES ) This is a course conducted in the Department of Social Studies. Though it may not form part of a major in History (except in the combined course for Bachelor of Arts and Diploma of Social Studies) it may be taken otherwise as a Croup II subject. Credit will not be given for both Social History and Later British History. Inquiries about the course should be addressed to the Department of Social Studies, A course of two lectures each week and tutorial classes throughout the year. No external enrolments are accepted in this subject. SYLLABUS A. The social history of Britain in the late eighteenth, nineteenth and early twentieth centuries. This will include economic development; changes in population and class structure; the emergence of the party system of democratic government; the growth of state bureaucracy; the changing role of local government. Attention will be paid to public health; education (both schools and universities); the maintenance of order and systems of penal detention; the Poor Laws and their "break up" in the early twentieth century; political and social thought and ways in which it may, or may not, be related to social change (Burke, Paine, Bentham, Mill, Disraeli, the Fabians); the role of the Churches and religious beliefs, and the challenge of science to religion; theories and practice of town planning considered in relation to the economic and social environment. 121

FACULTY OF ARTS HANDBOOK B. A special comparative study of the development of social welfare work as sponsored by both governments and voluntary bodies in Britain, the U.S.A. and Australia, with particular reference to the emergence of the profession of social work and the factors responsible for its changing character from the late nineteenth century to the Second World War. BOOKS (a) Recommended for preliminary reading: Trevelyan, G. M.—English Social History. (Longmans. ) Plumb, J. H.—England in the Eighteenth Century. (Penguin.) Thomson, D.—England in the Nineteenth Century. (Penguin.) (b) Recommended for reference (section A only): Note: No textbooks are prescribed for this subject, but duplicated lists of references are issued to students from time to time, and at the beginning of each term the questions set for the weekly tutorials are issued with relevant reading for each. The following short list includes only major works of general reference. Clark, G. Kitson—The Making of Victorian England. (Methuen.) Watson—The Reign of George III, 1760-1815. (Oxford.) Woodward—The Age of Reform 1815-1870. (Oxford.) Ennor, E. C. K.—England 1870-1914. (Oxford.) Taylor, A. J. P.—En gland 1914-1945. (Oxford.) Briggs, A.—The Age of Improvement. (Longmans.) Marshall, D.—English People in the Eighteenth Century. (Longmans.) Young, G. M. (ed.)-Early Victorian England, 2 vols. (Oxford.) Halevy, E.—A History of the English in the Nineteenth Century, 6 vols. (Benn. ) Aspinall, A., and Smith, E. R.—English Historical Documents, Vol. XI, 1783- 1832. (Eyre & Spottiswoode. ) Young, G. M., and Handcock, W. D.—English Historical Documents, Vol. XII (i), 1833-1874. ( Еyrе & Spottiswoode. ) Cole, G. D. H., and Filson, A. W. (eds. ) —British Working Class Movements, Select Documents, 1789-1875. ( Маcmillan. ) EXAMINATION. One 3-hour paper and essays as required.

HONOURS DEGREE B. SCHOOL OF HISTORY ( For possible combinations with this school see p. 251) Note: Students who have entered the course before 1968 should see the Details in the Faculty of Arts Handbook, 1967, pp. 122-5; but they will be allowed to benefit from the freer choice of subjects permitted in the present Details. Both such students and students enrolling in 1968 should plan their degree courses in consultation with a member of the academic staff of the Department of History. An appointment for this purpose should be made at the departmental office. For con- venience the subjects of thе Honour School are set out as periods of history, but they are taught with primary attention to the major problems arising in each subject. Students will be advised about the different emphases and characters of the various subjects. They should in any case read the section on the School of History in the Guide to Arts which is available from the Faculty of Arts office. 1. The course for the degree with honours in the School of History comprises the following subjects: (a) Two of Ancient History i one of which must be British History taken at Honours level. European History A (b) Four of Honours History A (Ancient History) Honours History B (Medieval European History) Honours History C (Later Medieval and Early Modern European History) Honours History D (Modern European History) Honours History E (Modem British History) (A prerequisite 122 HISTORY for Honours F unless special permission given. ) Hõnours History F ( Australian History) ( Honours History E a prerequisite, unless special permission given. ) Honours History G (American History) I-Ionours History H (Far Eastern History) Honours History J ( Historiography ) (c) Special Study ( normally advanced work in field of history already studied at pass or honours level). (d) Theory and Method of History. (e) A Thesis of 8,000-9,000 words on an approved subject. (A short course of classes on Methods of Historical Research will be provided at tbe commencement of work on the thesis is order to assist students in choosing thesis subjects and in organizing their research. ) (f) An approved foreign language, normally to be Part I of a language course within the Faculty of Arts. Since the primary purpose of this language study is to prepare students to read historical works in a foreign language, university language courses other than Part I may be approved on application to the Professor in charge. (Note: Attendance at Summer Schools of language does got satisfy the language requirement, although such courses are highly recommended to students of History. In first planning their degree courses, students should seek advice from a member of staff about the language or languages most helpful for their particular interests in History.] (gg) Three additional subjects selected from the subjects of the degree of Bachelor of Arts, Ordinary degree. These subjects should normally comprise a major in subjects offered by a Department of the Faculty of Arts other than the Department of History. The following variations of this requirement are allowed: (i) In certain circumstances the Professor in Charge will allow the third pass subject to be an additional foreign language or an approved pass History subject; (ii) In place of the requirement of one language subject and three additional pass subjects, the Professor in Charge will allow two sub-majors in language, i.e. Parts I and II of two language courses. 2. Subject to the possible variations mentioned above, the subjects of the course must be taken in the following order, unless the Professor in Charge of the Depart- ment gives special permission for the order to be varied. First Year: (a) Two of British History, European History A and Ancient History. Students must enrol for Honours in one of the above subjects, and will be expected to achieve a Pass with Merit in the other subject chosen. (b) The first part of an approved major (pass). (c) Part I of a language other than English. Second Year: (a) Two of Honours History A, B, D and E. (E is a prerequisite for F unless special permission given.) (b) Second Pass subject. Third Year: (a) Two of Honours History C, D, F (E is a pre-requisite for F unless special permission given.), G, H and I. (b) Third pass subject. (c) Commencement of work on Final Honours Thesis, including attendance at short course of classes on Methods of Historical Research. Fourth Year: (a) Theory and Method of History. (b) Special Study. (c) Completion of Final Honours Thesis. Note: (a) Students will be advised about their selection of subjects, and speci- men combinations of subjects in the Honours School will be posted on the Notice Board. Some variation in the choice or order of subjects may be allowed by the 123 FACULTY OF ABTS HANDBOOK Professor in Charge, particularly when the temporary suspension of one or more of the subjects makes variation desirable. (b) There will be no examination in connection with the Third-Year seminar on Methods of Historical Research which is planned to assist students in the preparation of the thesis. But attendance at this seminar is required ( for one hour a week for approximately twelve weeks). 3. Examinations in Honours History subjects taken by students in the. Honours School of History will be conducted at the end of the students' First, Second and Fourth Years. Normally there will be no examination in such subjects at the end of the students' Third Year. Examinations in Pass subjects will be annual. The examination in History at the end of the Fourth Year will be a Final Examination. The components of the fourth-year examination will be papers in each of the Honours History subjects taken in Third. Year, in the Special Study and in Theory and Method of History, together with a. Thesis of approximately 8,000-9,000 words on an approved subject. The result of the two Honours History papers written in the Second Year will also be incorporated into the general result of the Final Examination. 4. Towards the end of the Third Year, students will be asked to choose one of the subjects available for Special Study in the following year. As these studies will be based on previous work in the subject, students should keep the choice of Special Study in mind when planning the course. 5. Students are expected to take the first steps in selecting their thesis subjects during the Second Term of the Third Year, and will be required to do enough preliminary enquiry to enable them to define the limits of their subjects at the beginning of the Third Term. Members of the academic staff of the Department of History will discuss possible subjects in the course on Methods of Historical Research, and will be available for consultation at times which will be announced. It is expected that students will have defined their subjects sufficiently by the end of Third Term to be able to do substantial work on the thesis during the long vacation. In cases in which the subject of the Final Honours Thesis is intimately connected with the Fourth-Year Special Study, certain variations in this pattern may be permitted, on the advice of the supervisor concerned, to allow for the spending of the Long. Vacation on general reading in the field of the Special Study and a later concentration of work on the Thesis. Failure to submit the Final Honours Thesis by the required date may disqualify a student from proceeding to the Final Examination. Comments: (a) Except with the permission of the Faculty, no candidate for honours in the School of History may sit for examination without completing, by the set dates, the written work prescribed and attending all tutorial classes in the subjects taken in the Honours School of History. (b) Students who have completed their First Year must be approved by the Faculty of Arts as candidates for the degree with honours before entering the Second Year of the Honours School. The Department of History will normally recommend such approval for candidates who have gained first or second class honours in one of Ancient History, European History A and British History. Students are also expected to achieve Pass with Merit in the second History subject of the FIRST year, Candidates who have failed to gain first or second class honours in the Honours History subject, but who wish to continue in the Honours School should consult with the Professor in Charge, who will be guided in his recommendation by the merits of the case. A student who has not attempted honours in these First-Year subjects, but who, at the end of his First Year wishes to enter the Honours School, must make special application to the Faculty through the Sub-Dean for permission to do so. If such permission is granted, the Faculty will prescribe what further work must be completed before the student is allowed to proceed. (c) Students who fail to gain first or second class honours in examinations in History at the end of the Second Year will usually be advised by the Department of History not to proceed to the Third Year of the Honours School, but rather to complete a course for the degree of Bachelor of Arts, Ordinary degree. (d) The Third and Fourth Years of the Honours School are regarded as forming a continuous whole. Candidates who, during their Third Year, have made satisfactory 124 HISTORY progress in the history subjects of this year, will be admitted to the Fourth Year of the School without formal examination in these subjects. Candidates whose progress in these subjects during the first two terms is not for this purpose considered satisfactory will be notified during the third term that they must sit for a special examination at the end of the third year. Unsatisfactory attendance at honours tutorial classes will for this purpose be regarded as evidence of unsatisfactory progress. (е ) Students who are unable to proceed to the Fourth Year but who satisfy the examiners at a special examination at the end of their Third Year may, with the approval of the Faculty, be admitted to the degree of Bachelor of Arts, Ordinary degree. Enquiries concerning such special examinations should normally be made before the end of the September of the year concerned. ( f) Students may be advised to attend additional lecture courses which are regarded as relevant to their work. ( g) The following course has been approved for students who intend to combine the School of History with a Law Course. The course will be that taken by the students of the School of History with the following exceptions: First Year: Introduction to Legal Method will be taken instead of the first part of the approved major (pass) of the History course. Second Year: Criminal Law and Principles of Contract will be taken instead of the second part of the approved major (pass) subject of the History course. Third Year: The Law of Torts and Principles of Property and Land will be taken instead of the third part of the approved major (pass) subject and one of the Honours History subjects. Fourth Year: Legal History will be taken in addition to the Fourth Year of the History course, and the Final Examination in History subjects will be taken at the end of this year. Fifth Year: As for Third Year Law. Sixth Year As for Fourth Year Law. 33. ANCIENT HISTORY (Ions) Mr. W. Culican, Mr. R. T. Ridley Students will be required to attend the lectures for Ancient History ( Pass ), a special seminar per week throughout the year and occasional additional lectures. Attendance at pass tutorials is optional. SYLLABUS As for the ordinary degree, together with a study of Athenian Imperialism in the fifth century B.C., with special reference to the relationship between democracy and imperialism in Athens. BOOKS (a) Prescribed for preliminary reading: Burn, A. R.—Pericles and Athens. (Teach Yourself +Iistory.) Bury, J. В.-History of Greece, chs. VIII-XI. (Macmillan.) Hammond, N. G. L.—A History of Greece, Books iii-iv. (Clarendon.) (b) Prescribed textbooks (in addition to textbooks for the Pass course) : *Thucydides-History. ( Everyman. ) *Plutarch—Lives. 3 vols. ( Everyman.) *Herodotus—Histories. ( Oxford World Classics.) *Gomme, W.-A Commentary on Thucydides, 3 vols. (Oxford, 1962.) A useful substitute for the Everyman translations of Herodotus and Thucydides is provided by Godolphin, F. R. В. (ed.)-- The Greek $istoriaпs, vols. I-II. (Ran- dom House, N.Y.) This contains translated texts other than the two historians, which are of value for the course in Ancient History, both pass and honours. Further reading will be indicated in the lectures. EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper in addition to the paper for the ordinary degree. Written work done during the year will be considered in determining the result. 125 FACULTY OF лВТS HANDBIOt 34. BRITISH HISTORY (Ions) Dr. D. E. Kennedy Students will be required to attend the lectures for British History ( Pass ), one Honours tutorial and one additional lecture per week. . SYLLABUS As for British History in the ordinary degree, together with a special study of Puritanism. BOOKS (a) Recommended for preliminary reading: Haller, W.—The Rise of Puritanism. (Harper Torchbooks. ) Simpson, A. Puritanism in Old and New England. (Phoenix Books.) (b) Prescribed textbooks: *Miller, P. and Johnson, T. H. (eds.)—The Puritans. 2 vols. (Harper Torchbeuks. ) *Woodhouse, A. S. P. Puritanism and Liberty. (Dent.) Haller, W.—Liberty and Reformation in the Puritan Revolution. (Columbia Paperbacks.) Hill, C.—Society and Puritanism in Pre-Revolutionary England. (Seeker & War- burg.) . Мillег, P.—The New England Mind; The Seventeenth Century (Beacon Press.) (c) Further reading will be suggested during the course. EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper in addition to the paper for the ordinary degree. Written work done during the year will be considered in determining the result. 35-1. EUROPEAN HISTORY A (Ions) Mr. L. R. Gardner, Dr. C. B. McCullagh, Mr. J. R. Parris Students will be required to attend the lectures as for European History A ( Pass ), one Honour tutorial per week and one additional lecture per week during two terms of the academic year. SYLLAws As for European History A in the ordinary degree, together with a special stud) of some aspects of the Reformation. BOOKS (a) Recommended for preliminary reading: Chadwick, O. The Reformation. ( Pelican History of the Church, 3.) *Elton, G. R.—Reformation Europe 1517-1559. (Fontana.) (b) Prescribed textbooks: »Dilenberger, J. (ed. )—Martin Luther. ( Anchor Paperback.) Grimm, H. J.—The Reformation Era 1500-1650. ( Collier-Macmillan Paperback.) Dolan, J. P. ( ed. )—The Essential Erasmus. ( Mentor-Omega.) *Jackson, W. T. H. (ed. )—Essential Works of Erasmus. (Bantam.) •Olin, J. C. ( ed. )—Christian Humanism and the Reformation. Desiderius Erasmus. ( Harper Torchbooks. ) *Winter, E. F.—Discourse on Free Will. ( Erasmus-Luther.) ( Ungar Paperback.) (c) Further reading will be suggested during the year. EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper in addition to the paper _for the ordinary degree. Written. work done during the year will be considered in determining the final results 40-1. HONOURS HISTORY A (Ancient History) Mr. W. Culicar, Mr. R. T. Ridley The course will be predominantly a seminar course of one lecture and one seminar each week devoted to select periods of Roman history with special reference to source criticism: (i) The Early Republic, (ii) The Julio Claudians, ( iii) The Period of Constantine. 126 HISTORY Books 3rd ed *Scullard, H.—А History of the Roman World 753-146 B.C. ( Methuen, 1962.) All students are required to read the first six chapters before the beginning of term I as a general background knowledge will be presupposed in lectures. Careful note should also be taken of Appendix I. Bloch, R.—The Origins of Rome. (Thames and Hudson.) Should also be consulted. Of primary sources the important and readily available ones which students should possess are: *Livy Books 1-6 of which the first five are translated as The Early Hłstoty of Rome by de Selincourt. (Penguin L 104.) *Cicero—The Republic, and The Laws. (Loeb Classical Library.) *Syrne, R.—The Roman Revolution. (o.U.P., 1939.) *Jones, A. H. M.—Studies in Roman Government and Law. (Blackwell, 1980.) *Tacitus—Annals. (trans. Dudley.) (Mentor.) *Suetonius—Lives of the Caesars. (trans. Graves.) (Penguin.) *Parker, H. M. D.—Nistory of the Roman World, A.D. 138-337. (Methuen.) EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper. Class work and written work done during the year will be considered in determining the result.

40-2. HONOURS HISTORY B (Medieval European History) Miss M. Gibbs This subject will not be available in 1968. A course of lectures and tutorials for two or three hours per week; class papers and essays are required. SYLLABUS In each of the three terms three subjects will be studied from original sources in translation: the age of. Bede and Boniface; the twelfth century Renaissance; the age of Dante. Some general reading on the origins and development of the institutions of Medieval society up to the fourteenth century will also be required. BOOKS . Preliminary reading during vacation: Blair, P. 1.—An • Introduction to Anglo-Saxon England. ( C.U.P., 1962. ) Southern, R.—The Making of the Middle Ages. (Arrow Books or Hutchinson.) Ullman, W. Political Thought In the Middle Ages. ( Pelican.) . Students are advised also to read the sources set for work in first term, the list of which can be obtained at the History Oílìce. Knowledge of Latin and/or modern European languages, especially Italian, is necessary for fourth-year work. EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper. Class work and written work done during the year will be considered in determining the result.

40-3. HONOURS HISTORY C . (Later Medieval and Early Modern European History) Mr. I. G. Roberston, Professor R. M. Crawford A course of lectures and tutorials, normally three hours per week, throughout the year. Class papers and an essay will be required. SYLLлвцS Special studies of (i) the political, social and cultural history of the Italian states in the fourteenth, fifteenth and sixteenth centuries; and (ii) the ecclesiastical history of Europe as a whole in the same centuries. 127 FACULTY OF Антв HANDBOOK Books (a) Prescribed for preliminary reading: Waley, Daniel-Later Medieval Europe from Saint Louis to Luther. (Longmans. ) Ferguson, Wallace K.—Europe in Transition, 1300-1520. (Houghton Mifflin Co., Boston.) Hay, D.—The Italian Renaissance in its Historical Background. (C.U.P.) Laven, Peter—Renaissance Italy 1464-1534. (Batsford, London, 1966.) Luzzatto, G.—An Economic History of Italy from the Fall of the Roman Empire to the beginning of the Sixteenth Century. (Routledge and Kegan Paul.) (ch. vii-viii. ) Mattingly, G.—Renaissance Diplomacy. (Cape or Peregrine.) • Burckhardt, J.—The Civilization of the Renaissance In Italy. (1860.) (Various editions.) Chadwick, O.—The Reformation. (Pelican History of the Church vol. III.) Elton, G. R.—Reformation Europe, 1517-1559. (Fontana Library. (b) Detailed reading guides will be distributed in tutorial classes. ITALIAN AND LATIN Some knowledge of the Italian and/or Latin languages would be of great assistance to students of Honours History C, although it is not an essential pre-requisite. EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper. Class work and written work done during the year will be considered in determining the result.

40-4. HONOURS HISTORY D (Modern European History) Professor J. R. Poynter, Mr. R. Isaac, Mrs. A. Patrick A course of seminars each week throughout the year, together with occasional lectures, a total of not more than three hours per week. Students taking this subject are required to attend lectures in European History B. SYLLABUS A study of selected themes in European history from the French Revolution to the twentieth century, with special reference to developments in France, Germany and Russia. BOOKS (a) Prescribed for preliminary reading: Rudé, G.—Revolutionary Europe, 1783-1805. (Fontana.) Thomson, D. Europe since Napoleon. (Penguin.) (b) Recommended for reference: .. Clapham, J.—The Economic Development of France and Germany. (Cambridge.) Rosenberg, A. Imperial Germany. (Beacon.) Mosse, G. L.—The Crisis in German Ideology. (Grosset and Dunlop.) Sukkanov, N.—The Russian Revolution. ( Harper Torchbooks. ) Origin of the Communist Autocracy. (Praeger.) Sćhapiro, L.—The Full reading guides will be distributed during the year. See also the book list of the subject European History B for additional works in paperback editions which students should consider buying. EXAMINATION One or two 3-hour papers. Class work and written work done during the year will be considered in determining the result. 128 HLSTORY 40-5. HONOURS HISTORY E (Modern British History ) Dr. D. F. Mackay This subject is a prerequisite for Honours History F (unless special permission is given). A course of seminars each week throughout the year, together with occasional lectures, a total of not more than 3 hours per week. Students taking this subject are required to attend lectures in Later British History. Written work will be required. SYLLABUS A study of aspeds of British society from the late eighteenth to the twentieth century. The course is not intended to provide a formal general history of Britain in the period, and а selection of topics for close study will be made each year. It is therefore important that students should acquire a general chronological knowledge of the main developments in social, political and economic history early in the year, preferably during the long vacation, by reading through some of the better textbooks on the period. Special emphasis will be given from time to time to a selection from such topics as the following: (a) social consequences of industrialism, ( b political and administrative reform, (c) religion and society, (d) literature and society, (e) doubt and confidence in Victorian England, ( f) old and new imperialism, ( g) British societies overseas, (h) working class movements, (i) Liberalism and Conservakism (j) social problems and thought in the twentieth century. BOOКS (a) Recommended for preliminary reading: Plumb, J. Н.—Епgland in the Eighteenth Century. (Pelican. Thomson, D. England in the Nineteenth Century. ( Pelican. Thomson, D. England in the Twentieth Century. ( Pelican. ) Cole, G. D. H. and Postgate, R.—The Сommoп People. ( University Paperbacks, Methuen. ) Young, G. 1. —Victorian Essays. ( Oxford. ) Kitson Clark, G. S. 1.—An Expanding Society. ( M.U.P. ) (b) Prescribed textbooks: *Chambers, J. D.—The Workshop of the World. (H.U.L, ) *Briggs, Asa—The Age of Improvement. (Longmans.) *Ensor, R. C. K.—England, 1870-1914. (Oxford.) *Young, G. M.—Victorian England: Portrait of an Age. (Oxford.) *Kitson Clark, G.—The Making of Victorian England. (Methuen.) *Mowat, C. L.—Britain Between the Wars, 1918-1940. ( Methuen. ) *Нãlévy, E.-A History of the English People, 8 vols. (Benn. ) ( c) Reference Books: Lists will be issued during the year. EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper. Class work and written work done during the year will be considered in determining the result. 40-6. HONOURS HISTORY F (Australian History) Mr. W. Bate, Dr. L. L. Robson Prerequisite: Honours History E (unless special permission is given). A course of seminars each week throughout the year, together with occasional lectures; a total of not more than 3 hours per week. Students taking this subject are required to attend lectures in Australian History, SYLLABUS A general survey of Australian history along the lines set down for the pass subject, Australian History. In addition the class will undertake a detailed study, including documentary work, of selected periods or topics within the general field. 129 FACULTY OF ARTS HANDBOOK Books As for Australian History. EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper in the Final Examination. Class work and written work done during the year will be considered in determining the result.

40-7. HONOURS HISTORY G (American) Professor N. D. Harper, Dr. P. F. Bourke A course of lectures and seminars throughout the year. Particular attention will be given to a number of special topics: The American Revolution 1763-1781; the New Nation 1781-1812; western expansion and the frontier hypothesis; slavery and the emancipation of the negro (to 1963); American foreign policy after 1890. Written class papers and one essay will be required during the year. BOOKS (a) Recommended for preliminary reading: Blum, J. M. et al.—The American Experience. (Macmillan.) Franklin, J. H.—From Slavery to Freedom. (Knopf.) Higham, J. ed.—The Reconstruction of American History. (Harper Torchbook.) Turner, F. j.—The Frontier in American History. (Holt.) Turner, F. J.—Frontier and Section. (Spectrum Books.) Wright, E.—Fabric of Freedom. (Macmillan.) (b) Recommend for reference: Full reading guides will be distributed at the beginning of the year. EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper in the Final Examination. Class work and written work done during the year will be considered in determining the result.

40-8. HONOURS HISTORY H (Far Eastern History) Mr. P. A. Rule A course of seminars each week throughout the year, together with occasional lectures; a total of not more than three hours per week. Students taking this subject are required to attend lectures in Far Eastern History. EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper in the Final Examination. Class work and written work done during the year will be considered in determining the result.

41-2. SPECIAL STUDY (FINAL YEAR) Students will be asked to choose, towards the end of their third year, one of the subjects announced for Special Study in the following year. It is hoped that courses will normally be available in all the principal fields taught in the Department i.e. Ancient and Medieval History, the Renaissance, Seventeenth-century British, Australian, American, Far Eastern, Modern European and Modern British History. The courses offered will involve advanced study of a restricted theme in each field; courses available in recent years include, for example, studies of The Age of Dante, The Political Thought of Machiavelli and his Italian Contemporaries, Urban History with particular reference to Australia, Imperialism, and Totalitarian Regimes of the Twentieth Century. Each course will pre-suppose earlier general study of the field and period, and students will not normally be admitted to a particular course unless they have already taken the relevant pre-requisite subject at Pass or Honours level. In some cases 130 FIISTOBY reading ability in a specified foreign language may also be a condition of admission. Students are advised to keep the choice of Special Study in mind when planning earlier years of the course. EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper in the Final Examination. Class work and written work done during the year will be considered in determining the result.

40-9. HONOURS HISTORY J ( HISTORIOGRAPHY) Dr. P. F. Bourke, Dr. C. B. McCullagh, Mr. R. Isaac A course of lectures and seminars, approximately three hours each week, throughout the year. Written work will be required. SYLLABUS A course in the history of historical writing, beginning with the classical historians and including a series of special studies of historiographical problems in the nineteenth and twentieth centuries. The course will be concerned with the social and intellectual context of historical writing, with changing ideas about the subject matter of history and with the development of techniques of source criticism, etc. BOOKS Prescribed textbook: Collingwood, R. G.-The Idea of History. (Galaxy Books.) A detailed reading guide will be issued at the commencement of lectures. EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper in the Final Examination. Class work and written work done during the year will be considered when determining the result.

41-3. THEORY AND METHOD OF HISTORY Dr. D. E. Kennedy A weekly discussion between members of the staff and honours students during the Fourth Year. Theory and Method of History is designed to encourage reflection on the assumptions, the methods and the conclusions of historical study. BOOKS Walsh, W. 1.—An Introduction to Philosophy of History: (Hutchinson 's Uni- versity Library.) *Соllingwоод, R. G.—The Idea of History. (O.U.P.) Gardiner, P.—Theories of History. (Free Press.) *Gardiner, P.-The Nature of Historical Explanation. (O.U.Р.) *Dray, W.—Laws and Explanation In History. (O.U.P.) EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper in the Final Examination. Class work throughout the year will be considered in determining the result.

MASTER OF ARTS 42-4. B. SCHOOL OF HISTORY Prospective candidates for the M.A. in the School of History should in all cases consult the department of History before beginning work for the purpose. Examination is normally by thesis, prepared under supervision and assisted by participation in research seminars. All candidates may be required to take any subject or attend any classes relevant to their l.A. subject. Variations of the normal procedure are now being considered, to extend this last provision in practice, in order to allow greater attention to be given to training M.A. students in the skills 131 FACULTY OF ARTS HANDBOOK required for the different fields of historical study. For certain students the Professor- in-charge may plan .A. courses which require a shorter thesis and give credit for time spent in the masteringМ of ancillary studies (such as languages, statistics, etc.). Students pursuing the traditional M.A. course will submit a thesis not exceeding 50,000 words, excluding footnotes, bibliographies and appendices which are trans- criptions of relevant documents. For students pursuing a course giving more time to ancillary studies, the length of thesis will be prescribed by the Professor-in-Charge. All M.A. students must write regular reports on the progress of their research as requested. An entry form for examination for higher degrees must be submitted to the Registrar. Three copies of each thesis (quarto, typewritten, double-spaced) should be submitted, one of which will be deposited in the University Library. The attention of candidates is drawn to the recommendations of the Professorial Board on the format of theses (regulation 4.6 in the University Calendar).

132 DEPARTMENT OF HISTORY AND PHILOSOPHY OF SCIENCE Reader-in-Charge; Miss D. DYASON, M.Se. This discipline is concerned with the critical study of scientific concepts and theories. Sometimes the problems will be mainly historical, to consider the character and development of scientific ideas; sometimes the problems will be mainly logical, to discuss the presuppositions of science and the relation of experiment to theory. Often problems will straddle the two fields. The emphasis varies in the different subjects taught, depending on what is considered most appropriate to the class of students concerned. ORDINARY DEGREE ( Details for the honours degree are set out at the end of this section.) GROUPING A History and Philosophy of Scieńce subject may be counted as either a Group 4 or Group 3 subject, but if a student takes more than one H.P.S. subject in his course, they must all be considered as in the same group ( i.e. a sub-major or major in H.P.S. could not satisfy the requirements for both Group $ and Group 4 except for combinations with Logic or Theory of Statistics. There are four subjects available to students taking a pass Arts course and three of these may be taken as a major. History and Philosophy of Science I, II and III are designed specificallу for Arts students. In these subjects the emphasis is largely historical, although logical criticism of the theories dealt with will be an important component. History and Philosophy of Science ( Science course) is designed primarily for В.Sc. students but is suitable as the third stage of a major for Arts students whose main interests are philosophical. Arts students intending to take H.P.S. ( Science course) are advised to consult the department. Majors: 1. H.P.S. I, H.P.S. II, H.P.S. III or H.P.S. (Science Course) or Logic. 2. H.P.S. I, Theory of Statistics I, Theory of Statistics II or Logic. For Science Students or Graduates who have passed in H.P.S. (Science Course) the following courses are available*: 1. Group 4 subject, H.P.S. (Science Course), H.P.S. II. 2. H.P.S. ( Science Course, H.P.S. II, H.P.S. III. 3 H.P.S. ( Science Course), H.P.S. II, Logic. 4. H.P.S. (Science Course), Theory of Statistics I, Logic. Note: Students with appropriate pre-requisites who wish to take the maximum number of Pass H.P.S. subjects may complete a double major by taking H.P.S. I, H.P.S. II, H.P.S. III, H.P.S. (Science Course) and any two of the following: Logic, an additional group 4 subject, Theory of Statistics I, Theory of Statistics II. 44-1. HISTORY AND PHILOSOPHY OF SCIENCE I Course Controller: Miss M. M. MacCallum Lecturers: Dr. L. Trengave, Dr. E. B. tasking A course of three lectures and one tutorial per week. Part of the course will be devoted to a discussion of the nature of scientific knowledge and explanation as understood from Classical Greek to modern times. The mainart of the subject will be a detailed study of the development of selected scientific theories using, where possible, the writings of the scientists concerned. This study will involve a discussion of the problems that had to be faced the emergence of the new concepts necessary to solve these problems and the general outlook and philosophy of the times dealt with. The theories selected have been chosen because they are: 1. comprehensible to students who have not had previous scientific and mathe- • Subject to approval. 133 FACULTY OF ABTS HANDBOOK matiсal training and 2. are central to the overall development of science. No scientific or mathematiсal knowledge will be presupposed in this course. Written work and tests will be required during the year and these will be taken into account in the final result. SYLLABUS The following or similar topics. A. The history of Astronomy from Greek times to Newton. B. Changing views of scientific explanation and method. C. The history of Generation and Genetics.

BOOКS (a) Preliminary reading: (A sheet giving detailed advice on preliminary reading is available to intending students from the Secretary of the Department.) Asimov, I. WeiØrings of Life. (Mentor, 1961.) Asimov, I.—A Short History of Biology. (Natural History Press, 1964.) Adler, I—The Sun and its Family. ( Signet Science Library, 1962. ) (b) Prescribed textbooks: *Roneoed Source Material issued by the Department. *Kuhn, T.—The Copernican Revolution. (Longmans, 1954, Random House paperback, 195.) *Toulmin, S., and Goodfield, J. Fabric of the Heavens. (Pelican, 1963.) (c) Recommended for continual reference: *Cohen, I. B.—The Birth of а New Physics. (Heinemann, 1961.) *Koestler, A.—The Watershed. (Heinemann, Science Study Series. ) also contained in The Sleepwalkers. (Hutchinson, 1959.) Butterfield, 1.—The Origins of Modern Science. (Bell, 1957.) Rattray Taylor, G.—The Science of Life. (Thames and Hudson, 1963.) A further bibliography will be issued to all students enrolled in this subject. EXAMINATION. Two 3-hour papers. EXTERNAL STUDIES Students who have already made satisfactory progress towards their B.A. degree may apply in writing to the department for permission to take this subject externally.

44-2. HISTORY AND PHILOSOPHY OF SCIENCE II Dr. E. B. tasking, Dr. R. Home A course of three lectures and one tutorial per week. One lecture per week will be devoted to the factual scientific content necessary for an understanding of the historical material. Students who pass the initial or mid-year test will be exempted from further attendance at these classes. The approach to this subject is similar to H.P.S. I, but involves a more advanced study of the logic of the theories dealt with. These theories will be more sophisticated from a scientific point of view. The course will make extensive use of original sources and study the logical and conceptual problems that are raised. Written work and tests will be required during the year and these will be taken into account in the final result. SYLLABUS A selection from the following or similar topics. 1. Greek Dynamics. 2. Dynamics in the Middle Ages. 3. Rise of modern mechanics. 4. Theories of the structure of matter. 5. Gas chemistry, including its application to biological problems. 6. Theories of combustion. 7. Foundations of the atomic theory. 134 HISTORY AND PHILOSOPHY OF SCIENCE

Books (a) Preliminary reading: Cohen, I. B.—The Birth of a New Physics. ( Heinemann, 1961.) Gregory, S. A.—Chemicals and People. (London, 1961.) (b) Prescribed textbooks: *Roneoed Source Material issued by the Department ( с ) Recommended for continual reference: Dijksterhuis, E. J: The Mechanization of the World Picture. ( .U. ., 1961.) Crornbie, A. C.—Augustine to Galileo. ( Mercury Books, 1961.) І Р Hall, A. R.—From Galileo to Newton. ( Collins. ) Prescribed textbooks and books recommended for continual reference for the second half of the course will be placed on the notice board at the department. A further bibliography will be issued at the beginning of the year. EXAMINATION. Two 3-hour papers. EXTERNAL STUDIES Students who have already made satisfactory progress towards their B.A. degree may apply in writing to the department for permission to take this subject externally. 44-3. HISTOНY AND PHILOSOPHY OF SCIENCE III Miss D. J. Dyason The aim of this course is to study the development of scientific ideas and technology which have had important social or economic consequences. A course of weekly lecture seminars (2-3 hours ) plus weekly tutorial (2-3 hours). Written work will be an integral part of the course. SYLLABUS A selection from the following or similar topics: 1. Development of the germ theory of disease. 2. The Aristotelian concept of science and its methods; its influence and over- throw. 3. Science during the Renaissance. The influence of the artist and artisan on scientific thought. Science and Humanism. 4. Science and Religion. 5. The rise of chemical industry. 6. Development of steam power. 7. Development of electrical power. 8. 18th Century French biology and its interconnections with the intellectual movements in pre-revolutionary France. 9. Development of Public Health measures. 10. Newtonian world system. 11. Problem of statics in relation to architecture and civil engineering. Books The emphasis will be on original scientific publications. Roneoed Source Material and bibliographies will be issued by the department. (a) Preliminary reading: Gale, A. H. Epidernia Diseases. ( Penguin, 1959.) Poynter, F. N. L., and Keele, K. D.—A Short History of edicine. (Mills å Boone, 1961.) М Winslow, C. E. A. Man and Epidemics. ( Princeton, 1952.) Wileeeks, C.—Medical Advance, Public Health and Social Evolution. (Pergamon Press, 1965.) (b) Prescribed textbook: Camai, C. N. B. —Classics of Medicine and Surgery. (Dover, N.Y., 1959.) (c) Recommended for continual reference: Longmate, N.—King Cholera. (Hamish Hamilton, 1966.) Winslow, C. E. A.—The Conquest of Epidemie Disease. (Princeton, 1943.) Additional bibliographies will be provided during the year. Further bibliography for Preliminary reading may be obtained from the Depart- ment. 135 FACULTY OF ARTS HANDBOOK EXAMINATION. Two 3-hour papers. EXTERNAL STUDIES. Correspondence tuition is not available in this subject.

382. HISTORY AND PHILOSOPHY OF SCIENCE (SCIENCE COURSE ) Mr. F. J. Clendiпnen A course of three lectures and one tutorial per week throughout the year, together with prescribed essay work. The essays will be regarded as an essential part of the course and the student must reach a satisfactory standard in these before he will be granted permission to take the final examination. The normal requirement will be two 3,000-word essays on approved topics. The main emphasis of this course will be on the philosophy or logic of science, although the course will include a detailed historical case study, and historical examples will be used to illustrate logical points. SYLLABUS 1. Introductory Lectures on Logic. The purpose of these lectures is to introduce the student to some of the tools of modern logical analysis. 2. The Nature of Mathematics. A discussion of empiricist, formalist, intuitionist,. and other views about the foundations of arithmetic and geometry, and of the relationship between mathematics and physical theory. 3. General Problems in the Philosophy of Science. A selection of not more than four of the following topics: . (a) theories and explanations; b) verification and meaning; c) causality and probability; ( d ) laws and concepts; (e) metaphysical principles ( e.g. the principles of simplicity, suшcient reason, symmetry, and essential connectivity). 4. Concept Analysis. A detailed logical analysis of one of the following groups of physical concepts: (i) force and related concepts; (ii) heat and temperature; . (iii) space and time; (iv) measurement. 5. Historical Case Study.A detailed historical case study of some part or parts of the history of science, involving careful analysis of relevant primary source material BOOKS The student will be provided with fairly extensive reading lists of books and journal articles as the course proceeds, and roneoed source material will be provided by the department. ( a) Recommended for preliminary reading: Butterfield, H. The Origins of Modern Science. ( Bell, 1957.) Hospers, J.—An Introduction to Philosophical Analysis, Chapters 1-5. (R.K.P., 1959.) . (b) Prescribed textbooks: *Hempel; Carl G.—Philosophy of Natural Science. (Prentice-Hall.) *Barker, Stephen—Philosophy of Mathematics. (Prentice-Hall.) (c) Recommended for reference: Madden, E. H.—The Structure of Scientific Thought. (Routledge & Kegan Paul.) Dantx, A., and Morgenbesser, S.—Philosophy of Science. (Meridian, 1960.) . EXAMINATION. Two 3-hour papers. EXTERNAL STUDIES. Correspondence tuition is not available in this subject. 136 HISTORY AND PHILOSOPHY OF scrENCE HONOURS DEGREE O: SCHOOL OF HISTORY AND PHILOSOPHY OF SCIENCE (For possible combinations with this degree see p. 251) L The course for the degree with honours in the school of History and Philosophy of Science comprises the following subjects: ( a ) History and Philosophy of Science I. History and Philosophy of Science II. History and Philosophy of Science (Science course) History and Philosophy of Science C. History and Philosophy of Science D. (b) Two approved Philosophy subjects. or History subject and History and Philosophy of Science III (hens) (c) A part I Science subject* and either A part II Science subject or Two other subjects at least one of which is a Science subject. (d) Two additional subjects for either B.A. or B.Sc. degree of which at least one is above first year level. Candidates must be placed in the class list or reach honours standard in all subjects of group (a) and in one Philosophy subject or H.P.S. III in group (b). Note: To suit individual needs the faculty, on the recommendation of the head of the department, may permit a student to make certain substitutions of subjects especially in, group (b).. 2. The range of subjects specified permits a considerable variety of courses. A candidate must have the approval of the head of the department for the choice and order of subjects to be taken before entering the second or third year of the honours school. 3. (a) Students who have completed one year of the B.A. degree or two of the B.Sc. must be approved by the faculty of Arts (on application through the Sub-Dean) as candidates for the degree with honours before entering the Second or Third Year respectively of the honours school. The department. of History and Philosophy of Science will normally recommend such approval for candidates who have gained first or second class honours in History and Philosophy of Science I or Science Course, provided that the content and quality of the remaining subject may be considered in deciding on a recommendation. Candidates who have failed to gain first or second class honours in these subjects but who wish to proceed to the honours school should see the head of department- who will be guided in making the recommendation by the merits of the case. A student who has not obtained honours in the requisite subjects but who, at the end of the Third Year wishes to enter the honours school, must make special application to the faculty through the sub-dean for permission to do so. If such permission is granted the faculty will prescribe what further work must be completed before the student is allowed to proceed to the final examinations. (b) Students may also be advised to attend other lecture courses which are regarded as relevant to their work. 4.The final honours examination will consist of the papers for H.P.S.C. and H.P:S.D., together with either three essays of 3,000 words or one essay of 9,000 words on approved subjects. In the final assessment results in other subjects may be taken into account. 44-1. HISTORY AND PHILOSOPHY OF SCIENCE I (Ions) A course of lectures as for the ordinary degree. SYLLÀBUS As for the ordinary degree. •Science subject means subject prescribed for B.Sc. degree. 137 . FACULTY OF ARTS ØВOOB Books As prescribed for the ordinary degree. EXAMINATION Two 3-hour papers as for the ordinary degree. Candidates for honours will. be expected to show a wider and more detailed knowledge than pass candidates in both the examination and the essay work.

44-2. HISTORY AND PHILOSOPHY OF SCIENCE II (lions) A course of lectures as for the ordinary degree. SYLLABUS As for the ordinary degree. BOOKS As for the ordinary degree. EXAMINATION Two 3-hour papers as for the ordinary degree. Candidates for honours will be expected to show a wider and more detailed knowledge than pass candidates in both the examination and the essay work.

382. HISTORY AND PHILOSOPHY OF SCIENCE (SCIENCE coURsE) (Ions) A course of lectures as for the ordinary degree. SYLLABUS As for the ordinary degree. BOOKS As prescribed for the ordinary degree. EXAMINATION Two 3-hour papers as for the ordinary degree. Candidates for honours will be expected to show a wider and more detailed knowledge than pass candidates in both the examination and the essay work.

44-3. HISTORY AND PHILOSOPHY OF SCIENCE III (lions) A course of lectures as for the ordinary degree. SYLLАВUS As for the ordinary degree. BOOKS As prescribed for the ordinary degree. EXAMINATION Two 3-hour papers as for the ordinary degree. Candidates for honours will be expected to show a wider and more detailed knowledge than pass candidates in both the examination and the essay work.

44-4. HISTORY AND PHILOSOPHY OF SCIENCE C A course of one lecture-seminar per week throughout the year. The purpose of this course is to develop the philosophical and logical topics previously introduced. This course will normally be taken in the year aftér H.P.S. (Science Course). Written work will be required. EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper to be taken in the final honours year. 138 HISTORY AND PШLOSOPHY OF SCIENCE 44-5. HISTORY AND PHILOSOPHY OF SCIENCE D At least three lecture-seminars per week throughout the year, together with written work. SYLLABUS An intensive study of topics in the history and philosophy of science to be decided on in the light of the scientific, historical and philosophical backgrounds of the students concerned. EXAMINATION. Three 3-hour papers.

MASTEп OF ARTS 45-9. O. SCHOOL OF HISTORY AND PHILOSOPHY OF SCIENCE Candidates are required to prepare a thesis on an approved subject. They will work under the supervision of a member of the History and Philosophy of Science department, to whom they should regularly report on the progress of their work. They may also be required to attend any lectures or discussion classes bearing on their work. Before the subject of th6 thesis is approved, candidates may be required to sit for an examination at honours standard in the field of the proposed thesis. An M.A. enrolment form* for examination for higher degrees must be submitted to the Registrar. Three copies of each thesis (quarto, typewritten, double-spaced) should be submitted, one of which will be deposited in the University Library. The attention of candidates is drawn to the recommendations of the Professorial Board on the format of theses (regulation 4.6 In the University Calendar). Candidates may also be examined orally on the subject of their thesis.

• Obtainable at Arts Faculty Office. 139 DEPARTMENT OF INDIAN STUDIES Head of Department: Mr. S. N. Ray, M.A. ( Calcutta ) ORDINARY DEGREE (Details for the honours courses are set out at the end of this section) Group 5 Indian Studies A may be taken as one subject in the Arts degree course or as the first part of a major which is completed with parts B and C. After the first year the following courses will be offered: Modern Indian Political Thought (half-subject). Classical Indian Thought (half-subject). Bengali Literature (half-subject). Sanskrit and Prakrit Literature (half-subject). Indian Art and Architecture (half-subject). Islam in India (half-subject). Each of these courses constitutes only one half of a degree subject. Indian Studies B shall consist of any two of these courses, and Indian Studies C shall consist of any two not yet taken as part of Indian Studies B. These courses will be available to students of Indian Studies B and C on the following basis: Modern Indian Political Thought. will be available Classical Indian Thought. in 1969 and alternate Bengali Literature. years Sanskrit and Prakrit Literature. will be available Indian Art and Architecture. in 1968 and alternate Islam in India. years Ј N.B.—Students who have passed Indian Studies B in 1965 or 1966 will not be able to do Indian Studies C in the year 1968 and alternate years, but they will be able to do it in 1969 and alternate years. 47. INDIAN STUDIES A S. N. Ray and J. T. F. Jordens A course of two lectures and one tutorial per week throughout the year. SYLLABUS The course will consist of two series of lectures, one on the social and intellectual movements in India during the British period; the other on the origins and development of India's traditional culture till the beginning of the Christian era. BOOKS (a) Recommended for preliminary reading: Panikkar, K. M.—A Survey of Indian History. (Asia, Bombay.) (b) Prescribed textbooks: Paper I.—The Indian Renaissance. (S. N. Ray.) •Sources of Indian Tradition—compiled by W. T. de Baxy and others. Part 6 only. (Columbia U.P.) 140 INDIAN STUDIES *Heimsath, C. H.—Indfan Nationalism and Hindu Sоcial Reform. (Princeton.) Majumder, R. C. History of the Freedom Movement in India. Vol. I. (Firma K. L. Mukhopadhyaya, Calcutta.) CoUet, S. D.—The Life and Letters of Raja Rammohun Roy. (еd., D. K. Biswas and P. C. Ganguli, Sadharan Brаhmo Samej, Calcutta.) *Wolpert, S. A.—Titak and Gokhale. ( California U.P.) Goyal, O. P.—The Moderates and the Extremists. (Kitabmahцl, Alahabad.) Paper II.—Cultt'ral Heritage. (J. T. F. Jordens.) *Dutt, R. C. The Mahabharata and the Ramayaпa. (Everyman.) *Macnico1,' N.—Hindu Scriptures. ( Everyman.) *Burtt, E. A.—The Teachings of the Compassionate Buddha. (Mentor.) *Hiriyanna, M.—Outlines of Indian Philosophy. (Allen & Unwin.) *Basham, A. L.—The Wonder that was India. (Sidgwick & Jackson. ) (c) Recommended for Reference: Papers I and II Varma, V. P.-Modern Indian Political Thought. (Agarwal, Agra.) Datte, K. K.-Dawn of Renascent India. (Allied, Bombay.) Мisra, B. B.—The Indian Middle Classes. (O.U.P.) Natarajan, S.—A Century of Social Reform in India. (Asia, Bombay.) Desai, A. R.-Social Background of Indian Nationalism. (Popular, Bombay.) Piggot, S.-Prehfstoric India. (Pelican.) Keith, A. B.-Religion and Philosophy of the Veda and Upanishads. (Cambridge, Mass.) Radhakrishnan, S.-Indian Philosophy. Vol. I. (Allen & Unwin) EXAMINATION Two 3-hour papers. Students wil be required to write two essays during the second term.

48. INDIAN STUDIES В AND C Students are reminded that although Indian Studies II and III consist of two half-subjects, credit will not be given for one half-subject only. The final assessment of the examination will be based on the two papers together, and the students will pass or fail in both together.

48-1. MODERN INDIAN POLITICAL THOUGHT (Half-Subject) S. N. Ray A course of one lecture per week and one tutorial per fortnight throughout the year. Available in 1969. SYLLABUS This will be an advanced study of some of the major Indian political thinkers and schools of thought of the last one hundred years. Their ideas and activities will be examined in the context of contemporary political developments. Books (a) Prescribed text books: *Fischer, L. (ed.)—The Essential Gandhi. (Vintage.) *Tagore, Rabindranath—Towards Universal Man.ia, As Bombay.) Norman, Dorothy—Nehru the First Sixty years. Vols. I & II. (Bodley Head.) *Roy, M. N. Memoirs. ( Allied, Bombay.) *Narayan, J. Р.—Socialism, Sarvodaya and Democracy. (Asia, Bombay.) Goyal, O. P.—Contemporary Indian Political Thought. (Kitabmahal, Allahabad.) Aiyar, S. P., and Srinivasan, R.—Studies in Indian Democracy. (Allied, Bombay.) (b) Recommended for reference: Majumder, R. C. History of the Freedom Movement in India. Vols. II & IIL (Firma K. L. МіјІdіoрadьуaуа, Calcutta.) 141 FACULTY OF AATs HANDBOOK Chosh, P. C. Indian National Congress. (Firma K. L. Mukhopadhyaya, Cal- cutta. ) Overstreet, G. D., and Windmiller, M.—Communism in India. (Perennial Press, Bombay.) Weiner, M. Party Politics in India. (Princeton.) EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper. Students will be required to write one essay.

48-2. CLASSICAL INDIAN THOUGHT (Half-Subject) J. T. F. Jordens (Previously Indian Philosophy in Part II and Indian Philosophy and Religion in Part III.) A course of one lecture per week and one tutorial per fortnight throughout the year. Available in 1969. SYLLABUS An introduction to the efforts and achievements of classical Indian thinking in different fields: philosophy and theology, mysticism, ethics and politics. The most important thinkers or schools will be studied and their mutual relationship and influence will be considered. BOOKS (a) Prescribed text books: *Radhakrishnan, S.—Indian Philosophy. 2 Vols. (Allen & Unwin.) *Нiriуаnnа, I.—Outlines of Indian Philosophy. (Allen & Unwin.) Zimmer, H.—Philosophies of India. (Meridian.) (b) Recommended for reference: Eliade, M.-Yoga, Immortality and Freedom. (Routledge & Kegan Paul.) Riepe, D.—The Naturalist Tradition in Indian Thought. (University of Wash- ington.) Varma, V. P.—Studies in Hindu Political Thought. (Motilil Banarasidas, Benares. ) Zaehner, R. C.—Mysticism, Sacred and Profane. (O.U.P. ) EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper. Students will be required to write one essay.

48-3. BENGALI LITERATURE (Half-Subject) A. Mojumder A course of one lecture per week and one tutorial per fortnight throughout the year. Available in 1969. SYLLABUS This will be a study of the historical development of Bengali literature with prescribed literary texts in English translation. The larger socio-cultural context of this literature will be also taken into consideration. BOOKS (a) Prescribed text books: *Mojumder, A.—Caryã-songs. ( selected pieces.) available from the Department. *Dimmock, E. C.—The Thief of Love. ( Chicago, U.P. ) Thompson, E. J., and Spencer, A. /A—Bengali Religious Lyrics. (Y.M.C.A., Calcutta.) *Chatterjee, Bankim Chandra—Krishnakanta's Will. Tr. by J. C. Ghose. (UNESCO, New Directions.) *Tagore, Rabindranath—Poems. (Viswabharati, Calcutta.) *Tagore, Rabindranath-Dora. (Macmillan.) Tagore, Rabindranath—Binodinł. Tr. by K. Kripalani. (Sahitya Academy, New Delhi.) 142. INDIAN STUDIES Tagore, Rabindranath—The Housewarming and other Stories. (New American Library, New York.) Banпerjee, Manik—The Boatman of Padma. Tr. by H. Mukherjee. (Kutub, Bombay. ) *Rаy, Lila (E . & Tr.)—The Broken Bread. (M. C. Sarkar & Son, Calcutta.) (b) Recommended for reference: Sen, D. C.—Нistory of Bengali Language and Literature. ( Calcutta University.) *chose, J. C. Bengali Literature. ( O.U.P. ) De, S. K.—Bengali Literature in the 19th Century. ( Firma K. L. Mukhopad- hyaya, Calcutta. ) EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper. Students will be required to write one essay. 48-4. SANSKRIT AND PRAKRIT LITERATURE (Half -Subject) J. T. F. Jordens and A. Mojumder (FORMERLY CLASSICAL INDIAN LITERATURE) A course of one lecture per week and one tutorial per fortnight throughout the year. Available in 1968. SYLLABUS Some major works of Classical Sanskrit and Prakrit literature (lyrical, didactic, narrative and dramatic) will be studied in translation. The course also includes the study of Indian poetics. BOOKS (a) Prescribed textbooks: Keith, A. B.—Classical Sanskrit Literature. (Y.M.C.A., Calcutta.) Wells, H. W.-Six Sanskrit Plays. ( Asia, London. ) Edgerton, F. E. (Ed.)—Kalidasa, The Cloud Messenger. (Ann Arbor Paper- back.) Yohannan, J. D.—A Treasury of Asian Literature. ( Mentor.) Ryder, A. W. ( tr. )—Pancatantra. (Jaico, Bombay. ) Tawney, C. H. (tr. )—Stories from Somadeva's Kathasaritsagara. (jaico, Bombay. ) Francis, H. T., and Thomas, E. J.—Jataka Tales. (jaico, Bombay;) (b) Recommended for reference: Dasgupta, S. N., and De, S. К:А History of Sanskrit Literature. Vol. L (Cal- cutta, University. ) Keith, A. B.—The Sanskrit Drama. ( O.U.P. ) De, S. К. History of Sanskrit Poetics. (Firma K. L. Mukhopadhyaya, Calcutta.) EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper. Students will be required to write one essay.

48-5. INDIAN ART AND ARCHITECTURE (Наlf-Subject) S. N. Ray A course of one lecture per week and one tutorial per fortnight throughout the year. Available in 1988. SYLLABUS An historical survey of Indian painting, sculpture and architecture to the end of the Hindu period, with some discussion of the canons of Hindu-Buddhist art. BOOKS (a) Preliminary reading: Iyer, K. B.—Indian Art. (Asia, Bombay.) (b) Prescribed textbooks: *Brown, P. Indian Architecture: Buddhist and Hindu. (Taraporevala, Boni- bay.) 143 FACULTY OF ARTS HANDBOOK *Saraswati, S. К.— Survey of Indian Sculpture. (Firma K. L. Mukhopadhyaya, Calcutta.) А Goetz, H. Five Thousand Years of Indian Art. (Taraporevala, Bombay.) Bhattacharya, T. P.—The Canons of Indian Art. (Firma K. L. Mukh ad y , Calcutta.) ор уа а Rowland, B.—Art in East and West. (Beacon.) (c) Recommended for reference: Zimmer, H.—The Art of Indian Asia. 2 vols. (Pantheon.) Rowland, B.—The Art and Architecture of India. (Penguin.) Coomaraswamy, A. К.Н istотy of Indian and Indonesian Art. (Dover.). EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper. Studenťs will be required to write one essay.

48-6. ISLAM IN INDIA (Нalf-Subject) A course of one lecture per week and one tutorial per fortnight throughout the year. Available in 1968. SYLLABUS An introduction to Islam's contribution to religion, culture, and social and political developments in India. Its scope will be limited mainly to the pre-Brxtish period. BOOKS (a) Preliminary reading: Titus, M. T. Islam in India and Pakistan. (Y.M.C.A., Calcutta.) (b) Prescribed textbooks: Sources of Indian Tradition. Compiled by W. T. de Bary and others. Part 4 only. (Columbia U.P.) Tarachand—Influence of Islam on Indian Culture. (Indian Press, Allahabad.) Husain, Yusuf—Glimpses of Medieval Indian Culture. (Asia, Bombay.) Ahmad, Aziz—Islamic Culture in the Indian Environment. (O.U.P.) Qureshi, I. H.—The Muslim Community of the Indo-Pakistan Subcontinent. (Mouton, The Hague.) (c) Recommended for reference: Brown, Percy—Indian Architecture: Islamic Period. (Taraporevala, Bombay. Karim, Abdul—Social History of the Muslims in Bengal. (Asiatic Society, Dacca.) EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper. Students will be required to write one essay. INDIAN LANGUAGE : ORDINARY DEGREE Group 1 This is a new course which has been available since 1967. The language offered is Bengali which may be taken as a sub-major (parts I and ii >, or as a major (parts I, II and III), or as part of the course for the degree with Honours in the School of Indian Studies. The first two years will be devoted mainly to language study; the finаl year will include critical study of major literary texts in the original. An intensive Summer School will be provided for the duration of two weeks, immediately before the commencement of the first term, and students seeking admission to Bengali Part I are required to attend it. They must contact the Department not later than February 15th. 50-1. BENGALI PART I A. Mojumder A course of two lectures per week plus two tutorials throughout the year. Avail- able in 1968. SYLLABUS (i) General historical outline of the origin and development of the Bengali language. 144 INDIAN STUDIES (ii) Basic elements of Bengali grammar, phonetics, phonology and orthography. (iii) Spoken Bengali. (iv) Reading from set texts, translation from Bengali into English and from English into Bengali. BOOКS • (а ) Prescribed text books: *Dimmoek, E. C.—An Introduction to Bengali, Part L (East West Center Press, Hawaii University, Honolulu.) *Sengu pta, Subodh (Ed. m Anglo-Bengali Dictionary. (Sahïtya Samsad, Calcutta. ) *Sengupta, Subodh (Ed.)—Samsod Bengali-English Dictionary. (Sahitya Samsad, Calcutta.) The Department will supply transcript material on Bengali grammar, pronunciation, vocabulary and prescribed texts. EXAMINATION Two 3-hour papers, together with an oral test.

50-2. BENGALI PART II A course of three lectures per week, plus two tutorials throughout the year. Available in 1968. SYLLABUS (i) Advanced study of Bengali grammar, phonology, . phonetics, orthoepy, orthography and prosody. (ii) Bengali dialects, literary and spoken language, recent developments. ( iii) Reading of advanced modern texts, stylistic analysis and translation. (iv) Composition in Bengali. BOOkS (a) Prescribed text books: *Bhattaeharji, S.—Advanced Bengali Reader. (U. of Chicago.) Chatteriiee, S. k.—The Indo-Aryan and Hindi. (Firma К. L. Mukhopadhyaya, Calcutta.) Chatterjee,' S. k.—The Languages and Literatures of Modern India. (Bengal Publishers, Calcutta.) Annadashankar and Lila Ray-Bengali Literature. (P.E.N. books.) (International Book House, Bombay.) Most of the material will be supplied in typescript by the Department. EXAMINATION Two 3-hour papers, plus an oral test. Students will be required to write one essay. 50-3. BENGALI PART III Details for the ' course will be published in 1969.

HONOUЕS DEGREE S. SCHOOL OF INDIAN STUDIES 1. The course for the degree with honours in the School of Indian Studies comprises the following subjects: (a) Indian language (Bengali) parts I, II and III. (b) Indian Studies honours, parts I, II, III and IV. (c) Three additional subjects at pass or honours level, selected from the subjects of the degree of Bachelor of Arts. One of these additional subjects should be above first year level. 145 FACULTY OF ARTS HANDBOOS (d) A thesis of 9,000 words on an approved subject. The details of Indian Language I, II, and III are set out under the ordinary degree; the details of Indian Studies honours I, II, III and IV are set out below. 2. In their first year, candidates in the honours school will take Indian Language part I, Indian Studies I ( honours ), and two additional subjects ( one of which will normally form part of a sub-major) approved by the Head of Department of Indian Studies. Admission to the higher years of the course is conditional upon a satisfactory performance in First Year, and students must be approved by the Faculty of Arts as candidates for the degree with honours, before entering the Second Year of the honours school. The Head of Department of Indian Studies will normally recommend such approval for candidates who have gained at least second class honours in Indian Studies I ( honours ), and Pass with Merit in Indian Language L Other candidates who wish to continue in the honours school must interview the Head of Department, who will be guided in his recommendation by the merits of the case. A student who has completed the First Year of the course for the ordinary degree and has passed in Indian Language I and Indian Studies I, may, with the permission of faculty, enter the honours school. Such a student must make special application to the faculty through the sub-dean. If permission is granted, the faculty will prescribe what further work must be completed before the student is allowed to proceed to the final examination. 3. In the second year, candidates will take Indian Language. II, Indian Studies II (honours), and an additional subject, which will normally constitute the second part of a sub-major. 4. In the third year, candidates will take Indian Language III, (with special honours work in the language) and Indian Studies III (honours). 5. In the fourth year, candidates will take Indian Studies IV.

47. INDIAN STUDIES: PART I (Ions) A course of three lectures and one tutorial per week, throughout the year. SYLLABUS As for the ordinary degree, together with a special study of ancient and modern texts in translation. BOOKS As for the ordinary degree, together with special texts, as prescribed by the Department. EXAMINATION Two 3-hour papers as for the ordinary degree, with special questions on the special study.

48. INDIAN STUDIES PART II (Ions) A course of three lectures and one tutorial per week, throughout the year. SYLLABUS (1) Indian Studies II, as for the ordinary degree. (2) A special socio-cultural text study. BOOKS (1) Indian Studies II as for the ordinary degree. (2) Texts and supplementary reading list will be supplied by the Department. EXAMINATION Thгеe 3-hour papers; two as for Indian Studies II, ordinary degree, and one on the special text study. N.B. Details for Indian Studies III (honours) and Indian Studies IV (honours) will be published in 1969 and 1970. 146 DEPARTMENT OF INDONESIAN AND MALAYAN STUDIES Head of Department: Vacant. ORDINARY DEGREE The courses offered in the. Department of Indonesian and Malayan Studies are designed to constitute an "area study" embracing Indonesian language and also the history, culture, and social, political and economic background to present-day Indonesia and Malaysia. The first year will be solely devoted to language study; in the later years, each subject will include both the "area study" content and continued work in Bahasa Indonesia, the two parts being woven together as closely as possible. Indonesian I will be a pre-requisite for entry to Indonesian and Malaysian Studies A and both will be pre-requisites for Indonesian and Malaysian Studies B and C. Although Indonesian I will be a Group I subject and the others Group 5 subjects, it will be permissible to combine these to form a major. 52-1. INDONESIAN PART I Mr. J. P. Sarumpaet A course of four lectures a week, plus one tutorial, throughout the year. SYLLABUS (i) Basic elements of sentence structure and idiom in Bahasa Indonesia. Trans- lation from Indonesian into English from prescribed texts and elementary translation from English into Indonesian. Pronunciation and elementary conversation. (1) Reading from set texts. Background study of topics related to the reading. BOOKS (a) Recommended for preliminary reading: Grant, Bruce-Indonesia. ( М.U.Р., 1964.) (b) Prescribed textbooks: *Sarumpaet, J. P. and Mackie, J. A. C.—An Introduction to Bahasa Indonesia. ( M.U.P., 1966.) *Sarumpaet, J. P.—The Structure of Bahasa Indonesia. (Available from the Department.) Pino, E., and Wittermans, T.-Kamus Inggeris. (2 vols., J. B. Wolters, Groningen.) . Echols, J. M., and Shadily, Hasan—An Indonesian-English Dictionary. ( ComeU U.P. ) The Department will supply typescript material, including explanation of more .. advanced grammatical structures and extracts for reading from Indonesian novels and stories. EXAMINATION. Two 3-hour papers, together with an oral test of 15 minutes. Class exercises and tests will be required throughout the year and will be taken into account in determining examination results. 52-2. INDONESIAN AND MALAYSIAN STUDIES A A course of study based upon 3 lectures a week, together with one tutorial class, throughout the year. SYLLABUS This subject will be presented as an "area study" course combining a historical survey of Indonesian and Malaysian societies and politics over recent centuries with FACULTY OF ARTS HANDBOOK continued language study, and using materials in Bahasa Indonesia related to the area study. Indonesian I will be an essential pre-requisite, except in cases where students can satisfy the Head of the Department that they are already competent in Indonesian or Malay. Books. (a) Recommended for preliminary readiňg: Harrison, В.—South-Еast Asia, a Short History. ( Macmillan, 1954. ) (b) Prescribed language textbooks and dictionaries: As for Bahasa Indonesia Part I. Selected extracts from historical and political writings and short stories will be supplied by the Department. (c) Prescribed area study textbooks: Allen, G. C. and Donnithorne, A. G.—Western Enterprise in Indonesia and Malaya. ( Macmillan, 1957. ) Benda, H. J.—The Crescent and the Rising Sun. ( van Hoeve, 1958.) Cowan, C. D. Nineteenth Century Malaya: the Origins of British Political Con- trol. ( O.U.P., 1961.) Emerson, R.—Malaysia. a Study in Direct and Indirect Rule. (Macmillan, 1937.). *Feith, 1.—The Decline of Constitutional Democracy in Indonesia. (Cornell U.P., 1962.) Furnivall, J. S.—Netherlands India. ( C.U.P., 1944.) *Hã11, D. G. E.—A Нistотy of South-еast Asia. (2nd ed., Macmillan, 1964.) *Kahin, G. McT.—Nationalism and Revolution in Indonesia. ( Cornell U.P., 1952.) Kennedy, J.—A History of Malaya, 1400-1959. (Macmillan, 1962.) *Legge, J. D: Indonesia. ( Prentice-Hall, 1965.) McVey, R.—The Rise of Indonesian Communism. (Cornell U.P., 1966.) van Niel, R. The Emergence of the Modern Indonesian Elite. (van Hoeve, 1960.) Vlekke, B. H. M.—Nusantara. (van Hoeve, 2nd ed., 1959.) Wertheim, W. F. Indonesian Society in Transition. (3rd ed., van Hoeve, 1963.) EXAMINATION Two 3-hour papers, together with an oral test in Bahasa Indonesia. Essays and class exercises will be required throughout the year. 52-3. INDONESIAN AND MALAYSIAN STUDIES B A course of study as outlined below, with two lectures and one tutorial per week throughout the year. SYLLABUS Political organization and social structures in Indonesia and Malaysia since independence; nationalism, ideologies and the problems of communal politics. Village communities. Population growth. Cultural continuity and the concern with national identity. (These questions will be studied against the background of other Southeast Asian countries, although primary attention will be given to Indonesia.) The development of Indonesian literature. BOOКS (a) Recommended for preliminary reading: Rose, S.—Democracy in Southern Asia. (b) Prescribed books for language study: Achdiat, . Mihardja—Atheis. Hardjowidjogo—SedjarahК Wayang Purwa. Another novel and a lakon from the wayang repertoire (available within the Department) should also be read during the year. (c) Prescribed area study textbooks: Anderson, B. Mythology and the Tolerance of the Javanese. ( Cornell M.I.P., 1965.) 148 INDONESIAN AND MALAYAN slUDIEs *Feith, H.—The Decline of Constitutional Democracy in Indonesia. (Cornell U.P., 1962. *Ceertz, C.—The Religion of Java. (Free Press, 1960.) Gullick, J. M.—Malaya. (Benn, 2nd ed., 1965.) Hindley, D.--The Communist Party of Indonesia 1951-63. (California U.P.; 1964.) Каhin, G. MоT. ( ed. )—Government aпд Politics of Southeast Asia. ( Cornell U.P., 2nd ed., 1964.) Legge, J. D.—Central Authority and Regional Autonomy in Indonesia. ( Cornell U.P., 1961.) *McVey, R. ( ed.)—Indonesia. ( Human Relations Area Files, 1963.) Purcell, V.—The Chinese in Southeast Asia. ( O.U.P., 2nd ed., 1964.) *Selosoemardjan—Social Changes in Jogjakarta. (Cornell U.P., 1962.) . *Skinner, C. W. (ed.)—Local, Ethnic and National Loyalties in Village Indonesia. (Yale Southeast Asia Studies, 1959.) *Wertheim, W. F.—East-West Parallels. (van Hoeve, 1964.) Further reading guides will be distributed during the year. EXAMINATION Two 3-hour papers and an oral test in Indonesian. Students will also be required to submit written exercises and essays during the year.

HONOURS DEGREE (For possible combinations with this degree see p. 252) 1. Indonesian and Malaysian Studies may at present be taken only in Combined Honour Schools, which will include the four Honours level courses outlined below and the subjects prescribed by the other department concerned. Students will be required to submit a Final Honours essay in their fourth year, the subject of which must be approved in advance by the heads of the two departments. 2. Students who have taken Indonesian Studies I at Honours level and wish to proceed with. Combined Honours Schools should consult the head of department for the appropriate details of the course.

52-1. INDONESIAN PART I (loris) SYLLABUS A course of lectures and classes as for the ordinary degree, with additional classes and reading. BOOКS As prescribed for the ordinary degree. Additional material for reading will be supplied by the Department. EXAMINATION Two 3-hour papers as for the ordinary degree. Candidates for Honours will be required to answer questions demanding wider and more detailed reading.

52-2. INDONESIAN AND MALAYSIAN STUDIES A (Ions) A course of lectures as for the ordinary degree, with additional classes and reading. SYLLABUS As for the ordinary degree, together with more intensive and comparative study of changes in certain political and social institutions of Indonesia, Malaysia and other Southeast Asian countries during the colonial era. Prescribed texts: Cullick, J. M. Indigenous Political Systems of Western Malaya. (Athlone Press, 1959.) Furnivall, J. S. Colonial Policy and Practice. (Macmillan, 1956.) Kahin, G. McT. (ed. )—Covernnwnt and Politics of Southeast Asia. (Cornell U.P., 2nd ed., 1964. ) INDONESIAN AND MALAYAN STUDIES Mills, L. A.—British Malaya 1824-67. (J.R.A.S.M.B., 1962.) Schrfieke, B. Indonesian Sociological Studies, 2 vols. (van Hoeve, 1955-1957.) Swettenham, F.-British Malaya. (Allen & Unwin, 1948.) Tarling, N. Piracy and Politics in the Malay World. (U. of Queensland . 1963.) Р Tregonning, K. G.—Under Chartered Company Rule. (U. of Malaya P., 1958.) Wurtzburg, C. D.—Rages of Singapore. (Hodder & Stoughton, 1954.) EXAMINATION As for the ordinary degree, together with one additional 3-hour paper.

52-3. INDONESIAN AND MALAYSIAN STUDIES В (Ions) SYLLABUS A course of study as for the ordinary degree, with an additional weekly seminar devoted to theories of "the politics of development" as applied to Indonesia and Malaysia. BOOKS As for the ordinary degree, plus the following: Almond, G. and Coleman, J. S. (ed. )—The Politics of the Developing Areas. ( Princeton, 1960.) Geertz, C. (ed. )—Old Societies and Neu) States. (Free Press, 1963.) Ratnam, K. J —Communalism and the Political Process in Malaya. (U. of Malaya Press, 1965.) Riggs, F. W.—Administration in Developing Countries. (Houghton-MifFlin Co., 1964.) EXAMINATION As for the ordinary degree, with one additional three-hour paper.

52-4. INDONESIAN STUDIES C (Ions) A course of study based on a weekly 2-hour seminar. Students taking this subject will be required to have a reading knowledge of Dutch. SYLLABUS A more intensive study of selected problems in the history of Indonesian societies and cultures. Traditional literatures as sources of historical evidence. Study of Jawi script. . Books Hall, D. G. E. (ed. )-Historians of South-east Asia. (O.U.P., 1961. ) Soedjatmoko (ed. )—An Introduction to Indonesian Historiography. ( Cornell U.P., 1965. ) Winstedt, R.—A History of Classical Malay Literature. (J.R.A.S.M.B., Singapore, 1961.) Jassin, H. B.—Kesusasteraan Indonesia Modern dalam Kritik dan Esei, 2 vols. (Gunung Agung, Djakarta. ) Pudjawijatna, I. R. Edjaan Arab bagi Bahasa Indonesia. (Obor, Djakarta.) Lewis, M. B.—A Handbook of Malay Script. ( Macmillan, 1958. ) Zuber Usman—Sari Sastra, 2 vols. (Gunung Agung, Djakarta, 1962.) Gazali Dunia—Batjaan Bart'. (Nusantara, Djakarta. ) Extracts from: Hikajat Hang Tuah Hikajat Abdullah. Sedjarah Melaju.

150 DEPARTMENT OF ITALIAN Head of Department: Mr C. A. McCORMICK, В.А. ( Cantab. ) ORDINARY DEGREE (Details for the honour courses are set out at the end of this section. Croup 1 Subjects offered: Italian I, II, III. BOOKS' The books listed hereunder are for general consultation. Detailed reading lists for each course will be issued at the beginning of the year. Grammars Battaglia, S., e Pernicone, V.—La grammatica italiana. (Loescher, Torino.) Trabalza, C., e Allodoli, E.—La grammatica degl'italiani. (Le Mouler, Firenze.) Jones, F. J.—A Modern Italian Grammar. ( U.L.P. ) Shewring, W. Italian Prose Usage. ( C.U.P. ) Dictionaries Cassell's Italian Dictionary. Purves, J.-English-Italian, Italian-English Dictionary. ( Routledge.) Hazon, M.—Dizionario inglese-italiano, italiano-inglese. ( Garzanti, Milano.) The Cambridge Italian Dictionary. Vol. I: Italian-English. (C.U.P. ) Cappuccini, G., e Migliorini, B.-Vocabolario della lingua italiana. (Paravia, Torino.) Zingarelli, N.Vocabolario della lingua italiana. ( Zаґіicћеш, Bologna.) Panzini, A.—Dizionario moderno. ( Hoe li, Milano.) Gabrielli, A.Dizionario linguistico moderno. ( Mondadori, Milano.) Histories of Literature Wilkins, E. H.History of Italian Literature. ( Harvard U.P. ) Whitfield, J. H.—History of Italian Literature. (Penguin.) Sapegпo, N.—Compendio di storia della letteratura italiana. (La Nuova Italia, Firenze.) Rossi, V.—Storta della letteratura italiana. (Vallardi, Milano.) Flora, F.—Storia della letteratura italiana. (Mondadori. Milano.) Various authors—Storia letteraria d'Italia. (Vallardi, Milano.) Histories Salvatorelli, L.—Sommario della storia d'Italia. (Einaudi, Torino.) Rodolico, N.-Storia degli italiani. (Sansoni, Firenze.) Trevelуaa, J. P.-A Short History of the Italian People. (Alen & Unwin.)

54-1. ITALIAN PART I A course of four lectures per week, with one tutorial class throughout the year. This course assumes that students have reached matriculation standard in Italian and is a prerequisite for Italian part II. External tuition is available in Italian part I. External students should contact the head of department at the beginning of the year. 151 FACULTY OF ART3 HANDBOOK SUMMER SCHOOL An intensive Summer School, to be followed by two hours per week extra tuition throughout the year, may be available for a limited group of students with no previous knowledge of Italian but with proved language learning ability who wish to complete Italian I. Selection for admission to the group will be based on personal interview. Students interested must contact the Department not later than February 15. SYLLABUS (i) Translation of prescribed texts and unseen translation. (ii.) Translation into Italian; composition in Italian; grammar and syntax. ( iii) Dictation, conversation, phonetics. (iv) Study of selected literary works, prose and verse. (v) Introduction to History of Italian Literature. BOOKS (a) Recommended for preliminary reading: Cole, J. P. Italy. (Chatto & Windus. ) Pettoello, D.—An Outline of Italian Civilization. (Cassell.) Solmi, A.—The Making of Мodeгі Italy. (Benn.) Salvadori, 1.—Italy. ( Prentice-Hall.) (b) Prescribed textbooks: *McCornůck, C. A.—Basic Italian Grammar. ( Cheshire. ) *Tomasi di Lampedusa, G.—Ii Gattopardo. (Universale Economica Feltrinelli, Milano.) *Levi, C. Cristo si è f ermato a Eboli. ( rr . ) *Cerutti, T.—A Guide to Composition inНа Italian.ар (C.U.P.) Other texts to be prescribed. N.B. Students intending to proceed beyond Italian part I are strongly recommended to acquire Cappuccio, C.—Storia della letteratura italiana. (San- sonf, Firenze.) EXAMINATION Two 3-hour papers (the first on unseen translation into English, translation of prescribed texts and composition: the second on part (iv) of the syllabus); an oral test of 15 minutes; terminal tests on translation into Italian and dictation, which must be completed before the written examination. Class work will be taken into account in the determining of examination results.

54-2. ITALIAN PART II A course of four lectures, with one tutorial class throughout the year. External tuition is available. External students should contact the head of department at the beginning of the year. SYLLABUS (i) The literature of the Renaissance with historical background. (ii) Special literary study of Manzoni. ( iii) Special literary study of 20th century authors. (iv) Translation into Italian. (v) Translation into English, unseen and prepared. (vi) Dictation, conversation. ESSAY WORK Students are required to submit an essay on some aspect of the literature studied. BOOKS (a) Recommended for preliminary reading: Burckhardt, J.—The Civilization of the Renaissance in Italy. (Phaidon.) Crawford, R. M.—The Renaissance and Other Essays. (M.U.P.) Ross, J. B., and McLaughlin, M. M. (eds.)—The Portable Renaissance Reader. (Viking, N.Y.) (b) Prescribed textbooks: 152 TTAI.IAN *McCormick, C. :así Italian Grammar. ( Cheshire. ) Cappuccio, C.—АStoriaВ dellaс letteratura #altana. ( Sansoni, Firenze. ) *Palanza, U.—Guida aila letteratura contemporanea. (Società Editrice Dante Aligghieri, Milano. ) *Piгandеllо, L.—Set personaggi in cerca d'autore. ( Biblioteca Moderna Mondadori, Milano.) *Pirandello, L.-II fu Mattia Pascal. (Mondadori Gli Oscar, Milano.) *Manzoni, A.—I Promessi Sposi. (ed. Russo.) (La Nuova Italia, Firenze.) *Quasimodo, S.—Poesie. (Mondadori Gli Oscar, Milano.) *Machiavelli, N.-11 Principe e discorsi. ( Universale Economica Feltrinelli, Milano.) *Ariosto, L.—Orlando furioso. 4 vols. ( Biblioteca Universale Rizzoli, Milano.) Other modem novels to be prescribed. EXAMINATION Three 3-hour papers ( the first on unseen translation into English and 20th century authors; the, second on Renaissance literature and Manzoni; the third on translation of prescribed texts and an essay in Italian ). Terminal tests on translation into kalian and dictation, which must be completed before the written examination. Class work will be taken into account in the determining of examination results. 54-3. ITALIAN PART III A course of four lectures with one tutorial hour throughout the year. External students should contact the head of the department at the beginning of the year. SYLLAВUS (i) The literature of the 14th century with special reference to Dante, Petrarch and Boccaccio. (ii) Special literary study of a modem author. ( iii) Translation into Italian. (iv) Translation into English, prepared and unseen. (v) Dictation, conversation. ESSAY WORK Students are required to submit an essay in Italian on Dante. BOOKS (a) Recommended for preliminary reading: As for Italian II. (b) Prescribed textbooks: *Russo, L.—I classici italiani. Vol. I, Part I. ( Sansoni, Firenze. ) *Alighieri, D.--La Divina Commedia, Vol. I. Inferno: A cura di Natalino Sapegno. (La Nuova Italia, Firenze. ) *Boccaccio, G.—.Il Decamerone. Con un' p ndic delle opere minori. A cura di L. Russo. ( Sansoni, Firenze. ) ар е е Cappuccio, C.-Storia della letteratura italiana. (Sansoni, Firenze.) *Brancati, V.—I piaceri. ( Bompiani, Milano. ) *Braneati, V.-I1 vecchio con gli stivali. ( Bompiani, Milano.) *Braneati, V.—Gii anni perduti. (Bompiani, Milano.) EXAMINATION . Three 3-hour papers (the first on unseen translation into English, and on the prescribed modern author; the second on Dante; the third on 14th century literature). Terminal tests on translation into Italian and dictation which must be completed before the written examination. An oral test of twenty minutes. R. SCHOOL OF ITALIAN LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE Combined honours courses are available with most other subjects. Students should consult the department for full details and advice in planning their courses. 153 FACULTY OF ARTS HANDBOOK 1. The course for the degree with honours in the school of Italian Language and literature will comprise the following subjects: Italian part I Italian part II Course A Italian part II Course B Italian part III Literature Italian part III Language Italian part IV Literature Italian part IV Language in accordance with the details set out below. Candidates for the degree with honours must take also three additional subjects at pass or honour standard, two of which should form a sub-major. A knowledge of Latin, particularly in the philological sections of the course, will be assumed and is indispensable for this part of the work. 2. In their first year, candidates in the honour school will take the honour course in Italian part I, and two additional subjects ( one of which will normally forni part of a sub-major) approved by the head of the department. Admission to the higher years of the course is conditional upon satisfactory performance in this First Year, and students must be approved by the faculty of Arts as candidates for the degree with honours before entering the Second Year of the honour school. The head of department will normally recommend such approval for candidates who have gained at least second class honours in Italian. part L Other candidates who wish to continue in the honours school must interview the head of department, who will be guided in his recommendation by the merits of the case. A student who has completed the First Year of the course for the ordinary degree and has passed in Italian part I may, with the permission of the faculty, enter the honour school. Such a student must make special application to the faculty, through the sub-dean, and, if permission is granted the faculty will prescribe what further work must be completed before the student is allowed to proceed to the final examination. 3. In their Second Year, candidates will take the two honour courses, Italian part II Course A and Italian part II Course B and the second part of their sub- major or additional remaining subject. In order, to proceed to the Third Year, they will be required to be "recommended to proceed" at the end of the Second Year. 4. In their Third Year candidates will take the honour courses Italian part III Literature and Italian part III Language. In their fourth year, candidates will take the honour courses, Italian part IV Literature and Italian part IV Language. The Final examination will be held in two parts, part I at the end of the Third Year, and part II at the end of the Fourth Year, and will comprise the following tests: (a) At the end of the Third Year: A. Formal Examination Papers: (1) Italian Literature of the 14th century. 2) Italian Literature of the 17th and 18th centuries. 3) History of the Italian Language up to 1300. (4) Pre-Dante Literature. B. Class Tests and Essays: 1) Tests in unseen translation from English into Italian. 2) Test in unseen translation from Italian into English. 3) Essay on Italian Literature of the 17th and 18th centuries. 4) Essay on Dante. 5) Oral test on the structure of modern Italian. (6) Oral test in Italian. (b) At the end of the Fourth Year: A. Formal Examination Papers: (1) Dante. (2) Italian Literature of the 20th century. 154 TTALIAN (3) Italian Language of the 14th and 15th centuries and dialectal texts. (4) History of the Italian Language from 1300. B. Class Tests: (1) Advanced oral test in Italian. (2) Advanced unseen translation into Italian. C. A thesis on an approved topic, to be prepared under the guidance of a supervisor and submitted in third term.

54-1. ITALIAN 'PART I (Ions) A course of five lectures and one tutorial class throughout the year. SYLLABUS As for the ordinary degree, together with special study of the work of G. D'Annunzio. BOOKS (a) Recommended for preliminary reading: As for the ordinary degree. ( b ) Prescribed textbooks: . As for the ordinary degree with the following additional books: D'Annunzio, G. Il f iore della lirica. (ed. Flora. ) (Edizioni Scolastiche Monda- diii, Milano.) Other books of D'Annunzio to be prescribed. *Cappuccio, C. Storia della letteratura italiana. (Sansoni, Firenze.) EXAMINATION Three 3-hour papers ( the first and second as for the ordinary degree, the third on special author); terminal tests, class work and oral test as for the ordinary degree. 55-1. ITALIAN PART II COURSE A (Ions) A course of lectures as for the ordinary degree, together with one additional lee- ture, a seminar and special tutorial assistance throughout the year. SYLLABUS As for the ordinary degree, together with a special study of selected 19th century poetry. BOOKS As for the ordinary degree, with the following additional texts: *Vicinelli, A.—Le ire corone. Poesie a prose di Carducci, Pascoli a D' Annunzio. (Edizioni Scolastiche Mondadori, Milano.) A modern novel to be prescribed. EXAMINATION As for the ordinary degree together with one additional 3-hour paper on the subject for special study and a special oral test.

55-2. ITALIAN PART II COURSE В (Hons) A course of lectures as for the ordinary degree, together with two additional lee- hires, a seminar and special tutorial assistance throughout the year. SYLLABUS As for the ordinary degree together with the following: (i) Aspects of Renaissance literature: in 1968, Ii romanzo cavalleresco. (1) Author for special study: in 1968, Tasso. BOOKS As for the ordinary degree, with the following additional texts: *Tasso, T.—Aminta. (ed., Fassд, Sansoni, Firenze.) 155 FACULTY OF ARTS HANDBOOX

*Тasso, T.—La Gerusalemme liberata. (ed., Momigliano, La Nuova Italia, Firenze.) EXAMINATION As for the ordinary degree, together with one additional 3-hour paper on sec- dons (i) and (ii) of the syllabus. A special oral test. 56-1. ITALIAN PART III LITERATURE (Ions) A course of lectures as for the Ordinary Degree, together with two additional Iectures and tutorial assistance throughout the year. SYLLABUS As for Italian part III, Ordinary Degree, with the addition of the following: (i) Italian Literature of the 17th and 18th centuries with special reference to Metastasio, Goldoni and Parini. (ii) Contemporary Italian authors (Study in seminars of selected texts) . BOOKS As for the ordinary degree, with the following additional prescribed textbooks: *Goldoni, C.—Le opere di Carlo Goldoni. A cura di A. Momigliano. (Loescher, Torino.) *Metastasio, P. Øone abbandonata (ed. Gervasoni, Signorelli, Milano.) *Metastasio, P.—Attilio Regolo. (ed. Marenduzzo, Signorelli, Milano.) *Parini, 0.—Il giorno. (Biblioteca Universale Rizzoli, Milano.) *Parini, G.—Le Odi. (Biblioteca Universale Rizzoli, Milano.) EXAMINATION Two 3-hour papers (one on 14th century literature (as for Part III pass) and one on the Honours syllabus). Class tests in unseen translation from and into Italian. 57-1. ITALIAN PART III LANGUAGE (Ions) A course of lectures as for the ordinary degree, together with three additional lectures throughout the year. SYLLABUS (i) The development of Italian from Latin. (ii) Study of selected texts. (iii) The history of the Italian language to the present day. (iv) Contemporary Italian authors (Study in seminars of selected texts.) BOOKS (a) Recommended for preliminary reading: Migliorini, B.—Linguistica. (Le Moonier, Firenze.) (b) Prescribed textbooks: *Migliorini, B.—Storia della lingua italiana. (Sansoni, Firenze.) *Dionisotti, C., and Grayson, C.—Early Italian Texts. (Blackwell, Oxford.) EXAMINATION Two 3-hour papers (one on parts (i) and (ii) of the syllabus, the other on Part (hi) ). 56-2. ITALIAN PART IV LITERATURE (Ions) A course of two or more lectures with seminars throughout the year, together with such tutorial assistance as is necessary. SYLLABUS (i) Dante. (6) Italian literature of the 20th century. (iii) Spoken Italian. (iv) Advanced unseen translation into Italian. 156 TTAI..IAЛT ESSAY WORK Each candidate will be required to prepare under the guidance of a supervisor and submit in third term a thesis in Italian on an approved topic of his choice. BOOKS Prescribed textbooks: *Spagпo1etti, G. Poesta italiana contemporanea. (Luanda, Parma.) For the course on Dante students should possess their own copies of La Divina Commedia and La vita nuova. Recommended editions are: Alighieri, D.—La Divina Commedia. A cura di N. Sapegno. (La Nuova Italia, Firenze.) Alighieri, D.—La vita nuova. A cura di T. Casini. ( Sanson, Firenze.) A reading list will be sent to students early in the preceding long vacation. EXAMINATION Two 3-hour papers ( one on section (i) of the syllabus, the other on section (ii) ); an oral examination on aspects of the year's work; class tests on translation into Italian; the thesis mentioned above. 57-2. ITALIAN PART IV LANGUAGE (Ions) A course of two lectures throughout the year. SYLLABUS (i) Linguistic history of medieval Florence. Florentine vernacular in the XIIIth and XIVth centuries and comparison with other Tuscan vernaculars. The principal dialects of Italy. Detailed study of non-literary Tuscan and non-Tuscan texts. (ii) Dante's language and his linguistic writings. ( iii) Pre-Dante literature: philological studies in the literature of the Duecento. BOOKS Prescribed textbooks: Migliorini, В.—Storia della lingua italiana. (Sansoni, Firenze.) Migliorini, B., and Folena, G.—Testi non-toscani del Trecento. (Soćietà Tipo- grafica Modenese, Modena.) Migliorini, В., and Folene, G.—Testi non-toscani del Quattrocento. ( Society Tipografica Modenese, Modena. ) Dionisotti, C., and Grayson, C.—Early Italian Texts. ( Blackwell, Oxford.) Alighieri, D.—De vulgar{ eloquentia. (ed. Mango. Le Monnier, Firenze.) Other texts to be prescribed. EXAMINATION An essay, to be handed in at the beginning of Term III, on part (ii) of the syllabus. Two three-hour papers, the first on part (i), the other on part (iii) of the syllabus. Note: Students proceeding to Italian Part IV Language will be required, during the preceeding Summer Vacation, to complete a written assignment and to hand it in at the beginning of the year. MASTER OF ARTS 58-4. R. SCHOOL OF ITALIAN LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE Candidates will, under supervision, prepare a thesis in Italian, and will be required to report to their supervisor regularly during the year. They will be advised of a suitable course of reading and may be required to pass an oral examination covering the general field of their research. An entry form for examination for higher degrees must be submitted to the Registrar. Three copies of each thesis (quarto, typewritten, double-spaced) should be submitted, one of which will be deposited in the University Library. In certain cases candidates may also be required to pass a written and oral examination cm subjects approved by the head of the department. 157 DEPARTMENT OF MATHEMATICS Professor of Pure Mathematics and Head of Department: Professor E. R LOVE, B.A. (leib. and Camb.), Ph.D. (Camp. ) Professor of Applied Mathematics: Acting Professor W. W. Wood, Ph.D. (Cantab.), B.A., B.Sc. ORDINARY DEGREE ( Details for the honours degree are set out at the end of this section.) SUBJECTS OFFERED Applied Mathematics I, II, III and General Mathematics, in group 4 of the course. Pure Mathematics I, II, III in group 3 of the course. Evening lectures (alternative to the main day lectures) are given in Pure Mathematics I, II and Applied Mathematics I, II. In the other subjects the time- table is fixed so as to suit, as far as possible, both full- and part-time students. INTRODUCTION For those who are interested primarily in the principles and uses of mathematics and mathematical methods, Pure Mathematics part I and Applied Mathematics part I together constitute the basic course; but for those whose formal mathematical studies are likely to be confined to one year, General Mathematics is an alternative providing a somewhat wider and more superficial cover. Tutorial classes will be held in Pure and Applied Mathematics part I and General Mathematics, and practice classes in Pure and Applied Mathematics parts II and III. The work done in these classes will carry some weight in the annual examination. Ехтхвwлi. Sтwгкs Candidates in any of Pure Mathematics parts I. II, Applied Mathematics parts I, II, by external study, will be supplied with a synopsis of the appropriate course and with detailed references to textbooks. They will be supplied also with sheets of practice examples and, in certain subjects, with typed notes on isolated topics. They may submit examples for correction and may consult the appropriate lecturer or professor as to points of difficulty which they encounter in their studies, but apart from this they cannot be given detailed tuition. Entries for external study in the above subjects at the honour standard, or in any other mathematical subjects, will not be accepted.

VACATION READING Students are expected to read (especially during the summer vacations) substantial portions of at least two of the books listed under "Preliminary Reading' for the several subjects. Many of the books are available in paperback editions. In addition, attention is called to the following books on the history of mathematics. Struik, D. J: Concise History of Mathematics. ( Dover. ) Turnbull, H. W.—The Great Mathematicians. ( Methuen.) Bell, E. T.—Men of Mathematics. (Pelican.) Sarten, C. History of Mathematics. (Dover.) looper, A. Makers of Mathematics. (Faber.) Van der Waerden, B. L.-Science Awakening. (Groningen.) Dantzig, T.—Bequest of the Greeks. (Allen & Unwin.) Boyer, C. B. History of the Calculus. (Dover.) 384-1. PURE MATHEMATICS PART I A course of three lectures and one tutorial class per week throughout the year. Allocation to lecture groups will be listed on the notice boards of the Mathematics Department in the week preceding first term. 158 MATHEMATICs SYLLABUS (i_) Algebra and Geometry. Vector algebra. Analytical geometry in space. Sets and groups. Elementary matrices. Determinants. Complex numbers. (ii) Calculus. Differentiation and integration, with the usual applications. Sketching graphs. The standard elementary functions. Functions of two variables. Infinite series. Differential equations. (iii) Additional topics may be given, selected from: analytical plane geometry, conic sections, introduction to real numbers. It will be assumed that students attending this course have passed both the subjects Pure Mathematics and Calculus and Applied Mathematics, or the one subject Pure Mathematics ( Alternative Syllabus ), at the Matriculation Examination. BOOКS (a) Preliminary reading: One or more of the following: Room, T. G., and Mack, J. 1.—The Sorting Process. (Sydney U.P. ) Sav у er, W. W.—Mathematician's Delight. (Pelican.) Titchmarsh, E. C,—Mathematics for the General Reader. ( Hutchinson.) Dantzig, Т.—Number, The Language of Science. (Anchor.) Northrop, E. P.—Riddles in Mathematics. (Pelican.) Hooper, A.—Makers of Mathematics. ( Faber. ) Turnbull, H. W.—The Great Mathematicians. ( Methuen.) ( b ) Prescribed textbooks: Thomas, C. B.—Calculus and Analytic Geometry. ( Addison-Wesley. ) Fisher, R. C., and Ziebuhr, A. D.—Calculus and Analytical Geometry. ( 2nd ed., Prentice-Hai.) І altern.* Courant, R., and John, F. Introduction to Calculus and Analysis. (Wiley.) Maxwell, E. A.—Algebraic.Structure and Matrices. (C.U.P.) A book of mathematical tables. ( Кауе and Laby, Four-figure Mathematical Tables (Longmans) will be provided in examinations.) (c) Recommended for reference: Ferrer, W. L. Higher Algebra for Schools. (Oxford.) McArthur, N. and Keith, A.Intermediate Algebra. ( Methuen.) Cow, Margaret, M. Pure Mathematics. (English Universities Press.) Bowran, A. P.—A Boolean Algebra. (Macmillan.) Dinkines, Flora—Abstract Mathematical Systems. (Appleton-Century.) Weatherbu,rn C. E.Elementary Vector Analysis. (Bell.) Hummel, J. A.—Vectors. (Addison-Wesley, Paperback.) (d) Students who are aiming at honours may also use with profit: Ferrar, W. L. Higher Algebra, the sequel, starting with ch. XV. (Oxford.) Durell, C. V., and Robson—Advanced Algebra, vols. 1 and 2. (Bell.) Durell, C. V., and Robson—Advanced Trigonometry. (Bell.) Apostol, T. М.—Calculus, Vol. I. (2nd ed., Int. Stud. Ed., Blaisdell.) EXAMINATION. Two 3-hour papers. • Each lecturer will advise on the text be prefers.

384-2. PURE MATHEMATICS PART IL PASS A course of three lectures per week with practice classes throughout the year. Allocation to lecture groups will be listed on the notice boards of the Mathe- matics Department in the week preceding first term. SYLLABUS Complex functions. Exponential and related functions of a complex variable. Differential equations. Standard types of ordinary differential equation of the first and second orders. Singularities of first order equations. Integrals. Infinite and improper integrals. Reduction formulae. Multiple integrals. Curvilinear and surface integrals. Functions of several variables. Analytical solid geometry. Directional derivative, 159 FACULTY OF ARTS ØBOOY tangent plane, stationary points, Lagrange multipliers. Change of variables. Linear algebra. Linear transformations. Matrix algebra. Introduction to eigen values and eigenvectors. Convergence. Limits of functions. Positive term series, comparison and ratio tests. Absolute and conditional convergence. Power series. Approximations by series. Series solution of differential equations. Mappings. Real plane to real plane; Jacobian, with applications. DifTerentiable functions of a complex variable. Sets and Groups. Elementary theory. BOOKS (a) Preliminary reading: at least two of the following: Sawyer, W. W.—Prelude to. Mathematics. (Pelican.) Courant, R., and Robbins, H. E.—What is Mathematics? ( 0.ІУ.Р. ) Polya, G.—How to solve it. (Anchor.) Pedoe, D.—The Gentle Art of Mathematics. (Pelican.) Reid, C. Introduction to Higher Mathematics. (Routledge & kegan Paul.) (b) Prescribed text books: Maxwell, E. A.—Algebraic Structure and Matrices. (C.U.P.) and one of the following: Maxwell, E. A.-Analytical Calculus, vols. III and IV. (C.U.P.) Thomas, G. B.—Calculus and Analytic Geometry. (Addison-Wesley.) Courant, R.—Differential and Integral Calculus. Vols. I and II. (Blackie.) Chisholm, J. and Morris, R.—Mathematical Methods for Physics, vol. II. (North- Holland.) *Brand, L.—Advanced Calculus. (Wiley.) *Fulks, W.—Advanced Calculus. (Wiley.) • Recommended only for those intending to do Pure Matbematics Part IIIA. EXAMINATION. Two 3-hour papers.

385-1. and 385-2. PURE MATHEMATICS PART III PASS Course A and Course B each consist of three lectures per week, with practice classes, throughout the year; together with a project. The project for Course A has the form described below in ( i ) ; that for Course B consists of essay assignments. Course A is concerned with precise mathematical analysis and with mathematical techniques relevant to the exact sciences. Course B is designed mainly for those intending to teach mathematics subjects in schools; it is also appropriate to those whose interest in mathematics is as an element of general culture rather than as a tool of trade. Course A consists of units (i), (u), (iii ), (iv), (v) listed below. Course B consists of units (iv ), (v ), (vi ), ( vii) , and one unit selected from ( viii ), (ix) and (x ); together with two essays and vacation reading, as prescribed in lectures. Units (iv) and (v) will if possible be given in separate lecture groups to the two courses. Units (viii ), (ix) and (x) may not all be available in the one year. Instruction sheets for the vacation task for Course A and for the essay assign- rents for Course B will be available from the Mathematics Department in December, before the courses begin. The work done in these projects will carry weight in the examination. Students entered for Course A may be permitted, if they apply, to offer one of units (vi), (viii) , (ix) or (x) in place of (iii). Candidates who do sufficiently well in Course A may, if they apply, be admitted to Pure Mathematics III Honours Course in a subsequent year. SYLLABUS (i) Numerical Mathematics or Theory of Numbers or an alternative assignment, to be done in the long vacation preceding the course; no lectures given. Intending students should obtain the exercises and instructions from the Mathematics Depart- ment in December or January before the course begins and should hand in their work complete not later than 31 March. This work will carry some weight in the examination. 160 МА ЕМА тгs

Numerical Mathematics. Exercises on summation of series, difference tables, interpolation, integration, solution of differential equations, curve fitting, simultaneous linear equations and determinants. Calculating machines will be available for this work, on request, and may be used in the Mathematics department. It will be necessary to obtain, and to ready relevant parts of: Noble, B.—Numerical Methods, vols. I and II. ( Oliver & Boyd.) Theory of Numbers. Exercises on prime numbers, factorization, congruences, quadratic residues, co tin fractions, Diophantine approxhnation, quadratic forms. In addition to the exercisesп иеб and instructions referred to above, it will be necessary to obtain and mad: Davenport, H.—The Nigher Arithmetic. (Hutchinson.) A student who is studying, or who has passed, Theory of Computation part I, must choose the Theory of Numbers assignment. A student who chooses the Theory of Numbers assignment cannot Include topic (viii) as an examinable part of this subject. (ii) Analysis (a ) ( about 25 lectures) : Convergence of sequences. Series; absolute and conditional convergence. Multi- plication of serie'. Continuous and differentiatea functions of one real variable. Convergence of infinite ind improper integrals. Continuous functions of several variables; implicit functions. Functions defined by integrals. Multiple integrals. ( ) Analysis (b) (about 15 lectures): ` ш Uniform convergence of series of functions, with applications to power series. Fourier series. (iv) Linear Algebra ( about 20 lectures ) Mappings and linear transformations. Vector spaces. Matrix algebra. Characteristic polynomial; eigenvalues. (v) Functions of a Complex Variable (about 15 lectures): Differentiability. Conformal mapping. Contour integration. Residues. (vi) Noi -Euclidean Ceoinetrii ( about 15 lectures) : Projective geometry. Conics. Hyperbolic and Riemannian geometries. (vii) Abstract Algebra (about 15 lectures) : Groups. Rings. Lattices. (viii) Theory of Numbers (about 15 lectures) : Factorization. Congruences. Diophantine equations. (ix) Special Functions. (about 15 lectures) : Boundary value problems with linear partial differential equations. Legendre polynomials. Bessel functions. (x) Statistics (about 15 lectures):. . Theory of probability. Statistical distributions. . BOOKS. (a) Rпcoтптenдед for preliminary reading: Bell, E. T.-Mathematics, Queen and Servant of Sciвncв. (McGraw-Hill.) asner, E., and Newman, J. R.—Mathematics and the Imagination. (Bell.) Potya,К G.—.Induction and Analogy in Mathematics. ( Princeton.) . olya, G. Patterns of Plausible Inference. (Princeton.) Sawyer,Р W. W: A Concrete Approach to Abstract Algebra. (Freeman.) Adler, I.—The New Mathematics. (Mentor.) Meserve, B. E.—Fundamental Concepts of Algebra: (Addison-Wesley.) Meserve, B. E.—Fundamental Concepts of Geometry. (Addison-Wesley.) Struik, D. J.—Concise History of Mathematics. (Dover.) Boyer, C. . Bistory of the Calculus. (Dover.) Dantzig, T.В Bequest of the Greeks. (Allen & Unwin.) Van der Waerden, B. L.—Science Awakening. (Groningen.) (b) Prescribed textbooks: (1) and (iii) Thomas, G. B.—Limits. (Addison-Wesley.) Brand, L.—Advanced Calculus. (Wiley.) Courant, R.—Differential and Integral Calculus. 2 vols. (Blackie. ( alУera. ) 1В1 FACULTY OF ARTS HANDBOOK (iv) Munkres, J. P.—Elementary Linear Algebra. (Addison-Wesley.) Ayres, F.—Theorems and Problems of Matrices. (Schaum. ) Aitken, A. C.—Determinants and Matrices. (Oliver & Boyd.) - (altern.) Hohn, F. E.—Elementary Matrix Algebra. (Macmillan.) (v) to (x) As advised in lectures. EXAMINATION Two 3-hour papers.

386. GENERAL MATHEMATICS A course of three lectures and one tutorial class per week throughout the year. The course is designed for students of the less quantitative sciences, and others who may require more knowledge of elementary mathematical methods and their uses than they have acquired beforehand. It is not a suitable basis for mathematical studies beyond part I, and will normally not be accepted as such without further work and the permission of the head of the department of Mathematics. Students who have passed a Matriculation Mathematics subject, but not in a recent year, are strongly recommended to seek advice as to preparatory work from the Department in January. Students who have not passed a Matriculation Mathematics subject at all are advised to consult the lecturer before applying for enrolment. SYLLABUS The course will aim at covering a fairly wide range of topics selected from those set out below. While attention will be drawn to the meaning and importance of mathematical rigour, the degree to which finer points of argument will be pursued will be conditioned by the scope of the work to be covered. It is intended that the later parts of the syllabus will demonstrate as many applications as possible of the earlier parts, so that the student may see a number of elementary mathematical methods in action. Algebra. Algebra as a means of generalizing and abstracting features of scientific problems. Number systems. Introduction to sets and groups. Complex numbers. Determinants. Finite differences and interpolation. Geometry. Two-dimensional co-ordinate geometry: straight line and circle; elementary properties of conics; tracing of miscellaneous curves. Three-dimensional co-ordinate geometry: straight line and plane; sphere and simple quadrics. Intro- duction to vectors. Calculus. Elementary differentiation and integration with special reference to various curves; equations of tangents and normals; curvature. Partial differentiation. Introduction to multiple integrals. Exponential, logarithmic and other simple series; hyperbolic functions; Taylor series. Mean values. Approximations. Curve fitting. Differential equations. Ordinary differential equations of first order and degree; second order linear equations with constant coefficients and other simple types. Simplest partial differential equations. Probability. Probability as degree of belief; probability and frequency. De- velopment and use of the basic probability theorems. Probability and scientific method. BOOKS (a) Preliminary reading: As for Pure Mathematics Part I. (b) Prescribed textbooks: Gow, Margaret M.—Pure Mathematics. (E.U.P.) Blanton, F. L., and Perry, J. E.—Modern College Algebra. (McGraw-Hill.) McArthur, N., and Keith, A.Intermediate Algebra. (Methuen.) A book of mathematical tables. (Kaye and Laby, Four-figure Mathematical Tables (Longmans) will be provided in examinations.) EXAMINATION. Two 3-hour papers. 162 'L&ТКЕМАТ1Cs 383-L APPLIED MATHEMATICS PART I A course of three Iectures and one tutorial class per week throughout the year. SYLLABUS (i) Functions of two variables. Partial derivative, total derivative. Change of independent variables. Indefinite and definite integral. Differentiation under integral sign. (ii) Continuum mechanics in one spatial dimension. Conservation of mass and similar conservation laws. Kinetic waves; solution by characteristics; surfaces of dis- continuity; applications to open channel and traffic flow. Momentum principle for compressible and incompressible flow; applications to flow in ducts. Sound waves. Elastic springs. ( Ii ) Vectors. Addition and subtraction. Sсаlат and vector product. Triple products. Equation of plane. Angle between line and plane. Differentiation with respect to scalar. Acceleration in plane polar co-ordinates. Angular velocity. (iv) ` Dynamics. Principles of mechanics. Motion of a particle, of a system of particles, and of rigid bodies. (v) Additional topics may be given, chosen from: simple waves, central forces, solution of ordinary linear differential equations with constant coefficients. BOOKS ( a) Preliminary reading: At least two of the following: Kline, M.—Mathematics in the Physical World. ( John Murray.) Mach, E.—The Science of Mechanics. (Ch. 2 and 3.) (Open Court.) Peierls, R. E.—The Laws of Nature. (Allen and Unwin.) Darwin, G. H.—The Tides. (Murray.) Maxwell, J. C.—Matter and Motion. (Dover.) (b) Prescribed textbooks: No textbook is prescribed. Printed notes covering the Continuum Mechanics course will be issued by the Department. (c) Recommended for reference: Bullen, K. E. Introduction to the Theory of Mechanics. SScience Press. (alt.) Synge, J. L., and Griffith, B. A.—Principles of Mechanics. (McCraw—Hill.)) Spain, B.-Vector Analysis. (Van Nostrand.) The books by Mach and Darwin from (a). Prandtl, L.—The Essentials of Fluid Dynamics. (Blackie.) EXAMINATION. Two 3-hour papers.

383-2. APPLIED MATHEMATICS PART II PASS A course of two lectures, with one hour practice class, every week throughout the year. It will be assumed that students are concurrently studying Pure Mathematics Part II or have previously passed that subject. SYLLABUS (i) Vector Analysis. The differential and integral calculus of scalar and vector functions of position, with applications. (ii) Boundary Value Problems. Solution by separation of variables. Introduction to Fourier series, Legendre Polynomials and Bessel functions. (iii) General Dynamics. Lagrange's equations of motion. Small vibrations. (iv) Hydrodynamics. Elements of two- and three-dimensional irrotational flow. BOOKS (a) Preliminary reading: Abbott, A.—Flatland. (Dover.) von karman, T.—Aerodynamics. (McGraw-Hill.) . 163 FACULTY OF ARТs ØBOOt (b) Recommended textbooks: (i) and (ii) Sokolnikoff, I. S,, and Redheffer, R. M.-Mathematics of Physics and Modern Engineering. (1st ed., McGraw-Hill and Kogakueha.) ( 2nd ed., McGraw-10.) ( ) Rutherford, D. E.—Classical Mechanics. (Oliver and Boyd.) (iv)ш Rutherford, D. E. Fluid Dynamics. ( Oliver and Boyd.) (e) Recommended for reference: (i) and (ii) Sokolnikoff, I. S. and E. S.-Higher Mathematics for Engineers and Physicists. ( McGraw-Hill.) Hildebrand, F. B.—Advanced Calculus for Applications. (Prentice-Hall.) Chisholm, J., and Morris, R.—Mathematical Methods for Physics, Vol. II. (North-Holland.) Spiegel, M. R.-Vector Analysis. (Schaum.) (iii) Synge, J. L., and Griffith, B. A.—Principles of Mechanics. (McGraw-Hill.) Ramsey, A. S.—Dynamics, Part II. (C.U.P.) Goldstein, H.—Classical Mechanics. (Addison-Wesley.) Sommerfeld, A.—Mechanics. (Academic Press.) (iv) Milne-Thomson, L. M.—Theoretical Hydrodynamics. (Macmillan.) Prandtl, L., and Tietjens, O. S.—Fundamentals of Hydro- and Aero- mechanics. (Dover. ) Lamb, H. Hydrodynamics. (C.U.P. ) Ramsey, A. S.—A Treatise on H dromechaпics, Part II. (Bell.) Temple, G.—An Introduction toу Fluid Dynamics. (O.U.P.) EXAMINATION. Two 3-hour papers. 383-4. APPLIED MATHEMATICS PART III. PASS A course of three lectures and one practice class per week throughout the year. SYLLAВUS Topics selected from the following . (i) Potential theory, with appcations to electrostatics and gravitation. (ii) Cartesian tensors, with applications to continuum mechanics. ( iii) Fluid dynamics, mainly of inviscid fluids. (ivLinear elasticity. (v) Calculus of variations. (vi) Ordinary differential equations. BOOKS: Recommended for reference: Aris, R. Vectors, Tensors, and the Basic Equations of Fluid Mechanics. (Prentice-Hall.) Ferraro, V. C. A.—Electrоmagnetie Theory. ( London U.P.) Hurewicz, W.—Ordinary Differential Equations. ( M.I.T. ) Ramsey, A. S. Newtonian Attraction. ( C.U.P. ) Sokolnikoff, I. S. Mathematical Theory of Elasticity. ( McGraw-Hill.) Temple, G.—Cartesian Tensors. ( Methuen.) Temple, G.—An Introduction to Fluid Dynamics, ( O.U.P. ) Weinstock, R.—Calculus of Variations. ( McGraw-10.) EXAMINATION. Two 3-hour papers. HONOURS DEGREE D. SCHOOL OF MATHEMATICS (For possible combinations with this school see p. 251) 1. The course for B.A. with honours in Mathematics covers four years, during which the following subjects must be taken: Pure Mathematics parts I, II H, III H, IV. Applied Mathematics parts I, II H, III I, IV, Also, candidates must take additional subjects (one of which must be Physics part I), so as to make up a total of eleven in all, and must qualify in Science French or Science German or Science Russian as prescribed for the B.Sc. degree, and must 164 MATØATICS present a thesis on some approved topic in the final year. The full course will normally be as follows: First Year: Pure Mathematics part I Applied Mathematics part I Physics part I 'An Arts subject (see below). Science Language Second Year: Pure Mathematics part II Honours Applied Mathematics part II Honoůrs Logic or Theory of Statistics part 1 Third Year: Pure Mathematics part III Honours Applied Mathematics part III Honours Fourth Year: Thesis Pure Mathematics part IV Applied Mathematics part IV The details of the Mathematics subjects of this course are given below. Tutorial classes are held in the earlier years only. Students are expected to do reading and exercises related to the lectures throughout the course, and the work so done each year may be taken, into account in the examinations. Students in combined honour courses which include Mathematics will take Pure Mathematics parts I, II H, III H, IV and the following provisions, so far as they are relevant, apply to them. 2. Students proposing to take the Second Year of the honour school of Mathe- matics should normally have obtained at least second class honours in Pure Mathe- matics part I and Applied Mathematics part I. In exceptional circumstances students may be admitted without these qualifications; if admitted they will be advised what reading to undertake in the long vacation. Admission to the Second and higher years of the honour school must be approved by the faculty; candidates should make application as soon as possible after the examination results of the First. Year have been published. 3. In the Fourth Year, candidates will carry out, under direction, a study of a special topic in pure or applied mathematics, involving the reading and collation of the relevant mathematical literature, and will present a thesis embodying this work. The topic will be chosen, in consultation with the staff of the department, at or before the beginning of the first term, and the thesis will be presented not later than the beginning of the third term. The thesis will be taken into account in determining the class list for the final examination. 4. The examinations in Pure Mathematics part III and Applied Mathematics part III (two papers in each) , held at the end of the Third Year, will count as the tirst section of the final examination. The second section of this examination, held at the end of the Fourth Year, will cover the work of that year ( two papers in each of Pure and Applied Mathematics part IV ), and will include also two general papers relating mainly to the work covered in the second and third years. The results in both sections, as well as the thesis and other mathematical work done during the course, will be taken into account in determining the class list. 5. At the final examination the Wyselaskie Scholarship of $346 in Mathematics is awarded. This award may be held in conjunction with a University research grant. Normally the Wyselaskie scholar will be required to pursue study or research in Mathematics or some other subject. See Calendar, regulation 6.7. 6. For students majoring in Mathematics who wish to pursue Physics or Chemistry to part II level the В.Sа. degree is available under the provisions of section 9, regulation 3.20, in the Calendar. Such students may further proceed to the degree of В.Sc. with honours on completing the Fourth Year of the honours school of Mathematics. 7. The Professor Wilson Prize and the Professor Nanson Prize are awarded in alternate years for the best original memoir in Pure or Applied Mathematics. Candi- dates must be graduates, of not more than seven years' standing from Matriculation. See regulation 6.72(2) and (14) in the University Calendar. • The fourth subject in First Year is to be chosen from any of the groups, but must not be one of Chemistry. Biology or Geology. 165 FACULTY OF "RTS HANDBOOK

VACATION READINС Students are expected to read ( especially during the summer vacations ) substantial portions of at least two of the books listed under "Preliminary Reading' for the several subjects. Many of the books are available in paperback editions. In addition, attention is called, to the following books on the history of mathematics. Struik, D. J. Concise History of Mathematics. ( Dover. ) Turnbull, H. W.—The Great Mathematicians. ( Methuen.) Bell, E. T.—Men of Mathematics. (Pelican.) Sarien, G. History of Mathematics. (Dover.) Hooper, A.—Makers of Mathematics. (Faber.) van der Waerden, B. L-.—Science Awakening. ( Groningen.) Dantzig, T.—Bequest of the Greeks. ( Allen & Unwin.) Boyer, C. В.—History of the Calculus. (Dover.) 384-1. PURE MATHEMATICS PART I (See page 158) 384-3. PURE MATHEMATICS PART II HONOURS A course of four lectures per week in the first two terms, and three in the third term, with tutorial work. This course may be taken by those who have obtained adequate honours in Pure Mathematics I and by those who have passed satisfactorily in Pure lathe, matics II, subject to the approval of the faculty. SYLLABUS (i) Numerical Mathematics or Theory of Numbers or an alternative assignment, to be done in the long vacation preceding the course; no lectures given. Intending students should obtain the exercises and instructions from the Mathematics department in December or January before the course begins. and should hand in their work complete not later than 31 March. This work will carry some weight in the examination. The details of these assignments are as follows: Numerical Mathematics. Exercises on summation of series, difference tables, Inter- polation, integration, solution of differential equations, curve fitting, simultaneous linear equations and determinants. Calculating machines will be available for this work, on request, and may be used in the Mathematics department. It will be necessary to obtain, and to read relevant parts of: Noble, B. Numerical Methods, vols. I and II. ( Oliver & Boyd.) Theory of Numbers. Exercises on prime numbers, factorization, congruences, quadratic residues, continued fractions, Diophantine approximation, quadratic forms. In addition to the exercises and instructions referred to above, it will be necessary to obtain and read: Davenport, H. The Higher Arithmetic. ( Hutchinson. ) (ii) Analysis ( about 60 lectures): Convergence of sequences. Series; absolute and conditional convergence. Differentiable and continuous functions of one real variable. Riemann integration of step functions and bounded functions. Convergence of infinite integrals. Double series, multiplication of series, partial fraction expansions. Uniform convergence of series of functions. Power series, including the elementary functions of a complex variable. Fourier series. Integral transforms. Continuous functions of several variables. Differentiability, change of variables, implicit functions. Functions defined by integrals. Multiple integrals. (iii) Algebra and Geometry (about 30 lectures) : Linear transformations. Vector spaces. Matrix algebra. Characteristic polynomial. Quadratic forms. Systems of linear equations. (iv) Additional topic in Geometry, Algebra or Analysis. (Not more than 10 lectures.) BOOKS (a) Recommended for preliminary reading: Courant, R. and Robbins, H. E.—What is Mathematics? (O.U.P. ) 166 MATHEMATICS Sawyer, W. W.—Prelude to Mathematics. (Pelican.) Reid, Constance—Introduction to Higher Mathematics. (Routledge, Kegan Paul.) Bell, E. Т.—Mathematics, Queen and Servant of Science. ( McGraw-10.) Coxeter, I. S.-Introduction to Geometry; (Wiley.) Hilbert, D., and Cоhn-Vossen—Geometry and the Imagination. (Chelsea.) Kasner, E., and Newman, J. R.—Mathematics and the Imagination. ( Simon & Schuster. ) Stabler,°E. R.—Introduction to Mathematical Thought. (Addison-Wesley.) Waissmann, F.-Introduction to Mathematical Thinking. (Harper Torchbook.) (b) Prescribed textbooks: Ferrar, W. L.-Textbook of Convergence. (O.U.P.)).altern.) Hyslop, J. M.—Infinite Series. (Oliver & Boyd.) J Brand, L.—Advanced Calculus.Calculus. ( Wiley.Wiley. Fulks, W.—Advanced Calculus. Olmsted, J. M. H.-Advanced Calculus. (Appleton.) alters. Buck, R. C.—Advапсeд Calculus. (McGraw-Hill.) Murdoch, D. C.-Linear Algebra for Undergraduates. (Wiley.) l' Ferrer, W. L.—Algebra: Determinants, Matrices, etc. (O.u.P.) . (alters.) Hohn, F. E.—Elementary Matrix Algebra. (Macmillan.) J EXAMÍNATION. Two 3-hour papers.

384-4. PURE MATHEMATICS PART III HONOURS A course of approximately 100 lectures, with guided reading. SYLLABUS (i) Differential Geometry. Curves and surfaces in space. No lectures given. Recommendations for suitable reading should be obtained from the Mathematics Department before or during the long vacation. An alternative topic may be prescribed. (ii) Functions of a Complex Variable. Cauchy's theorems. Conformal mapping. Analytic continuation. Functions defined by integrals. Linear differential equations. Special functions. (iii) Abstract Algebra. Algebraic structures: groups, rings, lattices, fields. (iv) Additional topics selected from: non-Euclidean geometry, projective gel- tnetry, topology, Lebesgue integral, number theory. BOOKS (a) Preliminary reading: As for Pure Mathematics part II ( Ions) with the addition of: Bell, E. T.-The Development of Mathematics.. (McGraw-Hill.) Smith, D. E.—Source Book in Mathematics. (McGraw-Hill or Dover.) Sawyer, W. W. —A Concrete Approach to Abstract Algebra. (Freeman.) Blumenthal, L. M.-A Modern View of Geometry. (Freeman.) Hadamard, J.—The Psychology of Invention in the Mathematical Field. (Dover.) Ро1уа, G. Induction and Analogy in Mathematics. ( Princeton.) Роlуа, G.—Patterns of Plausible Inference. (Princeton.) ( b ) Prescribed textbooks: (i) Coxeter, H. S.—Introdućtion to Geometry. Ch. 17-20. (Wiley.) Weatherburn, C. E.—Differential Geometry. ( C.U.P.) Struik, D. Differential Geometry. (Addison-Wesley.) (altern.) Abram, J.—Tensor Calculus through Differential Geometry. (Butterworth.) (ii) Copson, E. T.—Functions of a Complex Variable. (O.U.P.) Goodstein, R. L.—Complex Functions. (McGraw-Híll.) Hille, E.—Analytic Function Theory. Vol. I. (Blaisdell.) (altern. ) Pennisi, L. L.—Elements of Complex Variables. (Holt, Rine- hart & Winston.) 167 FACULTY OF Alas IANDBOOK

Вirkhоff, G., and Maclane, S.—A Survey of Modern Algebra. ( Macmillan, N.Y. ) (0) Dubisch, R. Introduction to Abstract Algebra. ( Wiley.) (altern.) Patterson, E. M., and Rutherford, D. E. Elementary Abstract Algebra. ( Oliver & Boyd.) EXAMINATION. Two 3-hour papers.

384-5. PURE MATHEMATICS PART IV A course of about 100 lectures, arranged as a series of units of between 12 and 20 lectures each; some of these units are alternatives. In addition one thesis on a topic in pure or applied mathematics, or both, is required for subjects 384-5 and 383-6 jointly, as described in section 3 of the preamble (see p. 165). SYLLABUS (i) Lebesgue measure and integration. Fourier analysis. Group theory. (ii) Topics selected from abstract algebra, topology, functional analysis, generalized functions, integral equations, algebraic geometry, tensor, calculus, theory of groups, elliptic functions, functions of a complex variable, Laplace transform, non-linear diffегепtial equations, mathematical logic, theory of numbers, functional equations.

383-1. APPLIED MATHEMATICS PART I (See page 163)

383-3. APPLIED MATHEMATICS PART II HONOURS A course of three lectures per week throughout the year, with practice classes. SYLLABUS (i) Vector and tensor analysis. The differential and integral calculus of scalar and vector functions of position, with applications to electrostatics. Cartesian tensors. (ii) Boundary value problems. Fourier series, separation of variables techniques, and the simpler properties of Bessel and Legendre tunctions. (iii) General dynamics. Generalized coordinates and the canonical equations of motion. Calculus of variations and the variational principles of mechanics. (iv) Continuum mechanics. Foundations of elasticity and of viscous fluid theory. BOOKS (a) Preliminary reading: As for Applied Mathematics Part II Pass. (b) Recommended textbooks: (i) Spiegel, M. R. Vector Analysis. (Schaum. ) (i) Rutherford, D. E. Vector Methods. (Oliver and Boyd.) (ii) Churchill R. V.—Fourier Series and Boundary Value Problems. (McGraw- Нill. 5 ( ш ) Corben, Н. C., and Stehle, P.—Classiсаl Mechanics. (Wiley.) (ii) and (iii) Jaeger, J. C. Introduction to Applied Mathematics. (O.U.P.) (iv) Rutherford, D. E.—Fluid Dynamics. (Oliver and Boyd.) (iv) Sokolnikoff, I. S.—Mathematical Theory of Elasticity. (McGraw-Hill.) EXAMINATION. Two 3-hour papers.

383-5. APPLIED MATHEMATICS PART III HONOURS A course of three lectures per week throughout the year. SYLLABUS (i) Potential Theory. Volume and surface distributions of sources and doublets. Green's function. (ii) Electrostatics and electromagnetism. (iii) Continuum Mechanics. Incompressible viscous fluids, boundary layers, irrotational flow. 168 MATHEMATICS Books Recommended textbooks: Jeffreys, H. Cartesian tensors. (C.U.P.) Panofsky, W. K., and Phillips, M.—Classical Electricity and Magnetism. (Addison-Wesley.) Phillips, H. B.—Vector Analysis. (Wiley.) Ramsey, A. S.—A Treatise on Hy romechanics. Part II: Hydrodynamics. (Bel.) Rutherford, D. E.—Fluid Dynamics. (Oliver and Boyd.) EXAMINATION. Two 3-hour papers.

383-6. APPLIED MATHEMATICS PART IV A course of about 100 lectures, arranged as a series of units of between 12 and 20 lectures each. In addition one thesis on a topic in Pure or Applied Mathematics, or both, is required for subjects 384-5 and 383-6 jointly, as described in section 3 of the preamble (see p. 165). SYLLABUS (i) Mathematical methods. Partial differential equations, Laplace transforms, asym totic expansions, special functions, numerical analysis. (ii) Topics selected from: compressible flow, incompressible flow, magneto hydrodynamics, elasticity, relativity. BooКS References will be given in lectures. EXAMINATION. Three 3-hour papers.

MASTER OF ARTS 60-2. D. SCHOOL OF MATHEMATICS Candidates will prepare a thesis on some branch of Mathematics, and will be advised as to a suitable course of reading. Regular colloquia will be held to assist candidates in their studies. In addition, candidates must either submit a report of their original work or take a written examination on the subject of their thesis, and on one or more additional subjects which will be announced by 1 May of the year preceding the examination. An entry form for examination for higher degrees must be submitted to the Registrar. Three copies of each thesis (quarto, typewritten, double-spaced) should be submitted, one of which will be deposited in the University Library if approved. Candidates may also be examined orally on the subject of the thesis.

169 DEPARTMENT OF MIDDLE EASTERN STUDIES Head of Department: Professor J. BOWMAN, М.A., B.D. (Glas.), D.Phil. (Oxon), M.A. ORDINARY DEGREE ( Details for the honours degree are set out at the end of this section.? SUBJECTS OFFERED Biblical Studies parts I, II, III. Middle Eastern Studies A, B, C. Hebrew parts I, II, III. Arabic parts I, II, III. Note for Country Students Students wishing to enrol for external study in: Biblical Studies I, II, III Middle Eastern Studies A, B, C. may arrange with the Secretary, Department of Middle Eastern Studies, 25 Royal Parade, Parkville, 3052, for an interview with the lecturer in charge of external studies. Seminars and tutorials for external students will be held at intervals during the year, in Melbourne. Intending students should apply for information about these arrangements to the secretary as soon as possible. Group 5 All enquiries about courses to Professor J. Bowman, Mr. A. D. Hallam or Dr. J. A. Thompson, at Department of Middle Eastern Studies, 25 Royal Pde., Parkville, across the road from the School of Agriculture. 64-1. BIBLICAL STUDIES PART I A course in Biblical Studies consisting of two lectures and one tutorial per week throughout the year. SYLLABUS t A study with commentaries of historical books of the Bible: Samuel, I Kings, Luke and Acts in any English translation. Biblical history up to the end of I Kings will also be studied. The relevance and techniques of Biblical Archaeology and the background of Biblical Literature and Criticism will be dealt with in detail in relation to the Biblical History. One lecture per week will be entirely devoted to Archaeology. BOOKS Prescribed textbooks: Grollenberg, L. H.—Atlas of the Bible. ( Nelson, Edin., 1956.) or Wright, G. E., and Filson, F. V.—The Westminster Historical Atlas to the Bible. ( Westminster Press, Phil., 1945.) Peake's Commentary. ( Nelson, 196.) or A Catholic Commentary on Holy Scripture. ( Nelson, Melb., 1953.) Hastings, j (ed. )-A Dictionary of the Bible. (T. and T. Clark, Edin., 1963.) or Encyclopaedia Migra'it. (Mosad Bialik, Jerus., 1950.) Anati, E. Palestine Before the Hebrews. (Jonathan Cape, 1963.) Pritchard, J. B. (ed. )—Ancient Near East Texts. (Princeton U.P. ) Noth, M.—The History of Israel. (2nd ed., A. and C. Black, London, 1966.) Ricciotti, G.—The History of Israel. (Bruce, Milwaukee, 1955.) Bright, J.—Early Israel in Recent History Writing. (S.C.M. Press, 1956.) Bright, J. History of Israel. (S.C.M. Press, 1960.) de Vaux, R.—Ancient Israel—Its Life and Institutions. (Darton, Longman and Todd, 1962. ) 170 MIDDLE EASTERN STUDIES Wright, G. E.—Biblical Archaeology. (Westminster Press, 1958.) Albright, W. F.—Archaeology and the Religion of Israel. (Johns Hopkins Press, 1946.) Manson, T. W.—Companion to the Bible. (New ed., H. H. Rowley, T. and T. Clark, 1963.) Manson, W,-The Gospel of Luke. (Hodder & Stoughton, 1930.) Conzelmann, H.—The Theology of Saint Luke. (Faber, 1960.) Bruce, F. F.—The Acts of the Apostles. (Tyndale, London, 1951.) Dibelius, .—Studies in the Acts of the Apostles. (S.C.M., 1956.) Thompson,М J. A.—The Bible and Archaeology. (Paternoster, 1963.) EXAMINATION. Two 3-hour papers. 64-2. BIBLICAL STUDIES PART II A course in biblical studies consisting of two lectures and two tutorials per week throughout the year. SYLLABUS' A study with commentaries of the books of Jeremiah, Psalms and Synoptic Gospels in any English translation, and of Biblical history from the beginning of II Kings until the period of the Seleucid dynasty. Special attention will be given to religious thought. The study of Biblical Archaeology will continue together with the study of Biblical Chronology in its relation to Assyro-Babylonian history. Books Special topic for 1968: Prophecy. Lindblom, J.—Prophecy in Ancient Israel. ( Blackwell, 1963.) Prescribed textbooks: As for Biblical Studies part I plus: Skinner. J. Prophecy and Religion. (C.U.P. Paperback.) Weiser, A.—The Psalms. ( E.T., S.C.M., 1964.) Chaire, J.-God's Heralds. ( Wagner, N.Y., 1955.) or Lods, A. Israel: The Prophets and the Rise of Judaism. (Kegan Paul, 1935.) Olmstead, T.—History of Assyria. (U. of Chicago Press, 1951.) Wiseman, D. J.—Chronicles of the Chaldean Kings. ( London, 1958.) Grant, R. 1.—An Historical Introduction to the New Testament. (Collins, 1963.) Dibelius, M. From Tradition to Gospel. (2nd rev. ed. Scribner Library, 1933, N.Y.) Taylor, V.—The Formation of the Gospel Tradition. (2nd ed., Macmillan, 1935.) Cadbury, H. J.—The Making of Luke-Acts. ( Macmillan, 1958.) Bultmann, R. History of the Synoptic Tradition. ( Blackwell, 1963. ) Gospel Parallels. ( First three Gospels following Huck-Lietzmann and using the R.S.V.) EXAMINATION. Two 3-hour papers. 64-3. BIBLICAL STUDIES PART III A course in Biblical Studies consisting of two lectures and one tutorial per week throughout the year. The course will comprise a study of Dead Sea Scrolls in English translation, selected writings from Apocrypha and New Testament; with special reference to Johannine thought and its antecedents; and an introduction to the Biblical text, canon and versions. In addition all students will study Palestinian history from second century В.С. to second century A.D. and either (a) Palestinian archaeology of the Hellenistic and Roman periods, or (b) Pauline Christology. BOOKS (a) Prescribed texts: Caster, T. Н.—Scriptures of the Dead Sea Scrolls. (Seeker & Warburg, 1957.) Josephus—Antiquities; Jewish War. (tr. Whiston; or St. J. Thackeray, H in - mann, 1961.) е е 171 FACULTY OF ARTS ØBOO8 Bowman, J.—The Gospel of Mark. (Brill, Leiden, 1964.) Burrows, M. More Light on the Dead Sea Scrolls. ( Seeker & Warburg, 1956. ) Fritsch, C. T.—The Qumran Community--Its History and Scrolls. ( mill n, N.Y., 1058.) Мае а Stendahl, K.—The Scrolls and the New stаment. ( . . ., 1958.) Mowry, L.—The Dead Sea Scrolls and theТе Early Church.Ѕ С (М University of Chicago Press. ) Charles, R. H. Testaments of the Twelve Patriarchs. (Macmillan, Loud., 1917.) Goodenough, E. R. Jewish Symbols in the Greco-Roman Period. (Bollingen, 1958-9.) Simons, J. Jerusalem in the Old Testament. (Brill, Leiden, 1952.) Bruce, F. F.—The Books and the Parchments. (3rd ed., Pickering & Inglis, 1963.) Hanson, R. P. C.—Tradition in the Early Church. (S.C.M., 1962.) Pfeiffer, R. Н.Н istory of New Testament Times. (A. & C. Black, 1949.) Special Study: Johannine Literature. Grant, R. 1.—An Historical Introduction to the New Testament. (Collins, 1963.) Knox, R. A. New Testament Commentary for English Readers. (Burns, Oates & Washbourne, London, 1953.) Hoskyns, E.—The Fourth Gospel. (ed. Davey, 1956.) Cross, F. L. (ed.)—Studies In the Fourth Gospel. (Mowbray, 1960.) Lightfoot, R. Н.—St. John's Gospel. (ed., C. F. Evans, O.U.P. Paperback, 1963.) A fui list of reference books for Biblical Studies will be available in the Department of Middle Eastern Studies. EXAMINATION. Two 3-hour papers.

MIDDLE EASTERN STUDIES Note: Students who wish to concentrate on Islam or the Modern Middle East or the Ancient Middle East, can do so by choosing the appropriate options. First Year: The Ancient Middle East; or Islam Today—Focus on the Middle East. Second and Third Year programs in this subject alternate thus: Available in 1968: The Modern Middle East; or Comparative Religion—(Classic Themes); or Islam (Medieval). Available in 1969: Comparative Religion (Middle Eastern); or Islam (Teachings and Institutions) ; or Middle Eastern Syrian Christianity.

65-1. MIDDLE EASTERN STUDIES A Either: THE ANCIENT MIDDLE EAST A course of two lectures and one tutorial per week throughout the year. SYLLABUS The study will cover aspects of the rise of literate civilization in the Middle East; lectures will cover Sumero-Babylonian mythology, Canaanite and Egyptian Literature, concepts of social life, and institutions against a background of ancient art, and In the context of comparative religion. BOOKS Prescribed books: Mellaart, J.—Earliest Civilization of the Near East. (Thames and Hudson, 1965.) Hooke, S. H.—Middle Eastern Mythology. (Pelican, 1963.) Frankfort, H.-Ancient Egyptian Religion. (Harper, Torchbooks, 1961.) Frankfort, Н.—Веf оге Philosophy. (Pelican, 1953.) 172 MIDDLE EASTERN STUDIES Gurney, O.—The Hittites. (2nd ed., Pelican, 1954.) Pritchard, J. B. (ed.)—The Ancient Near East. (Princeton and O.U.P., 1958.) or ISLAM TODAY—Focus on the Middle East A course of two lectures and one tutorial per week throughout the year. SYLLABUS A study of the emergence of new movements and religious political concepts: Pan Islamism, Islamic Nationalism, Islamic Socialism. The re-interpretation of islam and the search for Islamic socio-political identity. BOOKS Prescribed books: Cragg, К.-Counsels in Contemporary Islam. ( Islamic Surveys 3.) Gibb H. A. R.—Modern Trends in Islam. ( Chicago, 1950.) Smith, W. C. Islam in Modern History. ( Mentor. ) Binder, L. Ideological Revolution in the Middle East. ( N.Y., 1964.) 65-2. and 65-3. MIDDLE EASTERN STUDIES B AND C THE MODERN MIDDLE EAST A course of two lectures and one tutorial per week throughout the year ( 1968 ). SYLLABUs An introductory study of social, technological and political aspects of the modern Middle East with particular reference to the impact of the Western nations and to the emergence of Israel and the modern Arab states. BOOKS Prescribed books: Fisher, S. N.—The Middle East. A History. ( Land., 1960.) karfat, k. L. Currents of Thought in the Contemporary Middle East. (Luzac, Praeger Special 1967.) Lewis, B.—The Mic)dle East and the West. (Weidenfeld and Nicolson, 1964.) Jacobs, N.—The Sociology of Development—Iran as an Asian case study. (Luzac, Praeger Special, N.Y., 1966.) Abbas Alnasrawi-Financing Economic Development in Iran—the Role of Oil in a Middle Eastern Economy. (Luzac, Praeger Special, N.Y., 1967.) Anderson, M. S.— hè Eastern Question-1774-1923. (Land., 1966.) Hirszowicz, L.—TheТ Third Reich and the Arab East. (Toronto, 1967.) O'Brien, P.—The Revolution in Egypt's Economic System. (Oxford, 1988.) Cremean, C. D--The Arabs and the World. (Praeger, 1963.) or ISLAM (Medieval) A course of two lectures and one tutorial per week throughout the year (1968). SYLLABUS The development of the Islamic Empire from Spain to India and its major contributions in the fields of literature, philosophy and science. BOOКS Prescribed books: Hell, Joseph—The Arab Civilization. ( 2nd ed., Lahore, 1943.) Brockelmann, C.—History of the Islamic Peoples. ( Lind., 1950.) Nicholson, R. A.—A Literary History of the Arabs. ( C.U.P., 1953.) O'Leary, De Lacy—Arab Thought and its place in History. (Routledge, 1953.) Hitti, P. К.—Нistогy of the Arabs. (Macmillan, 1958. ) Von Grunebaum, G. E. Medieval Islam. (Chicago, 1953.) or COMPARATIVE RELIGION (Classic Themes) A course of two lectures and one tutorial per week throughout the year (1968). 173 FACULTY OF ARTS HANDBOOK SYLLABUS An introductory comparative study of basic themes in major Middle Eastern Religions in their classical form. BOOKS Prescribed books: Zaehner, R. C.—The Teachings of the Magi. ( Alen and Unwin.) Zaehner, R. C.—Mysticism, Sacred and Profane. (Oxford.) Spencer S.—Mysticism in World Religion. (Pelican.) iappola, F. C.—Mysticism. (Pelican.) The Koran. (Penguin Classics) 1956.) New English Bible, New Testament. (Penguin.) Buddhist Scriptures. ( Penguin. ) Conze, E. Buddhism. (Harper Torchbook.) Guillaume, A.—Islam. (Pelican.) Smith, W. C.—Religious Atheism. (reprint from Milla-wa-Milla, 1966.) James, E. 0.-Comparative Religion. (University Paperbacks.) Jonas, H.-The Gnostic Religion. (Beacon.)

ISLAM (Teachings and Institutions) A course of two lectures and one tutorial per week throughout the year (1989). SYLLАВUS Islamic Faith and Institutions, including the study of religious movements and sects, and theology. BOOKS Prescribed books: Guillaume, A. Islam. (Pelican, 1955.) Gibb, H. A. R. Mohammedanism. (2nd ed., O.U.P., 1953.) Muhammed Ali—The Religion of Islam. (Shaikh Mohammed Ashraf, Lahore. Gaudefroy-Demombynes, M.—Muslim Institutions. (Allen and Unwin, 1950. Nicholson, R. A.—A Literary Нistоry of the Arabs. (C.U.P., 1953.) Encyclopaedia of Islam. (Brill., Leiden.)

COMPARATIVE RELIGION (Middle East) A course of two lectures and one tutorial per week throughout the year (1989 ).. SYLLАВUs A study of some modern writers in the Middle Eastern Religions, interpreting these religions in the light of modern civilization. BOOKS Prescribed books: Buber, M.—Between Man and Man. ( Fontana. ) Teilhard de Chardin, P.—The Phenomenon of Man. (Fontana.) Smart, N.—World Religions. (Pelican, 1966.) Iqbal, 1.—Reconstruction of Religious Thought in Islam. (Lahore, 1958.)

MIDDLE EASTERN SYRIAN CHRISTIANITY A course of two lectures and one tutorial per week throughout the year (1969). SYLLABUS The origins and development of Middle Eastern Christianity before and after the rise of Islam with especial reference to Persia. BOOKS Prescribed books: Fortesque—The Lesser Eastern Churches. (London, 1913.) Vine, A. R. Nestorian Churches. (Independent Press.) 174 MIDDLE EASTERN STUDIES Joseph, J. :The Nestorian and their Moslem Neighbours. (Princeton, 1961.) Wigram, W. A.—Introduction to the History of the Assyrian Church. (London, 1910.) Theodore on the Nicene Creed. (Woodbrooke Studies, ed. Mingana, A. Vol. 5. Cam. 1932.) (Longmans.) Кelly, J. N. D.—Early Christian Creeds. CROUP 1 All inquiries about courses to Professor J. Bowman, Mr. A. D. Hallam, or Dr. J. A. Thompson at Department of Middle Eastern Studies, 25 Royal Pde., Parkville, across the road from the School of Agriculture.

62-1. HEBREW PART I A course of three lectures and one tutorial per week throughout the year. Students who before their enrolment have not reached leaving or matriculation standard in Hebrew may be required to give evidence of ability to follow the course. Prerequisites for the course are • (a) Matriculation Hebrew, or (b) Intensive Summer School. Intending students for Summer School must consult the Head of the Department not later than the second week in January, 1968. Note: The course is not available for external students. SYLLABUS A study of Biblical texts and History will be compulsory for all students. In addition students must choose one of the following options: (a) Modern Hebrew (b) Post-Biblical Hebrew (c) Additional Biblical Hebrew. (a) Modern Hebrew will consist of a study of selected modern texts together with grammar and prose styles of Modem Hebrew. Tuition will be given in modern conversational idioms. (b) Post-Biblical Hebrew will consist of a study of selected post-Biblical material together with a study of early post-Biblical prose style. (c) Biblical Hebrew will consist of a study of selected Biblical texts together with work on grammar and prose styles, and the study of Exegesis. BOOKS Prescribed texts ( general) : Judges, chaps. 7-9; II Samuel, chaps. 9-15; I Kings, chaps. 17-19. In addition: Option (a) : Selections from the writings of Kimhi, Bar-Joseph, Bialik ( Poetry and Prose) and others in: Chrestomathy Ha-Tsaad ha-Shen{ by I. Radai. Option (b) : Mishnah Berakhoth. Option (c) : Psalms 2, 19, 34, 48, 68, 93,116, 140. N.B. Hebrew Bible. (Any Massoretic text edition; Kittel edition is especially recommended.) For history and commentaries the students are referred to the relevant material in the bibliography of the Biblical Literature and Antiquities part I course Recommended for reference: Koehler, L. and Baumgartner, W.—Lexicon In V.T. Libros. (Brill, 1953.) Cowley, A. E.-Cesenius Hebrew Grammar. (2nd English ed., O.U.P., 1910.) Pfeiffer, R. H.—Introduction to the Old Testament. (Black, 1952.) Brown, Driver, and Briggs—Hebrew and English Lexicon of the Old Testament. (O.U.P., 1906.) 175 FACULTY OF ARTs HANDBOOI

Murtonen, A.—A Concise Grammar for Вi icаl Hebrew. (Melb., 1962.) Kaufman, J. S. (ed. )—English-Hebrew Dictionary. (Dvir, Tel-Aviv, 1929.) Weiser, A.-The Psalms. (5th ed., E.T. S.C.M., 1962.) In addition students are advised to read the relevant material from the reference bibliography of the Biblical Studies part I course. EXAMINATION. Two 3-hour papers.

62-2. HEBREW PART II A course of three lectures and one tutorial per week throughout the year. External studies are not available. SYLLABUS A study of Biblical texts and history will be compulsory for all students who in addition must choose one of the following options: (a) Modern Hebrew b) Post-Biblical Hebrew c) Additional Biblical Hebrew. (a) Modern Hebrew will continue study of selections from Modern Hebrew literature of various styles. Prose composition in Modern Hebrew, Modern Hebrew syntax, and tuition in spoken Modern Hebrew will be taken. (b) The Post-Biblical Hebrew option will consist of a study of basic Qumran documents, Biblical exegesis of the early centuries of this era and selections from the Mishnah. (c) The Biblical Hebrew option will continue special study of Biblical material. together with syntax and prose composition in Biblical styles, and the study of Exegesis. BOOKS Prescribed texts (general) : Isaiah, chaps. 1-6; Jeremiah, chaps. 1-3, 7, 11, 26; Ezekiel, chaps. 33, 34, 36, 37; Pss. 2, 19, 34, 48, 68, 93, 116, 140. In addition: Option ( a ) : Selections from Shamir, Tschernichowsld, Bialik, and. Ahad Ha-Am. (in Chrestomathy Ha-Tsaad ha-Shen{ by I. Radai.) Optionb) : Mishnah Berakhoth; Ben Sira; Breshith Rabba. OptionOption( : Ben Sire; Deut. 5-7, 12, 26, 29, 30. Prescribed books: Weiser, A.—The Psalms. ( 5th ed., E.T. S.C.M., 1962.) Strack, H. L.—Introduction to the Talmud and Midrash. (Jewish Publ. Soc., Philad., 1938.) Gaster, T. H.—The Scriptures of the Dead Sea Sect. (Seeker & Warburg, 1957.) Ben-or Orinowsky, A.—Toledot Hasifrut Hahadasha (3 vols.). (Tel-Aviv, 1946.) Ch. Rabin—The Zadokite Documents. (2nd ed., Oxford.) Murtonen, A.—Annotated Translation of Zadokite Fragments. Burrows, M.—The Dead Sea Scrolls. (London, 1956.) The International Critical Commentary in its relevant parts. Students are also referred to the relevant material in the bibliography for the Biblical Studies part II course. EXAMINATION. Two 3-hour papers.

62-3. HEBREW PART III A course of three lectures and one tutorial per week throughout the year. External studies are not available. SYLLABUS A study of comparative grammar, prose composition and prescribed Biblical texts will be compulsory for all students. In addition students must choose one of the following options: 176 MIDDLE EASØ sTUDIEs (a) Mediaeval and Modem Hebrew ( b) Post-Biblical Hebrew c) Additional Biblical Hebrew. (а ) Mediaeval and Modern Hebrew option will consist of a study of advanced texts, advanced prose composition in Modern Hebrew and essays on mediaeval Jewish philosophers, and Israeli writers and their works. (b) The post-Biblical Hebrew option will consist of advanced study of selected Hebraic writings of the first two centuries A.D. and essays on Dead Sea Scrolls research. (c) The Biblical Hebrew option will continue a special study of selected Biblical literature in the original, together with work on advanced Biblical prose composition and studies on topics of Biblical literature, and Exegesis. BOOKS Prescribed texts (general): Job 1-8; Lam.; Joel.; Deut. 5-7, 12, 28, 29, 30. In addition: Option (a): Selections from writings of Barash, Shimoni, Agnon. Option ( b ) : Selections from the Dead Sea Scrolls: Milhamoth: The essiani Rule; Selections from Wertheimer's Batte Midrashoth. М с Option (o) : Isaiah 40-50; Eccles. Recommended for reference: Вarthélémу, and Mhik, J. T.—Discoveries in the Judaean Desert. ( 0.U.P., 1955.) Sukenik, E. L.—The Dead Sea Scrolls of Hebrew University. (Hebrew Univer- sity, Jerusalem, 1950.) Mansoor, M.-The Thanksgiving Hymns. ( BrIl, Leiden, 1961.) Cross, F. M., Jr.—The Ancient Library of Qumran. (London, 1958.) The International Critical Commentary in its relevant parts. Students are also referred to the bibliography for Hebrew part II. EXAMINATION. Two 3-hour papers. 63-1. , ARABIC PART 1 A course of two lectures per week with one tutorial class throughout the year. External studies are not available. SYLLABUS Translation from literary Arabic into English and from English into Arabic. Accidence and syntax. Introduction to the essentials of modern spoken Arabic. BOOKS Prescribed texts: Cowan, D.-An Introduction to Modern Literary Arabic. (Brill, 1958.) Thornton, F. du P., and Nicholson, R. A.—Elementary Arabic, A GramnØ. ( C.U.P., 1943.) Kalilah wa-Dimnah. Recommended for reference: Wright, W.-A Crammer of the Arabic Language. (C.U.P., 1933.) Hava, F. J. G.—Arabic-English Dictionary. (Cath. Press, Beirut, 1951.) Elias, E. A.—English-Arabic Dictionary. (Elias Modern Press, Cairo, 1959.) Nicholson, R. A.—Literary History of the Arabs. (C.U.P., 1953.) EXAMINATION Two 3-hour papers. Class work during the year may be taken into account. 63-2. ARABIC PART II A course of two lectures and one tutorial per week throughout the year. External studies are not available. SYLLABUS Translation from classical Arabic into English, and from English into literary Arabic. Accidence and syntax. Outline of the history of Islam. The Arab conquests in the. East and West. Arabic composition. Further study of the Quř iin. 177 FАCULTY OF ARTS HANDBOOK Books Prescribed texts: Ibn Batйta—Rihla. Qur'an: Miryãm, Yйsuf. Recommended for reference: Wright, W.—A Grammar of the Arabic Language. (C.U.P., 1933.) Hitti, P. K.-A History of the Arabs. (6th ed., Macmillan, 1958. ) Brockehnann, C. History of the Islamic Peoples. (R.K.P., 1959.) Dictionaries as for Arabic I. EXAMINATION. Two 3-hour papers.

63-3. ARABIC PART III A course of three lectures per week with one tutorial class throughout the year. External studies are not available. sYLLAвUS Prose composition. Study of Hadith, Qur'ãnic commentary, Belles Lettres and Historical writings. The Umayyad, Abbasid Caliphates and introduction to the history of Arabic literature. BOOKS Prescribed texts: Taha Husain: Al-A . Al Biruni: Risalah уатon India. Arabic biographical writing: Gibran; Al-Awasif. (Dar A1-Andulus, Beirut.) Arabic poetry: Majanil-Adab, vol. 6, pp. 252-268. Ibn Khaldun: Mugaddimah. Recommended for reference: As for Arabic I and II, plus: Weir, T. 1.—Arabic Prose Composition. (с.U.P., 1910.) EXAMINATION. Two 3-hour papers.

HONOURS DEGREE J. SCHOOL OF MIDDLE EASTERN STUDIES (For possible combinations with this school see p. 251) 1. The courses for the degree with honours in the school of Middle Eastern Studies comprise the following subjects: Hebrew, parts I, II, III and IV. Arabic parts I, II, III and IV. Aramaic/Syriac parts I, II, III and IV. Biblical Archaeology parts I, II and III. Middle Eastern Studies parts I, II and III. Ethiopic. Candidates proceeding to the ordinary degree are not permitted to enter for honours in any subject of the school beyond first year. A candidate in this school must take the appropriate eleven of these subjects and one additional, which must be approved by the professor of Middle Eastern Studies. A knowledge of Latin or a European language other than English at the matriculation examination is therefore requested, and those who have not obtained it must choose one of Latin part I, French part I, Italian part I, German part I, Dutch part I, Russian part I, Greek part I, as their additional subject. 2. In their First Year candidates in the honours school should take the honours courses in any two of Hebrew part I, Arabic part I, Aramaic/Syriac part I, together with either Biblical Archaeology part I or Middle Eastern Studies part I plus the additional subject. 178 MIDDLE EASTERN STUDIES Admission to the higher years of the course is conditional upon satisfactory performance in the First Year, and students must be approved by the faculty of Arts as candidates for the degree with honours before entering the Second Year of the honours school. The professor of Middle Eastern Studies will normally recommend such approval for candidates who have gained at least second class honours in any two of Hebrew part I, Arabic part I, Aramaic/Syriac part I. Other candidates who wish to continue in the honours school must interview the professor of Middle Eastern Studies, who will be guided in his recommendation by the merits of the case. A student who has completed the First Year of the course for the ordinary degree, and has passed iп Hebrew part I and Arabic part I, may with the permission of the faculty enter the honours school. Such a student must make special application to the faculty through the sub-dean, and if permission is granted, the faculty will prescribe what further work must be completed before the student is allowed to proceed to the final examination. In their Second Year, candidates will take the honours courses in the appropriate two of the following: Hebrew part II, Arabic part II, Aramaic/Syriac part 11, together with the continuing Second Year course of either Biblical Archaeology or Middle Eastern Studies, in all of which subjects they are required to be classed. They will be examined in these subjects at the annual examination at the end of the Second Year. In their Third Year, the students will take the honours courses in the appropriate two of the following: Hebrew part III, Arabic part III, Aramaic/Syriac part III together with the continuing Third Year course in either Biblical Archaeology or Middle Eastern Studies, or in Ethiopic. In their Fourth Year candidates will take the honours courses in the appropriate two of the following: Hebrew part IV, Arabic part IV, Aramaic/Syriac part IV. Towards thе end of their Third Year, candidates are required to select a subject. for an essay, which must be approved by the professor of Middle Eastern Studies. This essay, which must be prepared durin the Fourth Year and submitted before the end of second term, forms part of the final examination. The final examination will be taken in two parts, part 'I at the end of Third Year, part II at the end of Fourth Year. PART I Two papers from each of two of the following: Prescribed Hebrew texts and unseen translation. Prescribed Arabic texts and unseen translation. Prescribed Aramaic/Syriac texts and unseen translation. One paper on one of the following: Biblical Archaeology III, Middle Eastern Studies III, or Ethiopic. PART II One paper in each of two of: Advanced Hebrew prescribed texts of all periods and prose composition. Advanced Arabic prescribed texts of all periods and prose composition. Advanced Aramaic/Syriac prescribed texts of all periods and comparative philology. One paper in each of two of: Hebrew Literature, Biblical and Post-Biblical. Arabic Literature, Classical and Modem. Aramaic/Syriac Literatures. One paper in either: Islamic History and Institutions, or Hebraic historical and archaeological studies. In addition there will be a viva voce examination of at least half-an-hour's duration covering the work of the Fourth Year. 62-1. HEBREW PART I (Ions) A course of four lectures per week with one tutorial class throughout the year. SYLLABUS In addition to the basic material of the ordinary class, honours students shall choose two of the three options available viz. 179 FACULTY OF ABTS HANDBOOK (a) Modern Hebrew (b) Post-Biblical Hebrew ( с) Additional Biblical Hebrew. Books Prescribed texts (general): As for the ordinary degree, plus: Options (a) and (b) : Selections from KiтсЬi; Bar-Joseph; Bialik ( Poetry and Prose); and others in: Radai, Chrestomathy a-Tsaad ha-Shen{; Mishnah Middoth. Н Options (b) and (c) Berakhoth; Psalms 2, 19, 34, 48, 68, 93, 116, 140. Options (a) and (c) : Selections from Kimchi; Bar-Joseph; Biank (Poetry and Prose); Psalms, 2, 19, 34, 48, 68, 93, 116, 140. Prescribed books: Segal, М. H.—A Grammar of Mishnaic Hebrew. (O.U.P., 1923.) Weiser, A.—The Psalms. Smith, N.—Hymns of the Temple. (S.C.M., 1951.) Strack, H. L.—Introduction to Talmud and Midrash. (Jewish Pub!., hff hia, 1945.) Р адлр Recommended for reference: Encyclopedia Mikra it. (Jerusalem, 1950.) Waxman, M.—А History of Jewish Literature, 4 vols. (Bloch, N.Y., 1930-41. Mowinckel, S.—Traditionalism and Personalities In the Psalms. (H.U.C.A., Vol. 28, 1950-51.) Moore, G. F.—Judaism in the First Centuries of the Christian Era, 3 vols. (H.U.P., Cambridge, 1927-30.) Raisin, M.--Haskalah Movement in Russia. (Jewish Pub . Soc., Philaд.,.1912. ) EXAMINATION Two 3-hour papers and one 2i'-hour paper.

62-2. HEBREW PART II (Bons) A course of four lectures per week with one tutorial class throughout the year. SYLLABUS In addition to the basic material of the ordinary class, honours students will choose two of the available options, viz. (a) Modern Hebrew (b) Post-Biblical Hebrew (c) Additional Biblical Hebrew. BOOKS Prescribed texts (general) : As for the ordinary degree plus Options (a) and ( b ) : Mishnah Berakhoth; Breshith Rabba; Ben Sira; selections from Shamir; Tschernichowsld; Bialik; Ahad Ha-Am. Chrestomathy Ha-Tsaad ha-Sheni. Radai, I. Options (b) and (c) : Mishnah Berakhoth; Breshith Rabba; B Sire; Deut. 5-7, 12, 26, 29, 30. еп Options (a) and (c) : Selections from Shamir; Tschernichowski; Bialik; Ahad Ha- Am; Ben Sire; Deut. 5-7, 12, 26, 29, 30. Prescribed books: Relevant sections of: Waxman, M.—A History of Jewish Literature. (Bloch, N.Y., 1930-41.) Encyclopedia Talmudit. 180 MIDDLE EASØ STUDIES. Encyclopedia Israelit. (Jerusalem, 1947.) Wright, W.—Lectures on Comparative Grammar of the Semitic Languages. (C.U.P., 1890.) roekelmann, C.-Grundriss der Vergleichenden Grammatik der Semitischen В Sprachen, 2 vols. ( Reuther & Reichard, Berlin, 1908-13.) Epstein, I.—Judaism. (Pelican, 1959.) EXAMINATION. Three 3-hour papers. 62-3. HEBREW PART III (Ions) A course of four lectures and one seminar per week throughout the year. SYLLAВUS In addition to the work of the ordinary class, honours students must choose two of the available options, viz. (a) Mediaeval and Modern Hebrew (b) Post-Biblical Hebrew (c) Biblical Hebrew. BOOKS Prescribed texts (general): As for the ordinary degree, plus: Options (a) and ( b ) : Selections from the writings of Lavie; Barash; Shimoni; Frishman mciuding Anatole France's Thais translated by Frishman; Maimonices—Hilkhot Talmud Torah; Zulay—Piyyute Yannay. Klausner—Biyme Bait Sheni; Rashi and Kimchi; Mishnah Tamid. Selections from Wertheimer's Batte Midrashoth. Options (b) and (c) Selections from the Dead Sea Scrolls; Hodayoth and Ha- bakkuk commentary; Mishnah Tamid, Isa. 60-66; Zech. 9-14; Rashi and Kimchi; Selections from Wertheimer's Batte Midrashoth. Options (a) and (c): Selections from the Dead Sea Scrolls; Nadayoth and Ha- bakkuk commentary; Isa. 60-66; Zech. 9-14; Maimonides—Hiikhot Talmud Torah; Zulah—Piyyute Y nn . Klausner—Biome Bait Sherri;а ау Lavie Barash; Shimoni; Frishman, including Anatole France's Thais, translated by Frishman. Recommended for reference: Yale Judaica series with special reference to the volumes of the code of Maimonides. ( Yale U.P. ) Husik, I.—A History of Mediaeval Jewish Philosophy. ( Jewish Publ. Soc., Philad., 1946.) Rabin, C.-Maimonides: The Guide for the Perplexed. (East and West Library, London, 1952.) Halkin, 8.—Modem Hebrew Literature. (Shocken, N.Y., 1950.) Bauer, P. L.—Historisch Grammatik der hebraischen Sprache. (Jewish Pub'. Soc., Halle, 1922.) в , E.-Studien über hebräische Morphologie und Vokalismus auf Grund- Вгфппоlage der Mercatischen Fragmente der Zweiten Kolumne der Hexapla des Origenes. (Brockhaus, Leipzig, 1943.) Brockelmann, C.—Kurzgefasste Vergleichende Grammatik der Semitischen Sprachen. (Reuther & Reichard, Berlin, 1908.) Bentzen, A. Introduction to the Old Testament, 2 vols. (Gael, Copenhagen, 1948-9.) EXAMINATION. Two 3-hour papers and an oral test. 62-4. HEBREW PART IV A course of two or more lectures and special seminars per week throughout the year. SYLLABUS (a) Reading of Modern Hebrew Prose and Poetry. 181 FACULTY OF ARTS HANDBOOK or (b) Reading of Mediaeval Hebrew Prose and Poetry. or (c) Reading of Advanced Biblical and Post-Biblical Hebrew. BOOKS Prescribed texts: Option (a): Selections from the works of Shimoni, Bialik, Tschernichowski, Leah Goldberg, Barash. Selections from Agnon, Shamir, Hazaz, Berkowitz, Ahad Ha-Am, Cohen, Klaus- ner, Brenner, Frishmãn. Option ( b ) : Selections from Solomon ibn Gebirol, Moses ibn Ezra. Selections from Maimonides: Hilkhot Teshubhah; Azariah de Rossi; Mе'or Einaim; Judah b. Samuel He-Hasid: Sepher Hasidim; Joseph Qaro: Shulhan Arukh, Orach Hayyim; Sa'adiah Gaon: Sepher Emunoth we Death. Option (c): Selections from Isaiah, Job, Zechariah, Midrash Tanhuma (ed. Buber) and The War of the Sons of Light against the Sons of Darkness. Students at this stage in their course are expected to prepare their own bibliographies as an essential part of their preparation for research. EXAMINATION. Two 3-hour papers and an oral test of 25 minutes.

63-1. ARABIC PART I (Ions) A coůrse of four lectures per week, with one tutorial class, throughout the year. External studies are not available. SYLLABUS (i) Study of the accidence and syntax of Classical Arabic. (ii) Study of selections from early Classical Arabic literature. ( iii) Introduction to the essentials of Modern Spoken Arabic. BOOKS (a) Prescribed textbooks: Cowan, D.—An Introduction to Modern Literary Arabic. ( Brill, 1958.) Thornton, F. du P., and Nicholson, R. A. Elementary Arabic. A Grammar. ( C.U.P., 1943. ) Qur ãn: Y suf. Kalilah waй Dimnah. Recommended for reference: Caspari, C. P.—A Grammar of the Arabic Language. Trans. by W. Wright. ( 3rd ed, 2 vols., C.U.P.) Nicholson, R. A.—Literary Нistоryof the Arabs. (C.U.P., 1953.) Gibb, H. A. R.—Mohaminedanism. (2nd ed., O.U.P., 1953.) Lewis, B.—The Arabs in History. (Hutchinson, 1956.) Guillaume, A. Islam. (Pelican.) Dictionaries as for ordinary degree. EXAMINATION Two 3-hour papers. Class work throughout the year may be taken into account.

63-2. ARABIC PART II (Ions) A course of three lectures per week, with one tutorial, throughout the year External studies are not available. SYLLABUS (i) Accidence, syntax and prose composition. (ii) Continued study of the Qur'an with Hadith and other literature. (iii) The rise of the Islamic Empire. BOOKS Prescribed texts: Qur'an: Miryãm. Al-Biruni: Kitab al-Hind, Risalah on India. 182 MIDDLE EASTERN STUDIES Ibn Вat ta-Rihla. Arabic Biographical Writing: Gibran—Al Awasif. (Dar al-Andulus, Beirut.) Arabic Poetry: Majãni'l-Ada , vol. 6, pp. 252-268. Ab '1-'Atahiyah: Diwan. (Catholic Press, Beirut, 1887.) Recommendedй for reference: Hitt' P. R.—A History of the Arabs. ( 6th ed., Macmillan, 1956.) Muir, W.—The Caliphate: Its Rise, Decline and Fall. (Religious Tract Soc., London, 1891.) Brockelmann, C. Histогy of the Islamic Peoples. (R.K.P., 1959.) Arnold, T. W.-The Caliphate. (O.U.P., 1924.) EXAMINATION. Two 3-hour papers. 63-3. ARABIC PART III (Ions) A course of four lectures per week, with one tutorial, throughout the year. External studies are not available. SYLLABUS (i) Prose composition. (ii) Historical and exegetical texts, classical and modern poetry and prose. (iii) Umayyad and Abbasid caliphates and the history of Sufism with special reference to Qadirite Tariga. BOOKS Prescribed texts: Baуdãwt: Tafsir on Surah Yйsuf; Ibn Khaldun: Mugaddimah; Zuhayr: Мu'allagйt; Taha Husayn: Al-Аyyаm, Pre-Islamic Arabic Poetry: Majani'l Adab, vol. 6, pp. 252-268 (Sufi Text) AI-Jilani Abd al-Qadir; Al Fath al- Rabbani wa-fayd al-Rahmani (Cairo, 1380, 1960. Pp. 22-42; 84-109). Recommended for reference: Hitti, P. R.—A History of the Arabs. ( 6th ed., Macmillan, 1956. ) Muir, W.—The Caliphate: Its Rise, Decline and Fall. (Relig. Tract Soc., London, 1891.) Brockelmann, C.—History of the Islamic Peoples. ( R.K.P., 1959.) Arnold, T. W.—The Caliphate. (O.U.P., 1924.) Weir, T. 1.—Arabic Prose Composition. ( C.U.P. ) Nicholson, R. A.—A Literary Нistory of the Arabs. (C.U.P., 1953.) Gibb, H. A. R.—Arabic Literature, an Introduction. ( C.U.P., 1926.) Grunebaum, G. E. von—Kritik und Dichtkunst. (Harassowitz, Wiesbaden, 1955.) EXAMINATION. Two 3-hour papers and an oral test of 15 minutes. 63-4. ARABIC PART IV A course of two or more lectures per week, with one seminar throughout the year. SYLLABUS (1) Advanced study of Arabic historiography. or (2) Advanced study of special topics in modern Arabic literature with special reference to Sufism. or ( 3) Advanced study of Arabic philosophical and scientific works. or (4) Study of Arabic and Muslim linguistic, literary and cultural influence among non-Arabic speaking Muslim communities, with special reference to Persian and Urdu. BOOKS Prescribed texts: 1. al-Mubarrad: Al Kdmii; 1-Maš йдТ: Tanbih; al-Tabart: AnnaLs; a1-Balãdhuri: Futãi.h al Btilddn; Sa1ihа 'Ali: Mt'hddnrat f Ta'rikh ACArab. al-At1ãl; 2. Taha Husayn: `аla Hãmish as-Sira; MahrnOd Tayniur: Tawfiq al-Hakiin: Нlтат! Qdla Li; Amin а1-Rayhãnt: Mulйk al-'Arab; Jurji Zaydan: Rlwayał al-M аmійk. 183 FACULTY OF ARTS HANDBOOK

. Ibn ufa l: Hауу Ibn Yagxãn; Ibn Rushd: Fasl Al-Magãl; c.1-Ma'am: Luxumiy- ő Тyãt; уal-Biruni: Rasa11; Al Jilani Abd al-Quadir; Al Fath al Rabbani Wa-fayd al-Rahmani (Cairo, 1380, 1960. Pp. 112-138; 146-194). 4. Igba1, M.: Reсonstruction of Religious Thought in Islam; Yusuf Ja'fari: Kalam I-Urdu; Prem Chand: Gau-Dan; Sarshar, R. N.: Fisan-e-аxad; НaØ: Diwan; Rumi: Masnavi; Sа`adi: Gulisten; Omar Khyyam: Rubayуat. Recommended for reference: Platte, J. T.—A Grammar of Hindustani or Urdu Language. ( .U.P., 1941.) Lambton, A. K. S. Persian Grammar. ( C.U.P., 1953.) О Browne, E. G.—Literary History of Persia, 2 vols. (T. F. Unwire, 1902-06.) Bailey, T. G. Histогіј of Urdu Literature. (O.U.P., 1932.) EXAMINATION. Two 3-hour papers and thesis. 66-1. ARAMAIC AND SYRIAC PART I A course of three lectures per week together with one tutorial class throughout the year. External studies are not available. SYLLABUS (1) Study of the accidence and syntax of Syriac and Biblical Aramaic. Transla- tun from, and into, either Syriac or Aramaic. (2) Study of the Aramaic portions of the Bible, or of prescribed portions of the Peshitta. ( 3 ) Literary and historical introduction to the books prescribed. BOOKS Prescribed texts: Either: 1. Daniel, ii 4-vii 28; Ezra iv 8—vi 18, vii 12-20, and selections from the Genesis ApoØhon. or: 2. Mark. (Peshitta and Sinaitio Palimpsest.) Prescribed books: Either: Robinson, T. H. Paradigms and Exercises in Syriac Grammar. (O.U. ., latest ed.) Р or: Rosenthal, F.—A Grammar of Biblical Aramaic. ( Неітаѕѕоwіtz, 1981.) Recommended for reference: Either: Rowley, H. 1.—The Aramaic of the Old Testament. (0.U.P., 1929.) . Jastrow, M.—А Dictionary of the Targumim, The Talmud Babll and Yеrushalтi, and the Midraahic Literature. (Pardes Pub . House, N.Y., 1950.) or: Burkitt, F. C.-Evangelion da Mepharreshe, 2 vols. ( C.U.P., 1904.) Bendy, R. L., Rendel Harris J., Burkitt, F. C.—The Four Gospels in Syrewc transcribed from the Sinitic Palimpsest. ( C.U.P., 1894.) Jennings, W.—Lexicon to the Syriac New Testament Revised by Ganttnon. ( O.U.P., 1926.) Hoskyns, E., and Davey, F. N.—The Riddle of the New Testament. (3rd ed., Faber, 1958.) Nöldeke, T. 1.—Compendious Syriac Grammar. (Williams & Norgate, London, 1904.) EXAMINATION. Two 3-hour papers. 66-2. ARAMAIC AND SYRIAC PART II A course of three lectures per week with one tutorial class throughout the year. SYLLABUS either (i) Study of the Aramaic of the Persian period, together with selections from 184 MIDDLE EASTERN STUDIES

Talmud and Midrash. Translation and prose-work. or (ii) Study of Syriac of the Patristic period, with reading of prescribed texts. All three scripts to be read. Translation and prosework. Advanced grammar and unprepared translation. (iii) Literary, historical and cultural background to the texts prescribed.

BOOKS Prescribed texts: either Dalman, G.—Aramäische Dialektproben. ( Hinrichs, Leipzig, 1927. ) Cowley, A. E.-Aramaic Papyri of the Fifth Century B.C. (0.U.P., 1923.) Driver, G. R.-Aramaic Documents of the Fifth Century. (O.U.P., 1923.) (Abr. ed, 1957.) Kraeling, E. G.—The Brooklyn Museum,Aramaic Papyri. (Yale U.P., 1953.) Avigad, N., and Yadin, Y.—A Genesis Apocryphon. (Magnes Press, Hebrew Univ., Jerus., 1956. ) or Jansma, T.—A Selection from the Acts of Judas Thomas. (Brill, Leiden, 1952.) Bardaisan—Kthava d'Namusa d'Athrawatha. (Patrologia Syriaca. ) Eusebius—Historia Ecclesiae ( Bk. I, xiii.) ed. by Wright and Maclean. ( C.U.P. ) Brockelmann, C.—Syrische Grammatik mit Paradigmen, Literatur, Chresto- mathie und Glossar. ( Leipzig, 1980.)

Recommended for reference ( see also part I) : Duval, R.—La Littératurв syriaque, Bibliotheque de L'Enseignement de L'histoire eсclesiastique. Anciennes littératures chretiennes, vol. 11, (Paris, Lecoffre, 1899.) Baumstark, A.—Gesehichtв des Syrischen Literatur. ( Marcus and Weber, Bonn, 1922.) van Hoonacker, A.—Une Communauté Judéo-Araméeпe d Eléphantiпe. ( Schweich Lectures, 1914; О.U.P., 1915. ) • Altaner, B.Patrologie. ( 2tе Aufl.) ( Herder, Freiburg 1.B., 1950.)

Dictionaries: In addition to those mentioned under part I, the following should be consulted: Smith, R. Payne—Thesaurus Syrłaeus, 2 vols. (O.U.P., 1879-1901.) Smith, J. P.—Supplement to Thesaurus Syriacus of R. Pаyne Smith. (0.U.P., 1927.) Dahnan, G. H.—Aramäisch— Neuhebräisches Wörterbuch zu Targum, Talmud und Midrasch. (2te Aufi.) (Kaufmann, Frankfurt a. M., 1922.) Students are also referred to the other literature prescribed for Middle Eastern Studies parts I and II.

EXAMINATION. Two 3-hour papers.

66-3. ARAMAIC AND SYRIAC PART III A course of four lectures per week with one tutorial class throughout the year.

SYLLABUS (i) More advanced treatment of grammar and syntax, together with translation of unprescribed texts from both Aramaic and Syriac. either(ii) Study of the. Targum to one selected Book from the Prophets or the Hagiographa, together with a comparative study of the Targumixn to the Pentateuch. Introduction to the study of Samaritan liturgical compositions. or (iii) Study of Syriac Biblical commentators. (iv) Advanced Study of Patristic Texts.

BOOKS Prescribed texts: argum to Psalms. Psalms ii, viii, xxii, lxix, lxxxviii, cxviii. either Т Targum Onkelos, Targum Pseudo-Jonathan, the Jerusalem Targum, and the 185 FACULTY OF ARTS HANDBOOK Samaritan Targum. Portions chosen: Genesis i, Exodus zv, Deuteronomy Samaritan Aranlaic Liturgical Compositions of Margah, and 'Am Darah. ( Texts for the above from the department.) тап Sperber, A.—The Bible in Aramaic. ( Brill, Leiden, 1959.) or Theodore on the Nicene Creed, Woodbrooke Studies, ed. Mingana, A., vol. 6. Baptism. (Carob., 1932.) Wright, W. Joshua, the Stylite Chronicle. ( C.U.P., 1880.) Bar Hebraeus—Tractate on Heresies: Patrologie Orientalis, vol. XIII. Mitchell, C.. ed. Prose Refutations of Mani, Marcion and Bardaisan. (Texts and Trans. Soc., 1912.) Gibson, M. D.—The Commentaries of Isho'dad on the Gospel of John. (Books i-x.) (Horae Semiticae vii.) (C.U.P., 1911.) Burkitt, F. C.—Euphemia and the Goth. (Williams & Norgate, 1913.) Aphraates—De Monaсhis. (Patrologia Syriaca, Vol. 1. ed., Graffin R.) Recommended for reference: Kahle, P.—The Cairo Geniza. ( New ed., C.U.P., 1958.) Kahlе, P. Masoreten des Westens, Bd. II. ( Кohlhammer, Stuttgart, 1930.) Macho, Diez—Sef arad, Vol. xv, Journal. ( Madrid, 1955.) Lagarde, P. de—Hagtographa Chaldake. ( Teubner, Leipzig, 1873.) Ginsburger, M. Das Fragmenttargum. ( Calvary, Berlin, 1899.) Ginsburger, М:Рs еиdo-Jоnathan. ( Calvary, Berlin, 1903.) Barrett, C. K.—The Gospel According to St. John. An Introduction. ( Ѕ.Р.C.К., 1955.) Dodd, C. H.—The Interpretation of the Fourth Gospel. ( C.U.P., 1953.) EXAMINATION. Two 3-hour papers. 66-4. ARAMAIC AND SYRIAC PART IV A course of two or more lectures per week, with one seminar, throughout the year. SYLLABUS Options will be provided in Syriac, Aramaic, and Mandaean and Samaritan Aramaic. The overall plan will be as follows: (i) Texts. (a) Syriac: Study of Nestorian and Monophysite Liturgies and Homilies. (b) Aramaic: Advanced study of the Aramaic portions of Talmud Bab]] and Talmud Yerushalmi, and other Jewish Aramaic literature. (c) Mandaean and. Samaritan Aramaic: Study of Mandaean and Samaritan texts, including study of original MSS. (1) Comparative grammar and philology in the chosen option. ( iii) A special study on a topic selected from one of the foregoing fields. BOOКS Prescribed texts: Either (1): Liber Graduum, Patrologia Syriaca (ed. R. Graffin, Firmin-Didot, Pads, 1926.) Cols. 584-765. Dionysies Bar Salibi—Against the Armenians. (ed., A. Mingano, 1931.) Martyrium Beati Simeonis Bar Sabbãe Patrologie Syriaca. Vol. II, Cols. 714-960. Severus of Antioch Homilq XC. Pat. Or., 23 Fasc. 1A, pp. 120-165. Liturgical texts from the departmental collection viz: The Liturgies of Addai and Mari, and Theodore of Mopsuestia, eta. or (ii): Selections from the Zohar, Talmud Yerushalmi and Talmud Babil ( Selected Tractates), or (moi): Drower, E. S. Haran Gawaita and Masbuta Dhibll Ziwa. (Brill, Rome and Leiden, 1959.) (Brill, Leiden, Drower, E. S.—Тhe Canonical Prayerbook of the Mandaean. 1959.) Мemaг Margah, from MSS. in the department. 186 MIDDLE EASTERN STUDIES Recommended for reference: Surtevant—An Introduction to Linguistic Science. (Yale, 1947.) Other bibliography at this stage will be considered to be the responsibility of students, as part of their initial training for research. EXAMINATION. Two 3-hour papers. Thesis on special subject.

ETHIOPIC A course of two lectures per week throughout the year. SYLLABUS Translation from Ethiopic into English, accidence and syntax, outline of the history of South Arabic, reading of the Ethiopic Octateuch. BOOKS Prescribed texts. Selected from: Dillmann, A.—Octateuchus Aethiopicus. (Leipzig.) Chrestomathia Aethiopica. Prescribed textbooks: As above together with: Mercer, S. A. Ethiopic Grammar, Chrestomathy. Praetorius, F.—Grammatica Aethiopica. (Porta Linguarum Orientalium.) Recommended for reference: Harden, J. M.—An Introduction to Ethiopic Christian Literature. ( . .C. .) . Dictionaries: Ѕ Р К Dillmann, A.—Lexicon Linguae Aethiopicae cum Indice Latino. (New York, Ungar.) EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper in addition to an oral test of 15 minutes.

65-1. MIDDLE EASTERN STUDIES PART I A course of two lectures and two seminars per week throughout the year. SYLLABUS Either the syllabus for the pass course with a study of the basic documents and selections from Sumerian, Ugaritic and Hebrew texts. Tuition in textual studies in the original languages is offered. or Islam: a study of Islamic faith and institutions with their Jewish, Christian, Persian and North and South Arabian antecedents. Special study will be made of the fundamental religious and social structure of Islam. For this purpose students .will read material in the original language. BOOKS Prescribed books: As for the ordinary degree plus: Cassuto, U. The Goddess Anath. ( Bialik Institute, Jerusalem, 1953.) Gaster, T. H.—Thespis. ( Doubleday, Anchor, 1981. ) Obermann, J.—Ugaritic Mythology. A Study of its Leading Motifs. (Yale U.P., 1948.) Driver, G. R., and Miles, , Sir J. C. (eds.)—The Babylonian Laws. (O.U.P., 1955-8.) Driver, G. R., and Miles, Sir J. C. (eds.)—The Assyrian Laws. (O.U.P., 1935.) Lloyd, Seton—Early Anatolia. ( Pelican, 1956.) Pope, M. H. El in the Ugaritic Texts. ( Brill, Leiden, 1955.) or: Prescribed text: Williams, J. A. ( ed. )—Islam. ( Washington Square Press, N.Y., 1963.) 187 FACULTY OF ARTs HANDBOOK Prescribed books: As in Option (b) of Pass course plus: MacDonald, D. B.—The Development of Muslim Theology, Jurisprudence and Constitutional Theory. (Scпbner, N.Y., 1903.) EXAMINATION. Two 3-hour papers.

65-2. MIDDLE EASTERN STUDIES PART II A course of two lectures and two seminars per week throughout the year. SYLLAВUS History of Muslim Philosophy, together with trends in Modern Islamic Thought. BOOKS Prescribed books: As for the ordinary degree plus: Selections from Al-Ghazdli (in Arabic). Also available for Honours, Options as for the Ordinary Degree. EXAMINATION. Two 3-hour papers.

65-3. MIDDLE EASTERN STUDIES PART III A course of two lectures and two seminars per week throughout the year.

SYLLAВUS The continued study of Arabic civilization, comprising literature, arts, sciences, and the development of the Islamic peoples in North Africa, Western Asia, Pakistan and the Far East, and the Arab reawakening in the modern period. BOOKS Prescribed books: As for the ordinary degree plus: Atiyah, E. S.—The Arabs. ( Penguin, 1955.) Little, T.—Egypt. (Bann., 1958.) Ziadeh, N. A.—Syria and Lebanon. ( Benn., 1957.) Longrigg, S. H., and Stoakes, F. Iraq. (Benn., 1955.) Smith, W. C.—Pakistan as an Islamic State. ( Shaikh Muhammed Ashraf, Lahore, 1954.) Wallbank, T. W.—A Short History of India and Pakistan. (New American Lib.,. N.Y., 1958.) vols. Ibn Bhаldйп—Mugaddamah, 3 (Routledge, 1958.) Salin, A. 'Ali—Миhãdarat fi Taňkh Al-'Arab. Arnold, T. A., and Guillaume, A.—The Legacy of Islam. ( 0.U.P., 1931.) Hitti, P. R. Historu of the Arabs. ( 6th ed.. Macmillan, 1958.) Also available for Honours, Options as for the Ordinary Degree. A full list of reference books for the courses in Middle Eastern Studies will be available in the department of Middle Eastern Studies. EXAMINATION. Two 3-hour papers.

67-1. BIBLICAL ARCHAEOLOGY PART I A course of two lectures and one seminar per week with demonstrations and practical work. SYLLABUS The archaeology of Palestine and adjacent lands from the Neolithic to the Iron Age with special emphasis on archaeological technique and relative chronology. BOOKS Prescribed texts: kenyon, K —Excavations at Jericho. Vol. 1. (London, 1980.) 188 MWDLE EASTERN STUDIES Kenyon, K.—Archaeology in the Holy Land. ( Benn., 1959.) Emery, W. В.—Archaic Egypt. (Pelican, 1961.) Albright, W. F.—Ths Archaeology of Palestine. (Pelican, 1949.) Wright, G. E.—Biblical Archaeology.. ( Westminster, Рhiladерhiа, 1957.) Garstang, J.—The Story of Jericho. (Marshall, Morgan & Scott, London, 1948.) Schaeffer, J.—Stratigraphie cómparée de l' Asie occidentale. ( 0.U.P., 1949. ). Petrie, F. W. M.—Ancient Gaza I-IV. (Egyptian Exploration Soc., London, 1931-4.) Petrie, F. W. M.-Hyksos and Israelite Cities. (Egyptian Explor. Soc. Load:, 1938.) Bossert, Н.—Alt-Syrien. (Wasmuth, Tubingen, 1951.) Ваггоis, H. G.—Manuel D'Archéologie Biblique, 2 vols. (Picard, Paris, 1939.) Gurney, O.—The Hittites. (Pelican, 1959.) Braidwood, R. Mounds in the Plain of Antioch. (Chicago U.P., 1960.) Woolley, Sir L.—A Forgotten Kingdom. (Pelican 1953.) Franken, H. J.—А Primer of Old Testament Archaeology. (Brill, Leiden, 1963.) EXAMINATION. One 3-hour paper. One 1X-hour paper and a practical examination of 1%-hours.

67-2. BIBLICAL ARCHAEOLOGY PART II A course of two lectures and two seminars per week throughout the year. SYLLABUS The archaeology of selected Palestinian sites of the Bronze and Iron Ages together with a study of ancient texts relating to their history. The student is expected to become familiar with ` the pottery and archaeological sequences of Palestine and adjacent lands, and tuition in the reading of Cuneiform texts ( Akkadian and Ugaritic), or in Egyptian grammar will be offered and continued in the Third Year. A short course in archaeological drawing and surveying wí11 be given. BOOKS Prescribed texts: Lamm. R. S., and Shipton, G. N. Megiddo I, Strata I-V. (Univ. of Chic., 1949.) Loud, G.—Megiddo II. (Univ. of Chic., 1948.) Yadin, Y.—Nazor I. ( London, 1958.) Rowe, A.—Beth Sheen. (Palestine Exploration Fund, Lend., 1930.) Olmstead, T.—History of Assyria. ( Chicago Reprint Series, 1960.) Tuffnell, O.—Lashish II-W. ( O.U.P., 1940.) Di-toton, E., and Vandier, J.—L'Egypte. ( Presse Mana, Paris, 1953.) Wiseman, D. J.—Chronicles of the Chaldaean Kings. (Brit. Mus., 1958.) Parrot, A.-Nineveh and the Old Testament. trans. by B. Hooke. ( Studies in Biblical Archaeology, S. C. M., 1956.) Mailler, G.—The Excavations at . Tell Qasile, Preliminary Report. ( I.E.S., Jerusalem, 1951.) O'Callaghan, R. T.—Aram Naharaim. A Contribution to the History of Upper Mesopotamia in the Second Millennium B.C. (Pont. Inst. Bibi., Rome, 1948.) EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper, one 2-hour paper plus a short practical examination.

67-3. BIBLICAL ARCHAEOLOGY PART III A course of two lectures and two seminars per week throughout the year. sYLLABvS Students will have the option of: (a) The study of Semitic epigraphy in Palestine arid the Mediterranean lands together with the closer study of Archaelogical problems relating to Вiblical lands. or (b) The archaeology and epigraphy of Hellenistic Asia Minor (some knowledge of Greek is desirable). 189 FACULTY OF ARTS HANDBOOK Books Prescribed texts: Option (a): Driver, G. R.—Semitic Writing—From Pictograph to Alphabet. (O.U.P., 1948.) Diringer, D.—The Alphabet. ( Hutchinson, 1949. ) Cooke, G. A.—A Text Book of North Semitic Inscriptions. ( O.U.P., 1903.) Avi-Yonah, M. ( ed. )—Sepher Yerushalayim, Vol. I. (Jerusalem and Tel Aviv, Bialik Inst. and Dvir, 1956.) Torczyner, H.—Lachish I (The Lachish Letters). ( 0.U.P., 1938.) Obermann, J. Discoveries at Karatepe. ( Amer. Orient Soc., 1949.) Clousch, Z. N.-Thesaurus of Phoenician Inscriptions. (Dvir, Tel-Aviv, 1954.) Abel, F. M.—Geographic de la Palestine. ( Lib. Lecofire, Paris, 1933-8.) Option (b): Eusebius, Ecclesiae Historia. Ramsay, W.—Cities and Bishoprics of Phrygia. ( Oxford, 1911.) Ramsay, W.—The Cities of St. Paul. ( Oxford, 1908.) Calder, W. M.—Antiquae Asiaa Minons Monumenta. ( Oxford, 1921.) Dölger, F.-lkthus. ( Münster, 1946.) Rostovzeff, M.—Dura Europos and its Art. ( Oxford, 1938.) Morey, C. R.—The Mosaics of Antioch. ( N.Y., 1938.) Forschungen in Ephesos. Veröffentlichungen des Oesterreichischen Archäo- logischen Instituts. Articles in Anatolian Studies, Journal of Hellenic Studies. A selection from the collection of Hebrew, Samaritan, A.ramaic and Arabic MSS. in the department. A full list of reference books for the Biblical Archaeology courses will be available in the department of Middle Eastern Studies. EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper, one 2-hour paper plus -a short practical examination. MASTER OF ARTS 68-4. SCHOOL OF MIDDLE EASTERN STUDIES Candidates will prepare a thesis on an approved subject. They will work under the supervision of a member of the department of Middle Eastern Studies to whom they should report regularly upon the progress of their work. Research seminars will be held throughout the year. An entry form for examination for higher degrees must be submitted to the Registrar. Three copies of each thesis (quarto, typewritten, double-spaced) should be submitted, one of which will be deposited in the University Library. Candidates may also be examined orally on the subject of the thesis.

190 DEPARTMENT OF MUSIC Head of Department: Professor G. F. LOUGHLIN, D.Mus. (Dunelm. ), M.A., F.R.C.M., F.R.C.O. ORDINARY DEGREE The subjects which may be taken in the Group 5 ordinary degree course are Music A, В, C. • The major is Music A, , C. No pure honours course inВ Music is available, but honours courses in Music A, В, C, D may be taken as part of an approved combined honours course. For examples see p. 251. External tuition is not available in Music A, В, C or D. Satisfactory attendance at both lectures and tutorials is necessary. 70-1. MUSIC A This course is divided into (a) Form and (b) History of Music, comprising two lectures and one tutorial per week, with home assignments, throughout the year. Although no special pre-requisite is laid down, students will be expected to have sufficient knowledge to enable them to follow the lectures. For this purpose students who have passed fourth grade Theory and Practice at the A.M.E.B. examinations should be competent to enter upon the course. SYLLABUS (a) Form:. Folk Song and the principal Forms from the 16th century to the early 20th century, including the following— Mass, Motet, Madrigal, the Forms used by J. S. Bach and his contemporaries, Sonata, Quartet, Symphony, Concerto, Symphonic Poem, Variations. (b) History of Music: The history of European music from 1600 to 1770 and the study of representative works from those of Monteverdi to the early works of Haydn and Mozart. ESSAYS Students are required to submit essays. Details will be supplied at the beginning of first term. BOOKS Prescribed textbooks: Abraham, G.--The History of Music in Sound. Vols. 4, 5 and 6. ( ... ., 1953-4.) І Тг Р Bukofzer, М.—Music in the Baroque Era. ( Dent, 1948.) Harman and Mellers.—Man and his Music, Parts II ( 3-6 ) and III (1). (Rocklifi, 1962.) Lang, P. H.— sic in Western Civilization. ( Norton, 1941.) Morris, R. Мц O.-The Structure of Music. ( О.U.P., 1935.) Thorpe Davie, C.—Musical Structure and Design. (Dobson, 1953.) EXAMINATION. One 3-hour paper.

70-2. Music В A course of two lectures and one tutorial per week, with home assignments, throughout the year. SYLLABUS (a) The history of European music from 1770 to 1900 with special reference to 191 FACULTY OF ARTS HANDBOOK the literary background of the Romantic Era. (b) The study of works by representative composers from Haydn to Richard Strauss. ESSAYS Students are required to submit essays. Details will be supplied at the beginning of first term. BOOKS Prescribed textbooks: Abraham, C.—A Iundred Years of Music. ( Duckworth, 1949.) Brophy, B.—Mozart the Dramatist. (Faber.) Cooke, D.—The Language of Music. ( O.U.P., 1959.) Einstein, A. Music in the Romantic Era. ( Dent, 1947.) Ferguson, D.Music as Metaphor. (U. of Minnesota, 1960.) Hanslick, E.—The Beautiful in Music. (Boobs-Merrill, 1957.) Kerman, J.—Opera as Drama. ( Vintage, 1956. ) Lang, P. H. Music in Western Civilization. ( Norton, 1941. ) ellers, W.—Man and his Music. ( Rockli$, 1957.) Meyer,М L. B.—Emotion and Meaning in Music. (U. of Chicago, 1956.) Reti, R.—The Thematic Process in Music. ( Faber, 1961.) Strunk, O.—Source Readings in Music History. ( Norton, 1950.) EXAMINATION. Two 3-hour papers. 70-3. Music C A course of two lectures , and one tutorial per week, with home assignments. throughout the year. SYLLABUS (a) European music from earliest times to A.D. 1800. (b) Post-romantic music to the present day. ESSAYS Students are required to submit essays. Details will be supplied at the beginning of first term. BООKS Prescribed textbooks: Abraham, G. The History of Music in Sound. Vols, II, III, IV and X. ( O.U.P., 1953.) Hannan and Melers—Man and his Music, I, II (1-2) and IV (ii). (Rockliff, 1962.) Hartog, 1.—European Music in the 20th Century. (Routledge and Kegan Paul, 1957.) Lang, P. H.—Music in Western Civilization. (Norton, 1941.) Myers, R. (ed.)—Twentieth Century Music: A Symposium. (Calder, 1900.) EXAMINATION. Two 3-hour papers. HONOURS DEGREE 70-4. MUSIC D ( Combined Honours Course ) A course of tutorials arid guided study in specified compositions of the twentieth century as determined by the head of the department. EXAMINATION. One 3-hour paper. 70-5. MASTER OF ARTS SCHOOL OF MUSIC Candidates are required to prepare a thesis on a subject approved by the head of the department. They will work under the supervision of a member of the department, to whom they should report regularly upon the progress of their work. 192 DEPARTMENT OF ORIENTAL STUDIES Read of Department: Professor H. F. SIMON, B.A. (Lend.), М.A. The Department of Oriental Studies was established in 1961, thanks to a gener- ous grant of the Myer Foundation. It offers courses in Chinese I, II and III leading to a major of the ordinary degree, in Parts I. II, III and IV of the honours school of Chinese and in Japanese I, II and III. A non-linguistic survey course of the history and political institutions of China and Japan, East Asian Studies I, is offered by the Centre of East Asian Studies ( cf. below p. 200 ). For the time being it will not be possible to offer East Asian Studies II. COURSES IN CHINESE The Chinese are proud of a civilization which is second to none. One of the most remarkable features of this civilization is that it has been carried in the one language by the one people over a period of some 4,000 years. We have a wealth of literature in many fields which covers the last two and a half millennia of this period as well as inscriptions on bronzes and oracle bones which go back much further. A knowledge of written Chinese will put within one's reach what is probably the largest corpus of literature known to us in any one language. But it is necessary to distinguish three main forms of written Chinese: classical, mediaeval and modern. Classical Chinese has a structure and vocabulary broadly based on the written language of the 5th Century B.C. Mediaeval and modern Chinese, on the other hand, are based on the spoken language current at the time at which the texts were written. There are, therefore, fundamental and strongly marked differences of structure, style and vocabulary between the three forms. Modem Chinese may be dated from the beginning of this century, whilst mediaeval Chinese may be said to have its early beginnings in the 6th century A.D. and to have produced its first major creative works, the plays of the Yuan period, in the 13th century. The terms "modern" and "mediaeval" are, therefore, used in a rather special sense dictated by the nature and structure of the written material. Classical. Chinese continued to be written throughout these periods and is still being written today. As a spoken language, Standard Chinese—or as it is often called, Мапdariп, or Kuoyii or Putunghua—is now spoken and understood throughout China and in most of the overseas Chinese communities in the various countries of South-Еаst Asia. It Is, therefore, a satisfactory medium of communication with the majority of the 700,000,000 of Australia's Chinese neighbours—rather more than one-fifth of the world's total population. Standard Chinese is based on the Peking dialect and the pronunciation taught will be that of Peking. The rapid emergence in the latter half of this century of China as a great world power has added considerable urgency to Western studies of Chinese and of Chinese civilization. From their early beginnings as a peripheral and esoteric pastime, these studies have now developed into an increasingly normal and central pursuit at most of the major universities in the West. Australia's geographical position makes such a development particularly desirable and important. As a result of this development, some opportunities now exist for careers in the academic world as well as in government and business for graduates in this field. A knowledge of Chinese either of major or sub-major standard coupled with suitable qualifications in such fields as History, Political Science or Economics is particularly useful in this respect. ORDINARY DEGREE (Details for the honours degree are set out at the end of this section.) Croup 1 73-1. CHINESE PART I A course of hours per week consisting of 4 lectures and 2 tutorials. No previousВ knowledge of Chinese is necessary for this course and its main 193 G FACULTY OF ARTS HANDBOOK emphasis will be linguistic. Students will receive a thorough grounding in Standard Chinese in its spoken and written form. There will also be some introductory lectures on Chinese poetry. Candidates who intend to proceed to Chinese II must also take East Asian Studies I (cf. p. 200) since a pass in this subject is a pre-requisite for Chinese II. Holders of the G.C.E. or Matriculation in Chinese and graduates of Chinese ndddle schools or similar or higher institutions, where the language of instruction is Chinese, are exempted from Chinese I. Such candidates will take East Asian Studies or Japanese I and Chinese II and III as a major for the ordinary degree. They may take Chinese II as an additional subject in group 1 of the ordinary degree. Similar exemption may also be given at the discretion of the head of the department to other candidates who have recognized professional qualifications in Chinese. SYLLAвцs Phonetics and syntax of the Peking dialect Translation from and into Standard Chinese. Dictation, calligraphy and conversation. Introduction to Chinese poetry. BOOKS (a ) Prescribed texts: *Chao, Y. K—Mandarin Primer. Vol. 1. (Harvard U. P.) Simon, W.—Structure Drill in Chinese. ( Lund Humphries.) Kotewall, R., and Smith, N. L., ( trans.)—The Penguin Book of Chinese Verse. ( Penguin, 1962.) (b) Prescribed dictionary: *Simon, W.—Beginners' Chinese Dictionary. (Lund Humphries.) (c) Recommended for reference: Wang, Fang-Yu—The Lady in the Painting. ( Far Eastern Publications, Yale University, 1957 Lee, Pao-Chen—Read about China. ( The Institute of Far Eastern Languages, Yale University, 1957.) The department will issue a supplementary reading list as well as additional teaching material in the form of mimeographed sheets. EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper of translation from Chinese (unseen). One 3-hour paper of translation into Chinese (unseen) together with questions on Chinese grammar and Chinese poetry. An oral examination. 73-2. CHINESE PART II A course of б hours per week consisting of 4 lectures and 2 tutorials. Before being allowed to proceed to Chinese II, students must have obtained a pass in Chinese I and in East Asian Studies I. In exceptional circumstances, permission may be granted by the head of the department to proceed to Chinese II and East Asian Studies I simultaneously. Candidates who are exempt from Chinese I must satisfy the head of the department that they have a satisfactory command of Standard Chinese. The emphasis of courses in Chinese II will be divided between language and the study of modern Chinese literature. Classical Chinese will also be introduced at this stage. The medieval novel will be studied both in the original and in translation. SYLLABUS Prescribed texts from Modern Chinese Literature. The Chinese novel. Translation from and into Modern Chinese. Conversation and oral practice. Classical Chinese. BOOKS ', a) Prescribed texts: *Liu, C. Y.—Fifty Chinese Stories. (Lund Humphries, 1960.) *Ва Jin—Yuehyeh. (any ed.) 194 ORIENTAL втцлгвв Luu Shiunn—Guhshia g. Hwu Shyh—Shin Sychaurп Yunndonq. Lao Sheh—Renwuhde iaushiee. Buck, Pearl—( trans. ) AllМ Men are Brothers. ( Grove Press Inc., N.Y.) Wang, Chichen ( trans. )—Dream of the Red Chamber. (Twayne Publications, N.Y.) ( b ) Prescribed Dictionaries:

*Mathews, R. H.—Chinese-English Dictionary. (Any ed. ) • »Tzonqher Inghwa Hwaing Dah Tsyfdean. (Any ed.) or Liang, Shih-Chiou—A New Practical English-Chinese Dictionary. (Yuan Tung Tushu Gongsy, Taipei, 1963.) (c) Recommended for reference: Lo, Kuan-Chung—Romance of the Three Kingdoms. (Trans. C. H. Brewitt Taylor.) (Tuttle, Rutland, 1959.) Liu, Tieh-Yiin—The Travels of Lao Tian. (Trans. Harold Shadick.) (Cornell .. ., 1952.) (Prescribedїг Р and other Chinese texts, together with a supplementary reading list may be obtained from the department.) EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper on translation from and into Chinese (unseen). One 3-hour paper on prescribed texts together with questions on the Chinese novel. An oral examination.

73-3. CHINESE PART III A course of 8 hours per week consisting of lectures and tutorials. The division of emphasis between language and literature will be the same as In Chinese II. The study of classical Chinese wig be continued. Sung and Yuan poetry will be studied in the original. SYLLАВUS Prescribed texts from Modern and Medieval Chinese literature. Chinese poetry. Translation from and into Chinese. Classical Chinese. Advanced oral work. Chinese Bibliography. BOOKS (a) Prescribed texts: Mau Duenn—Chuentsarn. Luu Shíunn—Fann Au-nonq. Lao Sheh—Renwuhde iaushiee. *Liou Dah-Jye—JonggwoМ Wenshyue Fajaanshyy. Мencius, Book VI, Part I. (b ) Prescribed Dictionaries: *Tsyr Hae. (Jonghwa Book Company.) *Txongher inghwa Hwaing Dah Tsijrdean. (Any ed.) or Liang, Shih-Chiou—A New Practical English-Chinese Dictionary. (Yuan Tung Tushu Gongay, Taipei, 1963.) *Mathews, R. H.—Chinese-English Dictionary. (Any ed.) ( c) Recommended for reference: Teng, S. Y., and Biggerstaff, k.—An Annotated Bibliography of Selected Chinese Reference Works. ( Harvard, 1950. ) EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper on prescribed texts. One 3-hour paper on prescribed Classical Chinese texts and unseen translation from Modern Chinese. One 3-hour paper on translation into Chinese together with questions on Chinese literature. An oral examination. 195 FACULTY OF ARTS HANDBOOK Lectures, Tutorials and Examinations. Attendance at all lectures and tutorials is compulsory and class work and essays will be taken into consideration in the grading of examination results.

HONOURS DEGREE Q. SCHOOL OF CHINESE 1. A candidate in the school of Chinese will take Chinese parts I, II, III and IV, together with East Asian Studies I and three additional subjects to be approved by the head of the department. One of these additional subjects should be English I or the first part of a sub-major in a subject to be approved by the head of the department. Candidates will be encouraged to proceed to a major in an approved subject. 2. In their First Year, candidates will, therefore, take Chinese part I, East Asian Studies I and either English I or the first part of a reb-major or major in an approved subject. Admission to the higher years of the course is conditional upon a satisfactory performance in the First Year, and students must be approved by the faculty of Arts as candidates for the degree with honours before entering the Second Year of the honours school. The professor of Oriental Studies will normally recommend such approval for candidates who have gained at least second class honours in Chinese part I. Other candidates who wish to continue in the honours school must interview the professor of Oriental Studies, who will be guided in his recommendation by the merits of the case. A student who has completed the First Year of the course for the ordinary degree and has passed in Chinese I and East Asian Studies I may, with the permission of faculty, enter the honours school. Such a student must make special application to the faculty through the sub-dean. If permission is granted, the faculty will prescribe what further work must be completed before the student is allowed to proceed to the final examination. 3. In the Second Year, candidates will take Chinese part II together with an additional subject or the second part of the approved sub-major or major. 4. In the Third Year, candidates will take Chinese part III together with an additional subject or the third part of the approved major. 5. In the Fourth Year, candidates will take Chinese part IV. Some variations in this course may be available in 1988.

73-1. CHINESE PART I ( Ions ) A course of 7 hours per week of 4 lectures and 3 tutorials. SYLLABUS As for the ordinary degree, together with a course on linguistic theory and Chinese grammar. Books As for the ordinary degree, together with the following recommended textbooks: Forrest, R. A. D--The Chinese Language. or karlgren, B.—The Chinese Language. (Ronald Press, 1949.) Hackett, C. F.—A Course in Modern Linguistics. ( Macmillan, 1958.) Jones, D--The Phoneme. ( Не8 ег, 1950. ) EXAMINATION As for the ordinary degree, with special questions on Chinese Grammar and Poetry. 73-2. CHINESE PART II (Ions) A course of 9 hours per week of lectures and tutorials. SYLLAws As for the ordinary degree, together with a course of 3 hours per week of leo- tires and tutorials on prescribed texts in medieval Chinese. 198 OIUENTAL STUDIES Books As for the ordinary degree together with the following prescribed texts: *Shoeihuujuann. (120 chapter ed.) Chaps. 23, 24. Irwin, R. G. Evolution of the Chinese Novel. (Harvard, 1953.) Hightower, J. R.—To pics in Chinese Literature. (Harvard, 1953.) Prescribed and other Chinese texts as well as a supplementary reading list may be obtained from the department. EXAMINATION As for the ordinary degree together with one paper on the prescribed texts. 73-3. CHINESE PART III (Ions) A course of 9 hours per week of lectures and tutorials. SYLLABUS As for the ordinary degree, together with a course of 3 hours per week of lee- tures and tutorials on prescribed texts in medieval Chinese literature. Books As for the ordinary degree together with the following prescribed texts: *Shoeihuujuann. ( 120 chapter ed.) Chaps: 25, 26. *Tsaur Sheuechyn-Horngloumenq. ( 120 chapter ed.) Chaps. 1 and 14. Chinese texts as well as a supplementary reading list may be obtained from the department. EXAMINATION Three papers as prescribed for the ordinary degree together with a fourth paper on prescribed texts in medieval Chinese and an oral examination. 73-4. CHINESE PART IV (Ions) A course of 6 hours per week of lectures and tutorials. SYLLABUS Advanced language study of modem and classical Chinese. Advanced study of modem and medieval Chinese literature. A project on a modern Chinese author, involving translation and a short thesis. BOOKS Prescribed texts: *Tsaur Sheuechyn—Horngloumenq. ( 120 chapter ed.) Chaps. 31-34. !Magi Jyhyeuan—Hanngong Chiou. Sy-Maa Chian—Shyy Jih. Book 7. (Prescribed and other Chinese texts together with supplementary teaching material orr mimeographed sheets may be obtained from the department.) EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper of translation from modern and classical Chinese (unseen). One 3-hour paper of translation into Chinese ( unseen) and an essay. One 3-hour paper on the prescribed texts. Lectures, Tutorials and Examinations. Attendance at all lectures and tutorials is compulsory and class work and essays will be taken_ into consideration in the grading of examination results. COURSES IN JAPANESE Japan's emergence as a modem State over the last hundred years is one of the most striking features of recent history. Today Japan stands as one of the most important nations on the world scene, and an understanding of Japan and its people is of the greatest importance. Australia's geographical position in particular makes it mevitable that contacts with Japan must steadily grow. A very large part of Australia's trade is with Japan, and thep roportion will probably increase. It is most desirable that knowledge of Japanese culture and civilization should increase at the same time. 197 FACULTY OF ARTS ØВOOK A knowledge of Japanese also provides access to a highly stimulating and varied field of study. Before the modern era, Japan had already evolved a complex civilization by supplementing its own distinctive cultural foundations with extensive adaptations of a wide range of Chinese, Indian and other elements. In addition to the intrinsic value of the resulting variety of literary expression and historical records, this wide background makes a knowledge of modem Japanese scholarship especially useful in the study of other Asian civilizations. Again, Japan's extraordinary success in the task of modernization, both cultural and economic, has resulted in the growth of a vigorous modern literature in close touch with all contemporary problems, as well as a steady stream of valuable publications on scientific and other specialized research. Japanese studies are therefore important both for the intrinsic interest of the national culture, ancient and modem as well as for the many special contributions the Japanese have made to Asian and general problems of our time.

ORDINARY DEGREE Group 1 74-1. JAPANESE PART I A course of hours per week consisting of lectures and tutorials. No previousб knowledge of Japanese is necessary for this course and its main emphasis will be linguistic. Students will receive a thorough grounding in Japanese in its spoken and written form. Candidates who intend to proceed to Japanese II must also take East Asian Studies I (cf. p. 200) since a pass in this subject is a pre-requisite for Japanese II. Holders of the G.C.E. in Japanese and graduates of Japanese middle schools or similar or higher institutions, where the language of instruction is Japanese, are exempted from Japanese I. Such candidates will take East Asian Studies or Chinese I and Japanese II and III as a major for the ordinary degree. They may take Japanese II as an additional subject in group 1 of the ordinary degree. Similar exemption may also be given at the discretion of the head of the department to other candidates who have recognized professional qualifications in Japanese. SYLLАВUs Phonetics, fnilexion and syntax. Translation from and into Japanese. Dictation, calligraphy and conversation. Books (a) Prescribed textbooks: O'Neill, P. G., and Yanada, S.—An Introduction to Written Japanese. (E.U.P.) Dunn, C. J., and Yanada, S. Teach Yourself Japanese. (E.U.P. ) (b) Prescribed dictionary: Nelson, A. N.—Tha Modern Reader's Japanese-English Character Dictionary. (Tuttle.) (c) Recommended for reference: Sakade, Florence (ed. )—A Guide to Reading and Writing Japanese. ( Tuttle, 1965.) EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper of translation from Japanese (unseen). One 3-hour paper of translation into Japanese (unseen) together with questions on Japanese grammar. An oral examination.

74-2. JAPANESE PART II A course of six hours per week consisting of lectures and tutorials. The emphasis of courses in Japanese II will be divided between language and the study of Japanese literature. Some Classical Japanese will also be introduced at this stage. 198 оАІЕгтглг, sтtmІЕs SYLLABUS Prescribed texts from modern and classical Japanese literature. Translation from and into Modern Japanese. Conversation and oral practice. Lectures on Japanese literature. BOOKS (a ) Prescribed texts: Elisseeff, S., and Reischauer, E. O.—Selected Japanese Texts for University Students. Vol. I. ( Harvard-Yenching. Miller, R. A.—A Japanese Reader, Graded Lessons in the Modern Language. (Tuttle, 1964.) ( Other Japanese texts, together with a supplementary reading list, may be obtained from the department. ) (b) Prescribed Dictionary: Kenkyusha's New Japanese-English Dictionary. (Kenkyusha, Tokyo, 1954.) Nelson, A. N.—The Modern Reader's Japanese-English Character Dictionary. (Tuttle.) (c) Recommended for reference: Sakade, Florence (ed.)—A Guide to Reading and Writing Japanese. (Tuttle, 1965. ) EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper on translation from and into Japanese (unseen). One 3-hour paper on prescribed texts together with questions on Japanese literature. An oral examination.

74-З. JAPANESE PART III A course of six hours per week consisting of lectures and tutorials. As in Japanese II, the emphasis of courses in Japanese III will continue to be divided between language and literature. Selected Modern and Classical works will be studied in the original.- SYLLABUS Prescribed texts from Modern and Classical Japanese literature. Translation from and into Modern Japanese. Classical Japanese. Advanced oral work. BOOKS (a) Prescribed texts: (1) For Classical Japanese Taketori Monogatarł. (ed., Iwanami Bunko. ) Hojoki. ( ed., Iwanami Bunko. ) (2) For Modern Japanese Akutagawa Ryunosuke—Rashonron. ( ed., Shincho Bunko. ) Natsume Sóseki—Botchan. ( ed., Iwanami Bunko.) - Mishima Yukio—Shiosai. ( ed., Shincho Bunko. ) Nakamura Mitsuo—Nihon No Kindai Shosetsu. [The Modern Japanese Novel.] (ed., Iwanami Shoten.) , (b) Prescribed dictionaries Jikai. (Sanseido, Tokyo. ) ( Small ed. ) Nelson, A. N.—The Modern Reader's Japanese-English Character Dictionary. (Tuttle.) Kenkyusha's New Japanese-English Dictionary. (Kenkyusha, Tokyo, 1954. ) EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper on prescribed texts. One 3-hour paper on unseen translation from modern Japanese. One 3-hour paper on translation into Japanese together with questions on Japanese literature. An oral examination. Lectures, Tutorials and Examinations. Attendance at all lectures and tutorials is compulsory and class work will be taken into consideration in the grading of examination results. 199 FACULTY OF ARTS HANDBOOK CENTRE OF EAST ASIAN STUDIES Course Committee: Professor H. F. SIMON ( Oriental Studies ) Dr. J. S. GREGORY (History) Mr. A. lUCK ( Political Science ) Mr. L. R. DATES (Oriental Studies ) The Centre of East Asian Studies is an interdepartmental organization which offers interdisciplinary courses on East Asia. The centre is administered by the professor of Oriental Studies and courses are devised by an inter-departmental course committee. At present the centre offers a one-year course entitled East Asian Studies I. This is open to students of all faculties and ranks for credit in Group 5 of the faculty of Arts. East Asian Studies part II is not likely to be available in the near future. East Asian Studies I is a course of two lectures and one tutorial per week. Lectures are given by members of the departments of History, Political Science and Oriental Studies and by scholars and experts from other universities in Australia and elsewhere. Lectures are integrated according to academic disciplines and the main emphasis of the course is on the history of China and Japan and on political institutions and problems in both countries. The course also contains a short series of lectures on Confucianism and Neo-Confucianism. Students will be asked to submit essays during the course of the year. The quality of the essays will be taken into account in grading students at the end of the course.

Group 5

75. EASТ ASIAN STUDIES Part I SYLLABUS A survey of the history of China and Japan and of political institutions and problems in the two countries, together with lectures on Chinese thought. Students are required to submit discussion papers. Books Recommended for Preliminary Reading: Fairbank, J. k.—The United States and China. ( Harvard. ) Reischauer, E. O. Japan Past and Present. (Duckworth.) Fitzgerald, C. P.—The Birth of Communist China. (Pelican.) Fitzgerald, C. P.—The Chinese View of Their Place in the World. ( 0.U.P.) Prescribed textbooks: *Reischauer, E. 0., and Fairbank, J. K.—East Asia: The Great Tradition. (Allen and Unwin.) *De Bary, W. Т.—Sources of Chinese Tradition. (Columbia U.P.) Reischauer, E. 0., Fairbank, J. K., and Craig A. M. East Asia: The Modern Transf oгmation. ( Allen and Unwire.) or Beckmann, G.—The Modernization of China and Japan. (Harper and Row.) Additional texts: Students of the course will find the following, most of which are available in. paperback editions, useful additional texts. Creel, H. G.—Chinese Thought. ( Methuen.) Day, C. M.—Philosophers of China. (Citadel.) Loewe, M. Imperial China. ( Allen and Unwin. ) North, R. C.—Chinese Communism. ( Wiedenfeld and Nicolson. ) Clubb, O. E.—Twentieth Century China. (Columbia.) Stony, R.—A History of Modern Japan. (Pelican. ) Tiedemann, A. Modern Japan. (Anvil.) The Centre will supply supplementary reading lists. EXAMINATION. One 3-hour paper. Lectures, Tutorials and Examinations. Attendance at all lectures and tutorials is compulsory and class work and essays will be taken into consideration in the grading of examination results. 200 ORIENTAL Øg S MASTER OF ARTS 76-2. SCHOOL OF ORIENTAL STUDIES Candidates will, under the supervision of a member of the department, prepare a thesis on a subject to be approved by the Head of the department. They may be directed to take any subject or attend any lectures bearing on their work and will be required to write regular reports on the progress of their research. Prospective candidates for the M.A. in the school of Oriental Studies should in all cases consult the department of Oriental Studies before beginning work for the purpose. An entry form for examination for higher degrees must be submitted to the Registrar. Three copies of each thesis (quarto, typewritten, double-spaced) should be submitted, one of which will be deposited in the University Library. The attention of candidates is drawn to the recommendations of the Professorial Board on the format of theses (regulation 4.6 in the University Calendar). Candidates may also be examined orally on the subject of the thesis.

201 DEPARTMENT OF PHILOSOPHY Head of Department: Professor D. A. Т. GASKING, В.А. (Liv.), М.А. (Cantab.) ORDINARY DEGREE ( Details for the honours degree are set out at the end of this section.) SUBJECTS OFFERED (a) There are two alternative grade I subjects, namely Philosophy IA and Philo- sophy IB. Except with the special permission of the Head of the Department of Philosophy internal students will not be permitted to take either of these subjects after their first year at the University. (b) There are a number of grade 2-3 subjects (which may be counted either as grade 2 or as grade 3). These are: Epistemology, Logic and Methodology;Political Philosophy; Modern Philosophy; Ethics; Rationalist Metaphysics; Medieval Philosophy; Greek Philosophy; Contemporary European Philosophy; and Problems of Philosophy. Neither Problems of Philosophy nor Medieval Philosophy will be offered in 1968. The pm-requisite for Epistemology, Logic and Methodology is either any two University subjects or a grade I Philosophy subject. That for Political Philosophy is either a grade 1 Philosophy subject or two Political Science subjects. The pre-requisite for each of the remaining grade 2-3 subjects is any one Philosophy subject. (c) There are two grade 3 Philosophy subjects, namely Philosophy of Religion and Aesthetics. The pre-requisite is any two Philosophy subjects.

МAJORS A major shall consist either of a grade 1 subject, a grade 2-3 subject and a grade 3 subject or of a grade 1 subject and two subjects of grade 2-3, taken in either order.

PASS SUBJECTS AT IONOURS LEVEL A candidate for the ordinary degree may, if he chooses, offer certain of the above subjects at honours level, by undertaking extra work and aiming at a higher standard. The titles of such subjects when taken at honours level are distinquishеd by ( Ions. ), and the course comprising the extra work required is called the ' special course in the subject in question. Thus, for instance, the course for "Philosophy IA ( Ions. )" comprises the course for Philosophy IA, together with the Philosophy I special course. There are at present three such courses, namely Philosophy IA ( Ions. ), Philo- sophy IB ( Ions. ), and Epistemology, Logic and Methodology ( Ions. ). For detail, see under details of the honours degree. ( Subjects bearing such titles as "Honours Philosophy A" or "Honours Philosophy B" are subjects of the honours school and as such are not available to candidates for the ordinary degree). NOTE FOR COUNTRY STUDENTS In 1968, some correspondence tuition will be provided for a limited number of students in Philosophy IA and in Political Philosophy, In 1969 Epistemology, Logic and Methodology and Modern Philosophy will be available and in 1970 Modern Philosophy only. After 1970 external Studies in Philosophy will not be available. Students cannot be accepted for external tuition unless they have, prior to 1968, enrolled for and made some satisfactory progress with a B.A. course. Those who wish to apply for admission to external studies in Philosophy should fill, in the relevant form obtainable from the Department) and return it to the Sub-dean of Arts by February 28th, 1968. 202 PØOSOPHY 77-1. PHILOSOPHY IA Mr. J. R. Howes A course of two lectures and one tutorial class per week throughout the year. SYLLABUS Through a critical study of the arguments and doctrines of Plato's Republic, the course deals with a number of questions in such a way as to introduce students to several areas of philosophy. Among these questions are: in ethics, 'How are integrity, personal integration and happiness to be understood and related?' in political philosophy, `What are the criteria for deciding whether a state is just?' in theory of knowledge, 'What is the nature of knowledge and of opinion, and what is their relationship to observation and experience?' in philosophy of education, 'How are art, morality and education to be understood and related?' Frequent reference will be made to Salmon's Logic, to assist students with the more formal aspects of Plato's and other philosophical arguments. Selections from modern philosophers will be compared with particular sections of the Republic. The shorter of these selections will be available in duplicated notes. Three short assignments and one longer essay are required of students in the course of the year. BOOKS (a) Preliminary reading: Students are advised first to read through the two prescribed texts quite rapidly, and then to give a closer reading to Part One of the Repubii.. (b) Prescribed texts: *Plato—The Republic. (H. D. P. Lee's translation, Penguin.) *Salmon, W. C.—Logic. ( Prentice-Hall.) - (c) For special reference: *Mill, J. S.-Oп Liberty. (Everyman.) Austin, J. L.—"A Plea for Excuses', in Philosophical Papers. ( О.U.Р. ) (d) For general reference: *Crombie, I. 1.—An Examination of Plato's Doctrines. Vol. 1. ( R.К.P. ) Crombie, I. M.—Plato, The Midwife's Apprentice. ( R.K.P. ) *Cross, R. C., and Woozley, A. D.—Plato's Republic: A Philosophical Commen- tary. ( Macmillan. ) Field, G. C.—The Philosophy of Plato. (H.U.L.) . Nettleship, R. L.—Lectures on the Republic of Plato. (Macmillan.) Foster, M. B, Masters of Political Thought, Vol. 1. (Harrap.) Ross, W. D. Plato's Theory of Ideas. ( O.U.Р. ) Popper, K. R.—The Open Ѕіcіеtу and its Enemies, Vol. 1. ( R.K.P. ) Sesenske, A. (ed. )—Plato's Republic: Interpretation and Criticism. (Wadsworth, California.) Students may obtain duplicated material on the various themes of the course, on Plato's concepts, and on Lee's translation. EXTERNAL STUDIES. Correspondence tuition is available in this subject. EXAMINATION. One 3-hour paper.

77-2. PHILOSOPHY IB Professor D. A. T. Cashing, Mr. C. A. Coady A course of two lectures and one tutorial class per week throughout the year. SYLLABUS Each year several of the following topics will be selected for discussion: (a) Free-will and determinism (b) Scepticism about induction (c) Body and mind (d ) Moral Judgements (e) The existence of God (f) Perception (g) A Priori Knowledge (h) Meaning, verification and metaphysics. 203 FACULTY IF ARTS F АNDBOOS The discussion will be based on an anthology of readings from classical and contemporary sources, in which opposing views on each of these issues is presented. BOOKS Prescribed textbook: *Edwards, P., and Pap, A.—A Modern Introduction to Philosophy. (Revised ed., Macmillan, 1965.) EXAMINATION One 3-hоur paper. 78. MODERN PHILOSOPHY Mr. W. K. Presa A course of two lectures per week and one tutorial class throughout the year. Essays will be set. SYLLABUS. Descartes, Leibniz, Locke, Berkeley, Hume. Two essays are required of students in the course of the year.

BOOKS • (a) Prescribed books Descartes, R.—A Discourse on Method; Meditations. ( Everyman 570, Dent.) or (preferably )- Anscombe, Elizabeth, and Ceach, P. T. (eds. )—Descartes-Philosophical Writings. (Nelson.) Locke, J. Eśsay Concerning lumen Understanding. (Pringle-Pattison's Abbre• viated Ed., O.U.P., or Everyman 984.) Berkeley, G. Principles of Human Knowledge. (Everyman 483.) or (preferably)- Jessop, T. E. (ed. )—Berkeley—Philosophical Writings. (Nelson.) Wiener, P. P. (ed.)—Leibniz Selections. (Scribners. ) Hume, D.—A Treatise of Human Nature. (Everyman 548, 549, or Selby-Bigge edition, Clarendon.) (b) Recommended for reference: Gibson, A. B.—The Philosophy of Descartes. ( Methuen.) Kemp Smith, N.—New Studies in the Philosophy of Descartes. ( Macmillan. ) Aaron, R. I. John Locke. (O.U.P. ) O'Connor, D. J.—John Locke (Pelican.) Warnock, G. J.—Berkeley. (Pelican.) Basson, A. H.—David Hume. (Pelican.) Kemp Smith, N.—The Philosophy of David Hume. (Macmilan.) Price, H. 1.—Hume s Theory of the External World. ( Clarendon.) Wittgenstein, L.—Tractatus Logico-Philosophicus. ( R.K.P. ) Wittgenstein, L.—Philosophical Investigations. ( Blackwel. ) Students may obtain lecture notes in this subject. EXAMINATION. One 3-hour paper. 79. RATIONALIST METAPHYSICS Dr. V. Rice The course is intended to introduce students to the works of rationalist metaphysicians, with special reference to Leibniz, Spinoza and F. H. Bradley. Particular attention will be paid to such topics as the following: the possibility of a rationalist metaphysics, metaphysical system building, monism and pluralism, the concept of substance, the concept of necessary being, the concept of relations, etc. There will be two lectures and one tutorial class per week throughout the year. Two essays are required of students in the course of the year. BOOKS (a) Preliminary reading: Descartes, R.-Discourse on Method. 204 PHILOSOPHY

(b) Prescribed texts: For Descartes, Leibniz and Spinoza: The Rationalists. (Dolphin, Doubleday & Co., N.Y.) Bradley-Appearance and Reality. (O.U.P.) Alternative texts: Descartes, Discourse on Method. Everyman 570, Dent.) Spinoza—Ethics. (tr. by Elwes, Bohn or Dover.) Leibniz—Selections. (ed., P. Wiener, Scribner. ) (c) Recommended for reference: Wisdom, J.—Philosophy and Psychoanalysis. (Blackwell.) Copleston, F.—A History of Philosophy, Vol 4. (Image Books.) Russell, B.—A Critical Exposition of the Philosophy of Leibniz. (Allen & Unwin.) Wollheim, R.—F. H. Bradley. (Pelican. ) Saw, R. L.—Leibniz. (Pelican.) Hampshire, S.—Spinoza. (Pelican.) Strawson, P. F.-Individuals. (Methuen.) Students may obtain lecture notes in this subject. EXAMINATION. One 3-hour paper.

80-1. EPISTEMOLOGY, LOGIC AND METHODOLOGY Professor D. A. T. Gasking, Mr. L. Chlpmaix A course of two lectures and one discussion class per week throughout the year. SYLLABUS Reasonable belief and knowledge. Intuition, judgement and inference. Types of argument and types of statement. The rudiments of formal logic. Generalization. Laws. Hypotheses. Applying loose generalizations and balancing considerations. Probability. Causal Investigations. Types of explanation. Empirical and a priori. Necessity, meaning and analyticity. Types of concept. Goals and techniques of definition. Two essays are required of students in the course of the year. BOOKS (a) Prescribed textbooks: *Chisholm, R.—Theory of Knowledge. (Prentice-Hall.) *Salmon, W.—Logic. (Prentice-Hall.) Alston, W.-Philosophy of Language. (Prentice-Hall.) *Hempel, C.—Philosophy of Natural Science. - (Prentice-Hall.) (b) For reference: - Dray, W.—Philosophy of History. Chs. 1 and 2. (Prentice-Hall.) Lerner, D. (Ed. )—Evidence and Inference. (Free Press of Glencoe.) Hart, H. L. A., and Hoпoré, A. 1.—Causation in the Law. Chs. 1 and 2. (0.U.P.) Ramsay, F. P.-The Foundations of Mathematics. (Routledge & Kegan Paul.) N.B. Students for the Pass degree taking Logic may take the Honours subject, Symbolic Logic, simultaneously with the Pass course and be classified in the subject on the combined result of the two papers.

81. ETHICS Dr. H. J. McCloskey A course of two lectures per week and one tutorial class throughout the year. SYLLABUS The course will consist of a study of the nature and presuppositions of morality, of the logical status and character of moral principles and moral judgements, and of the relation between moral phenomena such as rightness, good, moral good and duty. Two essays are required of students in the course of the year. 205 FACULTY OF ARTS HANDBOOK Books (a) Background reading: Ewing, A. C. Ethics. (English U.P.) Benedict, R.—Patterns of Culture. (New American Library.) Russell, B.—Rumen Society in Ethics and Politics. (Allen & Unwin.) (b) Prescribed texts: *Hume, D. Enquiry Concerning the Principles of Morals. (Clarendon or any other ed.) *kant, I. Fundamental Principles of the Metaphysics of Ethics. (Trans. Abbott.) (Longmans or any other edition.) *Bradley, F. 1.—Ethical Studies. (Clarendon.) *Ross, W. D.—The Right and the Good. (Clarendon.) *Stevenson, C. L.—Ethics and Language. (Yale, U.P.) *Sidgwick, H.—The Methods of Ethics. (Macmillan paperback.) (c) Recommended for reference: Reading guides will be issued at the beginning of 1968. EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper. 82. POLITICAL PHILOSOPHY Dr. J. Srzednicld A course of two lectures and one tutorial class per week throughout the year. Two essays are required of students in the course of the year. SYLLABUS A conceptual examination of notions such as: 'community'; 'rule'; 'right'; 'duty'; 'obligation', etc., together with an examination of inter-individual and communal relations. With a view towards re-examination of such problems as: Political obligation; Representative government and government by consent, etc, Books Recommended for preliminary reading: Beck, Robert M. (ed. )—Perspectives in Social Philosophy. (Holt, Rinehart and Winston, N.Y., 1967.) Recommended for reference: Hart, H. L. A.-The Concept of Law. (Oxford, 1961.) Weber, Max—Basic Concepts in Sociology. (Citadel.) Plamenatz, J.—Consent, Freedom and Political Obligation. (Oxford.) Weldon, T. D.—The Vocabulary of Politics. (Pelican, ch. 3.) EXTERNAL STUDIES. Correspondence tuition is available in this subject. EXAMINATION. One 3-hour paper. 83. PROBLEMS OF PHILOSOPHY This subject will not be available in 1968. 84. GREEK PHILOSOPHY Dr. Mary McCloskey, Mr. J. R. Howes A course of two lectures and one tutorial class per week throughout the year. SYLLABUS The course consists of three sections: (f) the philosophical method of Socrates, and the ethics of Socrates and Plato; (ii) a special topic in Plato and/or Aristotle; (iii) Epicureanism and Stoicism. Two essays are required of Pass students. 206 PØOSOPFIY Books (a) Introductory reading: Guthrie, W. K. C.—The Greek Philosophers. ( Methuen.) Cornford, F. M. Before and After Socrates. (C.U.P. ) Raven, J. E.—Plato's Thought in the Making. (C.U.P. ) ( b ) Prescribed texts: *Plato--Collected Dialogues. (ed. Hamilton and Cairns, Pantheon. *Aristotle—Categortes and De Interpretation. ( ed. Aсkri11, O.U.P. *Epicurus—Letters, Principal Doctrines, Vatican Sayings. (ed. Geer, Library of Liberal Arts. ) *Cicero—De Finibus. (ed. Rackhanx, Loeb.) (c) Recommended' for reference: Crombie, I. M.—An Examination of Plato's Doctrines, Vol. 1 and 2. ( R.K.P. ) Adkins, A. W. H.—Merit and Responsibility. (O.U.P. ) Robinson, R.—Plato's Earlier Dialectic. (2nd ed. O.U.P. ) Dodds, E. R.—Plato: Gorgias. (0.U.P.) Knook, D.—Three Traditions of Moral Thou ht. (C.U.P.) Hare, R. 1.—Freedom and Reason. (0.U.P.) Taylor, A. E.—Plato: The Man and his Work. (Methuen.) Nietzsche, F.—Thus Spake Zarasthustra. (Penguin.) Allen, R. E. (Ed. )—Studies in Plato's Metaphysics. (R.K,P. ) Bambnough, R. (Ed. )-New Essays in Plato and Aristotle. (R.K.P. ) Ryle, G.Plato 's Progress. (C.U.P.) Lucretius—The Nature of the Universe. (Penguin.) Epictetus—Discourses. (Loeb, 2 vols.) Bailey, C.—The Greek Atomists and Epicurus. (O.U.P. ) Bevan, E.—Stoics and Sceptics. ( .U.P.) Zeller, E. _Stoics, Epicureans and ОSceptics. (Russel & Russell.) EXAMINATION. One 3-hour paper.

85. MEDIEVAL PHILOSOPHY Not available in 1968.

86. CONTEMPORARY EUROPEAN PHILOSOPHY Dr. M. J. Charlesworth A course of two lectures and one tutorial class per week throughout the year. SYLLАws A study of the movement of Phenomenology in its various manifestations. Selec- tions from the following texts will be considered and a critical analysis of thi Phenomenological method will be undertaken. Two essays will be required of students in the course of the year. BOOKS (1) Preliminary Reading: Kaufman, W. ( ed. )—Existentialism from Dostoevsky to Sartre. ( MeridIan Books. ) Collins, J. The Existentialists: A Critical Study. (Gateway Editions.) Murdoch, Iris—Sartre: Romantic Rationalist. ( Fontana Library.) Warnock, Mary—The. Philosophy of Sartre. (Hutchinson University Library.) (2) Textbooks: Sartre, J. P.—Existentialism and Humanism. (trans. Philip Mairet, Methuen.) Sketch for a Theory of the Emotions. (trans. Philip Mairet, Methuen.) Being and Nothingness. (trans. Hazel Barnes, Methuen.) Merleau-Ponty, 1.—The Phenomenology of Perception. (trans. Colin Smith,. Routledge and kegan Paul.) 207 FACULTY of AВTS HANDBOOK Husserl, E. Ideas: General Introduction to Pure Phenomenology. (trans. W. Boyce Gibson, Macmillan.) ( Students will be advised on texts at the beginning of lectures.) (3) Reference: Spiegelberg, H.—The Phenomenological Movement, 2 Vols. (1965.) EXAMINATION. One 3-hour paper.

87. AESTHETICS Dr. Mary McCloskey A course of two lectures and one tutorial class per week throughout the year. SYLLABUS The object of the course is to determine and examine the central concepts of aesthetics and to consider the relationships between judgements about natural beauty and judgements about works of art. This will be done by using what is worthwhile in Kant s account of aesthetic judgement, developing it and consolidating its contemporary interest. Books (a) Prescribed text: Kant, I.—Critique of Aesthetic Judgement. (trans. Meredith, .U.P. ) Wittgenstein, L.—Lectures and Conversations on Aesthetics, Оpsychology and Religious Belief. (ed. Cyril Barrett.) (Blackwell, 1966.) References will be given in class. EXAMINATION. One 3-hour paper.

88. PHILOSOPHY OF RELIGION Dr. H. J. McCloskey, Dr. M. J. Charlesworth, Dr. V. Rice, Mr. J. R. Howes A course of two lectures and one tutorial per week throughout the year. SYLLAВUs An examination of arguments bearing on (i) the existence and attributes of Ø with reference to the traditional proofs; (ii) the problem of evil; (iii) the relation of faith and reason; (iv) the import of religious statements. Two essays will be required of students in the course of the year. BOOKS (a) Preliminary Reading: Hick, J.-Philosophy of Religion. ( Prentice-Hall. ) Lewis, Н. D.—Philosophy of Religion. (E.U.P. Teach Yourself Books.) (b) Prescribed Reading: St. Anselm—Proslogion. ( Selected extracts to be circulated.) St. Thomas Aquinas—Summa Theologiae. (Selected extracts to be circulated.) Kant, I.—Critique of Rure Reason, Book 2, Chapter 3, Sections 2-7. ( any ed.) Mascall, E. L. He Who Is—A Study in Traditional Theism. (Lon ans.) Smart, N. ( ed. )—Historical Selections in Philosophy of Religion. (S.C. . ) Pike, J. (ed.)—God and Evil. (Prentice-Hall.) М Hick, J. (ed.)—The Existence of God. (Macmillan.) Smart, N.—Philosophers and Religious Truth. ( S.C.M. ) The Epistle to the Romans, in The New English Bible. (c) Recommended for reference: Hume, D.-Dialogues Concerning Natural Religion. (Hafner. ) McTaggart, J. MeT. E.—Some Dogmas of Religion. (Arnold. ) Campbell, C. A.—On Selfhood and Godhood. (Allen and Unwire.) Flew, A. G. N., and Macintyre, A. (ed. )—New Essays in Philosophical Theology. (s.C.M. ) Mitchell, B. G. (ed.)—Faith and Logic. (Allen and Unwin.) Paton, H. J.-The Modern Predicament. (Allen and Unwin.) 208 PØOSOPHY Hick, j. Evil and the God of Love. (Macmillan.) Students are advised to check for further details on the Philosophy notice-board at the beginning of 1968. EXAMINATION. One 3-hour paper.

HONOURS DEGREE 90-4. C. SCHOOL OF PHILOSOPHY ( For Combined Honour Courses including Philosophy see page 251. For a Combined Course for the degree with honours in Philosophy and the diploma of Social Studies see the Social Studies Handbook.) 1. The course for the degree with honours in the School of Philosophy comprises the following subjects: (a) Either: Philosophy IA ( Ions.) or Philosophy IB (Ions.). (b) Epistemology, Logic and Methodology H; Political Philosophy; Modern Philosophy; and Ethics. (c) - Two chosen out of the following: Rationalist Metaphysics; Medieval Philosophy; Greek Philosophy; Aesthetics; and Contemporary European Philosophy; and Philosophy of Religion. Provided (1) that a student may not do both of Contemporary European Philosophy and Philosophy of Religion, and (2) that a student who did Philosophy IB must do Greek Philosophy. (d) Honours Philosophy A (Epistemology, Logic and Methodology). Honours Philosophy В ( Philosophy of the period 1900-1953). Honours Philosophy C (Ethics). Honours Philosophy D ( Political Philosophy). Honours Philosophy E ( Кant's Critique of Pure Reason). Honours Philosophy F (Philosophy since 1953). Honours Philosophy G (Philosophical Psychology). (e) Either four additional subjects (taught by Arts Departments other than that of Philosophy) or three such subjects of which at least one is taken at honours level. These additional subjects must either include History and Philosophy of Science I or include two subjects which form the first two parts of an approved major. Normally also they must include a language other than English, although the last requirement may be waived in special cases. 2. The normal sequence of courses and examinations is as follows: (a) First Year. Either Philosophy IA (Ions.) or Philosophy IB (Ions.). Either three additional subjects or two such subjects, one at least at honours level, chosen in conformity with 1(e) above. (b) Admission to Second Year. Students who have completed this first year must be approved by the Faculty of Arts before entering the second year of the honours school. Those who have gained at least second class honours in either Philosophy IA (Ions.) or Philosophy IB (Ions.) should apply direct to the Arts Sub-Deanery, where admission will be automatic. Those who got less than a second and wish to continue with honours, and those who did not attempt first-year honours but wish to enter second-year honours on the basis of a good pass in Philosophy I (A or B), should interview the head of the department of Philosophy, who will be guided in his recommendation by the merits of the case. (c) Second Year. Epistemology, Logic and Methodology (Ions.); Political Philosophy; Modem Philosophy. One additional subject, chosen in conformity with 1(e) above. There will be an examination in these subjects at the end of the year. Students admitted to second year honours on the basis of a good pass, 209 FACULTY OF ARTS řIANDB00B in Philosophy. I (A or B) are also required to sit and obtain honors hi the examination for the Philosophy I Special Course. (d) Third Year. Ethics; Honours Philosophy A; Honours Philosophy B. Two of: Rationalist Metaphysics; Contemporary European Philosophy; Greek Philosophy; Medieval Philosophy; Aesthetics; Philosophy of Religion, chosen in conformity with the proviso of (I) c above. All subjects done in third year except Honours Philosophy A, will be examined. But this examination will not be regarded as part of the final exaixination for honours. (e) Fourth year. Honours Philosophy C; Honours Philosophy D; Honours Philosophy E; Honours Philosophy F; Honours Philosophy G. (f) Essays. All honours students ( Pure and Combined) are required to write one essay of about 3,000 words in each of the long vacations preceding their third and fourth years, and, in their third year, one essay ( normally of 1,500-2,000 words) in each of the subjects in which they are to be examined that year. Students in the Pure School are required to submit in addition an essay of 3,000 words at the beginning of the second term of their fourth year. Topics will be set for all these essays, but in certain cases other topics may be approved. These essays will be taken into account in the determination of class at the third year and final examinations. (g) The Final Examination. The final examination will consist of the following seven papers: (1) Epistemology, Logic and Methodology. (2) Ethics. (3) Political Philosophy. (4) Honours Philosophy E. (5) Honours Philosophy F. (6) Honours Philosophy G. (7) Essay Paper. Each of the first three of these papers will be designed to test the student's general familiarity ` with the subject as a whole, whereas papers (4), (5) and (6) will cover specifically the work done in those courses whose names they bear. The essay paper will consist of a single question chosen from a number of alternatives covering the main fields of philosophical study. Candidates may also be required to attend an oral examination.

77-1. PHILOSOPHY IA (lions.) SYLLABUS. As for Philosophy IA, together with the Philosophy I, Special Course (see below). 77-2. PHILOSOPHY IB (Ions.) SYLLABUS. As for Philosophy IB, together with the Philosophy I Special Course (see below). PHILOSOPHY PART I (Special Course) Mr. D. Gunner, Dr. V. Rice A course of one lecture per week, throughout the year, in addition to the lectures and tutorial for the ordinary degree. SYLLABUS As for the ordinary degree, together with a study of the main doctrines of Berkeley. BOOKS As for the ordinary degree, together with the following: 210 PØSOPHY (a) Prescribed text: •Berkeley—The Principles of Human Knowledge; Three Dialogues between i yies and Philonous. (Both these are printed in the Everyman volume, New Theory of Vision and Other Writings. They are also printed in Berkeleý s Philosophical Writings. (Collier Books.) (b) Specially recommended for reference: Warnock, G.—Berkeley. (Pelican.) (c) Recommended for reference as directed in lectures: Dawes Hicks, G.-Berkeley. (Benn.) Johnston, G. A.—The Development of Berkeley's Philosophy. (Macmillan.) Moore, G. E. Philosophical Studies. (R.K.P. ) Price, H. H.-Perception. (Methuen.) Hume, David-Enquiry Concerning Human Understanding. (0.U.P.) Broad, C. D.—"Berkeley's Argument Against Material Substance", in Proceedings of the British Academy, 1942. EXAMINATION. One 3-hour paper in addition to the paper for the ordinary degree.

80-1. EPISTEMOLOGY, LOGIC AND METHODOLOGY (Ions) sYLLАВUS As for Epistemology, Logic and Methodology together with Special Course (see below).

80-2. EPISTEMOLOGY, LOGIC AND METHODOLOGY ( Special Course) (Symbolic Logic) Mr. L. Chipman One lecture class per week for honours students in their second year. (This subject may also be taken by Pass students.) sYLLAвUS The rudiments of modern symbolic logic. BOOKS (a) Prescribed textbook: Lemmon, Е. J: —Beginning Logic. ( Nelson. ) Other references will be given in lectuгes. EXAMINATION. One 3-hour paper.

89-1. HONOURS PHILOSOPHY A (Epistemology, Logic and Methodology) Mr. L. J. O'Neill One lecture-tutorial class per week for honours students in their Third Year. SYLLABUS As for the ordinary degree, together with a study of certain more advanced logical topics. BOOKS Reference will be made to some of the following: Wittgenstein, L.—Remarks on the Foundations of Mathematics. ( Blackwell, 1956.) Feigl, et al ( ed. ) —Minnesota Studies {п the Philosophy of Science. Vol. 2 and Vol. 3. (Minnesota Press.) Pap, A.—An Introduction to the Philosophy of Science. (Eyre and Spottiswoode, 1963.) Strawson, P. F.—Introduction to Logical Theory. (Methuen.) Other references will be given in lectures. 211 FACULTY OF ARTS ØBOOK 89-2. HONOURS PHILOSOPHY В (British Philosophy of the period 1900-1953) Mr. D. L. Gunner (a) Preliminary Reading: Russell, B.—My Philosophical Development. (Allen & Unwin.) Unison, J. 0.—Philosophical Analysis. (O.U.P.) (b) Prescribed Text: Wittgenstein, L.—Tractatus Logico-Philosophicus. , ( R.K.P. ) ( c ) For Reference: Russell, .—Principia Mathematics, Introduction. (C.U.P.) Russell, ВB.—Logic and Knowledge. (Allen & Unwin.) Russell, B.—The Principles of Mathematics. Griffin, J.-Wittgenstein s Logical Atomism. ( O.U. . ) Moore, G. E.—"A Defence of Commonsense" printedР in Contemporary British Philosophy, Vol 2. (Allen & Unwin.) Moore, G. E.—"A Reply to my Critics", published in The Philosophy of G. E. Moore. (North Western University.) Ramsay, F. P.—The Foundations of Mathematics. (R.K.P. ) Ayer, A. J.—Language, Truth and Logic. (Gollancz.) Wisdom, J.—Other Minds. (Blackwell.) Flew, A. G. N.—Logic and Language, Vols. I and II. (Blackwell.) Ryle, G.—Dilemmas. (C.U.P.) Anderson, J.—Studies in Empirical Philosophy. (Angus & Robertson.) Black, M.—A Companion to Wittgenstein's Tractatus. (C.U.P.) Wittgenstein, L.—The Blue and Brown Books. (Blackwell.) Wittgenstein, L.—Philosophical Investigations. (Blackwell.) Pitcher, G.—The Philosophy of Wittgenstein. (Prentice-Hall.)

89-3. HONOURS PHILOSOPHY C ( Ethics) Mr. W. K. Presa A lecture-tutorial course extending throughout the year. SYLLABUS: The additional work for the honours degree will fall into two parts. (i) The ethics of Aristotle. (ii) The contemporary situation. BOOKS (a) Prescribed texts: Hare, R. M.—Freedom and Reason. (O.U.P.) Aristotle-The Nicomachean Ethics. Books I, II, III, VI, VII and X. (Trans. Ross. World's Classics.) (b) Recommended for reference: Ross, W. D.-The Foundations of Ethics. (0.U.P. ) Muirhead, J. H.—Rule and End in Morals. (O.U.P.) Blanshard, Brand—Reason and Goodness. (Allen & Unwin.) Von Wright, G. H.—The Varieties of Goodness. (R.K.P.) Hare, R. M.—The Language of Morals. (O.U.P.) Beier, K. E. 1.—The Moral Point of View. (Ithaca.) Singer, M. G.—Generalization in Ethics. (Spottiswoode.) Nowell-Smith, P. H.—Ethics. (Penguin.) Joachim, H. 1.—Commentary on Aristotle's Ethics. (O.U.P. ) 212 PHILOSOPHY 89-4. HONOURS PHILOSOPHY D ( Political Philosophy ) Dr. H. J. McCloskey One lecture-tutorial class per week throughout the year. SYLLABUS Issues to be considered in this course will be taken from the following: the nature and object of .political philosophy; the nature of the state; the function of the state; the grounds of political obligation; ideals in politics—common good, rights, liberty, equality, justice. BOOKS Essential reading will be indicated by the lecturer. The following books will be relevant: *Мill, J. S.—Liberty. (Everyman.) Representative Government. (Everyman.) And Principles of Political Economy. (Longman.) Ritchie, D. G.—Natural Rights. (Allen & Unwim.) *Hobhouse, L. T.-Liberalism. (H.U.P.) Laski, J. H.—А Grammar of Politics. (Allen & Unwin.) Plamenatz, J. P.—Consent, Freedom and Political Obligation. (O.U.P.) Tawney, R. H.—Equality. (Allen & Unwin. ) Benn, S., and Peters, R. S.—Social Principles and the Democratic State. (Allen & Unwin.) Berlin, 1.—Two Concepts of Liberty. (Clarendon.) Hart, H. L. A.—The Concept of Law. (Oxford.) Barmy, B.—Pol tica/ Argument. (Routledge.) Wilson, J. Equality.ł (Hutchinson.)

89-5. HONOURS PHILOSOPHY E (Kant's Critique of Pure Reason) Dr. Mary McCloskey, Dr. J. Srzednicki One lecture-tutorial class ( one and a half hours) per week throughout the year. SYLLABUS А study of Kant's Critique of Pure Reason and its place in the history of philosophical thinking. BOOKS (a) For preliminary readin : Кöтnет, S.—Капн. ( Penguin. Kant, I.—Prolegomeпa. ( tr. Lucas.) ( Manchester U.P. ) ( b ) Prescribed text: *Kant—The Critique of Рите Reason. ( trs. Кетр-Smith. ) (Macmillan.) ( с). Recommended for reference: Bird, Graham—Kant's Theory of Knowledge. (R.K.P.) Paton, H. J.—Kant's Metaphysic of Experience. ( А11еп & Unwin.) Ewing, A. C.—A Short Commentary on Kant's 'Critique of Pure Reason'. ( Methuen. ) Pritchard, H. A.—Kant's Theory of Knowledge. (O.U.P.) 5trawson, Р. F.—The Bounds of Sense. (Methuen.) Bennett, J.-Kant's Analytic. (Cambridge.) Wolff, P. R.—Kant's Theory of Mental Activity. (Harvard U.P.)

89-6. HONOURS PHILOSOPHY F (Philosophy since 1953 ) Mr. A. Coady One lecture-discussion class (one and a half hours) per week throughout the year. 7Асцга У OF ARTS HANDBOOK SYLLАвUS A study of some of the main philosophical investigations that have taken place during the last ten or twenty years, expanding and particularizing the general review in Contemporary Philosophy part I. Books Selections will be made from the following: *Wittgenstein, L.—Philosophical Investigations. ( Blaсkwel, 1953.) Shoemaker, S.—Self-Knowledge and Self-Identity. (Cornell, 1963.) Taylor, C.—The Explanation of Behaviour. (Routledge, 1965.) Strawson, P. F.Individuals. huen,(Met 1959.) Quine, W. V. 0.—Word and Object. (Technology Press, 1960.) Armstrong, D, ' M. -Perception and the Physical World. (Routledge, 1962.) Austin, J. L.—How to do Things with Words. ( Oxford, 1962.) Smart, J. J. C.—Philosophy and Scientific Realism. (Routledge, 1963.) Ayer, A. J.—The Concept of a Person. ( Масmiцan, 1963.) Bennett, J. _Rationality. (Routledge, 1965.) 89-7. HONOURS PHILOSOPHY G ( Philosophical Psychology) Dr. G. Marshall, Mr, L. Chipman One lecture-discussion class (one and a half hours) per week throughout the year. SYLLABUS The object of the course is to consider questions in the philosophy of the mind. It is intended not to overlap with the work of the department of Psychology. BOOKS There is no prescribed textbook. Students should read: Rуlе, G.—The Concept of _ Mind. ( Hutchinson.) Anscombe, G. E. M.—Intention. ( Blackwell.) Hampshire, S. :Thou ht and Action. (Chatto & Windus.) Wittgenstein, L.—Philosophical Investigations. (Part II.) (Blackwe Ρ.) Strawson, P. F. Individuals, Ch. 3. ( Methuen. ц Shoemaker, S.—Self-Knowledge and Sel f}-Identity. (Cornell.) More detailed reference to articles and books will be made during the course. 90-3. THE M.A. PRELIMINARY COURSE IN PHILOSOPHY Holders of the В.А. Ordinary Degree who have done at least a major in Philo- sophy will be admitted to this course if their philosophical knowledge and ability is judged to be adequate. Those seeking admission should consult the Philosophy Depart- ment's Director of М.A. Preliminary students, Mr. John Howes, who will advise on enrolment procedures and will, if they are admitted, plan their course with them. The М.A. Preliminary Examination will consist of four papers, all to be taken in the same year. These papers will either be identical with four of the papers currently being taken by Final Honours students or (in special cases) identical with three of such Final Honours papers and one paper currently being taken by Third 'Year Honours students. The four subjects for examination having been selected for a particular student, a course of study will be planned, suitable to prepare him for that examination. In no case will this course involve less than one year of full-time study or two years part-time. Admission to successive years of the course will be conditional upon satisfactory attendance at all lectures and seminars prescribed, and upon satisfactory performance in all written tests which may be imposed. MASTER OF ARTS 90-4. C. SCHOOL OF PHILOSOPHY Students seeking admission to the М.А. Course in Philosophy (for which the normal prerequisite is at least second class honours in the School of Philosophy, in the philosophical part of a Combined Honours School, or in the M.A. Preliminary examination in Philosophy) should, after consulting the department. fill in the 214 FACULTY OF ARTS HANDBOOK application form and submit it to the Arts sub-deanery by February 28th. And if their course lasts for more than one year they must re-enrol at the beginning of each year. Candidates are required to prepare a thesis on an approved subject, and (unless specially exempted) to attend an oral examination covering the general field of their research. They will work under the supervision of a member of the Philosophy department to whom they should report regularly on the progress of their work, and who will advise them about a suitable course of reading. They may also be required to attend any lectures or discussion classes prescribed by their supervisor. The final date for submission of theses is 12 February, 1969, prior to which date candidates should have submitted to the Registrar an entry form for examination for higher degrees. Three copies of each thesis (quarto, typewritten, " double-spaced) are required, of which one copy, in the case of a successful candidate, will be deposited in the University Library.

215 DEPARTMENT OF POLITICAL SCIENCE

Head of Department: A. F. Davies, М.A. ORDINARY DEGREE (Details for the honours degree are set out at the end of this section.) Group 2 SUBJECTS OFFERED Modern Government A, В, C, Public Administration, International Relations, Political Sociology. For approved majors see p. 37. For pm-requisites for certain subjects see Regulation 3.5. Note: Students taking the ordinary degree, or the honours degree other than in the school of Political Science, may enter for honours in individual Political Science subjects. Details of the additional honours syllabus in each subject will be found below, under the heading "Honours Degree, School of Political Science".

93-1. MODERN GOVERNMENT A A course of two lectures and one tutorial class per week throughout the year. SУLLAВUS The course is planned as an introduction to the study of politics with Australia as the main case study. The following matters will be considered: the nature of politics; how the individual learns his politics, especially the role of the family and social class; individual participation in politics as voter, as audience and in parties and pressure groups. Then, aspects of society and political culture such as bureaucracy, ideology, democracy, power and constitutions will be analysed in detail, providing a setting for examination of important parts of the political structure such as parliament, cabinet and the administration, with emphasis on the role of politician and the role of administrator. BOOKS (a) Recommended for preliminary reading and reference: Davies, A. F.—Australian Democracy. (2nd ed., Longrans.) Mayer, H. (ed. )—Austraiian Politics—A Reader. (Cheshire.) Lane, R. E.-Political Life. (Free Press.) (b) Recommended for reference: Dahl, R. A.-Modern Political Analysis. ( Prentice-Hall.) Burns, C. B.—Parties and People. ( M.U.P. ) Blondel, J. Voters, Parties and Leaders: The Social Fabric of British Politics.. (Pelican.) Birch, A. H.-Representative and Responsible Government. ( Allen and Unwin.) Bottomore, T. B. Elites and Society. (Pelican.) Crisp, L. F.—Australian National Government. (Longmana.) Jupp, j.—Australian Partу Politics. (I.U.P.) Eпcеl, S.—Cabinet Government in Australia. (M.U.P. ) Crick, B. In Defence of Polities. (Pelican.) Davies, A. F.—Images of Class. (Sydney University Press.) Detailed reading guides will be issued during the year. EXAMINATION. One 3-hour paper. 216 POLITICAL sCIENGE 93-2. MODERN GOVERNMENT B A course of two lectures with supplementary tutorials throughout the year. SYLLABUS A course in comparative politics based mainly on the U.S.A., Britain and the U.S.S.R. Students are required to submit written work during the course. BOOKS (a) Recommended for preliminary reading: Almond, G. A., and Powell, G. B.—Comparative Politics: A Developmental Approach. ( Little, Brown.) eloff, M.—The American Federal Government. ( Oxford. ) or Grifiths,В E. S.—The American System of Government. (Methuen.) Armstrong, J. Ideology, Politics and Government in the Soviet Union. ( Praeger.) (b) Prescribed textbooks: King, A. Politics in the United States. (Little, Brown.) or Havard, W. C.—The Government and Politics of the United States. (Hutchin- son.) *Irish, M. D., and Prothro, J. W.—The Politics of American Democracy. (Prentice- Hall.) Hazard, J. N.—The Soviet System of Government. (Chicago.) or Schapiro, L.—The Government and Politics of the Soviet Union. (Hutchinson.). or Barghoorn, F. C.—Politics in the U.S.S.R. (Little, Brown.) *Churchward, L. G.-Contemporary Soviet Government. (Routledge and Kegan Paul.) *Rose, R.-Politics in. England. (Little, Brown.) (c) Recommended for reference: Detailed reading guides will be issued throughout the year. EXAMINATION. One 3-hour paper.

93-3. MODERN GOVERNMENT C A course of two lectures and one tutorial class per week throughout the year. SYLLABUS A course in comparative politics based mainly on China and India. Note: This course will not be offered in 1968.

94. INTERNATIONAL RELATIONS A course of two lectures with supplementary tutorials throughout the year. SYLLABUS An introductory course in international relations. The course will include the consideration of the following problems: the nature and scope of international relations; ãpm-caches to the study of international relations; power politics; balance of power and international alliances; international relations since World War II; international organisation; a study of international politics in the Pacific and Southern Asia; Australian foreign policy. Students will be required to submit written work throughout the year. Books (a) Recommended for preliminary reading: Carr, E. H.—Nationalism and After. (Macmillan.) Connell-Smith, G.—The Pattern of the Postwar World. (Penguin.) Frankel, J.—International Relations. (O.U.P.) 217 FACULTY OF ARTS HANDBOOK (b) Recommended for references: Carr, E. H.-The Twenty Years' Crisis. ( Macmillan. ) Can, E. H.—Internationai Relations Between the Two World Wars. ( Macmillan. ) Morgenthau, H. J. Politics Among Nations. (Knopf.) Schwarzenberger, G.—Power Politics. ( Stevens and Son. ) Seton-Watson, 1.—Neither War nor Peace. (Methuen. ) Belоff, 1.—The Foreign Policy of Soviet Russia. ( O.U.P. ) Dean, V. 1.—The Nature of the Non-Western World. ( Mentor. ) Burton, J. W. International Relations: A General Theory. (Cambridge.) Greenwood, G., and Harper, N. D.—Australia in World Affairs, 3 Vols. (Cheshire.) Kennedy, D. F.—The Security of Southern Asia. (Chatte and Windus. ) Levi, W. Australia's Outlook on Asia. (Angus and Robertson. ) Zagozia, D.—The Sino-Soviet Conflict. (Princeton U.P.) Stoessinger, J G.—The United Nations and the Super Powers. (Random House. Watt, A.—The Evolution of Australian Foreign Policy 1938-1965. (Cambridge.) Cole, J. P.—Geography of World Affairs. (Penguin.) EXAMINATION. One 3-hour paper. 95. POLITICAL SOCIOLOGY A course of two lectures with supplementary tutorials throughout the year. SYLLABUS A study of the contribution of sociology and other social sciences to theory and research in politics, and in particular to the understanding of politics as a learnt activity. The course is concerned both with substantive contributions ( e.g. the study ofolitical socialization, group membership, civic culture and leadership in public life) and research methods (e.g. interviewing and survey analysis). Students will be required to submit written work during the year. BOOKS There is no prescribed textbook. Students should read: Greenstein, F. I.—Children and Politics. ( Yale U.P., 1965.) Lasswell, H. D.—Psychopathology and Politics. ( Viking, Compass, 1965.) Lane, R. E.-Political Life. (Free Press, 1959.) Verba, S.—Small Groups and Political Behaviour. (Princeton U.P., 1961.) Almond, G. A. and Verba, S.-The Civic Culture. (Princeton U.P., 1963.) Eulau, H., Eldersveld, S. J., and Janowitz, M.—Political Behaviour. (Free Press, 1956.) Berelson, ., and Janowitz, M.—Reader in Public Opinion and Communication. (FreeВ Press, 1953.) More detailed reference to articles and books will be made during the course. EXAMINATION. One 3-hour paper. 96. PUBLIC ADMINISTØTION A course of two lectures with supplementary tutorials throughout the year. SYLLABUS A study of the bureaucratic arm of government. An introductory outline of the structure and functions of the public services, with special reference to the Australian Commonwealth Public Service, leading to an examination of the relationship between administration and policy development. Two general policy areas, economic policy and science policy, will be examined in some detail. Students will be required to submit written work during the year. BOOKS (a) Preliminary reading: Marx, F. 1.—The Administrative State. (U, of Chicago P., 1957.) Blair, L.—The Commonwealth Public Service. (M.U.P., 1958.) (b) General references: Spann, R. N. (ed. )-Public Administration in Australia. (N.S.W. Govt. Printer.) 218 POLITICAL SCIENCE

Caïдèn, G. E.—Career. Service. (M.3.P., 1965.) Simon, H. A., Smithburg, D. W., and Thompson, V. A.—Public Administration. (Knopf, 1964.) Mackenzie, W. J., and Grove, J. W.—Central Administration in Britain. (Long- mans, Green & Co., 1957.) Sayre, W. (ed. )—Ths Federal Government Service. ( Prentice-Hall, 1965.) Wilson, Thomas—Planning Growth. ( Macmillan and Co., 1964.) Price, Don K.—Government and Science. (0.U.P., 1962.) Lakoff, S. A. (ed. )—Knowledge and Power. ( Free Press, 1966.) Schoffer, В. B., and Corbett, D. C. (ed. )-Decisions. (Cheshire, 1965.) A detailed rеаding guide will be issued in this subject. EXAMINATION. One 3-hour paper. HONOURS DEGREE I. SCHOOL OF POLITICAL SCIENCE ( For possible combinations of this school with other honours schools see p. 251) 1. The course for the degree with honours in the school of Political Science comprises the following subjects: Modern Government A Modern Government B Three of: Modern Government C, International Relations, Public Administra- tion, Political Sociology, or European History . Theories of Politics ( Parts I & II) В together with one of the following sequences of subjects: 1. European History A or British History and one of Australian History, Ameri can History, European History B, Far Eastern History, Social History, Later British History. 2. Economics A, Economics B. 3. Philosophy Part 1, Political Philosophy. 4. Indonesian Part I, Indonesian and Malayan Studies A. 5. Psychology Part I. The first subject in the above sequences must be taken at the honours level, excepting in sequence 4 when Indonesian. Part 1 should be taken at the pass level and Indonesian and Malayan Studies A at the honours level. In addition, candidates for the degree with honours must take two other subjects at pass standard, and part I or IA of a recommended foreign language, or another approved subject, in the First Year of the course. 2. The subjects of the course should be taken in the following order, unless, because of special circumstances, the Faculty allows the order to be varied. First Year: ( a) Modern Government A (bons). (b) European History A ( hoes) or British History ( hons) or Econ- omics A ( hons) or Philosophy part I ( hons) or Indonesian part L (c) The pass course in one other subject. (d) Part I or IA of a recommended foreign language or another approved subject. Second Year: (a) Modern Government B (bons). (b) International Relations ( hons) or Public Administration (hons ) or European History B ( hons) . (c) An approved grade 2 History in sequence 1. above or Economics B or Political Philosophy or Indonesian and Malayan Studies A (hons). Third Year: Two of Modem Government C (hons), International Relations, Political Sociology (bons); and one other approved subject at the pass standard. Fourtk Year Theories of Politics Parts I & II. 3. Comments. The First Year is regarded as a preliminary year, and students who have completed it must be approved by the Faculty of Arts as candidates for the degree with honours before entering the Second Year of the honours school. 219. FACULTY OF ARTS HANDBOOK Admission will normally be given only to candidates who have obtained at least second class honours in Modern Government A and European History A or British History or Economics A or Philosophy part I or Psychology part I. Other candidates who wish to continue in the honours school should interview the head of the department, who will be guided in his recommendations by the merits of the case. A student who has not attempted honours, but who at the end of the First Year passes in Modem Government A and wishes to enter the honours school, must make special application to the Faculty through the Sub-dean for permission to do so. If such permission is given, the Faculty will prescribe what further work must be completed before the student is allowed to proceed to the final examination. Students who fail to gain first or second class honours in their examinations in Political Science at the end of the Second Year will usually be advised by the Depart- ment of Political Science not to proceed to the Third year of the honours school, but rather to complete a course for the Degree of Bachelor of Arts, Ordinary Degree. The Third and Fourth Years of the Honours School are regarded as forming a. continuous whole. Candidates who, during their Third Year have made satisfactory progress in the Honours Political Science subjects of this year, will be admitted to the Fourth Year of the School without formal examination in these subjects. Candi- dates whose progress in these subjects during the first two terms is not considered satisfactory will be notified during the third term that they must sit for a special examination at the end of the Third Year. Students who are unable to proceed to the Fourth Year but who satisfy the examiners- at a special examination at the end of their Third Year may with the approval of the Faculty, be admitted to the Degree of Bachelor of Arts, Ordinary Degree. Enquiries concerning such special examinations should normally be made before the end of September of the year concerned. 4. The examination in the School of Political Science . taken at the end of the Fourth Year will be a Final Examination. The components of the final examination will be papers in each of the two Honours Political Science subjects taken in the Third Year, two pagers in Theories of Politics, together with a 9,000 word thesis on an approved subject. The above thesis, embodying the result of independent research, must be handed in at the beginning of third term. The following course has been approved for students who intend to combine the sØol of Political Science with a Law course: First Year: Modern Government A (bons). British History ( hons ). Introduction to Legal Method. Part I or IA of a recommended foreign language or another approved subject. Second Year: Modem Government B (hons). International Relations A (hons). Criminal Law. Principles of Contract. Third Year: Modern Government C (lions). Public Administration (hons) or Political Sociology. The Law of Torts. Principles of Property in Land. Fourth Year: Theories of Politics. Legal History. . Fifth Year: As for Third Year Law. Sixth Year: As for Fourth Year Law.

93-1. MODERN GOVERNMENT A (Hops) . A course of lectures as for the ordinary degree, together with one honours tutorial class each week throughout the academic year. SYLLABUS (i) As for the ordinary degree. (ii) An introduction to political theory. 220 POLITICAL SCIENCE Books (i) As for ordinary degree. (ii) There are no set textbooks for this course. Detailed reading guides will be issued during the year. EXAMINATION. Two 3-hour papers.

93-2. MODERN GOVERNMENT В (lions) A course of lectures as for the ordinary degree, together with one honours tutorial class each week throughout the academic year. SYLLABUS (i) As for the ordinary degree. (ii) A comparative study of modern political systems with the main emphasis on modern representative democracies. BOOKS (i) As for the ordinary degree. (ii) Prescribed textbooks: *Almond, G. A., and Powell, G. B.—Comparative Polities: Developmental Approach. (Little, Brown.) А Almond, G. A., and Verba, S.—The Civic Culture. (Little, Brown.) *Easton, D.—A Framework for Political Analysis. (Prentice-Hall.) *Dahl, R. A.—Modern Political Analysis. (Prentice-Hall.) (iii) References to various primary and secondary sources to be used for the course will be given in the reading guides for the honours students which are issued during the year. EXAMINATION. Two 3-hour papers.

93-3. ' MODERN GOVERNMENT C (Ions) (This course will not be offered in 1968.) A course of lectures as for the ordinary degree, together with one honours tutorial class each week throughout the year. SYLLABUS (i) As for the ordinary degree. (ii) An introduction to some aspects of the comparative study of politics in underdeveloped societies, with special reference to the analysis of political modernization. BOOKS (I) As for the ordinary degree. (ii) Detailed reading guides will be issued in this subject. EXAMINATION. Two 3-hour papers.

94. INTERNATIONAL RELATIONS (Ions) A course of lectures as for the ordinary degree together with one tutorial class each week throughout the academic year. Students are required to submit written work during the course. SYLLABUS (i) As for the ordinary degree. (ii) 'A more detailed study of certain topics in the course for the ordinary degree with particular emphasis on general theories and models of international relations. BOOKS Detailed reading guides will be issued throughout the year. EXAMINATION. Two 3-hour papers. 221 FACULTY OF ARTS HANDBOOK 95. POLITICAL SOCIOLOGY (Ions) An introductory course on methods of research together with a more detailed study of a selected topic. The topic for.1968 will be "The suburban political process". BOOK Students should read: Junker, В. H. Field Work. (U. of Chicago, 1959. ) ЕхлмwАтrow: Two 3-hour papers. 96. PUBLIC ADMINISTRATION (Ions ) A course of lectures as for the ordinary degree, together with one honours tutorial class each week throughout the academic year. Students are required to submit written work during the course. sУLLAВUs (i) As for the ordinary degree. (ii) . Organization theory. . BOOKS (i) As for the ordinary degree. . (ii) General references for Organization Theory: Presthus, R.—The Organizational Society. ( Vintage Books, 1965.) Blau, P. M., and Scott, W. R. Formal Organizations. (Routledge and Kegan Paul, 1963.) Simon, H. A.—Administrative Behavior. ( 2nd ed., Free Press, 1957. ) Barnard, C. I.—The Functions of the Executive. ( Harvard U.P.) Selznick, P.—Leadership in Administration. ( Row, Peterson, 1957.) Merton, R. K. et a1. (ed.)—Reader in Bигеаисгас . (Free Press, 1952.) Etzioni, А.—Моdern 0тgаnizat{ons. ( Prentice-Hall, 1964.) Thompson, J. D. (ed. )—Approaches to Organizational Design. ( Pittsburgh, 1966.) Detailed reading guides will be issued on this subject. EXAMINATION. Two 3-hour papers. 97-1. THEORIES OF POLITICS I A weekly seminar for Fourth Year Honours students dealing with various problems in Organization Theory. BOOKS List as for Public Administration (hons). Detailed reading guides will be issued on this subject. EXAMINATION. One 3-hour paper. 97-2. THEORIES OF POLITICS II A weekly seminar for Fourth Year Honours students dealing with the contribution of some leading writers to political studies. BOOKS Selected texts and reading guides will be announced at the beginning of the. course. EXAMINATION. One 3-hour paper. MASTER OF ART5 98-4. 1. SCHOOL OF POLITICAL SCIENCE Candidates will prepare a thesis on an approved subject, and will be advised as to a suitable course of reading. A discussion class will be arranged. Candidates may be expected to pass an oral examination covering the general field of their research. An entry forni for examination for higher degrees must be submitted to the Registrar. Theses must be submitted not later than 12 February, 1969. Three copies of each thesis (quarto, typewritten, double-spaced) should be submitted, one of which will be deposited in the University Library. 222 DEPARTMENT OF PSYCHOLOGY Head of Department: Professor O. A. OESER, .Sc. ( S. Africa ), Dr.Phil. ( Marburg ), Ph.D. (Cantab. ), М Ρ., MЛ F.B.Ps.S. INTRODUCTION WHAT PSYCHOLOGISTS DO Psychologists are employed mainly. by government departments, both Com- monwealth and State, especially Labour and National Service, the armed forces, and Mental Health and Education, and also by public hospitals. The field of industrial and commercial employment is growing. Just what the psychologist does depends, of course, on the body which employs him. He may be concerned with advising young men and women on how best to find and settle into a job suited to their capacities and interests, or with advising school children and their parents on di$îculties'encountered in work at school. Or he may be concerned with the special problems of handicapped persons (deaf, or partially crippled, or with speech defects), or with the detailed psychological examination of patients in psychiatric clinics. In industry, the psychologist may deal with problems of recruitment and selection, or of social relations ( morale, absenteeism, managerial problems, and so on) or of ergonomics (the study of human factors in complex modem engineering systems) or of consumer research. All these various fields are also those of psychologists in the armed forces. Many psychologists are engaged in research, not only in universities and teacher's colleges but also in government departments. -Indeed, the long and special training in research techniques which is part of the psychologist's professional pra- paration tends to make him a research consultant to busy practical people in problems of human relations. A special field of research is in comparative and physiological psychology ( the study of satinai behaviour and its relevance to the science of human behaviour and development). THE TRAINING OF PSYCHOLOGISTS A psychologist is thus a professionally trained person. The background for his diverse duties is a degree in Psychology: that Is, training in the scientific study, assessment and management of behaviour. This starts, of course, from what everyone knows of human nature, but it is very much more detailed and elaborate and, above all, more exact. The courses therefore include a thorough training in methods, as applied to behaviour, and especially in statistical analysis and inference. The major fields of study are: development generally, including learning and the development of intelligence and social behaviour; and the organization and varieties of personality. Special studies include behaviour in small groups, the behaviour of mentally dis- turbed persons and advanced learning theory and experimental methods. Through- out the course, there is extensive training in experimental work, in field investigations and in the use of special methods of assessment. For more responsible work and for research, training beyond the first degree to the Diploma, M.A. or Ph.D. level is of course necessary. HOW TO BECOME A PSYCHOLOGIST The "ordinary" degree. For details consult the General Manual of the Depart- ment of Psychology. Various approved courses are possible, among which the main distinction is between those with one major ( three consecutive parts) in Psychology and those with more than three consecutive parts. The minimum professional qualification for employment as a psychologist is the course with one major,* but for most jobs more Psychology than this is desirable, if not necessary. • To become a Member of the Australian Psychological Society an additional year of study in Psychology is required. The recommended method of entry to the profession is by taking an honours degree. Students with a previous degree who wish to become psychologists may inquire about entering the profession through postgraduate studies. 223 FACULTY OF ARTS HANDBOOK The degree with Honours. In the first three years students are required to take five Psychology subjects and four approved additional subjects. The syllabus for Psychology Part I (continuing course) is the same for pass and honours. However,. second and third year honours subjects differ in intensity from pass subjects. The fourth year usually includes preparation of an empirical thesis and theory seminars. In order to be admitted to the fourth year a student must be classed in Psychology III A and in at least two other Psychology subjects. A student may enrol for the Honours degree in his first year, and then will be required to read Psychology I and any three other subjects approved by the Faculty on recommendation from the Head of the Department. Because students fresh from school have no acquaintance with Psychology (in contrast with, say History or English or Physics ) and if they should fail to attain the necessary Honours, would have to revert to a Pass course, it is usually advisable to take two subjects from two of the remaining groups. Although admission to the Honours school will normally occur no later than the beginning of second year it will be possible for students who do exceptionally well in two second year Psychology pass subjects to be admitted to the Honours school at the end of second year. Students admitted at the end of second year may be required to cover special second year Honours topics before presenting for Part I finals. The Diploma in Psychology offers training in applied aspects of the subject for graduates with at least a major in Psychology. It includes courses in Psychology of Counselling, Psychology in Education, and Occupational Psychology. A prospectus may be obtained from the Department of Psychology. Subjects to Study at School The pre-requisite foreign language is necessary in order to enrol In the Faculty of Arts. A good mathematical background is very helpful ( almost essential) for the training in statistical analysis and inference. A science, but especially biology, is very important as background knowledge. But a good background in the humanities and social studies is certainly no less important. Literature and history are replete with observations of and comments on human behaviour. And, from the purely practical point of view, a psychologist must be able to write lucidly, with due appreciation of the niceties of language. A student who has not studied a foreign language for matriculation and thus cannot enter the Faculty of Arts, can study Psychology either in the Science Faculty or in the Faculty of Economics and Commerce (see the respective Handbooks) except that in Commerce he can study only two units of Psychology. But when he has achieved a degree in Commerce, he can continue with Psychology studies for the degree in Arts. Finally, note that some Psychology is required for other courses, such as the Diplomas of Social Studies and Criminology, and is of special value for those who are intending to become teachers.

ORDINARY DEGREE ( Details for the honours degree are set out at the end of this section.) sUВ ECтS OFFERED Grade 1: Psychology I Grade 2: Psychology IIA, Psychology IIB Grade 3: Psychology IIIA, Psychology IIIB.

МАJORS (i) Psychology I, Psychology IIA, Psychology IIIA (taken in separate years). This is the only course that is accepted as a first and single major in Psychology. A student may take in addition one or two other Psychology subjects. Criminology A, a subject of group 2, does not form part of any major. 224 PSYCHOLOGY 100. PSYCHOLOGY PART I (General Introductory Course) A course of two lectures per week with one tutorial class and one laboratory period of two hours throughout the year. No extra classes will be held for honours candidates. No correspondence courses are given. . SYLLABUS - The course is a general introduction to psychology with particular emphasis on method. The origin and development of behavioural patterns, motivation, emo- tiоп, perception, learning. The nature and development of personality. Elements of measurement in psychology. Individual differences. BOOKS (a) Recommended for preliminary- reading, any one of: Skurnik, L. S., and George, F. Psychology for Everyman. ( Pelican, 1964.) Eysenck, H. 3.—Uses and Abuses of Psychology. ( Pelican, 1953.) Maddox, H. How to Study. ( Pan Books, 1963. ) Miller, G. A.—Psychology. ( Hutchinson, London, 1962. ) ( b ) Prescribed textbooks: *Hilgard, E. R., and Atkinson, R. C. Introduction to Psychology. (4th ed., Harcourt, Brace and World, 1967. ) or -*Morgan, C. T., and King, R. A.Introduction to Psychology. (3rd ed., McGraw- Hill, 1966. ) *King, R. A.—Readings for an Introduction to Psychology. (2nd ed., McGraw- Hill, 1966.) *Langley, P. D. Elementary Statistical Methods for Students of Psychology. (2nd ed., Dept. of Psychology, 1967.) Books recommended for additional reading and reference are listed in the General Manual of the Department of Psychology. EXAMINATION Terminal examinations in elementary statistical methods and in experimental and related methods of enquiry in Psychology, and two 3-hour papers at the conclusion of the course. Candidates must submit satisfactory reports of laboratory items at specified times during the year. Honours candidates will be required to show in both practical work and examination papers a wider and more detailed knowledge than Pass candidates.

100-1. PSYCHOLOGY PART IIA ( Psychological Development) A course of two lectures and one tutorial class per week with practical work throughout the year. No correspondence courses are given. SYLLABUS The course consists of four parts: (a) Development. The growth and socialization of the child. Theory and assessment of intellectual processes in childhood. A brief introduction to the psychoanalytic theory of development. (b) Human Learning. Some fundamental facts and principles of human learn ing. The significance of classical and instrumental conditioning in human development. An introduction to theories of learning. (c) Measurement. Introduction to probability. The aims of statistical inference. The use of statistical tests of significance. (d) Essay. A 3,000-4,000 word essay. 225 FACULTY OF ARTS HANDBOOK PRACTICAL WORK Experimental and observational work relating to the course. Practical work has three principal aims: (a) Training in general research design and experimental method. (b) Training hi the use of some statistical techniques essential for comprehending current research. (c) Training in observation, developmental scales and intelligence scales. BOOKS: Students are advised to consult the Department Manual before purchasing textbooks. Prescribed textbooks: (i) General texts: *Baldwin, A. L.-Theories of Child Development. (Wiley, 1987.) *Holland, J. G., and Skinner, B. F.-.—The Analysis of Behaviour. ( McGraw-Hill, (1981.) *Mussen, P. I., Conger, J. J., and Kagan, 3.—Readings in Child Development and Personality. (Harper and Row, 1965.) (ii) Statistical texts: *Ferguson, G. A.—Statistical Analysts in Psychology and Education. (2nd ed., McGraw-Hill, 1966.) (This is a text for Psychology IIIA also.) *McCollough, C., and Van Atta, L.—Statistical Concepts. (McGraw-Hill, 1983.) (Ii) Books recommended for additional reading and reference are set out in the Department Manual and lists of references will be handed out from time to time during the course. EXAMINATION Two papers at the end of the year. Candidates must submit satisfactory laboratory notebooks and essay.

100-2. PSYCHOLOGY PART IIB Two lectures per week with practical work throughout the year. Except with the permission of the head of the department, this second year course may only be taken simultaneously with or subsequent to completing Psychology Part IIA. SYLLABUS The course consists of five units: (a) Attitudes. Approaches to social attitudes, beliefs, opinions, values. Condi- tions of attitude formation and change. (b) Behaviour in Groups. Group dynamics, leadership, and social roles. (c) Design I. Statistical inference, experimental design and scaling. (d) Perception. Psychophysics, perceptual learning, constancies and related perceptual phenomena. (e) Field Study (Social). Techniques of data collection and analysis, viz. interviewing, questionnaire studies, observations of social behaviour, attitude measurement. PRACTICAL WORK Experimental studies of perception, and field work in social psychology. BOOKS Students are advised to consult the Department Manual before purchasing textbooks. *Backman, C. W., and Second, P. F. ( еds.)— ems in Social Psychology. Selected Readings. (McGraw-10, 1966.) Ргоы *Dember, W. N.—The Psychology of Perception. (Holt, Rinehart and Winston, 1980. ) PSYCHOLOGY *Moroney, M. 3.—Facts from Figures. (Penguin, 1958.) *Second, P. F., and Backman, C. W.—Sociad Psychology. (McGraw-Hill, 1964. F. N.—Foundations of Behavioural Research. (Holt, Rinehart and Winston, 1965.) EXAMINATION Two papers at the end of the year, Satisfactory notebooks must be submitted.

100-3. PSYCHOLOGY PARТ IIIA The course contains six units of which four are compulsory and the others may be chosen from a list of options. The four compulsory units involve two lectures and one laboratory period per week plus some tutorials. The timetables for optional units are set out in the Department Manual. SYLLAВUS The compulsory units are: (i) Personality: motivation. Theories of personality that stress motivation. (ii) Personality: structure. Problems in defining the units of personality. Trait studies. The organization of personality. . ( iii) Deviant Behaviour. An introduction to patterns of deviant behaviour in relation to both individual and social conditions. (iv) Laboratory. Practical work relevant to the compulsory units. One two-hour period held weekly during 1st and 2nd terms. Two further units to be chosen from the following: (i) Abilities. (ii) Personality and culture. ( iii) Organizational Psychology. (iv) Independent project. (v) Essay. The essay will nотmацу involve attendance at a selected course of third year lectures. Further details and prescribed texts for optional units are set out in the Department Manual, which students are advised to consult before purchasing texts. BOOKS . *Cattell, R. B.—The Scientific Analysis of Behaviour. (Pelican, 1965.) *Ferguson, G. A.—Statistical Analysis in Psychology and Education. (2nd ed., McGraw-Hill, 1966.) *На11, C. S., and Lindzey, G.—Theories of Personality. (Wiley, 1957.) *Stafford-Clark, D —Psychiatry Today. (Pelican, 1952. ) Kerlinger, F. N.-Foundations of Behavioural Research. ( Holt, Rinehart and Winston, 1964.) EXAMINATION Two papers at the end of the year. Satisfactory practical work and assignments during the year. 100-4. PSYCHOLOGY PARТ IIIB A third year course which may only be taken simultaneously with or subsequent to completing Psychology Part IIIA. SYLLABUS The course comprises five units of which three are compulsory and two are to be chosen from options. The compulsory units are: (i) Theories of Psychopathology. Psychoanalytic and learning theory con- ceptions of behaviour disorders. (ii) Experimental Psychopathology. Studies of the perceptual, learning and motor performance of selected psychopathological groups. Family dynamics in psychopathology. 227 FACULTY OF ARTS HANDBOOK (iii) Cognition and Behaviour. Basic principles of cognition and information processing, cognitive structures and personality, role cognitive functioning in behaviour. Optional units: Perceptual Theories; The Nature of Psychological Theories; Assessment; Design (2). Practical work and tutorials will be required in the compulsory subjects. BOOKS Prescribed textbooks: *Buss, A. H. Psychopathology. (Wiley, 1966.) *Cameron, N. L. Personality Development and Psychopathology. (Houghton hi$lin, 1963.) (Paperback.) Derber, W. N.—The Psychology of Perception. (Holt, Rinehart and Winston, 1960.) Freud, 5.—The Problem of Anxiety. (Norton, 1963.) Freud, S. The Psychopathology of Everyday Life. (Pelican, 1939.) *Harper, R. J. C., Anderson, C. C., Christensen, C. I., and Hunka, S. 1.—The Cognitive Processes—Readings. (Prentice-Hall, 1964.) Palmer, J. 0., and Goldstein, M. J.—Perspectives in Psychopathology. (0.U.P., 1966.) Prescribed textbooks for optional units are listed in the Department Manual. EXAMINATION Two papers at the end of the year. Satisfactory laboratory and other reports.

HONOURS DEGREE K. SCHOOL OF PSYC1OLOGY (For possible combinations with this school see p. 251) 1. The course for the degree with honours in the school of Psychology consists of ten subjects as follows: (i) Psychology Part I, Psychology Part IIA ( Ions. ), Psychology Part IIB (Ions.), Psychology IIIA (Ions.) and Psychology Part IIIB (Ions.) and Psychology IV. (ii) Any three first year subjects as prescribed for the degrees of Bachelor of Arts or Bachelor of Science. (ice) One Grade II subject from the degrees of Arts or Science. The above-named subjects are to be taken in accordance with the details set out below. 2. The subjects must be taken in the following order: First Year: Psychology part I and the three subjects of (ii) above. Second Year: Psychology Part IIA ( Ions. ), Psychology Part IIB ( Ions. the subjects as in ( iii) above. Third Yeas: Psychology part IIIA ( Ions. ), Psychology IIIB (Ions.). Fourth Year: Psychology part IV. 3. Admission to the Second and higher years of the honour school must be approved by the Faculty; candidates should make application as soon as possible after the examination results of the First Year have been published. Suitable students may be admitted to the second year of the honours school as "provisional honours students". Such students can revert to the pass course at the beginning of the third year if they choose (or if this is necessary). Honours in three Psychology subjects including Psychology IIIA ( Ions.) is required for admission to fourth year. 4. The class list for final honours will take into consideration the results of all Psychology subjects. 228 PSYCHOLOGY 5. Application must be made in writing to the Sub-Dean through the professor of Psychology for permission: (i) to vary the requirements of section I (ii) ; (iii). (ii) to be credited with Psychology subjects passed in other universities. 6. A graduate who has the ordinary degree or a student who is proceeding to the ordinary degree may proceed to the honours degree by fulfilling such requirements as may be prescribed by the Head of Department of Psychology and approved by Faculty. 100. PSYCHOLOGY PART I (Ions) A course of two lectures and one discussion class per week, together with practical work throughout the. year. SYLLABUS- As for the ordinary degree (continuing course). PRACTICAL WORK As for the ordinary degree (continuing course). BOOKS As prescribed for the ordinary degree. EXAMINATION Terminal examinations in elementary statistical methods and in experimental and related methods of inquiry in Psychology, and two papers at the conclusion of the course as for the ordinary degree. Candidates for honours must submit satisfactory reports of laboratory items at specified times during the year and will be required to show a wider and more detailed knowledge than pass candidates in both practical work and examination papers. 100-1. PSYCHOLOGY PART IIA (Ions) SYLLABUS The course contains five units: (a) Development (double unit). As for Psychology Part IIA Pass. (b) Human Learning. As for Psychology Part IIA Pass. (c) Measurement. As for Psychology Part IIA Pass. (,d) Learning Theories. A systematic exposition of the major classical theories of learning. Contemporary problems in the study of learning. Laboratory work. BOOKS As prescribed for Psychology IIA Pass, together with *Kimble, G. A., Hilgard, E. R., and Marquis, D. G.-Conditioning and Learning. (Methuen, 1961.) •Hilgard, E. R., and Bower, G.—Theories of Learning. (3rd ed., Appleton- Century-Crofts, 1966.) EXAMINATION Two papers. Satisfactory laboratory notebooks must be submitted. 100-2. PSYCHOLOGY PART IIB (Ions) SYLLABUS As in Psychology IIB Pass, together with additional Honours work on the same topics. BOOKs As for Psychology IIB Pass. EXAMINATION Two papers. Satisfactory laboratory notebooks and other reports must be submitted. 229 FACULTY of ARTS HANDBOOK 100-3. PSYCHOLOGY PART IIIA (Hops ) SYLLABUS The course consists of a substantial research project and the following three units from Psychology IIIA Pass, augmented by special related honours work. (i) Personality: motivation. (ii) Personality: structure. (iii) Deviant Behaviour. BOOKS As for Psychology IIIA Pass, plus additional texts as set out in the Department Manual. EXAMINATION One or two papers to be decided during the year. Satisfactory project.

100-4. PSYCHOLOGY PART IIIB (Ions) SYLLABUS As in Psychology IIIB Pass, plus special additional honours tutorials and assignments, and with additional texts as set out in the Department Manual. EXAMINATION One or two papers to be decided during the year. 100-5. PSYCHOLOGY PART IV The fourth year of the honours course includes one general (and compulsory) seminar, then divides into specializations of A and B, as detailed. GENERAL 1. A seminar on Theories of Action. The seminar will meet weekly during first term and the examination (by essay) will be completed by the beginning of second term. COURSE A 2A. A second seminar, chosen from the range of combined postgraduate and Final Honours seminars, on advanced and relatively specialized topics. Some of these will run through the first half of the academic year, others through the second. The examination (by essay or an equivalent paper) will in either case be shortly after the end of the seminar. ЗА. A substantial empirical project, which should occupy half the year's work. Details should be settled early . in first term or, if two seminars are undertaken in this term, early in second term at the latest. The report is due on December 1st. COURSE B 2В. Students electing to proceed with Course B will be expected to attend discussion groups and lecture-demonstrations throughout the year. Much of the material will be drawn from the clinical field, but students will usually be given an opportunity to attend lectures or seminars in postgraduate and other courses in which they may have a special interest. 3E. Students will be expected to complete an extended study such as a case study. This assignment will be assessed, together with other items, for examination purposes at the end of the year. . 4В. Students may be allocated to Psychiatric Clinics at which practical experience is available. Special assignments in practical work may be required.

MASTER OF ARTS 101-4. K. SCHOOL OF PSYCHOLOGY Candidates are required to obtain credit for two seminars, to submit a thesis and an essay or some equivalent work. An oral examination may be required on the general field of their research. 230 PSYCHOLOGY Three copies of each thesis (quarto, typewritten, double-spaced) should be submitted, one of which will be deposited in the University Library. Candidates may be required to make up deficiencies in their preparatory work, and any intending student who does not hold an Honours degree in Psychology from the University of Melbourne should inquire at the Psychology Department about his status before enrolling. Graduates who are not qualified for admission as candidates may be permitted to enrol as Master's Preliminary students. All intending Master's students should read the Department Manual of Graduate Studies for details of requirements and should consult the head of the department. Theses must be submitted not later than 12 February, 1969. An entry form for examination for higher degrees must be submitted to the Registrar.

DIPLOMA IN PSYCHOLOGY The Diploma in Psychology is awarded after two years successful postgraduate part-time study. It provides an advanced training in theory, practice and research for employment as a professional psychologist. A candidate must be a graduate of this or some other University recognized for this purpose, must have passed in a Psychology major must have had approved professional experience in psychology or related fields and must be in a position to obtain suitable practical experience during the two years of the course. Applications for enrolment will be considered individually and intending candidates should consult the prospectus for the Diploma in Psychology (available at the Department of Psychology) for further details of subjects, references and conditions of enrolment. The course for the Diploma in Psychology consists of:

PSYCHOLOGY OF COUNSELLING A course of One lecture and one discussion class per week, with visits and practical work, extending over twо years. SYLLABUS' A comparative study of theories and techniques of counsellin . Diagnosis and assessment of adjustment problems. Research and evaluation of diagnostic and counselling procedures. Philosophical, legal and ethical issues in professional psychology. TEXTBOOKS *Goldman, L.—Using Tests in Counselling. (Appleton-Century-Crofts, 1961.) *Megargee, E. I. (Ed. )—Research in Clinical Assessment. ( Harper & Row, 1968. *Patterson, C. H.—Theories of Counselling and Psychotherapy. (Harper & Row, 1966.) *Steftlre, В. (Ed.)-Theories of Counselling. (McGraw-Hill, 1965.) EXAMINATION Two 3-hour papers at the end of the second year.

PSYCHOLOGICAL PØCTICE A course of four hours classwork per week, together with approved, regular and substantial experience in a relevant area of applied psychology for the full period of the course. SYLLABUS The diagnosis of adjustment problems of individuals and groups Educational, vocational and personal counselling with individuals and groups, including interview training, case presentation and discussion and group experience. The planning, completion and reporting of a research project in an area of professional interest. TEXTBOOKS *Blocher, D. $.—Devélopmental Counselling. ( Ronald, 1966.) *Kerlinger, F. N.— FоundatØ of Behavioural Research. ( Holt, Rinehart & Winston, 1964.) 231 FACULTY OF ARTS HANDBOOK EXAMINATION The candidate must submit a report of his research study; and a series of case studies. He will also sit an examination in interviewing. There will not be any final examination papers. PSYCHOLOGY IN EDUCATION A course of one lecture and one discussion class per week, with visits and practical work, extending over two years. SYLLABUS The psychologist in the school system. Psychological development of individual children and the assessment and prediction of abilities and achievement. Social factors in education. The education and adjustment of exceptional children. Remedial education. Theories of occupational choice and adjustment. The classification and study of occupations. The evaluation of vocational guidance procedures. TEXTBOOKS *Borow, H. (Ed.)—Man in a World at Work. ( Boston, Houghton MiHin, 1964.) *Bower, E., and Hollister, W. G. Behavioural Science Frontiers in Education. (Wiley, 1967.) *Medinnus, Gene R. (Ed. )—Readings in the Psychology of Parent-Child Relations. (Wiley, 1967.) *Rosenblith, J. F., and Allinsmith, W.—The Causes of Behaviour II. (Allyn & Bacon, 1966.) EXAMINATION Two 3-hour papers at the end of the second year. OR

OCCUPATIONAL PSYCHOLOGY A course of one lecture and one discussion class per week, with visits and practical work, extending over two years. SYLLABUS Theories of occupational choice and adjustment. The classification and study of occupations. The evaluation of vocational guidance procedures. Motivation and morale in industry. The social psychology of occupations. Psychological aspects of personnel practice. TEXTBOOKS *Borow, H. (Ed. )—Man in a World at Work. ( Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1964.) *Gilmer, B. von 1.—Industrial Psychology. (2nd ed., New York, McGraw-Hill,, 1966.) *Katz, D., and Kahn, R. L.—The Social Psychology of Organizations. (New York, Wiley, 1966.) *Vroom, V. H.—Work and Motivation. (New York, Wiley, 1964.) EXAMINATION Two 3-hour papers at the end of the second year of the course.

232 DEPARTMENT OF RUSSIAN Head of Department: Mrs. NINA CHRISTESEN, B.A. (Q'ld. ), M.A. ORDINARY DEGREE ( Details for the honours degree are set out at the end of this section. ) Croup 1 103. RUSSIAN READING COURSE Mrs. Nina Christesen and Miss M. Travers A course of two lectures per week, and tutorial assistance, for one year. The course is adapted to the needs of students with no previous knowledge of the language and is devised mainly for students in History, Political Science, English Literature, and Philosophy, but is also available to other students. The aim of the course is to enable the student to acquire an adequate skill in reading Russian texts relevant to his studies in other fields. The course constitutes a single group I subject. SYLLABUS (a) A brief survey of the morphology and syntax of written Russian. (b) Study of set texts. BOOKS Prescribed textbooks. Akhrnanova, O. S.—Russian-Eпglůh Dictionary. ( Moscow, 1966.) Johnson, E. L., and Smith, R. E. F.—Russian Social Science Reader. (Pergamon, 1966.) . Reading material will berovidед by the department according to the needs and interests of the students ande after consultation with the departments of History, Political Science and Philosophy. RECOMMENDED FOR REFERENCE Unbegaun, B. O.—Russian Grammar. ( O.U.P., 1962.) Waddington, P.—A Basic Russian-English. Vocabulary. (Methuen. ), Wolkonsky, C., and Poltoratzky, M. Handbook of Russian Roots. (Columbia Univ. Press.) EXAMINATION One three-hour paper at the end of the second year. Class work and term tests will be taken into account in determining the result of the examination.

104-1. RUSSIAN PART I Mrs. N. Christesen, Miss M. Travers and Mr. I. Meshakov-Korjakin A course of three lectures per week with tutorial assistance throughout the year. Pre=requisites for the course are: (a) Matriculation Russian, or (b) Intensive Summer School. Intending students must consult the Head of the Department not later than the second week in January, 1968. Note.—The course is not available for external study. SYLLABUS (i) Grammar. Conversation. Composition. Translation from Russian into English. and from English into Russian. (ii) Study of set texts. 233 FACULTY OF ARTS HANDBOOK Books Prescribed textbooks: *Short Stories by Soviet Writers, Vol. I. (Vera Inber, Yuri Nagibin, Konstantin Paustovsky, etc.) ( Progress Publishers, Moscow.) *Pushkin, A.—Pikovaya dama. ( Bradda. ) Unbegaun, В. 0.—Russian Versification. (Oxford, 1955.) *Obolensky, D. (ed.)—The Penguin Book of Russian Verse. (Penguin Books, 1966.) *Ognyov, V..(ed.)—Vo ves golos. (Progress Publishers, Moscow.) *Pulkina, L M.—A short Russian Reference Grammar. (Moscow, 1960.) Unbegaun, B. O.-Russian Grammar. (O.U.P., 1957.) Dictionaries: Lapidus and Shevtsova-A Russian-English Dictionary. (Moscow, 1962.) Myuller, V. K.—Anglo-russky slaver. (Moskva, 1959.) Akhmanova, O. S.—Russko-angliysky slover. (Moskva, 1960.) Avnesov i Ozhegov—Russkoye literaturnoye psoiznoshenie i udarenfe. (Moscow, 1960.) EXAMINATION Two 3-hour papers (the first on grammar and unseen translation into English and into Russian, the second on part (ii) of the syllabus ); oral tests and essays during the year. An oral test of Ilteen minutes. Class work, both oral and written, will be taken into account in determining the results of the examination.

104-2. RUSSIAN PART II Dr. Z. Uglitzky and Mr. I. Meshakov-Korjakin A course of three lectures per week, with one tutorial class, throughout the year. Intending students must consult the bead of the department of Russian Language and Literature before the beginning of the academic year. SYLLABUS (i) Language: Grammar. Conversation. Composition. Translation from Russian into English and from English into Russian. (1) Literature: (a) Study of set texts. (b) Outlines of Russian literature, thought and history. BOORS Prescribed textbooks: Unbegaun . 0.—Russian Grammar. ( Oxford, 1957.) Borras and Christian—RussianВ Syntax. ( Oxford, 1955.) PuØa, I. M.—A Short Russian Reference Grammar. ( Moscow, 1960.) *Lermontov, M.--Gero{ nashego vremeni. ( Bradda, London, 1961.) *Obolensky, D.—The Penguin Book of Russian Verse. (Penguin Books, 1962.) *Chekhov, A.-Chaika (Bradda, London, 1965.) and Vishnyovy sad. (Bradda, 1967.) Typescript material will be provided by the department. EXAMINATION Two 3-hour papers (the first on grammar and unseen translation into English and into Russian, the second on part (ii) of the syllabus ); oral tests and essays during the year. An oral test of fifteen minutes. Class work, both oral and written, will be taken into account in determining the results of the examination.

104-3. RUSSIAN PART III Mrs. Nina Christesen, Dr. Z. Uglitzky and Mr. I. Meshakov-korjakin A course of three lectures per week, with one tutorial class, throughout the year. SYLLAВUs (i) Language: Grammar. Composition. Translation from English into Russian. (ii) Unseen translation from Russian into English. ( ) Literature: Outline of 19th century Russian literature with special reference ш to Pushkin and Tolstoy. 234 нvssглN Books Prescribed textbooks: *Pushkin, A.-Evgeny Onegin. (Bradda, London, 1962.) or any other ed. in Russian. •Tolstoy, L.—Anna Каrепlna. ( Any ed. in Russian.) konovalov, S.—Russian Prose Composition. (O.U.P., 1960.) Unbegaun, В. 0.-Russian Grammar. (Oxford, 1957.) Borras and Christian—Russian Syntax. (Oxford, 1955.) Pulkina, I. M.—A Short Russian Reference Grammar. (Moscow, 1960.) •Vocabulary to 'Evgeny Onegin'. (Bradda, London, 1964.) EXAMINATION Three 3-hour papers, the first on part (i) and(ii) of the syllabus, the second on part ( iii) with special reference to Pushkin, and the third on part ( iii) with special reference to Tolstoy. An oral examination. Essays during the yeas. HONOURS DEGREE M. SCHOOL OF RUSSIAN LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE ( For possible combinations with this school see p. 251) 1. The course for the degree with honours in the school of Russian Language and Literature comprises the following subjects: Russian part I, Language. and Literature Russian part II, Language and Literature Russian part III, Language Russian part III, Literature Russian part IV, Language Russian part IV, Literature. A candidate in this school must take these six subjects and three additional subjects. Two of these additional subjects should form a sub-majorf. The three additional subjects must be approved by the head of the department of Russian Language and Literature. It is recommended that the students should acquire some knowledge of modern history, in particular Russian history of the 19th century, and of European philosophy, especially the French philosophers of the 18th and the German philosophers of the 19th centuries. 2. In their First Year, candidates for the honours school should take the honours course in Russian Part I, and two additional subjects. It is recommended that one of these be European History A or British History as the first part of a History sub-major, with European History В taken in the second year; an alternative sub-major could be Philosophy IA or IB with Modem Philosophy A in the second year. In case an Honours candidate does not obtain the necessary Honours and has to proceed to a Pass course, it is usually advisable that he select the remaining first year subject from either Group 2 or 3 ( whichever is not covered by the sub-major ), or either Group 4 or 5. Admission to the higher years of the course is conditional upon satisfactory performance in this First Year, and students must be approved by the faculty of Arts as candidates for the degree with honours before entering the Second Year of the honours school. Normally such approval will be given to candidates who have gained at least second class honours in Russian part L Other candidates who wish to continue in the honours school must interview the head of the department, who will be guided in her recommendation by the merits of the case. A student who has completed the First Year of the course for the ordinary degree and has passed in Russian part I, may, with the permission of the faculty, enter the honours school. Such a student must make special application to the faculty, through the sub-dean, and, If permission is granted, the faculty will prescribe what further work must be completed before the student is allowed to proceed to the final examination. t' See Approval of Сourae, Degree with Honours, note VI, p. 35. 235 FACULTY OF ARTS HANDBOOK. In their Second Year, candidates will take the honours courses in Russian part II and European History B, unless some other subject is specially approved by the head of the department. There will be no formal examination in the honours section of Russian at the end of the year. Examination in the Second Year will be by means of essays set during the year. In their Third Year candidates will take the honours courses in Russian part III, Language, and Russian part III, Literature. In their Fourth Year, candidates will take the honours courses in Russian part IV, Language, and Russian part IV, Literature. 3. The final examination in the school of Russian Language and Literature will comprise the following papers: (a) At the end of the Third Year. In addition to the three papers presented for Russian part III ( pass) at the annual examination, one 3-hour paper in each of: (i) Language: A. Advanced Syntaх Russian ( Part I). B. Part I of History of the Russian language or Part I of Comparative philology of the Slavonic languages. (ii) Literature: Russian literature to mid-nineteenth century, with special reference to the works of Pushkin, and the prescribed texts. (b) At the end of the Fourth Year: 4 three-hour papers: A. Formal Examination Papers: (i) Language: 1. Advanced Russian Syntax (Part IT). 2. One of the following: (1) Part II of History of thе Russian language. (2) Part II of Comparative philology of the Slavonic languages. ( ц) Literature: 1. Russian literature in the second half of the 19th century, with special reference to the works of Dostoyevsky. 2. Russian poetry from Pushkin to the Symbolists. Twentieth Century Literature. B. Class Tests and Essay: (i) Language: Class Test in advanced translation into Russian. (ii) Literature: Thesis on a special Russian literary study. In addition, oral test of 30 minutes in Russian. Vacation Reading.—suggestions for reading for the special literary study will be posted on the Modern Languages notice board. 104-1. RUSSIAN PART I (Ions) Mrs. Nina Christesen, Dr. D. Grishin and Miss M. Travers A course of lectures as for the ordinary degree, together with two additional lectures and additional tutorial assistance, throughout the year. SYLLABUS . (i) As for the ordinary degree. (ii) Phonetics. (iii) Study of set texts. (iv) Additional essays and translation into Russian. (v) Introductory background course in Russian history. Books (a) Prescribed textbooks: *Boyanus, S. C.—Russian Pronunciation. (London, 1955.) *Tolstoy, L.—Selections. (ed. Duddington and Gorodetzky, Oxford, 1959.) Oxford Book of Russian Verse. (Oxford, 1953.) EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper on sections (ii), (iii) and (v), in addition to the examination for the ordinary degree. RUSSIAN 104-2. RUSSIAN PART II (Ions) Dr. D. Grishin and Mr. P. Cubberley A course of lectures as for the ordinary degree, together with two additional lectures and additional tutorial assistance, throughout the year. SYLLАВUs (i) As for the ordinary degree. (ii) Old Church Slavonic. (ii) Study of set texts. (iv) Additional essays and translation into Russian. BOOKS (a) Prescribed textbooks: (Moscow, or any other edition in *D6Storevsky, F.—Рrеltиplemв i лаkаzanie. Russian.) Bogolepov, A. A.-Russkaya Linka. ( Izdatelstvo imeni Chekhova, New York, 1952.) Chekhov, A: Selected stories provided by the department. Nandris, G.—Old Church Slavonic Cramnwr. (Part I of Handbook of O.C.S., London, 1960.) Auty, R.—Texts and Glossary. (Part II of Handbook of O.C.S., London, 1960.) Typescript material will be provided by the department. EXAMINATION. As for pass students. No formal examination in the honours syllabus. ESSAYS AND SEMINAR WORK Candidates will be required to submit essays, oral tests, and other exercises during the year instead of the annual examination in this section.

105-1. RUSSIAN PART III LANGUAGE Dr. Z. Uglitzky and Mr. P. Cubberley A course of lectures as for ordinary degree, together with two additional lectures and additional tutorial assistance throughout the year. SYLLAВUS (i) As for the ordinary degree. (ii) Advanced Syntax Part I. ( iii) History of the Russian Language Part I. (iv) Comparative Philology of Slavonic languages Part I. BOOKS ( a) Prescribed textbooks: *Belevitskaya, V. S. et al.—Exercises in Russian Syntax. The. Simрle Sentence. ( Foreign Languages Publishing House, Moscow.) de Bray, R. G. A.—Cuide to the Slavonic Languages. ( Dent, London, 1951. *Matthews, W. K.-Russian Historical Grammar. (Athlone Press, London, 1960.) Vinokur, G. Izbrannue raboty po russkomu yazyku. ( Moscow, 1959.) Chernykh, P.—Istoricheskaja grammatika russkogo jazyka. ( Moscow, 1962. ) EXAMINATION As for Part III pass, and in addition one 3-hour paper on part (ii) and on either part ( iii) or (iv) of the syllabus. Essay in Russian. Oral test of thirty minutes. 106-1. RUSSIAN PART III LITERATURE Dr. D. Grishin and Mrs. Nina Christesen A course of lectures as for the ordinary degree together with two additional lectures and additional tutorial assistance throughout the year. SYLLABUS (i) As for the ordinary degree. (ii) Study of prescribed texts. (iii) Russian literature to mid-nineteenth century, with special reference to the works of Pushkin. 237 FACULTY OF . ARTS HANDBOOK Books (a) Prescribed textbooks: *Criboyedov—Gore of uma. (Any ed. in Russian.) Pushkin, A.—Polnoe sobranie sochineniy v desyati tomakh. (Any ed. in Russian.) *Lermontov, M.—Sochiпeniуa v chetyrekh tomakh. (Any ed. in Russian.) Gogol, N.-Polroe sobranie sochineniy. (Any edition in Russian.) EXAMINATION As for part III pass, and in addition one 3-hour paper. Oral test of 30 minutes. Essay in Russian.

105-2. RUSSIAN PART IV LANGUAGE Dr. Z. Uglitzky and Mr. P. Cubberley A course of three lectures and tutorial assistance throughout the year. Essay work and translation. SYLLABUS (i) Advanced translation into Russian. (ii) Advanced Syntax Part II. (iii) History of the Russian Language Part IL (iv) Comparative Philology of Slavonic languages Part II. BOOКS ( а ) Prescribed textbooks: Belevitskaya, V. S. et al.—Exercises in Russian Syntax. Compound and Complex Sentences. ( Foreign Publishing House, Moscow.) *Matthews, W. k.—Russian Historiсal Grammar. ( London, 1960.) de Bray, R. G. A.—Guide to Slavonic Languages. ( Dent, London, 1951. ) Obnorsky, S. P., i Barkhudarov, S. G.—Khrestomatiya po Wodi russkogo yaziika. ( Uchpedgiz, 1952 and 1ß48. ) (b) Recommendedor reference: . Vinogradov, V. V. (ed.)—Ocherki po istorii russkogo literaturnogo yazyka XVII-XIX oekov. ( Moscow, 190.) Vinogradov, V. V. (ed. )—Grammatika russkogo yazyka, 2 vols. (Alcad. Nauk S.S.S.R., 1960.) Vinokur, G. Izbrannye raboty po russkomu yazyku. ( Moscow, 1959.) Gorshkov, A. Istorija russkogo literaturnogo jаzyka. ( Moscow, 1965.) Vodovozov, N.—Istorija drevnerussko j literatury. ( Moscow, 1966.) Bernstein, S.—Ocherk .sravnitei'noj grammatik{ slavjanskikh jazykov. ( Moscow, 1961.) EXAMINATION (Final Examination.) Two 3-hour papers, the first ori part (ii) of the syllabus, and the second on part (iii) or part (iv). Part (i) to be tested by term tests. Oral test of 30 minutes.

106-2. RUSSIAN PART IV LITERATURE Mrs. Nina Christesen, Dr. D. Grishin and Mr. I. Meshakov-korjakin A course of three lectures and tutorial assistance throughout the year. Essay work and translation. SYLLABUS (i) Russian literature in the second half of the nineteenth century, with special reference to the works of Dostoyevsky. (ii) Russian poetry from Tyutchev to Pasternak. (iii) Twentieth century literature. (iv) Special study. BOOКS Prescribed textbooks: Dostoyevsky, F.—Bratia Karamazovy. (Any ed. in Russian.) Dostoyevsky, F.—Dnevnik pisatelia. (Any ed. in Russian.) 238 яvssглN Goncharov, L--O oØ. (Any еd. in Russian.) Ostrovsky, A.—Groza.Ы ( Any od. in Russian.) 1953, or any other Nekrasov, N. A.—Soch{nеn{ya v trekh tomakh. (Giz. Moscow, ed. in Russian.) Turgenev, I.—Otsy i det{, Tr{ portreta, Faust Veshniye vody. (Any ed. in Russian.) Tolstoy, L.—S vastopolsk{a raaskazy. (Any ed. in Russian.) Tolstoy, L.—Kazaki.в (Any ed. in Russian.) Tolstoy, L.—Chto takoye {sku stooP ( Any ed. in Russian.) Chekhov, A. Izbrannyie proizoedu{aв v trekh tvmakh. ( Moscow, 1962.) Tyutchev, F. G.—Polnoye sobraniye st{kh tvoren{y. (Moscow, 1950 or Chekhov Publishing House, 1952.) о Blok, A.—Polnoye sobraniye sikhotoD miv. ( Moscow, 1955 or any other ed. in Russian.) г Esenin, S.—Sobran{yyе aochinen{y v {at{ tomakh. ( Moscow, 1967.) Akhmatova, А.—Selected Verse. (Chekhov Publishing House.) Pasternak, В.-Cоllвctед Works, In 4 vols. ( Michigan Press, 1962.) Selected prose writings by Aksyonov, Babel, Burin, Kornei Chukovsky, Granin, Yuxy Kazakov, Victor Nekrasov, Ovechkin, Vera Panava, Paustovsky, Prishvin, Sholo- khov, Solzhenitsyn, Tendгyakov, Tvardovsky, Tsvetaeva, Zamуаtin. - and others. Material provided by the Department. EXAMINATION (Final Examination.) Two three-hour papers, the first on part (i) of the syllabus, the second on part (ii) and part (iii of the syllabus. Part (iv) of the syllabus to be tested by a thesis in Russianan to be dhande in on or before the last day of second term. Oral test of 30 minutes.

MASTER OF ARTS 107-4. M. SCHOOL OF RUSSIAN LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE Candidates will, under supervision, prepare a thesis hr Russian on an approved subject, and will be required to report to their supervisor regularly during the year. They will be advised of a suitable course of reading and may be required to pass an oral examination covering the general field of their research. An entry form for examination for higher degrees must be submitted to the Registrar. - Three copies of each thesis ( quarto, typewritten, double-spaced ) should be submitted, one of which will be deposited in the University Library. In certain cases candidates may also be required to pass a written and oral examination on subjects approved by the head of the department.

239 . DEPARTMENT OF STATISTICS Head of Department: Professor E. J. WILLIAMS, B.Com. (Tas.), D.Sc., F.I.M.S., M.I.S.I. ORDINARY DEGREE (Details for the honours degree are set out at the end of this section.) Group 4 Principles of Statistics does not fonn part of any major. For combinations of Theory of Statistics with Pure Mathematics, Applied Mathematics, Logic and History and Philosophy of Science, see p. 39. The pre-requisite for Theory of Statistics I is Pure Mathematics I and for Theory of Statistics II it is Pure Mathematics II.

410. PRINCIPLES OF STATISTICS A course of two lectures per week, with practical work, throughout the year. In the later part of the course alternative lectures will be provided when neces sary to meet the more specialized needs of particular groups of students. SYLLABUS An elementary presentation of statistical logic and techniques as appplied to problems of science and industry, illustrated by the use of clinical, field and laboratory data. Elements of probability. Random variables and probability distributions, discrete and continuous; attribute and measurement data; population and sample, parameter and statistic. Problems of estimation and hypothesis testing. Appli- cations of the binomial, Poisson, normal, t F and chi-square distributions. Linear regression and correlation. Elements of the design and analysis of experiments and of sampling surveys. Elementary analysis of variance and covariance. PRACTICAL WORK Two hours per week, involving training in the use of calculating machines and in general statistical computing. A knowledge of mathematics up to the standard of General Mathematics at the matriculation examination is desirable for this course. BOOKS (a) For preliminary reading: Finney, D. J. Experimental Design' and its Statistical Basis. ( Chicago Univ. Press.) (b) Prescribed tables and textbook: Hodges, J. L., and Lehmann, E. L. Easiс Concepts of Probability and Statistics. ( Holden-Day. ) •ное1, P. G. Elementary Statistics. (Wiley.) *Lindley, D. V., and Miller, J. C. P.—Cambridge Elementary Statistical Tables. (C.U.P. ) (c) Recommended for reference: A list of books recommended for reference will be posted on the Notice Board in the Department of Statistics. EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper on the lecture course. A short practical examination will be held in third term. Before admission to the examination, candidates must have satisfactorily completed the practical work. 240 STATTSTICS 410-1. THEORY OF STATISTICS PART I A course of three lectures per week, with tutorial and practice classes, throughout the year. SYLLABUS Introduction to the theory of probability; finite event space; simple and compound events; intersection and union; assigning of probabilities to events; conditional probability; independence of events; problems involving theory of arrangements; infinite discrete and continuous event spaces. Random variables; probability distributions; cumulative distribution function and probability density function; parameters associated with distributions. Standard elementary univariate distributions discrete rectangular, binomial, negative binomial, bypergeometric, Poisson, uniform, exponential, normal, gamma, beta) Treatment of experimental data; sample and population; notion of decision rules for preferring one model to another. Acceptance sampling plans; quality control technique. Exact treatment of 2 X 2 classifications for independence ( binomial case ). Distribution of sample statistics ( arithmetic mean, sample variance and standard deviation, range, etc. ). The t, F and chi-square distributions. Model building and testing; confidence intervals for parameters. Difference of proportions. Application of chi-square distribution to testing of hypotheses. Prin- ciples of experimental design and the analysis of variance technique; standard designs, one-way ( completely randomized ), two-way ( randomized blocks) and Latin square lay-outs, and extensions; factorial design; confounding in simple cases; description of split-plot and incomplete block designs. Bivariate distributions; the normal bivariate distribution; linear regression and correlation with two and three variables; fitting of trends and cycles, using moving averages; method of least squares; analysis of covariance technique. PRACTICAL WORK Three hours per week, on problems and computations relating to the lecture course and involving the use of calculating machines. A knowledge of mathematics up to the standard of Pure Mathematics part I. will be assumed in the course. BOOKS (a) Prescribed tables and textbook: 'Lindley, D. V., and Miller, j. C. P.—Cambridge Elementary Statistical Tables. (C.U.P. ) *Нoel, P. G —Introduction to Mathematical Statistics. (Chapman and Hall.) Brunk, H. D.—Introductiоп to Mathematical Statistics. ( Blaisdell.) Freund, J. E.—Modern Elementary Statistics. ( Prentice-Hall. ) (b) Recommended for reference: A list of hooks recommended for reference will be posted on the Notice Board In the Department of Statistics. EXAMINATION Two 3-hour papers on the lecture course. A short practical examination will be heldin third term. Before admission to the examination, candidates must have satisfactorily completed the practical work.

410-2. THEORY OF STATISTICS PART II A course of three lectures per week, with tutorial and practice classes, throughout the year. SYLLABUS Discrete and continuous probability distributions; transformation of vanables in univariate and multivariate cases. Characteristic functions. Derivation of the Common sampling distributions. Theories of point and interval estimation. Theory of significance tests. Sequential analysis and queues. Distribution-free methods. Regression analysis and linear hypotheses, with detailed application in the design and analysis of experiments. Analysis of autocorrelated series. Surveys. Introductory ideas in multivariate analysis. Linear programming. 241 FACULTY OF ARTS HANDBOOK PRACTICAL WORK Six hours per week, Including computations involving the use of calculating machines. A knowledge of mathematics up to the standard of Pure Mathematics part will be assumed in the above course. In addition, students will find it an advantageц to be currently taking the course in Pure Mathematics part III. Candidates may be required to read. original papers dealing with certain aspects of the course. BOOKS (a) Preliminary reading: Cox, D. R.—Planning of Experiments. (Wiley.) ( b ) Prescribed textbooks: *kempthorne, O.—The Design and Analysis of Experiments. (Wiley.) *Mood, A. M. and Gra bid, F. A.—Introduction to the Theory of Statistics. (2nd ed., McGraw-Hill) (c) Recommended for reference: A list of books recommended for reference will be posted on the Notice Board in the Department of Statistics. EXAMINATION Two 3-hour papers. Before admission to the examination, candidates must have satisfactorily completed the practical work.

HONOURS DEGREE L. SCHOOL DF MATHEMATICAL STATISTICS 1. The honour school of Mathematical Statistics comprises the following subjects: (a) Pure Mathematics parts I, II, Ill, IV. Applied Mathematics parts I, II. (b) Theory of Statistics parts I, II, ш. A candidate in this school must take these nine subjects, together with Physics part I or Biology, and one of Chemistry part I, Economics A, Psychology part I, Logic. In addition, he must take an examination in Science French or Science German or Science Russian} in common with students in the faculty of Science. The details of subjects for Pure Mathematics parts I, II, III and IV and Appplied Mathematics parts I and II are set out under the school of Mathematics. The details of subjects for Theory of Statistics part I and for Theory of Statistics part II are as set out below and as for the ordinary degree, and those for Theory of Statistics part III are as set out below. A student proposing to enter the honour school of Mathematical Statistics should normally have obtained honours in Pure Mathematics and in Calculus and Applied Mathematics at the matriculation examination. Candidates who have not this qualification are advised to consult the heads of the departments of Mathematics and Statistics before they enter. 2. In their First Year, candidates will take the courses in Pure Mathematics part I, Applied Mathematics part I, Physics part I or Biology, and one of Chemistry part I Economics A, Psychology part I, Logic. Admission to the Second and higher years of the honour school must be approved by the faculty; candidates should snake application as soon as possible after the examination results of the First Year are published. In their Second Year, candidates will take the courses in Pure Mathematics part II, Applied Mathematics part II. Theory of Statistics part I. In their Third Year, candidates will take the courses in Pure Mathematics part III and Theory of Statistics part II. Students should note that two of Science French, Science German and Sci nce Russian are t matical Statistics. е required for M.А. in the school of Mаthе 242 STАTI3TTCS In their Fourth Year, candidates will take the courses in Pure Mathematics part IV, and Theory of Statistics part III. They will also carry out, under direction, a practical project and the study of а special topic, involving the reading and collation of the relevant literature and will present a thesis embodying this work at the beginning of the third term. 3. The finаl examination in the school of Mathematical Statistics will be held in two parts, part I at the end of the Third Year, part II at the end of the Fourth Year. Part I ( 1) Pure Mathematics part III (hoes) ( first paper) . 2) Pure Mathematics part III ( bons ) ( second paper). 3 —(4) Theory of Statistics part II (hons). Part II (1) Pure Mathematics part IV (bons) (first paper). 2) Pure Mathematics part IV (hons) (second paper). 3 Pure Mathematics part IV (hons) (third paper). 4)-(6) Theory of Statistics part III (hons ). The work done in the study of the special topic, referred to in the preceding section, and the practical work carried out in the Statistical Laboratory, will be taken into account in determining the class list.

410-1. THEORY OF STATISTICS PART I (Ions) A course of three lectures per week, with tutorial and practice classes, throughout the year. SYLLАВUS As for the ordinary degree. PRACTICAL WORK As for the ordinary degree. BOOKS As for the ordinary degree. EXAMINATION As for the ordinary degree. Candidates for honours will be expected to show a wider and more detailed knowledge than pass candidates in both the examination and the work performed in the practice classes throughout the year.

410-3. THEORY OF STATISTICS PART II (Ions) A course of three lectures per week, with tutorial and practice classes, throughout the year. SYLLABUS The work prescribed for the ordinary degree, treated in a more advanced fashion, together with the prosecution of a special project which may be of a theoretical or practical nature. PRACTICAL WORK Six hours per week, together with the additional time required for the prosecution of the special project. Students taking this course will be assumed to have reached the standard of Pure Mathematics part II honours, and to be currently taking Pure Mathematics part III honours. Books (a) Prescribed tables and textbooks: As for the ordinary degree, together with the following: *Fisher, R. A., and Yates, F.--Statistical Tables. (Oliver & Boyd.) 243 FACULTY OF ARTS HANDBOOK or *Pearson, E. S., and Hartley, H. O.—Biometrika Tables fot Statisticians. Vol. L (C.U.P.) *Feller, W.—An Introduction to Probability. Theory and its Applications. Vols. I and II. (Wiley.) (b) Recommended for reference: A list of books recommended for reference will be posted on the Notice Board in the Department of Statistics. EXAMINATION As for the ordinary degree. Candidates for honours will be expected to show a wider and more detailed knowledge than pass candidates in both the examination and the work performed in the practice classes throughout the year.

410-4. THEORY OF STATISTICS PART III A course of lectures, with tutorial and practice classes throughout the year, together with the preparation of the thesis referred to in section 2 of the preamble (see p. 242) . SYLLABUS A selection of topics from advanced probability theory and distribution theory, design of experiments, theory of estimation, distribution-free methods, sequential analysis, sample survey theory, Markov chains, random walks, queues and storege, time series analysis, linear programming and other topics as approved by the Department. BOOKS (a) Prescribed textbooks: *Feller, W.—An Introduction to Probability Theory and its Applications. Vols. I and II. ( Wiley. ) *Rao, C. R.—Linear Statistical Inference and its Applications. (Wiley.) Pitt, H. R.—Integration, Measure and Probability. (Oliver & Boyd.) (b) Recommended for reference: A list of books recommended for reference will be posted on the Notice Board in the Department of Statistics. In addition, frequent reference will be made to articles in recent and current literature.

MASTER OF ARTS 110-2. L. SCHOOL OF MATHEMATICAL STATISTICS Candidates will, under supervision, prepare a thesis on an approved subject, in which they will be advised as to a suitable course of reading. Candidates must also pass a test in two of the following languages to the satisfaction of the head of the department concerned: French, German, Russian. An entry farm for examination for higher degrees must be submitted to the Registrar. Three copies of each thesis (quarto, typewritten, double-spaced) should be submitted, one of which will be deposited in the University Library. Candidates may also be examined orally on the subject of the thesis.

244 SCIENCE SUBJECTS Certain Science subjects, viz. those in group 4: Physics part I T, Chemistry part I A or I B, Biology, and Geology part I, may be taken as one-year courses in the faculty of Arts. Physics part I T is a terminal course designed for those students who wish to pursue their studies in the field for one year only, and is consequently a suitable subject for Arts students who wish to study one Group 4 (Scientific) subject. Any Arts student who may possibly want to complete a B.Sc. and study Physics for more than one year is advised to consult the Sub-Dean of the Faculty of Science; provided the student is sufficiently qualified, permission may be granted to proceed to Physics part IA or IB.

412. BIOLOGY A course of three lectures per week with laboratory work and field excursions during the year. A knowledge of Biology to the standard of Intermediate General Science and of Chemistry and Physics to Leaving Standard is assumed. It is intended to allocate to one lecture group students who have passed Matriculation Biology, but all students will sit the same final examinations. SYLLABUS An introduction to the living world; plant and animal diversity. The cell as the basic unit of life; molecular biology; structure and fine structure of plant and animal cells; cell metabolism, water relations and growth. Structure, life-history and biological significance of selected invertebrates and non-flowering plants emphasizing the increasing complexity of the organism, the increasing adaptation to the terrestrial environment and the associated changes in life-cycles. Modes of nutrition and the significance of heterotrophic plants in disease and decay and the cycling of carbon and nitrogen. Growth, morphology and physiology of flowering plants and vertebrates. Behaviour responses of plants and animals—nervous and hormonal control. Photo- synthesis, respiration and the flow of energy in biological systems. Plant and animal reproduction, embryology and development. Ecology and the biology of populations. Mitosis and meiosis. Single and two-locus crosses, segration and independent assortment, linkage, sex linkage and sex determination. Inheritance of blood groups, Rhesus factor. Introduction to population genetics. Gene action; genetic codes and protein synthesis. PRACTICAL WORK Three hours formal laboratory work per week. A further hour per week will be required for demonstrations. Half-day ana whole-day field excursions may be held; the first of these is nоrmацу on the morning of the second Saturday in Term I. Students must provide themselves with an approved microscope, razor, dissecting instruments and laboratory note books, a number of microscope slides, coverslips and a hand lens. Microscopes may be hired from the laboratory in the Barry Building, where all enquiries about practical work should be made.

BOOKS (a) Prescribed textbook: Either Hardin, G.—Biology—Its Principles and Implications. (2nd ed., Freeman, 1966.) or Weisz, P. B.—The Science of Biology. ( 3rd ed., McGraw-Hill, 1967.) (b) Reference books: Bold, H. C.—The Plant Kingdom. (2nd ed., Found. of Mod. Biol. Ser., Prentice- Hall, 1964.) 245 FACULTY OF ARTS HANDBOOK Gaiston, A. W.—Life of the Green Plant. (2nd ed., Found. of Mod. Biol. Ser., Prentice-Hal, 1964.) Swanson, C. P.—The Cell. (2nd ed., Found. of Mod. BioL Ser., Prentice-Hall, 1964.) Griffin, D. R.—Animal Structure and Function. ( Mod, Biol. Ser., Holt, Rinehart & Winston, 1962. ) Levine, R. P. Genetics. ( Mod. Biol. Ser., Holt, Rinehart & Winston, 1962.) Schmidt-Nielsen, K.—Animal Physiology. (2nd ed., Found of Mod. Biol Ser., Pгепtice-Нац, 1964.) Sussman, M: Animal Growth and Development. (2nd ed., Found. of Mod. Biol. Ser., Prentice-Hall, 1964.) McLucide, J., and Mekee, H. S.—Australian and New Zealand Botany. (Assoc. General Publications, Syd., 1954.) Simpson, G. G., and Beck, W. S.—Life. (2nd ed., Routledge & Kegan Paul, 1965. ) EXAMINATION One two-hour and one three-hour written examination for pass and honours combined (the two-hour paper wil nornialy be held early in second term); two one-hour terminal and one two-hour final practical examinations. The practical work. of each student is assessed continuously throughout the year and is taken into account, along with all examination results, in compiling the final mark of each candidate. Field excursions and examinations may be held on Satdays.

361-2. CHEMISTRY PART IB A course of three lectures, one tutorial per week and laboratory work through out the year. A preliminary standard equivalent to Matriculation Chemistry will be assumed. The syllabus is basically similar to that of the Chemistry IA course with the restriction that certain subjects are not developed so fully. Ρ. SYх к лвus. (i) Physical Chemistry. Experimental methods; methods of measurement and analysis including manometry, spectrophotometry, conductance and potential measurements. Chemical Equilibrium: homogeneous and heterogeneous equilibria in gases and solution; determination of equilibrium constants. Properties of electrolytes as found from conductance measurements; molar conductance; law of independent ionic migration; conductometric titration. Oxidation-reduction equilibria; reduction potentials; Nernst equation; half cells, cell reactions; equilibrium constants; potentiometric measurements and application to the determination of PH, pК., K. etc., redox indicators; free energy changes during redox reactions, relation to equilibrium constants; standard free energies. Electrolysis; decomposition and discharge potentials; overpotential; order of discharge. Solubility equilibria; determination of solubility and solubility products; calcula tun of solubilities involving simultaneous equilbria, complex ions; precipitation titrations. Acid-base equilibria; calculation of pH from fundamental principles; buffer solutions; polyprotics; titration curves, indicators; acids and bases in non-aqueous solvents. Gases: ideal and real gases; kinetic theory of gases, deviations from ideal gas behaviour and interpretation in terms of modification of kinetic theory postulates; van der Waals' equation; critical state; liquefaction. Phase equilibria: one component systems, P-V and P-T diagrams; polymorphism and metastable states. Two component systems; gas-liquid, liquid-liquid and liquid- solid systems; partial miscibility; distribution law; ideal and non ideal solutions; distillation; azeotropes. Chemical kinetics: measurement of reaction rate; rate laws; factors affecting rate: concentration (order; rate expressions for first and second order reactions); temperature; catalysts; radiation. Simple collision theory model for reaction niechan- jars; collision frequency; energy distributions; activation energy. 246 SØCE SUBJECTS Thermodynamics: thermodynamic properties, heat and work, functions of state U and H; heat absorbed at constant volume and at constant pressure, specific heats, Kirchoff's Law. NOTE: Detailed formulation of the 1st Law of Thermodynamics and the Kinetic Theory of Gases will not be presented but will be assumed to, be known front coverage in Physics I. Students nog taking physics will be supplied with a reading list to cover these topics to a suitable level. (ii) Inorganic ` Chemistry. Momie Structure and the Theory of Valency; electrovalent, covalent, dative, hydrogen, metallic and van der Waals's bonding. Structure" of Solids: influence of bond type on chemical and physical properties and type of structure. Introduction to Co-ordination Chemistry: Concept of donor-acceptor bonding; simple ligands and simple chelates. General characteristics of the 3d transition metals: electronic structure and position in periodic classification, aqueous chemistry, oxidation states. Periodic classification: comparative chemistry of selected groups and periods of elements with special reference to periodicity and electronic configuration. (iii) Organic Chemistry. The scope of Organic Chemistry—Bonding, structure and elementary stereochemistry of carbon compounds. An outline of the chemistry of hydrocarbons and their monofunctional derivitives in terms of molecular structure and the electronic mechanisms of reactions. LABounToEY Wonu. Three hours per week, throughout the year, illustrating the principles of inorganic, physical and organic chemistry together with exercises in quantitative and qualitative analysis. The practical classes for this subject are taken in the Chemistry Building. The department supplies all the apparatus for which a fee of $10 must be paid to the University Branch of the National Bank, using a specially stamped bank slip obtained from the department. Evidence of payment must be produced to the department before practical classes begin. Books. ( a ) Recommended for preliminary reading: Pauling, L.-.-Ceneral Chemistry. (Freeman.) Stranks, D. R., et al.—Chemistry—A Structural View. (M.U.P.) The content of the lectures in Chemistry IB will be based on the assumption that all students have read the textbook by Stтanks et al. (b) Prescribed text-books: Glasstone, S., and Lewis, D.—Elements if Physical Chemistry. (MacmIllan & Co., London. ) or Mahan, B. H.—University Chemistry. ( Addison Wesley.) Bell, C. F., and Lott, K. A. K.—Modern Approach to Inorganic Chemistry. ( Butterworth.) Allinger, N. L., and Allinger, J.-Structures of Organic Molecules. (Prentice- Hall.) Saunders, W. H.-Ionic Aliphatic Reactions. ( Prentice-Hall.) Tedder, J. M., and Nechvatal, A.—Basic Organic Chemistry. (Wiley.) Aylward G. H., and Findlay, T. J. V. ( eds. )—.Clwmkal Data Book. ( 2nd ed., Wiley, 1966.) f Experiments in Chemistry (1968 ed. )—Departmental Publication. ( This laboratory handbook is available only from the School of Chemistry.) ( c) Recommended for reference: Daniels, F., and Alberty, R. A.—Physical Chemistry. (Wiley.) f Gilreath, E. S.-Fundamental Concepts of Inorganic Chemistry. ( McGraw-

Gould, E. S. Inorganic Reactions and Structur . ( Holt. ) Brown, R. D., and O'Donnell, T. A.—Manual of Elementaryв Practical Chemistry. (3rd ed., M.Q.P. ) Books marked f are used by students proceeding to Chemistry II and Chemistry III. 247 FACULTY OF ARTS HANDBOOK EхАUnuwТІ0iu. One 3-hour paper in Physical Chemistry, one 2-hour paper in Inorganic Chemistry and one 2-hour paper in Organic Chemistry. The practical work of each student is assessed continually throughout the year and is taken into account in determining the success of candidates at the Annual Examination.

373-1. GEOLOGY PART I A course of three lectures per week, with laboratory and field work, throughout the year. SYLLABUS. An introductory course in the main branches of Geology. Crystallography. Crystal form and growth; the concept of symmetry; elementary crystal structure; introduction to crystal classes and forms; physical and chemical properties of crystals. Mineralogy. Physical properties of minerals, elementary silicate structures; rock forming minerals; economic minerals, their occurrence and uses. Petrology. Volcanoes and volcanic activity; igneous intrusions; igneous rocks, their origins and relationships; contact and regional metamorphism; metamorphic rocks; metasomatic rocks; sedimentary rocks and their environments of deposition; coal; petroleum and natural gas. Structural and Tectonic Geology. Sedimentary structures; conformity and un- conformity; folding and faulting; deformation of rocks; diastrophic movements; eustatism; earthquakes and seismology; internal structure of the earth; isotasy; major structural features of the earth's surface; geosynclines and the origin of fold moun- tains; theories of crustal deformation; continental drift. Physiography. Weathering of rocks and orebodies; soils; Iand forms; the work of streams and transportation of sediment; groundwater and artesian basins; the normal, arid, and marine cycles of erosion; glaciers and glaciation. Palaeontology. The nature and preservation of fossils; their use in Geology and Biology; structure of the principal groups of fossil invertebrates. Stratigraphy. Elementary principles; the succession of life; radioactive age determination; elements of Australian stratigraphy; fossil man. LABORATORY WORK. Three hours per week, dealing with the study of geol- ogical maps and sections, and the examination of crystal models, minerals, rocks, and fossils. FIELD WORK. Six field excursions, including two whole-day excursions held on Saturdays. Excursion reports may be used in the assessment of candidates' examination results. A charge to cover bus fares, the amount of which will be posted in the Depart- ment, must be paid to the National Bank using a specially stamped bank slip obtained from the departmental ofrce. BOOKS. (a) Recommended for preliminary reading: Feamsides, W. G., and Bulman, O. M. B.—Geology in the Service of Man. (Penguin.) ( b ) Prescribed text-books: *Read, H. H., and Watson, J. Introduction to Geology. Vol. 1. ( Macmillan. ) *Hills, E. S —The Physiography of Victoria. (Whitcombe & Tombs.) (c) Recommended for reference: Holmes, A.—Principles of Physical Geology. ( Rev. ed., 1965, Nelson.) Gilluly, J., Waters, C. A., and Woodford, A. O. Principles of Geology. ( Freeman. ) Dury, G. H. Face of the Earth. (Penguin.) Mason, B. Principles of Geochemistry. ( 2nd ed., Wiley.) Berry, L. G., and Mason, B. Mineralogy. ( Freeman.) Rutley, F. (ed. Read )—Elements of Mineralogy. ( 23rd or later ed., Murby. ) Huang, W. T. —Petrology. ( McGraw-Hill.) Beerbower, J. R.—Search for the Past. (Prentice-Hal.) Woods, H. Palaeontology. ( 8th ed., C.U.P.) Oakley, K. P., and Muir-Wood, H. 1.—The Succession of Life through Geologic Time. (Brit. Mus. Nat. History.) 248 SCIENCE SUBJECTS The library of the Department of Geology is open to students, and advice as to reading on any special section of the work will be given by members of the Staff. There are several well-illustrated introductory textbooks on Physical Geology available for general reference in the Reserve Section of the departmental library.

EXAMINATION. One 3-hour written paper; one practical test of 3 hours 20 minutes. The practical test may be supplemented by or replaced by terminal tests.

398-3. PHYSICS PART I T A terminal course of three lectures per week, with laboratory work, throughout the year. The presentation will be introductory, and will not use advanced mathematics. However, elementary concepts will be dealt with only briefly. Where possible, applications of physics to other disciplines will be used.

SYLLABUS A selection from the following topics: The Sćope of Physics. Structure of matter. The Universe: solar system, stars, galaxies. The Earth. Mechanics. Units and measurements. Scalars and vectors. Kinematics and dynamics of motion in a plane. Gravitation. Conservation laws. Kinematics and dynamics of rotation. Statics. Dimensional analysis. Mechanical and Thermal Properties of Matter. Intermolecular forces. Solids, liquids, and gases. Elasticity. Fluid statics. Surface phenomena. Fluid dynamics. Viscosity. The concept of temperature: thermometry. The laws of thermodynamics. Molecular motion: the kinetic theory of gases. Equations of state. Heat capacity. Change of phase. Heat transfer. Wave Motion. Types of waves. Kinematics of wave motion. Intensity. Supper- position of waves. Resonance. Doppler effect. Huyghens' principle and Its applications. Acoustics and hearing. Electromagnetic waves: Nature and propagation. Reflection and refraction. Mirrors and lenses. Optical instruments and the eye. Interference. Diffraction. Polarization. Electricity and Electromagnetism. Electrostatics: electric field and potential. Capacitance. Direct current circuits. Magnetic induction. Magnetic field due ta current or moving charge. Motion of charged particles in electric and magnetic fields. Electromagnetic induction. Inductance. Alternating currents. Electronics.

Atomic and Nuclear Physics. The origin of the Quantum Theory. The structure of the atom. Rohr's theory of the hydrogen atom. Optical and X-ray spectra. The structure of the nucleus: isotopes. Techniques of nuclear physics. Nuclear bind- ing energy. Nuclear transmutations: radioactivity, reactions, fission. Nuclear power. Elementary particles.

LARORATORY WORK Three hours per week. Due to present staff shortages, laboratory classes may nоt proceed throughout the entire academic year. Attendance at practical classes is compulsory. The practical work of each student is examined continuously duriп the year, and is taken into account in assessing the results ( including the Class List for the year. An additional test in practical work may be given. A fee of $10 is payable. The full fee is retained, as no charge is made for reasonable wear of the apparatus. 249 FACULTY. OF ARTS HANDBOOK воокв (а) Prescribed textbook: *Сaто, D. E., McDonell, J. A. and Spicer, B. М.M оdern Physics. (Cheshire.) *Constant, F. W.—Fuпdameпtal Laws of Physics. ( Addison-Wesley. ) (b) Recommended for reference: Rogers, E. М. Physics for the Enquiring Mind. (Princeton.) Sears, F. W., and Zemansky, М. W.—College Physics. (3rd ed., Addison- Wesley.) EXAMINATION. One 3-hour paper.

250

Cплrта'5 COMBINED HONOURS COURSES Contents Details of courses marked with an asterisk (*) may be obtained from the sub-dean. Students interested in combinations not listed here should consult the sub-dean. *Arabic & French .. .. .. History & Geography . . . . . 269 Arabic & German ...... 252 History & German .. .. . . 270 *Arabic & Indonesian History & History & Philosophy of *Aramaic/Syriac & .. Science .. 274 *Chinese & History & Latin . . . 275 Dutch ( see German) History & Music ...... 215 Economics & History . .. .. 253 History & Philosophy . 276 Economics & Mathematics .. 254 History & Political Science . .. 276 *Economics & Philosophy History & Psychology . . . . 277 Economics & Political Science .. 253 History & Russian .. . ...... 278 *Economics & Psychology History & Philosophy of Science & English & Fine Arts . .. 254 History 274 English & French .. .. .. . 255 History & Philosophy of Science & English & German ...... 255 Latin 278 English & History ...... 256 History & Philosophy of Science & English & Italian ...... .. 257 Maths. 279 English & Latin ...... 258 History & Philosophy of Science & *English & Mathematics Philosophy .. .. .. 279 English & Philosophy .. 258 *Indonesian & Arabic English & Political Science .. .. 259 Indonesian & French . .. 265 Fine Arts & English ...... 254 *Indonesian & Political Science Fine Arts & French . .. 260 Italian & English .. .. 257 Fine Arts & German .. . . 260 Italian & French . .. .. 266 Fine Arts & History .. . . 281 Italian & German : 271 Fine Arts & Latin . . Latin & English ...... 258 Fine Arts & Philosophy . .. 262 Latin & Fine Arts ...... 282 French & English . 255 Latin & French . 266 French & Fine Arts .. .. . 260 Latin & History 275 French & German ...... 263 Latin & History & Philosophy of French & History . .. 264 Science 278 French & Indonesian .. .. 265 Latin & Mathematics .. 280 French & Italian . .. .. 266 *Mathematics & Economics French & Latin ...... 266 *Mathematics & English French & Philosophy ...... 267 Mathematics & History & Phil- French & Russian ...... .. 268 osophy of Science . .. 279 Geography & History .. 269 Mathematics & Latin ...... 280 Geography & Political Science . . 269 Mathematics & Philosophy .. 280 German & Arabic . ..• .. .. 252 Mathematics & Psychology . 281 German & English . . 255 *Mathematics & Russian German & Fine Arts . 260 Music & German ...... 271 German & French ...... 263 Music & History 275 German & History . 270 *Philosophy & Economics German & Italian . . .. 271 Philosophy & English .. 258 German & Music .. 271 Philosophy & Fine Arts .. 262 German & Philosophy . 272 Philosophy & French .. .. 267 German & Political Science .. . 273 Philosophy & German .. . . .. 272 German & Russian .. .. 273 Philosophy & History .. .. . 276 Creek ( see Latin) Philosophy & History & Philosophy *Hebrew & of Science ...... 279 History & Economics .. .. 253 Philosophy & Mathematics .. .. 280 History & English . .. . .. 256 Philosophy & Political Science . . 281 History & Fine Arts ...... ,. 261 Philosophy & Psychology .:. .. .. 282 History & French . . .. 264 Political Science & Economics .. 253 251 FACULTY OF ARTS HANDBOOK Political Science & English .... 259 Psychology & History .. : 277 Political Science & Geography . . 269 Psychology & Mathematics .....281. Political Science & German .. .. 273 Psychology & Philosophy ...... 282 Political Science & History .. . 276 Psychology & Political Science . 283 Political Science & Philosophy . . 281 Russian & French ...... .. 268 Political Science & Psychology .. 283 Russian & German ...... .. 273 Political Science & Russian . 283 Russian & History ...... 278 *Psychology & Economics Russian & Political Science . . 283 A combined honour course is a course constructed from two honour schools so as to form an integral whole, and approved by the faculty of Arts as equivalent to a single honour school. The faculty normally requires at least four of the main subjects from each of the two honour schools together with such other subjects as are considered necessary to provide a background for the main subjects or to effect unity in the course as a whole A combined honour course may also be constructed from subjects of an honour school and four Music subjects taken at honour standard, and approved by the faculty as equivalent to a single honour school. The subjects of a combined honour course must be taken at the annual examinations or, where so prescribed, at the final examinations. The courses given in detail below have been approved by the faculty. Other combined honour courses constructed on similar lines may also be approved. Candidates taking a combined honour course should make themselves familiar with the preambles to, and the details prescribed for, each of the two honour schools. In particular, they should note: ( 1 ) that combined honour courses with Mathematics are approved only for Pure Mathematics; (2) that English in a combined honour course may be combined either through English Literature or through English Language; (3) that a knowledge of Latin is most desirable for all combined honour courses of which French or Italian form a part; (4) that admission to the Second Year is conditional upon satisfactory performance in the First Year, and will normally be granted only to candidates who have obtained honours (usually at least second class) in each of the main subjects of the course; (5) unless the alternative of honours is specifically indicated in the courses below, candidates who wish to take a supporting subject at honour standard must seek special approval; (6) Combined courses including Italian or Chinese are available. (7) Candidates enrolled for a combined honours course in certain languages may, on the recommendation of the heads of both departments concerned, be permitted to specialize in one of the two languages in Fourth Year. (8) A candidate enrolled for a combined honours course in English and a foreign language may, on the recommendation of the head of the language department, be permitted to specialize in that language in his Fourth Year. ARABIC AND GERMAN First Year. German I (hens), Arabic I (bons), Philosophy I, or Fine Arts A or some other approved additional subject. Second Year: German II (hons ), Arabic II (hofs). Any grade 2 Philosophy subject or Fine Arts B or C or some other approved additional subject. Third Year: German III (hons ), Arabic III (bons). Fourth Year: German IV (hons), Arabic IV (hofs). Examination in Arabic and German as for the ordinary degree (with additional subject prescribed for honours students in both languages) will be held at the end of the First Year. There will be a formal examination in Arabic at the end of the Second Year, but none in German II (hons); class tests in Renaissance and Baroque Texts, also in conversation and translation from and into German will however be given together with prescribed essays on literature. 252 COMBINED řIONOUKS COURSES In addition a thesis on a subject approved by the heads of both departments and based on independent work undertaken by the student during the preceding eight months must be handed in not later than the end of third term. The final examination will be held in two parts, part I at the end of Third Year and part II at the end of Fourth Year. Part I A. Formal Examination Papers: ( 1 ) Unseen translation from Arabic and prose composition. (2) Translation of specified Arabic texts, with questions on Arabic literature. (3) German stylistic analysis and Essay. (4) History of German Literature. (5) Novel and Background to Modern Germany. (6) Renaissance and Baroque Texts. B. Class Tests: (1) Oral test in both languages. (2) Essay on the German novel. Part II A. Formal Examination Papers: ( 1 ) Unseen translation from Arabic and prose composition. (2) One of the Arabic IV honours (1), (2), or (3).. (3) German texts prescribed for critical study. (4) Germanic Philology. B. Class Tests: . Oral tests in German and Arabic: essays on special German subject.

ECONOMICS AND HISTORY Students wishing to take a combined course in these subjects should consult one of the professors of History, Economic History or Economics. The details of the course will be arranged by the three professors in consultation, subject to the approval of the faculty of Arts, in order to provide for the needs and interests of those taking it.

ECONOMICS AND POLITICAL SCIENCE First Year: Economics I (hons). Economic History I (bons). Modern Government A ( hens ). Part I of a relevant foreign language or of another approved subject. Second Year: Economics II (hons ). Modern Government B (hons) or International Relations (hons ). Statistical Method. Third Year: Economics III (hons ) Modern Government C (hons) or Political Sociology (hons) or Public Administration (hons ). Fourth Year: Economics IV. Theories of Politics Part 1 or Part II. In addition a thesis on a subject approved by the Heads of the Departments of Economics and Political Science is required to be handed in at the beginning of third term.' The final examination will be held in two parts, part I at the end of Third Year, part II at the end of Fourth Year. Part I (1) Economics III-3 papers. Part II ( 1 ) Economics IV-3 papers. (2) One paper In Modern Government C or Political Sociology or Public Administration. (3) Theories of Politics, Part I or Part II. (4) Thesis. 253 FACULTY OF ARTs HANDBOOK ECONOMICS AND MATHEMATICS First Year: Economics I (hens ). Pure Mathematics I Economic History (hons) or another approved subject. Applied Mathematics I or Physics І . Second Year: Economics II (hons ).. Statistical Method. Pure Mathematics II (hons ). Third Year: Economics III (hons) * *. Pure Mathematics III ( ho). Fourth Year: Economics IV Pure Mathematics IV (hofs). Thesis, on a topic to be jointly agreed upon by the two departments. The final examinations will be held in two parts, part I at the end of the Third Year, part I at the end of the Fourth Year. ENGLISH AND FINE ARTS First Year: English I (hons ). Fine Arts A (hons). The first part of a sub-major in History, Music or a language other than English. Part I of a foreign language or the first year of a history or music subject (for students taking the sub-major in a language). Second Year: English Literature II. Fine Arts B or C (hons). The second part of the sub-major.

Third Year: English Literature III. • Fine Arts В or C (hons ). Fourth Year: English Literature IV. Fine Arts D. Aesthetics. In addition, each candidate must submit during his. Fourth Year a thesis of 8-10,000 words either in English in accordance with the requirements of the School of English Language and Literature or in Fine Arts in accordance with the requirements of the School of Fine Arts or on a combined subject which must be approved by the heads of both departments. The final examination will be held in two parts, part I at the end of Third Year, part II at the end of Fourth Year. . PartI (1 Poetry and Prose from Spenser to Johnson. 2) The 19th and 20th century Novel or Australian and American Literature. 3) Practice of Criticism (dating). Compulsory class test. 4) Classical Art. (5) The examination prescribed for the Third Year Fine Arts Honours subject (Fine Arts B or C, whichever is given in that year) i.e. 2 or 3 3-hour papers and a visual test. Part II (1) Thesis. (2) A course from section (2) of those listed for part I of the Final Examination in English. (3) Another course chosen within the options permitted in either section (2) or section (4) of those listed for part II of the Final Examination in English. . (4) Fine Arts D. Aesthetics. 8) Either (a) Italian Renaissance Art or (b) European Art 1750-1920, whichever subject has not been examined in Part L Applied Mathematics I is preferable to Physics I. •With some topics omitted. 254 COMBØ HONOUR$ COURSES ENGLISH AND FRENCH First Year: English I (hons ), French I (hons ), Fine Arts A or other approved additional subject. Second Year: English Literature II, French II (hofs), European History (A or В if a First Year history subject passed) or Medieval French Language and Literature. Third Year: English Literature III, French III (hons). Fourth Year: English Literature IV, French IV (hons). In addition, each candidate must at the beginning of the second term of his Fourth year present a thesis on an approved subject, in accordance with the requirements of the school of English Language and Literature. The final examination will be held in two parts, part I at the end of the Third Year, part II at the end of the Fourth Year.

Part I . A. Formal Examination Papers: (1) Poetry and Prose from Spenser to Johnson. (2) The 19th and 20th century Novel or Australian and American Literature.

(3) French Literature of the 18th century. • (4) The special French literary study. В. Class Tests and Essays: (1) Practice of Criticism (dating). (English) (2) Advanced unseen translation into French. (3) Advanced unseen translation from French into English. (4) Essay and explications on French 18th century literature. (5) Oral test in French.

Part II A. Formal Examination Papers: (1) Thesis (English). (2) A course from section ( 2) of those listed for part II of the Final Examination in English. ( 3 ) Another course chosen within the options permitted in either section (2) or section (4) of those listed for part II of the Final Examination in English. (4) Modem French. Literature-1st paper. (5) Modern French Literature-2nd paper. В. Class Tests::. (1) Essay • in French on an approved topic. (2) Advanced oral test in French. (3) Advanced unseen translation into French. (4) Class test on the social and intellectual history of France since 1870.

ENGLISH AND GERMAN A. First Year: English I (bons ), German I ( hons ), British History (pass). Second Year: English Literature II, German II (bons), European History A or В (pass) or Fine Arts A (pass). Third Year: English Literature III, German III (hons), omitting Renaissance and Baroque Texts and the special literary study. 255 FACULTY OF ARTS HANDBOOK Fourth Year: English Literature IV, German IV (bons). In addition, each candidate must at the beginning of the third term of his Fourth Year submit a thesis on a subject approved by the Heads of the Departments of English and German and in accordance with the requirements of the School of English Language and Literature. The final examination will be held in two parts, part I at the end of the Third Year, part II at the end of the Fourth Year. Part I ( 1 ) Poetry and Prose from Spenser to Johnson. (2 ) The 19th and 20th century Novel or Australian and American Literature. ( 3 ) German stylistic analysis and Essay. (4) History of German Literature. (5) Novel and Background to Modern Germany. Class tests: ( 1 ) Practice of Criticism ( dating ). ( English) (2) Oral test in German. ( 3 ) Essay on the German Novel. Part II A. Formal Examination Papers: (1) Thesis (English). (2) A course from section (2) of those listed for part II of the Final Examination in English. ( 3 ) Another course chosen within the options permitted in either section (2) or section (4) of those listed for part II of the Final Examination in English. (4) German texts prescribed for critical study. * (5 ) Germanic Philology. Class tests: oral test in German. Essays on special German subjects. B. English Language and German. Students should arrange their courses in consultation with the departments concerned. The same procedure should be followed in a combined course in English and Dutch. • The following can be taken as an alternative to Germanic Philology: German Renaissance and Baroque Tests.

ENGLISH AND HISTORY Course A First Year: English I (hens). British History ( bons) or European History A (hofs) . Part I of a foreign language. Second Year: English Literature II. Honours History B, D, or E (E is a pre-requisite for F unless special permission given). A pass subject relevant to the combined course such as Ancient History or Philosophy I or Fine Arts A. ( Other subjects may be taken but only with the approval of the Professors in charge of English and History). Third Year: English Literature III. Honours History C, D, F (if E taken in 2nd year), G or H. Methods of Historical Research ( no examination). Fourth Year: English Literature IV. Special Study ( History). In addition, each candidate must submit during his Fourth Year a thesis of 8,000-10,000 words in English in accordance with the requirements of the School of English Language and Literature or in History in accordance with the requirements of the School of History or on a combined subject which must be approved by the Heads of both Departments. The final examination is held in two parts (in the 3rd and 4th years) in the School of English, and in one part (in the 4th year) in the School of History, though the History Department also takes into account results obtained in Honours History subjects taken in the 2nd year. Students should note that History subjects are examined in the 2nd year and not normally in the 3rd year. 256 COMBINED HONOURS COURSES Part I (3rd year) (1 Poetry and Prose from Spenser to Johnson. ( 2) The 19th and 20th century Novel or Australian and American Literature. ( 3 Practice of Criticism ( dating )—compulsory class test. Part II (4th year) (1) Thesis. (2) A course from section ' (2) of those listed for part II of the Final Examination in English. ( 3 ) Another course chosen within the options permitted in either section (2) or section (4) of those listed for part II of the Final Examination in English. (4) Sppecial Study ( History). (5) The Honours History subject studied in Third Year. Course B Combined honours in History and English with emphasis on Ancient History. For this course the English requirements are the same as for A above. For the History requirements, the professor in charge of the Department of History, should be consulted. ENGLISH AND ITALIAN First Year: English I (hons). . Italian I ( hons ). Fine Arts A or another approved additional subject. Second Year: English Literature II. Italian IIA (hons) or Italian IIB (bons). European History A ( or В if a 1st year history subject already passed). Third Year: English Literature III. Italian III Literature or Italian III Language. Fourth Year: English Literature IV. Italian IV Literature or Italian IV Language. In addition, each candidate must at the beginning of the second term of his Fourth Year present a thesis on an approved subject in accordance with the require.. ments of the School of English Language and Literature. The final examination will be held in two parts, part I at the end of the Third Year, part II at the end of the Fourth Year. Part I A. Formal Examination Papers: ( 1 ) Poetry and Prose from Spenser to Johnson. ((2) The 19th and 20th century Novel or Australian and American Literature. ( 3) Italian Literature of the 14th century. (( 4 Dante. (5) Italian Literature of the 17th and 18th centuries. В. Class Tests: (1) Practice of Criticism (dating) English. (2) Advanced unseen translation into Italian. (3) Essay on Dante. (4) Essays on Italian 17th and 18th century literature. (5) Oral test in Italian. Part II A. Formal Examination Papers: (1) Thesis (English). (2) A course from section (2) of those listed for part II of the Final Examination in English. ( 3 ) Another course chosen with the options permitted in either section (2) or section (4) of those listed for part II of the Final Examination in English. (4) Dante (Italian). (5) Italian Literature of the 20th century. В. Class Tests: (1) Advanced unseen translation into Italian. 2 ) Отal test in Italian. 3 Essay in Italian on an approved topic. Note;, Candidates choosing to take Italian III Language and Italian IV Language should consult the Department of Italian for details of examination papers and class tests. 257 7 , FACULTY OF ARTS HANDBOOK ENGLISH AND LATIN A. First Year: Latin I ( hens ), English I ( hons) , and one of Ancient History, Greek I, French I, German I, Italian I, Philosophy IA or IB (pass or hons) or Classical Rome. Se ond Year: Latin II ( hons ), English Literature II, and one of Philosophy IA ć or IB, 'Greek II, Epistemology, Logic and Methodology, British History (pass). Third Year: Latin III ( hons ), English Literature III. At the beginning of the first term of the Second and Third Years each candidate must, unless exempted by the professor of Classical Studies, submit an essay prescribed by the department of Classics. Fourth Year: Latin IV (hens), English Literature IV. Each candidate must present either (a) at the beginning of the third term a thesis on a subject approved by the heads of the departments of Classics and English, or (b) at the beginning of the second term a thesis for the department of English and at the beginning of the third term a thesis for the department of Classics. If one thesis is presented, it should be in accordance with the requirements of the School of English Language and Literature. If two theses are presented, each should fulfil the requirements of the department in which it is presented except that it need not be of the length normally required. The final examination will be held in two parts, part I at the end of the Third Year, part II at the end of the Fourth Year. Part I (1 Poetry and Prose from Spenser to Johnson. 2 The 19th and 20th century Novel or Australian and American Literature. 3 Practice of Criticism (dating). Compulsory Class test. 4 Prescribed Latin texts. Part II (1) Thesis. (2) A course from section (2) of those listed for part II of the Final. Examination in English. (3) Another course chosen within the options permitted in either section (2) or section (4) of those listed for part II of the Final Examination in English. (4) Translation from extensive reading in Latin. (5) Latin unseen translation. (6) Latin Literature. Part I or Part II Imperial Rome. To be examined in the year in which lectures are held. B. Latin the same; English Language course to be arranged in consultation with the departments concerned. ENGLISH AND PHILOSOPHY First Year: Philosophy IA (bons) or IB (hons), English I (bons), and Part I of a language other than English. Second Year: Ethics, Epistemology Logic and Methodology (hons), English Litera- ture II, European History A ( pass) or Fine Arts C. There will be an examination in Philosophy subjects at the end of this year. Third Year: Modern Philosophy, Aesthetics, English Literature III. Fourth Year: Greek Philosophy or Honours Philosophy E, Honours Philosophy C, English Literature IV. NOTE: Honours Philosophy A may be substituted for Honours Philosophy C or Greek Philosophy or Honours Philosophy E. Each candidate must, at the beginning of the second term of his Fourth Year, present a thesis on an approved subject, in accordance with the requirements of the school of English Language and Literature. The final examination will be held in two parts, part I at the end of the Third Year, part II at the end of the Fourth Year. 258 COMBINED HONOURS COURSES Part I Poetry and Prose from Spenser to Johnson. The 19th and 20th century Novel or Australian and American Literature, Practice of Criticism (dating). Compulsory Class test. Modern Philosophy. Aesthetics. Part II Thesis (English). A course from section (2) of those listed for part II of the Final Examination in English. Another course chosen within the options permitted in either section (2) or section (4) of those listed for part II of the Final Examination in English. Honours Philosophy C. Greek Philosophy or Honours Philosophy E..

ENGLISH AND POLITICAL SCIENCE First Year: English I ( bons ). Modem Government A (bons). A language other than English. An additional grade I subject (pass). Second Year: English Literature II. Either Modern Government В (hofs) and International Relations ( pass) or International Relations ( hons) and Modem Government В (pass). Thirд Year: English Literature III. Either Modern Government C ( hons) or Political Sociology (hons ) or Public Administration (hofs). Fourth Year: English Literature I4. . One part of Theories of Politics. . In addition each candidate must submit during his Fourth Year a thesis of 8,000-10,000 words either in English in accordance with the requirements of the School of English Language and Literature or in Political Science in accordance with the requirements of the School of Political Science or on a combined subject which must be approved by the heads of both departments. The final examination will be held in two parts, part I at the end of the Third Year, part II_ at the end of the Fourth Year. Part I ( 1 ) Poetry and Prose from Spenser to Johnson. (2) The 19th and 20th century Novel or Australian and American Literature. ( 3 ) Practice of Criticism ( dating ). Compulsory Class test. Part II (1) Thesis. (2) A course from section (2) of those listed for part II of the Final Examination in English. ( 3 ) Another .course chosen within the options permitted in either section (2) or section (4) of those listed for part II of the Final Examination in English. (4)' Modern Government C, or Political Sociology, or Public Administration. (5) One part of Theories of Politics. 259 FACULTY. OF ARTS HANDBOOK FINE ARTS AND FRENCH First Year: French I (hons). Fine Arts A (hens) . The first part of a sub-major* in History, Music or a language other •than English and French. Second Year: French II (hens). Fine Arts B or C (ho). The second part of the sub-major. Third Year: French III (huis).' Fine Arts B or C (hons). Fourth Year: French IV (hons ). Fine Arts D. A thesis not exceeding 9,000 words on a subject approved by the heads of the departments of French and Fine Arts will be required to be handed in at the beginning of third term. The final examination will be held in two parts, part I at the end of the Third Year, part II at the end of the Fourth Year. Part I A. Formal Papers: (1) French Literature of the 18th century. (2) The special French literary study. ( 3 ) Classical Art and the examination prescribed for the third year Fine Arts honours subject ( Fine Arts B or Fine Arts C, whichever is given that year) as set out on p. 83, i.e. two or three 3-hour papers and a visual test. B. Class Tests: - (1) Advanced unseen translation into French. (2) Advanced unseen translation from French into English. (3) Essay and explications on French 18th century literature. (4) Oral test in French.

Part II A. Formal Papers: (1) Modem French Literature ( first paper). (2) Modern French Literature ( second paper). (3) Fine Arts D. (4) Either (a) Italian Renaissance Art or (b) European Art, 1750-1920, whichever subject has not been examined in Part I. B. Class Tests: (1) Essay in French on an approved topic. (2) Advanced oral test In French. (3) Advanced unseen translation into French. (4) Class test on the social and intellectual history of France since 1870. C. Thesis.

FINE ARTS AND GERMAN First Year: Fine Arts A (huns). German I (huns). The first part of an approved History or language sub-major*. Second Year: Fine Arts B or C (hus). German II (hofs). The second part of an approved sub-major. Third Year: Fine Arts B or C (hofs). German III (huns), omitting the special literary study. Aesthetics. e, Degree with Honours, Note (vi), p. 35. • See Approval of Courц 260 COMBINED HONOURS COURSES Fourth Year: Fine Arts D. German IV (hong), omitting Germanic Philology. There will be no annual examination in German after the Second- Year but only class tests. An oral test in German will be held at the end of every year. The final examination will be held in two parts, part I at the end of the Third Year, part II at the end of the Fourth Year. Part I (1) Stylistic analysis and Essay. (2) History of German Literature. (3 ) Novel and Background to Modern Germany. (4) Renaissance and Baroque Texts. (5) The examination prescribed for the third year Fine Arts honours subject (Fine Arts B or Fine Arts C, whichever is given that year) as set out on pp. 79 and 80, i.e., two or three 3-hour papers and a visual test. Part II (1 Cezn'*an Critical Texts. (2) Fine Arts D. ( 3 ) Aesthetics. (4) Either (a) Italian Renaissance Art or (b) European Art 1750-1920, whichever subject has not been examined in Part I. (5) Classical Art. Class tests: oral test in German. Essays on special German subject. In addition, students are required to submit at the end of third term a thesis on a subject approved by the heads of both departments twelve months prior to its submission. FINE ARTS AND HISTORY First . Year: Fine Arts 'A (bons). British History ( hus ) or European History A (bons) Philosophy IA or IB. or Ancient History (pass). Part I of a foreign language. Second Year; Fine Arts B or C ( hons ). Honours History B, D, or E. Ancient History. or Australian History. or Philosophy IA or IB. or Part II of a foreign language. Third Year:, Fine Arts B or C (bons). Honours History C. Methods of Historical Research .(no examination). Fourth Year: Fine Arts D. Special, Study (History). A thesis not exceeding 9,000 words on a subject approved by the Heads of the Departments of Fine Arts and History, will also be required. The Heads of the Departments should be consulted during the Third Year about the date on which the thesis will be required to be handed in. The final examination is held in two parts (iň the 3rd and 4th years) in the School of Fine Arts and in one part (in the 4th year) in the School of History though the History Department also takes into account results obtained in Honours History subjects taken in the Second Year. Students should note that History subjects are examined in the 2nd year and not normally in the 3rd year. Part I ( 3rd year) ( 1 ) Classical Art. (2) The examination prescribed for the third year Fine Arts honours subjects (Fine Arts B or C) i.e. 2 or 3 papers and a visual test. Part II (4th year) (I) Fine Arts D. (2) Either (a) Italian Renaissance Art or (b) European Art 1750-1920 (whichever subject has not been examined in part I ). 261 FACULTY OF ARTS ØBOOИ 3 The Honours History subject studied in Third Year. () 4 Special Study (History). (5) Thesis.

FINE ARTS AND LATIN First Year: Latin I (pass or bons). Creek I or Philosophy IA or IB or Ancient History or Part I of a foreign language or Classical Rome. Fine Arts A (hons ). Students who prefer to take a non-language subject as second subject must take an additional foreign language. Second Year: Latin II (hofs). Greek II or Philosophy IA or IB or Ancient History or part I of a foreign language. Fine Arts B or C (hons ). Third Year: Latin III (bons). Fine Arts B or C (hus). Fourth Year: Latin IV (hons ). Fine Arts D (bons). In addition, each student, unless exempted by the professor of Classical Studies, must submit at the beginning of each of the Second and Third Years an essay prescribed by the department of classics and at the beginning of the third term of the Fourth Year must submit a thesis of not more than 9,000 words on a subject approved by the heads of the departments of Classics and Fine Arts. The final examination will be held in two parts, part I at the end of the Third Year, part II at the end of the Fourth Year.

Part I (1) Prescribed Latin texts. (2) Classical Art and the examination prescribed for the third year Fine Arts honours subject (Fine Arts B or Fine Arts C, whichever is given that year) as set out on pp. 79-80, i.e. two or three 3-hour papers and a visual test.

Part i (1) Translation from extensive reading in Latin. (2) Latin unseen translation. ( 3 ) Latin Literature. (4) Fine Arts D. 5) Thesis. 6) Either (a) Italian Renaissance Art or (b) European Art, 1750-1920, whichever subject has not been examined in Part I. Part I or Part II Imperial Rome. To be examined in the year in which lectures are held.

FINE ARTS AND PHILOSOPHY First Year: Fine Arts A (bons ). Philosophy IA ( hons) or IB (bons). The first part of a sub-major* in English or Music or History (English I, Music A or a First Year History subject) or in a foreign language. Part I of a foreign language if the sub-major is not taken in a foreign language or English I or the first year of a History or Music subject. Second Year: Fine Arts B or C (bons). Ethics. Epistemology, Logic and Methodology (hons). • See Approval of Course, Degree with Honours, Nate (vi), p. 35. 262 COMBINED HONOURS COURSES The second part of a sub-major in English, Music, History or a foreign language. Third Year: Fine Arts В or C (bons). Honours Philosophy C Modern Philosophy (pass). Aesthetics. Fourth Year: Fine Arts D. Greek Philosophy or Honours Philosophy E. Thesis. Note: Honours Philosophy A may be taken in place of Honours Philosophy C or Greek Philosophy or Honours Philosophy E. The final examination will be held in two parts, part I at the end of the Third Year, part II at the end of the Fourth Year. Part I (1) Modern Philosophy. 2) Aesthetics. 3 Classical Art (4) and the examination prescribed for the third year Fine Arts honours subject (Fine Arts В or Fine Arts C, whichever is given that year, set out in pp. 79-80, i.e. two or three 3-hour papers and a visual tesł. Part II Greek Philosophy or Honours Philosophy E. (2) Honours Philosophy C. . (3) Fine Arts D. (4) Either (a) Italian Renaissance Art or (b) European Art 1750-1920, whichever subject has not been examined in Part I. In addition, students are required to submit at the end of the third term a thesis on a subject approved by the heads of both departments twelve months prior to its submission. FRENCH AND GERMAN First Year: French I (hons ), German I (hots ), Philosophy IA or IB or a group I subject, or a First Year History subject. Second Year: French II ( horas ), German II ( bons ), First Year History subject (or Second Year if First Year already passed), or a group I subject. Third Year: French III (hens ), German III (hons) except the special literary study.* Fourth Year: French IV (hens). German IV (bons). Examinations in French and German as for the ordinary degree (with additional work prescribed for honours students in both languages) will be held at the end. of First Year. There will be no formal examination papers in German II ( hens) at the end of Second Year, but class tests in Middle High German, also in conversation and translation from and into German will be given together with prescribed essays on literature. The laat examination will be held in two parts, part I at the end of the Third Year and part II at the end of the Fourth Year. Part I A. Formal Examination Papers: (1) French Literature of the 18th century. (2 ` The special French literary study. (3 ) German stylistic analysis and Essay. (4) History of German Literature. (5) Novel and Background to Modern Germany. (8) Renaissance and Baroque Texts. В. Class Tests and Essays: (1), Advanced unseen translation into French. See Approval of Course, Degree with Honours, Note (vi), p. 35. 263 FACULTY OF ARTS HANDBOOK Advanced unseen translation from French into English. 3; Essay and explications on French 18th century literature. (4) Oral test in each language. (5) Essay on the German NoveL Part II A. Formal Examination Papers: (1) Modern French Literature (first paper) . (2 ) Modem French Literature ( second paper). ((3 German textsrescribed for critical study. (4) Germanic Philology. B. Class Tests: (1) Essay in French on an approved topic. (2) Advanced unseen translation into French. ( 3 ) Oral test in each language. .Essays on special German subject. (4) Class test on the social and intellectual history of France since 1870. Candidates who wish to specialize in one of their two honours languages in the Fourth Year are required to apply to the heads of both departments concerned, as well as to the Sub-dean's Office. In addition a thesis on a subject approved by the heads of both departments concerned and based on Independent work undertaken by the student during the preceding eight months must be handed in not later than the beginning of the third term. Note: A combined course in French and Dutch on similar lines is also offered.

FRENCH AND HISTORY First Year: French I (hens) British History (bons) or European History A (hons) . An additional grade I subject p(pass ). Second Year: French II - (bons). Honours History B or D. An additional grade II subject (pass). If Honours History D is not taken in either - the second or third year, this subject must be European History B. Third Year: French III (bons). Honours History C or D. Methods of Historical Research (no examination). Fourth Year: French IV. Special Study (History). In addition each candidate must present two theses, each of about 5,000 words in length. One thesis must be written in French on a subject approved by the Head of the Department of French; the other, to be written in English, must be on a subject approved by the Head of the Department of History, preferably a subject in French history or making use of sources in French. Under certain circumstances the Heads of both Departments may give permission for one thesis (of about 8,000-9,000 words) to be written instead of two, provided it is written in French and its subject combines the study of History and some aspect of French civilisation. The final examination is held in two parts (in the 3rd and 4th years) in the School of French and in one part (in the 4th year) in the School of History, though the History Department also takes into account results obtained in Honours History subjects taken in 2nd year. Students should note that History subjects are examined. in the 2nd year and not normally in the 3rd year. Part I (3rd year) Formal Examination Papers: (1) French Literature of the 18th century. (2) The special French literary study. Class Tests and Essays: S1 Advanced unseen translation into French. (2 Advanced unseen translation from French into English. 284 COMBINED HONOURS COURSES (3) Essay and explications on French 18th century literature. (4) Oral test in French. Part II (4th year) Formal Examination Papers: S1)) Modern French Literature (1st paper). (2) Modern French Literature (2nd paper). 3 _ The Honours History subject studied in Third Year. (4) Special Study (History). Class Tests: (1 Advanced oral test in French. ((2 Advanced unseen translation into French. (3 Class test on the social and intellectual history of France since 1870. Theses or Thesis:

FRENCH AND INDONESIAN STUDIES First Year: French I (hons). Indonesian I (hons). An additional grade I subject (pass). Second Year: French II (hons). Indonesian and Malayan Studies A (hons). An additional grade 2 subject ,(pass). Third Year: French III (bons). Indonesian and Malayan Studies В (bons). Fourth Year: French IV. Indonesian and Malayan Studies C (hons). In addition, an essay of not more than 9,000 words on a subject approved by the heads of both departments concerned must be handed in early in third term, or two essays of not more than 5,000 words each, on subjects approved by the respective beads of the departments concerned. The final examination will be held in two parts, Part I at the end of Third Year, Part II at the end of Fourth Year.

Part I A. Formal Examination Papers: 1 French Literature of the 18th century. 2 ) The special French literary study. 3 Indonesian and Malayan Studies В (hofs). 4) Indonesian unseen translation. В. Class Tests and Essays: 1 Advanced unseen translation into French. 2 Advanced unseen translation from French into English. 3 Essay on French 18th century literature. 4) Oral test in French. 5). Oral test in Indonesian.

Part II A. Formal Examination Papers: ((1)) Modern French Literature (first paper). (2) Modern French Literature (second paper). (( 3 Indonesian and Malayan Studies C (hans). B. Class Tests: 1) Advanced oral test In French. 2)) Advanced unseen translation into French. 3 Class test on the social and intellectual history of France since 1870. 4) Indonesian unseen translation. C. Essay or essays. 265 FACULTY OF ARTS HANDBOOK FRENCH AND ITALIAN First Year: French I (hens), Italian I (hons ), Philosophy IA or IB or a group I subject, or a First Year History subject. Second Year: French II (hofs), Italian IIA (hofs) or IIB (hens), First Year history subject (or Second Year if First Year history already passed) or a group I subject. Third Year: French III (ho), Italian III Literature or Italian III (Language). Fourth Year: French IV (hons), Italian IV Literature or Italian IV (Language). The final examination will be held in two parts, part I at the end of the Third Year and Part II at the end of the Fourth Year. Part I A. Formal Examination Papers: 1 French Literature of the 18th century. 2The special French literary study. 3 Italian literature of the 14th century. 4 Dante. 5) Italian literature of the 17th and 18th centuries. B. Class Tests: (1) Advanced unseen translation into French. 2) Advanced unseen translation from French into English. 3) Essay and explications on French 18th century literature. 4) Oral test in each language. (5) Advanced unseen translation into Italian. (6) Essay on Dante. (7) Essays on Italian 17th and 18th century literature. Part II A. Formal Examination Papers: (1) Modem French Literature first paper). 2 Modern French Literature (second paper) 3 Dante (Italian). 4 Italian Literature of the 20th Century. . Class Tests: В 1) Essay in French on an approved topic. 2 Advanced unseen translation into French. ) Class test on the social and intellectual history of France since 1870. (4)З Oral test in each language. (5 Advanced unseen translation into Italian. (6) Essay in Italian on an approved topic. Note: Candidates who wish to specialize in one of their two honours languages in the Fourth Year are required to apply to the Heads of both Departments as well as to the Sub-Dean's ofFce. Candidates choosing to take Italian III (Language) and Italian IV (Language) should consult the Department of Italian for details of examination papers and class tests. FRENCH AND LATIN First Year: Latin I ( hofs ), French I ( hofs ), and one of Greek I, German I, Ancient History (pass or hons), Fine Arts A, Philosophy IA or IB or Classical Rome. Second Year: Latin II (hofs), French II (hofs), and European History A (or B, if a First Year history subject passed), or Medieval French Language and Literature. Third Year: Latin III ( hus ), French III ( hus). Fourth Year: Latin IV (hus), French IV (huns). Note: In addition, each student, unless exempted by the professor of Classical Studies, must submit at the beginning of each of the Second and Third Years an essay prescribed by the department of Classics. The final examination will be held in two parts, part I at the end of the Third Year, part I at the end of the Fourth Year. 266 COMBINED нохоцяв couпsØ Part I A. Formal Examination Papers: (1) French Literature of the 18th century. (2) The special French literary study. (3) Prescribed Latin texts. В. Class Tests: 1 Advanced unseen translation into French. 2 Advanced unseen translation from French into English. 3 Essay and explications on French 18th century literature. 4 Oral test in French. Part II A. Formal Examination Papers: (1) Translation from extensive reading in Latin.tin. (2) Latin unseen translation. ( 3 ) History of Latin literature. (4) Modem French Literature (first paper). (5) Modern French Literature (second paper). IL Class Tests: . (1) Essay in French on an approved subject. ( 2) Advanced oral test in French. (3) Advanced unseen translation into French. (4) Class test on the social and intellectual history of France since 1870. (5) Essay in a special study in Classics. Part I or Part II Imperial Rome. . To be examined in the year in which lectures are held.

FRENCH AND PHILOSOPHY First Year: French I (hons ). Philosophy IA (hens) or IB (hons ). Fine Arts A or some other approved additional subject. Second Year: French II (hons). Ethics. Epistemology, Logic and Methodology (hons ). European History A (or B if a 1st year history already passed). There will be examinations. in French and Philosophy subjects at the end of this year. Third Year; French III (bons). Aesthetics. Modern Philosophy A (pass). Honours Philosophy C. Fourth Year: French IV (hofs). Greek Philosophy or Honours Philosophy E. Special subject.t . Note: Honours Philosophy A may be substituted for Honours Philosophy C or Creek Philosophy or Honours Philosophy E. ExØАтіoxs: The final examination will be held in two parts, part I at the end of the Third Year, part II at the end of the Fourth Year. Part I A. Formal Papers: (1) French Literature of the 18th century. (2) The special French literary study. ( 3 ) Modern Philosophy. (4 ), Aesthetics. t This tray consist either of the History of French Philosophy from Descartes to the present day. or of the Literature section of French Language and Literature IL 267 FACULTY OF ARTs HANDBOOK B. Class Tests and Essays: (1) Advanced unseen translation into French. (2) Advanced unseen translation from French into English. 3) Essay and explications on French 18th century literature. (4) Oral test in French. Part II A. Formai Papers: (1) Modern French Literature ( first paper). (2) Modern French Literature (second paper). (3 Honours Philosophy C. (4) Greek Philosophy or Honours Philosophy E.* (5) Special subject. B. Class Tests: (1) Essay in French on an approved subject. (2) Advanced oral test in French. (3) Advanced unseen translation into French. (4) Class test on the social and intellectual history of France since 1870.

FRENCH AND RUSSIAN First Year: French I ( hens ), Russian I ( hons ), Philosophy IA or IB or a group I subject. Second Year: French II (hons), Russian II (hofs), First Year History subject or a group I subject. Third Year: French III ( hons ), Russian Language III (bons ), or Russian Literature III (hons). Fourth Year: French IV (hons ), Russian Language IV (hons ), or Russian Litera- ture IV (hons). Examinations for French and Russian as for the ordinary degree (with additional work prescribed for honours students in both languages) will be held at the end of First Year. There will be no formal examination papers in Russian II (bons) at the end of Second Year, but class tests in conversation and translation from and into Russian Ø be given, together with prescribed essays on literature. The final examination will be held in two parts, part I at the end of the Third Year and part II at the end of the Fourth Year. Part I A. Formal Examination Papers: (1) French Literature of the 18th century. (2) The special French literary study. (3) Either (a) Russian III papers (1) and (2) and Russian Language III (bons). or (b) Russian III papers (2) and (3) and Russian Literature III (bons). B. Class Tests: (1) Advanced unseen translation into French. (2) Advanced unseen translation from French into English. (3) Essay and explications on French 18th century literature. (4) Advanced unseen translation into Russian. (5) Advanced unseen translation from Russian into English. (B Special Russian Language or Literary study. (Essay.) (7 Oral test in each language. Part II A. Formal Examination Papers: (1) Modem French Literature ( first paper). (2) Modern French Literature ( second paper). ( 3 ) Either (a) Russian Language IV (2 papers), or (b) Russian. Literature IV (2 papers). 268 C0MB]NED нохоцпв соцпвØ B. Class Tests: (1) Essay in French on an approved topic. (2) Advanced unseen translation into French. (3) Class tests on the social and intellectual history of France since 1870. (4) Essay in Russian, to be approved by the Russian department. (5) Oral test in each language. Candidates who wish to specialize in one of their two honours languages in the Fourth Year are required to apply to the heads of both departments concerned, as well as to the Sub-dean's Office.

GEOGRAPHY AND HISTORY First Year: Geography I (bons). European History A ( hons) or British History ( hons) or Ancient History (hons). An additional grade 1 subject (pass). Part I of a foreign language. Second Year: Geography II (hons ). Exploration and Settlement. Honours History A, B, D or E (E is a prerequisite for F unless special permission given). Third Year: Geography III (bons). Political Geography. Honours History C, D, F (if .E taken in 2nd year), G or H. Methods of Historical Research (no examination). Fourth Year: Geography IV. Special Study (History). Thesis. . The heads of both departments should be consulted during the Third Year about the date on which the essay of 9,000-12,000 words will be required to be handed in. Part I (3rd Year) (1) Geography III. (2) Political Geography. Part II (4th year) (1 Geography IV. (2 The Honours History subject studied in 3rd year. 3 Special Study (History). (4) Thesis. GEOGRAPHY AND POLITICAL SCIENCE fi First Year: Geography I (ho). Modern Government A (hens). European History A (pass). Part I of a foreign language. Second. Year: Geography II ( hons ). Modern Government B ( hons) or International Relations (hons ). Exploration and Settlement. Third Year: Geography. III (hons). Modern Government C ( hens) or Political Sociology (hons) or Public Administration (hons ). Political Geography. Fourth. Year: Geography IV. One part of Theories of Politics. A thesis of not more than 9,000 words on a subject approved by the heads of each department. The final examination will be held in two parts, part I at the end of Third Year, part II at the end of Fourth Year. t Combinations of Geography with other subjects may be arranged. Students should consult the heads of the departments concerned. 269 FACULTY OF ARTS HANDBOOK Part I (1) Geography III. (2) Political Geography. Part II (1) Geography IV. (2) Modern Government C or Political Sociology or Public Administration. (3) One part of Theories of Politics. (4) Thesis.

GERMAN AND HISTORY First Year: British History ( hons) or European History A (hons ). German I (hus). The pass course in one of English I, Ancient History, Modem Government A, Philosophy IA or IB, or part I of a foreign language other than German. Second Year: Honours History B or D. German II (hans). The pass course in one of English II, Modem Government В, Modern Philosophy, or part II of a foreign language other than German. Third Year: Honours History C or D. Methods of Historical Research (no examination). German III (hofs), omitting the special literary study. Fourth Year: Special Study (History). German IV (hofs), omitting Germanic Philology. In addition, a thesis of not more than 9,000 words on a subject approved by the heads of both departments concerned and based on independent work undertaken by the student during the preceding eight months must be handed in not later than the beginning of the third teten, or two theses not more than 5,000 words each, on subjects approved by the respective heads of the departments. concerned. Note: In German II, students will be given class tests in Middle High German unseen translation and Literature, at the end of the Second Year. The final examination is held in two parts (in the 3rd and 4th years) in the School of German and in one part (m the 4th year) in the School of History, though the Hirtory Department also takes into account results obtained in the Honours History subjects taken in 2nd year. Students should note that History subjects are examined in the 2nd year and not normally in the 3rd year. In German II, students will be given class tests in Middle High German, unseen translation and Literature at the end of the Second Year. Part I (3rd year)

Formal Examination Papers: • 1) Stylistic analysis and Essay. (2) Novel and Background to Modern Germany. 3) Renaissance and Baroque Texts. (4) History of German Literature. Class Tests: (1) Oral test on German. Part II (4th year) Formal Examination Papers: ( 1 ) Critical studies in German Political Philosophy. (2) The Honours History subject studied in 3rd year. (3) Special Study (History). Class Tests: (1) Oral tests in German. (2) Essays on special German subject. Thesis or theses. 270 COMBINED HONOURS COURSES GERMAN AND ITALIAN First Year: Italian I (hons ). German I (hons). First additional subject (to be approved by both heads of Departments). Second Year: Italian IIA ( hons) or Italian IIB (hons ). German II ( bons ). Second additional subject. Third Year: Italian III Literature or Italian III Language. German III (hons). Omitting special literary study, but including either German Renais- sance and Baroque Texts, or Germanic Philology. Fourth Year: Italian IV Literature ` or Italian IV (Language). German IV (bons). The final examination will be held in two parts, Part I at the end of the Third Year and Part II at the end of the Fourth Year. Part I A. Formal examination papers: (1 Italian Literature of the 14th century. ( 2 Dante. ( 3 Italian Literature of the 17th and 18th centuries. ( 4 Stylistic Analysis and Essay ( German). (5) History of German Literature. (8) Novel and Background to Modem Germany. (7) German Renaissance and Baroque Texts or Germanic Philology or Swedish for Honours Students. B. Class Tests: 1 Advanced unseen translation into Italian. 2 Essay on Dante. 3 Essays on Italian 17th and 18th century literature. 4) Oral test in each language. 5) Essay on the German Novel. Part II A. Formal examination papers: S1 Dante. (2 Italian Literature of the 20th century. (3 German texts for critical study. B. Class Tests: (1) Advanced unseen translation into Italian. (2) Oral test in each language. (3 Essay on special German subject. A thesis of approximately 10,000 words, or two shorter theses, one for each subject, based on independent study will be submitted before the end of the third term on a subject or subjects approved by the heads of both Departments. Note: A combined course in Italian and Dutch on similar lines is also offered. Candidates who wish to specialize in one of their two honours languages in the Fourth Year are required to apply to the heads of both Departments concerned, as well as to the Sub-Dean's Ofliсе. Candidates choosing to take Italian III (Language) and Italian IV (Language) should consult the Department of Italian for details of examination papers and class tests..

GERMAN AND MUSIC First Year: Music A (bons). German I ( hans). The first part of an approved History or Language sub-major or Fine Arts A. Second Year: Music B ( hans ), with a study of prescribed musical scores. German II (bons). The second part of an approved sub-major or Fine Arts B or C. Third Year: Music C (bons), with a study of prescribed musical scores. German III (hons), including the special literary study. 271 FACULTY OF ARTS HANDBOOK Fourth Year: Music D (hons). German IV (bons), omitting ,Germanic Philology. Aesthetics. There will be no annual examination in German after the Second Year but only class tests. An oral test in German will be held at the end of every year. The final examination will be held in two parts, part I at the епд of the Third Year, part II at the епд of the Fourth Year. Part I (1) Stylistic analysis and Essay. 2) History of German Literature. 3) Novel and Background to Modern Germany. 4) Renaissance and. Baroque Texts. 5) Prescribed Musical Scores.' (8) Music C. Part II (I) Music D. (2) Aesthetics. (3) German tests prescribed for critical study. Class Tests: Oral test in German. Essays on special German subject. In addition a thesis on a subject approved by the heads of both departments concerned and based on independent work undertaken by the student during the preceding eight months must be handed in not later than the end of the third term.

GERMAN AND PHILOSOPHY First Year: Philosophy IA ( hons) or IB (hons ), German I ( hons ), English I (bons). Second Year: Ethics or Political Philosophy, Epistemology Logic and Methodology ( bons ), German II ( hons ), History and Philosophy of Science I. Third Year: Aesthetics, Modem Philosophy, German III (hus), omitting the special literary study. Fourth Year: Honours Philosophy E, German , IV omitting Germanic Philology, Honours Philosophy C or Honours Philosophy D. A thesis on a subject to be agreed upon by the heads of the two Departments concerned, to be submitted before the examination term. Note: Honours Philosophy A may be substituted for Honours Philosophy C or Honours Philosophy D. There will be examinations in all Philosophy subjects in the Second Year and class tests in Middle High German; unseen translation and literature for German. The Baal examination will be held in two parts, part I at the end of the Third Year, part II at the end of the Fourth Year, Part I (1) Stylistic analysis and Essay. (2) History of German Literature. (3) Novel and Background to Modern Germany. (4) Renaissance and Baroque Texts. (5) Modern Philosophy. (8) Aesthetics. Class Tests: Oral test in German. Part I (1) Honours Philosophy E. (2) Honours Philosophy C or Honours Philosophy D. ( 3 ) German texts prescribed for critical study. (4) Special subject. Class Tests: Oral test in German. Essays on special German subject. 272 COMBINED HONOURS COURSES GERMAN AND POLITICAL SCIENCE First Year: German I (hons). Modern Government A (hens). European History A ( pass) or Economics A (Arts) (pass) . An additional grade I subject (pass). Second Year: German II (hons). Modern Government B (bons) and International. Relations (pass), or International Relations ( hens) and Modern Government B (pass). Third Year: German III (hus), omitting the special literary study. Modern Government C ( hons) or Political Sociology ( hons) or Public Administration (hons). Fourth Year: German IV (hons), omitting Germanic Philology. One part of Theories of Politics. A thesis on a subject approved by the heads of both departments concerned and based on independent work undertaken by the student during the preceding eight months will be required to be handed in early in third term. The final examination will be held in two parts, part I at the end of the Third Year, part II at the end of the Fourth Year. Part I (1) Stylistic analysis and Essay. (2) History of German Literature. (3) Novel and Background to Modern Germany. (4) Renaissance and Baroque Texts. Class Tests: Oral test in German. Essay on the German novel.

Part II (1) Critical studies in German political philosophy. (2) One paper in Modern Government C or Political Sociology or Public Administration. (3) One part of Theories of Politics. (4) . Thesis. Class tests: Oral test in German, Essays on special German subject.

GERMAN AND RUSSIAN First Year: Russian I ( hons ), German I ( hons ), one group I subject, or Philos- ophy IA or IB. Second Year: Russian II (hons), German II (hons), First Year History subject or a group I subject. ThIrd Year: Russian Language III (hons) or Russian Literature III (hons), Ger- man III (hons) omitting the special literary study. Fourth Year: Russian Language IV (hons) or Russian Literature IV (hons), Ger- man IV (hons). Examinations for Russian and German as for the ordinary degree with additional subject prescribed for honours students in bath languages) will be held at the end of First Year. There will be no formal examination papers in German II ( hons) at the end of Second Year or in Russian II ( hans) at the end of Second Year, but class tests in Middle High German, also in conversation and translation from and into the respective languages will be given together with prescribed essays on literature. The final examination will be held in two parts, part I at the end of the Third Year and part II at the end of the Fourth Year. 273 FACULTY OF ARTS HANDBOOK Part I A. Formal Examination Papers: (1) Either (a) Russian III papers (1) and (2) and Russian Language III (hons), or (b) Russian III papers (2) and ( 3 ) and Russian Literature III (hons). (2) Stylistic analysis and Essay. ( 3 ) History of German Literature. (4) Novel and Background to Modern Germany. (5) Renaissance and Baroque . Texts. В. Class Tests: (1) Advanced unseen translation into Russian. (2) Advanced unseen translation from Russian into En lish. ( 3 ) Special Russian linguistic or literary study. (Essay. (4) Oral tests in both languages. (5) Essay on the German novel. Part II A. Formal Examination Papers; (1) Either (a) Russian Language IV, or (b) Russian Literature IV. (2) German texts prescribed for critical study. (3) Germanic Philology (for Russian Language IV). B. Class Tests: (1) Special German subject ( tests by essay). (2) Oral tests in both languages. In addition, a thesis of not more than 9,000 words on a subject approved by the beads of both departments concerned and based on independent work undertaken by the student during the preceding eight months must be handed in not later than the end of the third term, OR two essays of not more than 5,000 words each, on subjects approved by the respective heads of the departments concerned. HISTORY & HISTORY AND PHILOSOPHY OF SCIENCE First Year: British History ( bons) or European History A ( hons) or Ancient History (bons). History and Philosophy of Science I (hons). Approved part I Science or Mathematics. Part I of a foreign language. Second Year: Honours History A, В, D or E (E is a prerequisite for F, unless special permission given). History and Philosophy of Science II (hons). Epistemology, Logic and Methodology or an additional part I Science or Mathematics. Third Year: Honours History C, D or F (if E taken in 2nd year), G or H. Methods of Historical Research (no examination). History and Philosophy of Science (Science course) or H.P.S. III (hons. ) Fourth Year: Special Study (History). Selected topics from H.P.S. C and/or H.P.S. D. In addition, each student must submit a thesis of not more than 9,000 words on a subject to be approved by the heads of both departments. The thesis must be handed in no later than the second week of the August vacation of the Fourth Year. The final examination is held in two parts (in the 3rd and 4th years) in the School of History and Philosophy of Science, and in one part (in the 4th year) in the School of History, though the History Department also takes into account results obtained in Honours History subjects taken in the 2nd year. Students should note that History subjects are examined in the 2nd year and not normally in the 3rd year. Part I (3rd year) (1) History and Philosophy of Science (science course) (bons) or History and Philosophy of Science III (bons). Part II ( 4th year) (1) The Honours History subject taken in the Third Year. (2) Special Study (History) . (3) Selected papers from History and Philosophy of Science C and/or D. (4) Thesis. 274 COMBINED HONOURS COURSES HISTORY AND LATIN First Year: Latin I ( hens ), Ancient History ( hens ), and one of the following: Greek I, German I, French I, Philosophy IA or IB. Second Year: Latin II ( hens ), Honours History A, and an approved pass or honours history subject. Third Year: Latin III (hens) and Honours History B or C Fourth Year: Latin IV (hons). Special Study (History). In addition, each student, unless exempted by the professor of Classical Studies, must submit at the beginning of each of the Second and Third Years an essay prescribed by the Department of Classics, and at the beginning of the second terra of the Fourth Year must submit a thesis of not more than 9,000 words on a subject approved by the heads of the Departments of Classics and History. The final examination is held in two parts (in the 3rd and 4th years) hi the School of Latin, and in one part (in the 4th year) in the School of History. Students should note that History subjects are examined in the 2nd year and not normally in the 3rd year, but results in 2nd year will be taken into account when determining the final result. Part I (3rd year) . (1) Prescribed Latin texts. Part II (4th year) (1) The Honours History subject studied in 3rd year. (2) Special Study (History). ( З ) Translation from extensive reading in Latin. 4 Latin unseen translation. 5) Latin Literature. 6) Thesis.

HISTORY AND MUSIC First Year: British History (bons) or European History A (hons ). Music A (hus). Philosophy IA or IB or Ancient History (pass). Part I of a foreign language. Second Year: Honours History B or D. Music B ( bons with a study of prescribed musical scores. European History B (if Honours History D is not taken) or Ancient History or Philosophy IA or IB (pass) or Aesthetics (with addition of special reading and essay on Musical Aesthetics) or part II of a foreign language. Third Year: Honours History C. Methods of Historical Research (no examination). Music C ( hons) with a study of prescribed musical scores. Fourth Year: Special Study (History). Music D (hons ). In addition, each candidate must present a thesis not exceeding 9,000 words on a subject approved by the Heads of both Departments, which combines the study of history and music, provided that the Heads of the Departments may approve a subject which lies entirely in the field of History, or in the field of Music. The Heads of the Departments should be consulted during the Third Year about the date on which the thesis will be required to be handed in. The final examination is held in two parts (in the 3rd and 4th years) in the School of Music and in one part (in the 4th year) in the School of History, though the History Department also takes into account results obtained in the Honours History subject taken in 2nd year. Students should note that History subjects are examined in the 2nd year and not normally in the 3rd year. Part Y (3rd year) (1) Music C (bons). (2) Prescribed musical scores. 275 FACULTY OF ARTS HANDBOOK Part II (4th year) (1) The Honours History subject studied in 3rd year. (2) Special Study (History). (3) Music D. (4) Thesis. Note: Subject to the approval of the Departments of History and Music, a sub-major in subjects other than history and music may be taken in place of Ancient History and Philosophy I.

*HISTORY AND PHILOSOPHY First Year: British History (bons) or Ancient History (bons) or European History A (hons). Philosophy IA ( hons) or IB (hons ). Part I of a foreign language. Second Year: Honours History A, B, D or E (E is a prerequisite for F unless special permission given). Epistemology, Logic and Methodology (hoes), and one of Modem Philosophy, Ethics, Political Philosophy, History and Philosophy of Science I. There will be examinations in Philosophy subjects at the end of this year. Third Year: Honours History C, D, F (if E is taken in Second Year), G or H. Methods of Historical Research (no examination). The pass course in one of the three latter Philosophy subjects not taken in the Second Year. The honours course in one of the two Philosophy subjects taken in the Second Year. Fourth Year: Special Study (History). The honours course in the two remaining Philosophy subjects taken previously at pass standard only. A thesis not exceeding 9,000 words either in the Philosophy of History or in the History of Philosophy. The heads of the departments should be consulted during the Third Year about the time at which the thesis will be required to be handed in. • The Final Examination is held in two parts (in the 3rd and 4th years) in the School of Philosophy and in one part (in the 4th year) in the School of History, though the History Department also takes into account results obtained in Honours History subjects taken in the 2nd year. Students should note that History subjects are examined in the 2nd year and not normally in the 3rd year.

Part I (3rd Year) ( 1 ) The specifiedass subject in the school of Philosophy. (2) The specified honours subject in the school of Philosophy. Part II ( 4th year) (1) The Honours History subject studied in the 3rd year. (2) Special Study (History) . (3)—(4) The two remaining specified honours subjects in the School of Philosophy. (5) Thesis.

HISTORY AND POLITICAL SCIENCE First Year: Modem Government A (hons ). British History ( hons) or European History A (bons). An additional Grade I subject (pass). Part I of a foreign language. 276 COMBINED HONOURS COURSES Second, Year: Honours History D or E (E is a prerequisite for F unless special permission given). Either Modern Government B (hong) and International Relations (pass) or International Relations (bons) and Modern Government B (pass). Third Year: One of Honours History D, F (if E taken in 2nd year), G or H. Methods of Historical Research (no examination). Modem Government C ( huns) or Political Sociology ( bons) or Public Administration ( bons ). An approved pass history subject. Fourth Year: Sppecial Study (History). Theories of Politics Part I or Part I. In addition students must submit a thesis not exceeding 9,000 words, on a combined subject or in either History or Political Science. Students doing a pure History thesis will be required to submit it by the end of the first term vacation in their Fourth Year. Students doing a Political Science subject or a combined subject will be required to submit the thesis by the end of second term. Examinations in Honours subjects will be taken at the end of the student's First, Second and Fourth Years. Normally there will be no examinations in such subjects at the end of the Third Year. Nevertheless either Department may require a special examination if progress is not satisfactory. The final examination is taken at the end of the Fourth Year. ( 1) One paper in the Honours History subject taken in the Third Year. 2) One paper in Special Study (History). 3 One paper in Modern Government C or Political Sociology or Public Administration. (4) One paper in Theories of Politics part I or part IL (5) Thesis. Note: The result obtained in the 2nd year History subject will be considered in determining the Final History result.

*HISTORY AND PSYCHOLOGY First Year: British History (bons) or European History A (bons). Psychology I (bons ). Part I of a foreign language. Second Year: Honours History B D, or E (E is a prerequisite for F under special permission given ). Psychology IIA (hons). Psychology IIB (half of honours course). Third Year: Honours History C, D or F (if E taken in Second Year), G or H. Psychology IIIA (hons). Psychology IIB ( remaining half of honours course). Fourth Year: Either Special Study ( History ), Theory and Method of History, 9,000-word thesis. Or Psychology IV and such other work as the head of the department of Psychology may prescribe. As the details of this course may vary from time to time, students should consult the heads of departments before entering upon it. • FINAL EXAMINATION: Iп the Department of History the Final Examination is held at the end of the Fourth Year and includes History subjects taken in the Third Year. It should be noted that the result obtained in the History subject in the Second Year will also be taken into account when assessing the final result. Students choosing alternative ( 1 ) in the Fourth Year will be examined in Psychology subjects in the 3rd year but not in History subjects in the 3rd year. Students choosing alternative (2) may be examined in all subjects in the 3rd year. (This is under review and students should consult the Head of both Departments before making a decision.) 277 FACULTY OF ARTS HANDBOOK *HISTORY AND RUSSIAN First Year: British History (bons) or European History A (he ). Russian I (hens). An additional grade 1 subject (pass). Second Year: Honours History B, D or E. (E is a prerequisite for F unless special permission given.) Russian II ( ho). An additional grade II subject (pass). Third Year: Honours History B, C, D or F (if E taken in 2nd year), C or H. Methods of Historical Research (no examination). Russian Literature III (hens) or Russian Language III (hofs). Note: In Russian III, honours students will be given class tests in unseen translation and will have to write an essay, in Russian, on a subject approved by the heads of the two departments concerned, the essay to be handed in at the beginning of third term. Fourth Year: Special Study (History). Russian Literature IV or Russian Language IV. A thesis in English on a subject approved by the heads of both departments, based on independent research and not exceedin 9,000 words. The heads of the departments should be consulted during the Third Year concerning the date on which the thesis will be required to be handed in. • The Final Examination is held in two parts (in the 3rd and 4th years) in the School of Russian and in one part (in the 4th year) in the School of History, though the History Department also takes into account results obtained in Honours History subjects taken in the 2nd year. Students should note that History subjects are examined in the 2nd year and not normally in the 3rd year. Part I (3rd Year) A. Formal Examination Papers: (a) Russian III papers (1) and (2), and Russian Language III (hofs) or (b) Russian III papers (2) and (3), and Russian Literature III (hofs). B. Class Test: Oral test in Russian. Part II (4th year) A. Formal Examination Papers: ( 1 ) The Honours History subject studied in 3rd year. (2) Special Study (History). (3) Russian Literature IV or Russian Language IV. B. Class Test: Oral test in Russian. C. Thesis.

HISTORY AND PHILOSOPHY OF SCIENCE AND LATIN First Year: Latin I (hofs). History and Philosophy of Science I (huis). A part I Science subject. Second Year: Latin II ( ho). History and Philosophy of Science II (hofs). Ancient History or a History subject approved by the head of the department of History and Philosophy of Science; or an additional science subject or Epistemology, Logic and Methodology. Third Year: Latin III. History and Philosophy of Science ( Science course) or H.P.S. III (hons. ) Fourth Year: Latin IV (huis). Selected topics from H.P.S. C and/or H.P.S. D. The candidate must be classed in Latin I, II, III, IV and History and Philosophy of Science I, II, (Science course), or III, H.P.S. C and/or H.P.S. D. 278 COMBINED HONOURS COURSES In addition, each candidate, unless exempted by the professor of Classical Studies, must submit at the beginning of each of the Second and Third Years an essay prescribed by the department of Classical Studies. Each candidate must submit at the beginning of the third term of the Fourth Year either (a) a thesis of 9,000 words on a subject approved by the heads of the departments of Classical Studies and History and Philosophy of Science or (b) a thesis for the department of Classical Studies and a thesis for the department of History and Philosophy of Science. If two theses are presented, each should-fulfil the requirements of the department in which it is presented except that it need not be of the length normally required. The final examination will be held in two parts, part I at the end of the Third Year, part II at the end of the Fourth Year. Part I (1) Prescribed Latin texts. (2) History and Philosophy of Science (Science course) (hens.) or H.P.S. III (hens.) Part II (1) Translation from extensive reading in Latin. (2) Latin unseen translation. (3) Latin Literature. (4) History and Philosophy of Science D. and/or H.P.S. C. (5) Thesis. Part I or Part II Imperial Rome. To be examined in the year in which lectures are held.

HISTORY AND PHILOSOPHY OF SCIENCE AND MATHEMATICS First Year. History and Philosophy of Science I (bons). Pure Mathematics I. Physics I. Applied Mathematics I or another approved part I Science subject. Science language. Second Year. History and Philosophy of Science II (hus). Pure Mathematics II (hus). Epistemology, Logic and Methodology. Third Year; History and Philosophy of Science (Science course) plus C (bons) Pure Mathematics III (bons). Fourth Year. History and Philosophy of Science C and part of D. Pure Mathematics IV (hus). The final examination will be held in two parts, part I at the end of Third Year, part II at the end of Fourth Year. Part I (1') Pure Mathematics III ( bons) (2 papers). (2) History and Philosophy of Science ( Science course) . Part II (1) Pure Mathematics IV (bons) (3 papers). (2) H.P.S. C and a selection of the papers in H.P.S. D. ( 3 ) Thesis or prescribed essay work. HISTORY AND PHILOSOPHY OF SCIENCE AND PHILUSOPHY First Year: Philosophy IA (hons) or IB (bons). History and Philosophy of Science I (hofs). Approved part I Science or Mathematics. Part I of a foreign language. Second Year: Epistemology, Logic and Methodology (hons ) Modern Philosophy. 279 FACULTY OF ARTS HANDBOOK History and Philosophy of Science II ( hu). Third Year: History and Philosophy of Science ( Science course). One pass and one honours unit from another Philosophy subject or, by. arrangement, from a combination of Philosophy subjects. Fourth Year: History and Philosophy of Science C (hus.) and part of H.P.S. D. Honours Philosophy A. Honours Philosophy E.- Fnv,'і. ExлØATIoN (1) History and Philosophy of Science C and a selection of H.P.S. D papers. (2) Honours Philosophy A. () 3 Honours Philosophy E. (4) The pass section of the Philosophy subjects taken in the Third Year will be examined in the Third Year. The honours section of the Philosophy subjects taken in the Third Year will be examined in the final year.

LATIN AND MATHEMATICS First Year: Latin I (huns), Pure Mathematics I, either Applied Mathematics I or Physics I, and an additional grade I subject. Second Year: Latin II (lions ), Pure Mathematics II ( hofs ), and either Ancient History, or Greek I (pass). Third Year: Latin III ( hofs ), Pure Mathematics III ( hus). Fourth Year: Latin IV (hofs), Pure Mathematics IV (bons). In addition, each candidate must present a thesis in the final year on a special topic to be decided in consultation with the professors of Mathematics and Classical Studies. Note: In addition each student, unless exempted by the professor of Classical Studies, must submit at the beginning of each of the Sеcond and Third Years an essay prescribed by the department of Classics. The final examination will be held in two parts, part I at the end of the Third Year, part II at the end of the Fourth Year. Part I Pure Mathematics III (huns) (first paper). (2) Pure Mathematics III (hans) (second paper). (3) Prescribed Latin texts. Part II ' Translation into Latin prose, and questions on historical syntax. (2) Latin unseen translation. (3 History of Latin Literature. Pure Mathematics IV (hons) (first paper). (5) Pure Mathematics IV (hons) (second paper). Pure Mathematics IV (bons) (third paper). (7) Thesis. Part I or Part II Imperial Rome. To be examined in the year in which lectures are held.

MATHEMATICS AND PHILOSOPHY First Year: Philosophy IA ( bons) or IB ( hons ), Pure Mathematics I, either Applied Mathematics I or Physics I, and either part I of a foreign language or Science language courses in French and German. Second Year: Modem Philosophy, Epistemology, Logic and Methodology (bons), Pure Mathematics II ( bons ). There will be examinations in each of these subjects at the end of this year. Third Year: Honours Philosophy B, Pure Mathematics III (hons), Honours Philosophy A. Fourth Year: Pure Mathematics IV (hons), Honours Philosophy F, Honours Philosophy E. 280 COMBINED HONOURS COURSES Each candidate must also present a thesis in the final year on a special topic to be decided in consultation with the professor of Mathematics. The final examination will ba held in two parts, part I at the end of the Third Year, part II at the end of the Fourth Year. Part I. (1) Pure Mathematics III (hurls) (first paper). (2) Pure Mathematics III (hurls) (second paper). 3) Language study 4) Honours Philosophy A. 5) Honours Philosophy В. Part II (1) Pure Mathematics IV (hofs) (first paper). (2) Pure Mathematics IV (hoos) (second paper). (3) Pure Mathematics IV (hons) (third paper). (4) Honours Philosophy F. (5) Honours Philosophy E.

MATHEMATICS AND PSYCHOLOGY First Year: Psychology I (hons). Pure Mathematics I Two of: Applied Mathematics I, History, Economics, Political Science, a language. Second Year: Psychology IIA (hons).* Pure Mathematics II (hons). Theory of Statistics I or Psychology IIB (hons) Third Year: Psychology IIIA (hons) .* Pure Mathematics III (hons). Fourth Year: Psychology IV (hons).* Mathematics IV (hons).** ThesisРиге (on a topic in Mathematical Psychology). • Somewhat different collection of units for those with mathematical training. •• Omitting one of the course units. The final examination will be held in two parts, part I at the end of the Third Year, part II at the end of the Fourth Year.

PHILOSOPHY AND POLITICAL SCIENCE First Year: Philosophy IA ( hons) or IB (hois). Modern Government A ( hu). British History (pass). Part I of a foreign language. Second Year: Epistemology, Logic and Methodology (hulls). Political Philosophy (pass). Modern Government B (bons). There will be examinations in Philosophy subjects at the end of this year. Third Year: Ethics. Honours Philosophy A. Either Modern Government C ( bons) or International Relations (hons) or Political Sociology ( hons) or Public Administration (hulls). Fourth Year: Honours Philosophy C. Honours Philosophy D. 281

FACULTY OF ARTS HANDBOOK Theories of Politics, Part I or Part II.. Thesis. The final examination will be done at the end of the Fourth Year. (1) Honours Philosophy A. (2 Ethics. (3 Honours Philosophy C. (4 Honours Philosophy D. (5 One paper in Modern Government C or International Relations or Political Sociology or Public Administration. (6) Theories of Politics Part I or Part II. (7) Thesis of not more than 9,000 words in a subject approved by the head of each department.

PHILOSOPHY AND PSYCHOLOGY

A. First Year: Philosophy IA ( bons) or IB ( hoes )Psychology I (hons ), a language other than English, and one of the following: History and Philosophy of Science I, Biology, General Mathematics, Pure Mathematics I. Second Year: Epistemology, Logic and Methodology (hoes), Modern Philo- sophy, Psychology IIA ( bons) and Psychology IIB ( half of honours course). Third Year: Honours Philosophy A, Honours Philosophy G, Psychology IIIA ( hons) and Psychology IIB ( remaining half of honours course). Fourth Year: Honours Philosophy E, Psychology IV. B. First Year: Philosophy. IA ( bons) , or Philosophy IB ( bons ), Psychology I ( hons ), language other than English, History and Philosophy of Science I. Second Year: Ethics, Political Philosophy, Psychology IIA (bons) and Psycho- logy IIB (half of honours course). Third Year: Honours Philosophy D, Honours Philosophy G, Psychology IIIA (hons ), Psychology IIB (remaining half of honours course). Fourth Year: Honours Philosophy C, Psychology IV. In both courses A and B, Psychology IIA will be examined at the end of the Second Year. There will be examinations in Philosophy in the Second Year. The final examination will be held in two parts, part I at the end of the Third Year, part II at the end of the Fourth Year.

Part I A. (1) Psychology IIIA (bons), Psychology IIB (hons ). (2) Honours Philosophy A. (3) Honours Philosophy G.

Part II (1) Honours Philosophy E. (2) Psychology IV. Thesis. Part I B. (1) Psychology IIIA ( bons ), Psychology IIB (hons ). (2) Honours Philosophy D. ( 3 ) Honours Philosophy G. Part II 1) Honours Philosophy C. (2 ) Psychology IV. Thesis. 282 COMBINED HONOURS COURSES POLITICAL SCIENCE AND PSYCHOLOGY First Year: Psychology I ( hens ), Modern Government A ( bons ), European History A (pass), and one of the following: any Language subject, Philosophy IA or IB, Economics A, Pure Mathematics I, General Mathematics, History and Philosophy of Science I, Biology. Second Year: Psychology IIA (hons). and Psychology IIB ( bons ), Modern Govern- ment В (hons). Third Year: Psychology IIIA ( bons ), Modern Government C ( hons) or Inter national Relations (hons), or Political Sociology (hons) or Public Administration (hens). Fourth Year: * Either ( 1 ) Theories of Politics, Parts I and II, 9,000 word thesis. or (2) PsýchoIogy IV and such other work as the head of the depart ment of Psychology may prescribe. As the details of this course may vary from time to time, students should consult the heads of the departments before entering upon it. In the department of Political Science the Final Examination is held at the end of. the Fourth Year and includes Political Science subjects taken in the Third Year. It should be noted that the result obtained in the Political Science subject in the Second Year will be taken into account when assessing the final result. Students choosing alternative (1) in the Fourth Year will be examined in Psychology subjects in the Third Year but not in, Political Science subjects in the Third Year. Students choosing alternative (2) may be examined in all subjects in the Third, Year. Note: Students wishing to do a combined Fourth Year may do so with the approval of the beads of both departments. In this case the details of the course will be adjusted accordingly.

POLITICAL SCIENCE AND RUSSIAN First Year: Modern Government A ( bons ). European History A ( pass) or Economics A ( Arts) (pass). Russian I (bons). An additional grade 1 subject (pass). Second Year: Modern Government В ( bons) and International Relations ( pass) or International Relations ( bons ) and Modern Government B (pass). Russian II ( hans ) Third Year; Modern Government C (bons) or Political Sociology (hons) or Public Administration (bons). Russian Literature III (hons) or Russian Language III (bons). Fourth Year: One part of Theories of Politics. Russian Literature IV or Russian Language IV. The final examination will be held in two parts, part I at the end of the Third Year, part II at the end of the Fourth Year.

Part I A. Formal Examination Papers: Either (a) Russian III papers (1) and (2), and Russian Language III (hofs). or (b) Russian III papers ( 1 ) and (3 ), and Russian Literature III (hus). В. Class Test; Oral test in Russian. 283 FACULTY OF ARTS HANDBOOK Part II A. Formal Examination Papers: (1 Modern Government C or Political Sociology or Public Administration. (2 One part of Theories of Politics. (3 Either (a) Russian Literature IV. or (b) Russian Language IV. В. Class Test: Oral Test in Russian. C. Thesis: A thesis on a subject approved by the heads of both departments, based on independent research and not exceeding 9,000 words, will be required to be handed in at the beginning of the third term.

284 CHAPTER 6 SCHOLARSHIPS, BURSARIES, PRIZES AND FINANCIAL ASSISTANCE Commonwealth University. Scholarships (a) Open Entrance Scholarships—awarded on the total marks in the best three subjects (excluding English Expression) presented at the Matriculation Examination; applicants up to 25 years of age. (b) Later Year Scholarships—awarded on results obtained in approved university courses; applicants up to 25 years of age. (c) Mature Age Scholarships—awarded on whole academic record; applicants 25 years of age and over on 1st January of the year in which the course was commenced. Benefits: All compulsory fees. Full-time students may be granted a living allowance subject to a means test. All enquiries should be made from— The Officer-in-Charge, Commonwealth University Scholarships Branch, 99 Queen Street Melbourne, Vic. 3000. Education Department Studentships The Education Department provides a number of studentships each year to enable qualified students to proceed to, or complete, certain University courses provided that they undertake to serve the Department as teachers for three years next after the termination of their studentships, although this period may be reduced to one year in the case of women who marry. Applicants must be prepared to study approved subjects in one of the following courses: Arts (pass or honour degree), Science, Commerce, Music, Agricultural Science and Physical Education. On the completion of degree courses students will take the. First Year of the course for the degree of bachelor of Education. Physical Education students will be required, at the end of their diploma courses, to undertake a one-year course of teacher-training at a Teachers' College. Studentships are tenable at the Secondary Teachers' College, University of Melbourne. Allowances, of at least $1,140 per year, are intended to cover cost of books, travelling and personal expenses for the duration of the course, plus an additional allowance for students living away from home. A limited amount of hostel accommodation is available for both men and women. Applications should be made on the prescribed form and should be forwarded to the Secretary, Education Department, Melbourne, in time to be received at the Department, not later than 1 November. Students at school should forward applications through their head-teacher or headmaster or headmistress. Graduates and undergraduates should forward their applications direct. Each applicant will be interviewed before an award is made. Gowrie Scholarship Trust Fund In addition to postgraduate research travelling scholarships and secondary school scholarships, four or five University entrance scholarships, of the value $150 p.a. and tenable for the normal period of a University course, are awarded by the trustees. Applications for all scholarships are due on 30 November each year. Further particulars may be obtained from the Secretary, The Cowrie Scholarship Trust Fund, P.Q. Box. E5, St. James, Sydney, N.S.W. 2001. 285 FACULTY OF ARTS HANDBOOt Students' Loan Fund Loans of up to $300 may be made in any one year to matriculated students who are pursuing or intend to pursue a University course, and who cannot proceed without such assistance. Applications for loans must be lodged with the Registrar on the appropriate forms not later than 1 February. Supplementary applications may be considered during the year. Applications must be accompanied by evidence of the student's ability and full particulars of his financial position. The borrower must also provide a guarantor who is able and willing to guarantee the repayment of the loan. Provided that the borrower's work is satisfactory, the loan is free of interest during his course. Thereafter interest is chargeable at the rate of 4 % per cent for five years, and at 5 per cent on any balance unpaid after that period. Further information may be obtained from the Accountant's offсе. Annual Exhibitions An exhibition, prize or scholarship, of $30 unless otherwise stated, is awarded in each of the following subjects ( no formal application is necessary): Ancient History, Applied Mathematics 1, Applied Mathematics II, British History, Comparative . Philology, Dutch I, Dutch II, Economic Geography I, Economic History I, Economics C, English I (Honours), English Language and Literature II, French I, French Language and Literature I, French Language and Literature II or III, French iii, German I, German III, Greek I, Greek II, International Relations, Latin I, Latin II, Philosophy I, Philosophy 2nd Year, Modern Government A, Psychology I, Psychology IIA, Pure Mathematics I, Pure Mathematics II, Russian I, Russian I , Final Examination Prizes Prizes are awarded on the basis of the results of the final examination in all schools except Mathematics. The value of these is $50. No formal application is necessary.

A summary of other awards at entrance, undergraduate and graduate levels is given below in the Appendix which follows. The Wyselaskie Scholarships A Wyselaskie scholarship is open to competition at undergraduate or graduate level in each of the fields Iisted below. The scholarship may not be held beyond the last day of March in the fifth year after the year in which the scholar matriculated. Enquiries should be directed to the head of the department concerned. The closing date for application is 25 July. Details are set out in the University Calendar, regulation 6.7. 1. Mathematics: $440 p.a. The examination for the Wyselaskie scholarship in Mathematics will consist of part II of the final examination (Ytaken at the end of the Fourth Year) in the school of Mathematics. 2. Natural Science: Particulars may be obtained from the faculty of Science.

3. English Constitutional Нistогy: Particulars may be obtained from the Registrar. 4. Political Economy: $220 p.a. The University course for the degree of bachelor of Arts with honours in the school of Economics or bachelor of Commerce with honours. The examination will comprise three papers, to be taken at the end of the Third Year. Further details may be obtained from the department of Economics. 5. Modern Languages: $388 p.a. . (1) English. (2) French. (3) Germanic Languages. The examination in the foregoing groups will be as follows: (1) English—The papers set in the final examination in the school of English Language and Literature, along with the essay of the final examination. 288 ScHOLАВSIХРS (2) French—(i) part II of the final examination in the school of French; (ii) an essay (in French) on an approved subject. N.B.—A high standard of fluency and correctness will be expected. (3) Germanic Languages—The papers set in the final examination in the school of Germanic Languages, along with an essay on one of the two following subjects: Die Novelle Heinrich von Kleisla. De Nederlandse Novelle. The Wyselaskie scholarship in modern languages will be open to competition as follows: 1988 French 1969 Germanic Languages 1970 English and so on in rotation. 6. Classical and Comparative Philology and Logic: $428 p.a. The examination will consist of all the papers set in the final examination in the school of Classical Studies. Postgraduate Studies Grants from Research Funds Allocation Grants from the general research fund are made by the Professorial Board on the advice of its Standing Research Committee and the heads of the departments concerned. Research Awards The University of Melbourne has been accustomed to grant to students a limited number of research scholarships from its own resources. However, in the present period of financial restriction, there will be very few of these awards for the years 1968 and 1969. Where an award is made, scholars are expected to devote their whole time to research except for such tutoring and demonstrating work as is approved by the head of the appropriate department. Awards are made for one year, but may be renewed for additional yearly periods. Research grants are awarded to selected graduates of Bachelor standing. Research scholarships known as Williams Scholarships are awarded to selected candidates of Master standing who have shown marked ability for research and who are undertaking further research training, as Ph.D. candidates. Research scholarships may be renewed annually for a period not exceeding three years. Emoluments of Awards For students proceeding to a Master's degree the value of a research grant is $1,400 p.a. plus compulsory fees. The value of research scholarships varies from $1,600 to $1,750 per annum (plus annual compulsory fees). Research Fellowships The University of Melbourne has established five research fellowships, not more than two of which may be senior fellowships. The senior fellowships have the status and salary of a senior lecturer and the junior fellowship the status and salary of a lecturer. Fellowships may be held for one, two, but not more than three years. Travelling allowance is made for a fellow appointed from overseas. Fellowships will be advertised as they become vacant. ( For the reason ggiven above, no more Research Fellowships or Senior Research Fellowships will be offered for the time being.) Travelling Research Scholarships Two travelling research scholarships* are offered in two years out of every three to enable a graduate who shows first-rate capacity for research to undertake approved work at an overseas university, or other suitable institution. The value of the scholarship, which is normally awarded for three years, is $2,000 per annum. Research Report All persons conducting research in the University, whether under research awards er otherwise, are required to submit, by the end of February in each year, The Aitchison Travelling Scholarship, one year, and the Myer Scholarship, one year, which are worth $2 .000, are also available for research abroad. Together they form a two-year scholarship. 287 FACULTY OF ARTS HANDBOOK reports on their research during the preceding twelve months to the heads of their departments, together with a list of their research publications during the period. Heads of departments also submit departmental research reports, which are published in the annual University of Melbourne Research Report. Mode of Application Applications for research awards and grants must be made on a form designed for the purpose (and available at the office of the Dean of Graduate Studies) . Applications must be lodged with the Secretary for Graduate Studies before 31 December. In general, research awards are made as from 1 March. Further information may be obtained from the Secretary for Graduate Studies.

The H. В. Higgins Scholarships (Study of Poetry) The examination will be in two of the following: Group A Greek, Latin, English, French and either German or Dutch poetry. (One of these must be either Latin or Greek poetry.)

Group B English, French and either German or Dutch poetry. (1) Greek Poetry. In 1988: Sophoclеs—Oedipus Tyrannus Aeschylus—Persae Euripides—Bacсhae Euripides—Helen and Rhesus: as for 1964 (2) Latin Poetry. In 1968: Virgil—Aeneid V, Bucolics and Georgics Horace—Opera Catullus--Carmina Lucretius—Book V Juvenal—Satires Candidates should consult the books recommended for reference in the Faculty Handbook for the years in which the works are prescribed. (3) English Poetry. In 1968: The poetry of Marvell and Pope.

(4) French Poetry. In 1968: Baudelaire—Les Fleurs du Mal. (5) German or Dutch Poetry. In 1968: Candidates should intensively study one poet of their own choice after consultation with the head of the department. The examination in any part of each group will consist of two 3-hour papers, and will include— (a) Translation and interpretation of passages. (b) Critical comment and illustration. (c) Quotation. 288 COMBINED HONOURS COURSES (d) Questions on the history and principles of poetry and of literary style. (e) Questions concerning the lives and works of the prescribed authors. In addition, there may be an oral examination. The Jessie Webb Scholarship The Scholarship may be awarded to a student at the final examination in the combined honours course of Latin and History or Creek and History. A successful scholar shall be required to spend a season in Greece under th direction of an approved School of Archaeology. Enquiries should be directed to the Registrar's Office. John Masefield Prize (Original Poem) Subject for June, 1968: Any subject chosen by the applicant. Note: This means one poem of not more than 50 lines; not a book, pamphlet, or collection of poems. The W. T. Mollison Scholarships 1. French— The papers and class tests set for the final examination parts I and II in the school of French Language and Literature, with special emphasis on the oral test. or German The papers set for the final examination parts I and II in the school of Germanic Languages ( German ), with special emphasis on the oral test. or Dutch— The papers set for the final examination parts I and II in the school of Germanic Languages (Dutch), with special emphasis on the oral test. Bowen Prize Essay on subject prescribed by the Professorial Board and connected with the History, the Institutions, the Literature, the Jurisprudence, or the Political Economy of the British Commonwealth. Subject to be announced during the year. Professor Morris Prize Subject for October, 1968: Any subject approved by the professor of English Language and Literature, whether as a dissertation for the final examination in the school of English or otherwise. Shakespeare Scholarship ( Open for competition in 1968) The examination for the Shakespeare Scholarship will consist of two 3-hour papers on. Shakespeare and his fellow dramatists. Paper One. The Plays of Shakespeare. Paper Two. Non-Shakespearian tragedy of the Elizabethan and Jacobean period. For paper one a general knowledge of the whole of Shakespeare'ѕ dramatic work is expected but there will be considerable choice of question and candidates may make their own selection of plays for particular study. For paper two candidates will be expected to show a knowledge of Elizabethan theatrical conditions and conventions. Any enquј es about the examination should be made to the department of English. Appendix—Summary of Awards available to Students This table contains a list of awards included in the University Calendar in chapter 6 of the regulations, other than those previously listed. It also includes those 289 FACULTY OF ARTS HANDBOOK awards available to students either as annual gifts or as income from funds not held by the University as trustee. The table lists separately the awards available at entrance, undergraduate, final examination and postgraduate levels. The regulation establishing the award is listed where applicable, or the source of further information cited. The value of awards quoted is an approximation only and may be subject to variation. ENTBANCE

Field Title and Approximate Value Calendar Reference or Information Source Unrestricted Senior Government Scholarships Secretary, $80 p.a. Education Department, Treasury Place, Melbourne, Vic. 3002. Unrestricted Free Places Tuition fees Secretary, Education Department, Treasury Place, Melbоuге, Vic. 3002. Unrestricted Edwin Nonus Smith R 6.91 Scholarship Accounts Department $100 p.a. Unrestricted N.U.A.U.S. Aboriginal R 6.97 Scholarship Registrar's Office Determined according to individual needs Unrestricted Dick Bursaries R 6.54 $100 p.a. Accounts Department Unrestricted Moran Bursaries R 6.40 $180 p.a. Accounts Department Unrestricted Rest Home Bursary R 6.34 $90 p.a. Accounts Department Unrestricted War Bursaries R 6.105 Tuition fees Accounts Department Unrestricted Rolfe Scholarship Accounts Department $200 p.a. subject to a means test Unrestricted Schutt Scholarship Accounts Department Fees and living allowance

UNDERGRADUATE

Field Title and Approximate Value Calendar Reference or Information Source Unrestricted Aitchison Scholarships R 6.46 $140 Accounts Department Ancient History Rosemary Merle Prize $18 16.72(42) Australian History Lyles Turner Prize $34 R 6.72(12) British History Rosemary Merlo Prize $18 R В.72(42) Dramatic Мцпау Sutherland Prizes R 6.72(30) Performance $28 English Essay Bowen Prize 6.72(1) $40 approx. 1 English Essay Morris Prize ) Books $20 н в.72(в History ( Honours) Wilson Prize $60 R 3.5.25 290 scнoг.лнs1ІРs GRADUAтE

Calendar Reference or Field Title and Approximate Value Information Source

Philosophy Hastie Exhibition R 3.5.25 ( Honours ) $60 Poetry Enid Derham Prize R 6.72(22) $15.30 Poetry Masefeld Prize R6.72(19) $20 Middle Eastern Fanny Reading Scholarship R 6.75 Studies $108 p.a. Unrestricted Aitchison Travelling R 6.46 Scholarship Dean of Graduate Studies $2,000 Unrestricted Bartlett Research Scholarships R 6.51 $200 Dean of Graduate Studies Unrestricted British Council Scholarships See "Announcements" Maintenance and study Unrestricted British Council Travel Grants See "Announcements" Tourist return sea passage Unrestricted Cowrie Research Travelling See "Announcements" Scholarships The Trustees, Cowrie 8,720 Stg. Scholarships Trust Fund, P.O. Box ES, St. James, Sydney, N.S.W. 2001. Research Rhodes Scholarship See "Announcements" Scholarships £ 750 stg. p.a. Research Services Canteens Trust Scholarships Fund Scholarships General Secretary, ( For study abroad) Services Canteens Trust Fund, Maximum $2,000 p.a. Victoria Barracks, Melbourne Research Sir Arthur Sims Traveling R 6.80 Scholarships Scholarship Dean of Graduate Studies $2,000 Research Taft Interchange Scholarship R 6.70 Scholarships $2,000 Dean of Graduate Studies Arts Shell Scholarship See "Announcements" 850 Stg. Staff Manager, Shell Co. of Australia Ltd., 163 William Street, Melbourne, Vin. 3000. Arts Lizette Bentwitch Scholar- R 6.98 ship Dean of Graduate Studies $1,260 approx. Classical Studies Jessie Webb Scholarship Dean of Graduate Studies Dutch Мollison Scholarship R 6.9 $772 Dutch H. B. Higgins Scholarship 16.18 $80 Economic Research Kilmany Scholarship 16.43 $650 Dean of Graduate Studies English Shakespeare Scholarship 16.2 $390 approx. English Poetry H. B. Higgins Scholarship R 6.16 $80 French Mollison Scholarship 18.9 $772 French H. B. Higgins Scholarship R 6.18 $80 German Mollison Scholагshiр 16.9 $772 291 FАCULTY OF ARTS HANDBOOK

new Title and Approximate Value Caleudar Reference or Information Sоитсе German H. B. Higgins Scholarship 6.18 $80 н Greek H. B. Higgins Scholarship R 6.16 $80 History Harbison-Higinbotham R 8.28 Research Scholarship Registrar's Office $200 History Caroline Kay Scholarship R 8.20 $300-$570 History Ernest Scott Prize R 8.59 $500 Registrar's luce History Jessie Webb Scholarship Dean of Graduate Studies Icelandic Lodewyckx Travelling R 6.101 Scholarship $1,000 or $500 Languages Н. B. Higgins Scholarship R 6.18 $80 Languages Mollison Scholarship 16.9 $780 approx. Latin Н.$ Š Higgins Scholarship R 6.16 Mathematics Nanson Prize R 6.72(14) $94 Mathematics Wilson Prize R 6.72(2) $124 Music Lizette Bentwitch Scholarship R 6.98 $1,260 Dean of Graduate Studies Politics Harbison-Higinbotham R 6.28 Research Scholarship Registrar's Office $200

292 CHAPTER 7

DIPLOMA IN JOURNALISM In the course for the diploma in Journalism, students are required to take five selected subjects in the faculty of Arts and two additional short courses specially provided by the Board of Studies in Journalism. The two latter subjects offer guidance to journalists in such topics as practical aspects of journalism, newspaper organization, production and management; newspaper ethics; the writing of specialized articles; and law as it affects journalists. It is not the function of the diploma in Journalism to train people to be journalists but to give an academic training to people already employed in journalism. The diploma is only awarded to those who, having passed the examinations required by the course, have also had three years' experience of a kind approved by the Board of Studies in Journalism. Since the University does not provide correspondence tuition in the course, entry is restricted to those journalists who work in Melbourne.

Regulation 3.8—Diploma in Journalism 1. A candidate for the diploma in Journalism shall pursue his studies for at least two years after admission to the course. 2. The Board of Studies in Journalism may admit to the course any candidate who— (a) is qualified to matriculate; and (b) is a cadet journalist who is either on the staff of a daily newspaper; or is engaged in another branch of journalism approved by the board; or has had at least three years'ournalistic experience approved by the board, and in either case has satisfied the board that he is fit to undertake the work of the course. 3. A candidate must pass at the annual examinations in the following subjects in an order approved by the Board of Studies in Journalism- 1. 12. Rhetoric or 11-1. English part I 2. 8. Economics A (Arts) 3. 93-1. Modem Government A 4. 201. Journalism 5. 202. Law affecting Journalism 6. 34. British History or 35-1. European History A or 35-2. European History B or 217. Economic History A or 94. International Relations. 7. 215. Elementary Jurisprudence and Constitutional Law or 37. Australian History or 11-2. English part II or 17-1. Fine Arts A or 44-1. History and Philosophy of Science part I or another subject approved by the board. A candidate must, before beginning the course of study, obtain approval of the Board of Studies for the order in which he proposes to attempt the subjects of the course. A candidate must obtain like approval for any alteration subsequently proposed. When enrolling, students must quote the NUMBER as well as the name of the subject as listed above. 4. A candidate who has fulfilled the requirements of section 3 and has produced evidence that he has had three years' journalistic experience of a nature approved by the board may be granted the diploma in Journalism. 293 FACULTY OF ARTS ØBOOS 5. A candidate who is taking or has taken the course for a degree in the Uni- versity may be admitted to the diploma in Journalism if he has passed in at least four subjects approved for the purpose by the Board in addition to the subjects required for such degree.

APPROVAL OF COURSES The Board of Studies in Journalism considers it desirable that, when possible, students should take the subjects Journalism and Law Affecting Journalism in the first year of the course. The other subjects should be taken in the order shown in the Regulation. Normally, approval will not be given for a part-time student to take more than two subjects in any one year. For the purpose of approval of courses the subjects Journalism and Law Affecting Journalism, taken together, may be regarded as the equivalent of one subject.

DETAILS OF SUBJECTS For Arts subjects, see under degree of bachelor of Arts, ordinary degree.

201. JOURNALISM SYLLABUS Newspaper organization, production and management. Ethics and functions of the newspaper. Practical aspects of journalism. Books Recommended for preliminary reading; The Remsley Manual of Journalism. Williams, F.—Dangerous Estate. ( Longman, 1957.) Herd, H.—The March of Journalism. (Allen & Unwin.) Wolseley, R. E., and Campbell, L. R.—Exploring Journalism. (3rd ed., Prentice- Hall.) Wolseley, R. E. and Campbell, L. R. How to Report and Write the News. ( Prentice-Hall. ) Holden, W. S.—Australia Goes to Press. ( M.U.P. ) Mayer, Henry—The Press in Australia. ( Lansdowne Press.) Street, H.—Freedom, the Individual and the Law. (Penguin.). Textbooks and other reference books, available in the University Library and the Public Library, will be recommended in lectures. EXAMINATION. One 3-hour paper.

202. LAW AFFECTING JOURNALISM A course of thirteen lectures to be arranged. SYLLABUS Printers and Newspapers Act 1958. Registration of printing presses and newspapers. Postal Regulations. Electoral law. Advertisements. Freedom of speech and press. Leading principles of the Law of Copyright. Copyright Acts. Unpublished information. Defamation. Libel and Slander. Slander of title or goods. Literary, dramatic and artistic criticism. Seditious, blasphemous and obscene publications. Contempt of Court. Contempt of Crown and Parliament. Legal reporting. Privileges of the Press. Lotteries. 294 JОUнN.ц.]sм Books (a) Prescribed for preliminary reading: *Sawer, G.—A Guide to Australian Law for Journalists, Authors, Printers and PиЫ ishers. .( leib. U.Р., 1949.) (b) Prescribed textbook: Sawer, G.—A Guide to Australian Law for Journalists, Authors, Printers and Publishers. (leib. U.Р., 1949.) (c) Recommended for reference: Gatley, C.—On Libel and Slander. (Sweet and Maxwell.) Copinger, W. A.—On Copyright. (Sweet and Maxwell.) Oswald, J. F.—On Contempt. (Butterworth.) Fleming, J. G.—Law of Torts. (2nd ed. Ch. on Defamation.) EXAMINATION. One 3-hour paper.

215. ELEMENTARY JURISPRUDENCE AND

• CONSTITUTIONAL LAW A course of two lectures per week and one tutorial class per fortnight throughout the year. SYLLABUS ( a) Elementary Jurisprudence: Sources of law; common law; precedent, equity, statute; the courts and the administration of justice; elementary analysis of the legal. system and of general legal principles. (b) Elementary Constitutional Law: A consideration of the general principles of the British constitutional system as more particularly exemplified in the Australian States. Some problems of modern administrative law, with particular attention to delegated legislation and the liberty of the subject. Introduction to the constitutional law of the Australian federal system, including a brief discussion of the principal powers given to the Commonwealth and their operation, and the development of instruments of Commonwealth-State collaboration. BOOKS The latest edition of books should be used in all cases. ( a) Introductory reading: Glanville, Williams—Learning the Law. ( Stevens. ) ( b ) Prescribed textbooks: *Archer, P.—The Queen's Courts. (Pelican.) *Phillips, O. Hood—A First Book of English Law. ( Sweet and Maxwell. ) *Jennings, Sir. Ivor—The Queen's Government. (Pelican.) (c) Recommended for reference: Keeton, G.—Elementary Principles of Jurisprudence. (Pitman.) Friedmann, W. G.—Principles of Australian Administrative Law. ( Law Book Co.) Sawer, G.—Australian Government Today. (M.U.P. ) Paton, G. W.—Jurisprudence. ( O.U.P. ) Diceyy, A. V.—Law of the Constitution. ( Macmillan. ) Yardley, D. C. M. Introduction to British Constitutional Law. ( Butterworth, 1961.) Sawer, G.—Australian Constitutional Cases. ( Law Book Co.) Else-Mitchell, R. ( ed. )—Essays on the Australian Constitution. (Law Book Co.) EXAMINATION. One 3-hour paper.

295 TIME-TABLE FOR- 1968- FACULTY OF ARTS This Time-Table is subj ect to alteration Note-(a) In many subjects tutorials are given at times arranged early in first term. (Ь) For location of classes all students should consult the Time-table near the main entrance of the Old Arts Building. (c) Except where otherwise stated, the duration of lectures is one hour. (d) Day lecture times are printed in heavy black type, evening lectures in ordinary type, and lectures for both day and evening students in italics.

SUBSECT M. Tu. W. Ти. F. S. TEEMS Aesthetics .. 9.00 9.00 American History .. 5.15 5.15 Ancient History (P) 4.15 4.15 4.15 ) 4.15 Applied Mathematics P .. 11.00 10.00 11.00 6.15 5. 15 6.15 іr(Р) 12.00 10.00 11.00 5.15 5.15 12.00 6.15 6.15 II(Н) 12.00 10.00 12.00 II1( ) 5.15 Р t 6.15 III (H) 10.00 10.00 IV (Classes to be arranged) Arabio I . 4.15 - - 4.15 II .... . 5.15 - 2.15 III .. .. 4.15 - 4.15 IV .. 4.15 - 4.15 Arатаiо-Syrian I .. - 2.15 2.15 II .. 12.00 12.00 III 11.00 3.15 Iv.. 11.00 3.16 Australian History.. 11.00 11.00 Bengali I .. .. 5.15 6.15 II 6.15 6.15 6.15 Biblical Archaeology I 2.15 11.00 II 10.00 2.15 II 12.00 10.00 Biblical Studies I .. 5.15 5.15 II .. 4.15 4.15 III.. .. 4.15 4.15 British History (P & H) 2.15 2.15 5.15 5.15 (H) - 11.00 - Chinese' (P & H) .. 10.00 10.00 - 10.00 11.00 11.00 - 11.00 II(Р &H).. - 2.15 - 2.15 2.15 - 3.15 - 3.15 3.15 II(Н) .. (Classes to be arranged) III(Р &H) .. 2.15 2.15 - 2.15 3.15 3.15 - 3.15 III (H) 11.00 - - 11.00 - - - 3.00 IV .. - 2.00 - 3.00 2.00 - 4.00 - - 4.00 Classical Rome .. 4.15 - - 4.15 Comparative Philology (Classes to be arranged) Contemporary European Philosophy .. 11.00 - 11.00 - - Criminology A .. 12.00 . - - 12.00 Dutch I (P & H) .. 5.15 - 5.15 5.15 & 6.15 I(Н) .. (Classes to be arranged) II(Р & Н) .. 5.15 & - 5.15 & 6.15 6.15 (H) 4.15 I(P&H) ..' 6.15 - - 5.15& - 6.15 0 ( ) .. (Classes to be arranged) IV Н.. .. (Classes to be arranged) • Lecture groups will be listed on the notice boards of the Mathematics Department in the week preceding first term. t These times are alternative to one another. 296 -

Sивапст M. Ttr. Ти. F. TERMS East Asian Studieв . . 4.15 4.15 Economic Geography I 2.15 2.15 6.15 .15 II .. 3.15 В 3.15 Economic History A .. 3.1б 3.15 6.1б - 6.15 В (Р) .. - 3.15 3.15 - 5.15 .15 B(H) (Classes to e arranged) б Economic History C: Unit 1 . 12.00 - 6.15 - Unit 2 (P) . . - 12.00 6.1б Unit 3 (P).. 6.1б 12.00 - - - Units 4 & б (Not available in 1968.) Economics A - 4.15 - 4.15 B - - f10.00 f 10.00 l 5.15 l .16 C: б Unit 1 - - 4.15 Unit 2 0.00 Unit 3 5.15 - Unit 4 (Not availa le in 1968.) Unit 5 . . - 5.15 - Unit 6 4.15 English I (P & H) . 12.00 - 12.00 5.1 - .15 - II (P&H). б 4.15 -б 4.15 - 7.16 7.15 III (P&H).. 4.15 4.15 - 4.15 English Language I -- 3.15 - - 10.00 II - 10.00 - 12.00 11.00 III: . Middle English .. 10.00 -- 11.00 Elementary Old Norse .. 2.15 - 2.15 E. E. Lyric Poetry .. - 10.00 IV .. (Classes to e arranged) English Literature II (H) .. 12.00 12.00 2.16- 4.15 - English Literature III (H) Pract. of Criticism (Dating) 11.00 - Novel Course & Australian/ American Literature Course Additional Honours Work 11.00 2.15 English Literature IV: Aspects of Poetry 1500- 1800 .. .. .. 10.00- 2.15 12.00 Lit. & Thought 1830-1880 1i.00- 1.00 Lit. &Thought 1870-1925 11.00- i .00 Literary Criticism 2.1 - 4.1 б Drama .. Ь 11.0- 1.00 Epistemology, Logic and Methodology . 12.00 12.00 Epistemology, Logic and Methodology (Special Course) 11.00 Ethics 2.15 2.15 297 -

Suвгват M. Tu. ј W. Ta. F. S.

European History A (P) 2.15- - 2.15 10.00 B (I) 10.00 - 10.00 - Exploration & Settlement.. (Classes to be arranged) Far Eastern History 5.15 - 5.25 Fine Arts A 10.00 - - 10.00 5.15 - - Б.15 В .. 5.15 - - 5.15 В ) б.15 6.15* - 5.15 *2 & 3 С ) б.15 - -- .. 5.15 C (I)Н 6.15* 5.15 - 5.15 *2 &3 French I (P).. 9.00 12.00 9.00 11.00 - 6.15 - 6.15 - 7.15 - 7.15 - 9.00 12.00 9.00 - - - 2.15 - - 4.15 - 2.15 - 9.00 9.00 6.15 - 5.15 10.00§ 11.00k - 2.15 2.15 12.00 9.00 - 3.15 3.15 9.00 - - 5.15 - 5.15 6.15 - 6.15 7.15 - - 12.00 12.00 3.15 3.15 - 5.15 5.15 - IV . .. - 2.15 12.00 9.30 - - 2.15 10.30 General Mathematics 8.45 - 8.45 - 8.45 Geography I (P & H) .. 11.00 - - 11.00 or - - 9.00 - 12.00 (Practical work) .. fi2.00- - f2.00- - б.00 б.00 Geography II(P & H) - - 9.00 - 9.00 (Practical Work) Geography II (H) (Classes to be arranged) III (P&H) - 2.00 2.00 2.00 (Practical Work) ј ј (Classes to be arranged) ÌI (H) German I (P & H) 9.00 9.00 9.00 4.15 5.15 .15 б.15 I(I) б 3.15 II (P & H) 11.00 10.00 10.00 11.00 5.15 -5.1 5 5.15 6.15 (H) 11.00* 2.15 III (Р & Нj 10.00 11.00 10.00 11.00 11.00 5.15 5.15 б.15 6.15 6.15 III ( ) .. 2.15- 2.15 н 4.15 Iv.. .. 11.00- 10.00 12.30 2.15- 4.15

¢ Day and evening students. t These times are alternatives but students will be allocated to one of these groupa. • Optional for Pass. 298

TERMs SцвтЕст М. Ttr. W. Ти. F. Greek I (P) .. 10.00 - 10.00 - 10.00 (Further classes to be arranged) I (H).. .. 10.o0t 1o.0ott - ю.uutti 1o.0ot ta (Further classes to be arranged) itt & 2 II and III (P&H).. - 10.00 - 10.00 I 3.15t t3 (Further classes to be arranged) III(Р & Н) .. I 3.15tt ft1&2 II, III and IV (H) (Further classes to be arranged) Greek Philosophy (P & H) . - - - 9.00 - 9.00 Hebrew I (P & Н): f 11.00 Option A 11.00 l 3.15 Option В 12.00 12.00 3.15 Option C 11.00 12.00 3.15 II (P & H): Option A 11.00 3.15 3.15 Option В 10.00 10.00 11.00 Option C 10.00 10.00 11.00 III(P & H):. .. Option A 12.00 10.00 12.00 Option В 2.15 10.00 Option C 10.00 11.00 IV 10.00 11.00 History-Special Fourth Year (Classes to be arranged) History of Economia Theory 10.00 - 10.00 History and Philosophy of Science I . 3.15 3.15 з.15 В.15 В.15 6.15 II .. 6.15 .15 5.15 III .. 5.30- б 7.30 History and Philosophy of Science (Science Course) . . 12.00 12.00 12.00 Honours History:. A-Ancient History .. - 2.15 - 3.15 В-Medieval European (Not available in 1968). C-Later Medieval and - - 12.00 - Early Modern (Further Classes to be arranged) D-Modern European .. 10.00 - 10.00 -. - (Further classes to be arranged) E-Moderi British .. - 4.15 - 1 4.15 - (Further classes to be arranged) F-Australian .. 11.00 - 11.00 (Further classes to be arranged) G-American . 10.00 - 11.00 - 6.15 - 5.15 - H-Far Eastern .. 5.15 - 5.15 (Further classes to be arranged) J-Historiography 12.00 - - Honours Philosophy_A 9.30- - - 11.00 -В . 11.30- I .00 -C 3.45- 5.15 -D 11.00- 12.30 -E 11.30- 1.00

299 - -

SивтисТ Tu. Тн. F. S. TERMS

-F 10.00- 11.30 -G . 4.15- -.- 5.45 Indian Studieв I (P & H) .. - - 4.15 5.15 I(I) , 2.15 - - - II 5.15 - 5.15 5.15 ПI . 5.15 - 5.15 5.15 Indonesian I (Р & H) - 12.00 - 12.00 - 4.15 - 4.15 - 6.15 - 6.15 (Classes to be arranged) Indonesian and Malayan Studie A ( ) .. 4.15 5.15 в Р - 5.15 - -- A (и) (Classes to be arranged) В (Р) 3.15 - - I 9.00 В (Н) 4.15 C (Classes to be arranged) IaternationaI Relations .. - б.15 11.00 - ItalianI(Р &H) .. . 11.00 11.00 11.00 11.00 5.15 б.15 -- 5.15 6.1б - 4.15 6.15 - 5.15 6.15 6.15 - 3.15 - 3.15 3.16 5.15 - 5.15 .15 - 6.15 II (H)-Literature -В 12.00 12.00 I (1)-Language 3.15 12.00 3.15 II .. .. . (Classes to be arrange Japanese I .. .. .. 9.45 - 9.45 9.45 11.00 - 11.00 11.00 II .. .. 2.00 2.00 2.00 3.00 3.00 3.00 I .. .. - 9.45 9.45 9.45 П - 11.00 11.00 11.00 Journalism .. .. Later British History - 4.15 4.15 Latinl(P&I) .. . 11.00 - 9.00* - б.15 6.15 11.00 ( ) .. . 11.00 Iг (Р ) . 3.15 11.00 11.00** Н 2.15 II &III (Р & Н) .. б.15 11.00 6.15 11.00 2.15*'* II (P) .. .. .. 2.15 5.15*** II ( ) .. .. 2.00 III (P)Н .. 3.1 III (P&H) .. .. - Ь 2.15* - 5.16* II, III and IV (H) (Further classes to be arranged) Mathematical Economics - 9.00- - 11.00 Medieval French Language - 10.00 .- 10.00 and Literature .. ff - 11.оо -

300

SIIBJECT То. Ти. TERMs Middle Eastern studies: A-Option-The Ancient Middle East . .. 12.00 12.00 Option-Iвlam Today 11.00 5.15 B-Option-The Modern Middle East . . 11.00 11.00 Option-Ie1am (Medieval) .. . 4.15 2.15 Option-Comparative Religion (Classic Themes) .. 12.00 12.00 C-available in 1969. Modern Government A .. 12.00 12.00 6.15 - 6.15 В .. 5.15 - 5.15 Modern Philosophy - 5.15 - 6.15 Musio A .. - 4.15 4.15 B .. 2.00 - - 2.00 C 3.1б - - 3.15 Philosophy IA 11.00 - 11.00 IB . 6.15 - 5.15 I(I) .. 6.15 - Philosophy of Religion . 12.00 - 12.00 - Political Geography (Classes to be rranged) Political Philosophy 5.15 - 5.15 Political Sociology 12.00 - 12.00 Principles of Statistics 9.00 9.00- 11.00 - 11.00 Psychology I .. - 2.15 2.15 - 4.1б - 4.15 (Practical Work) ( Classes to be arrangeć) IIA(Р & Н) 4.15 4.15 (Practical Work) (Classes to be arranged) IIB (P & H) - 11.00- 11. 9.00- 10.00- 1.00 1.00 11.00 12.00 - 4.15- 9.00- 6.15 11.00 IIIA .. 4.15 - 5.15 4.15 (Practical Work) - §9.00- - §4.30- §9.00- 11.00 6.30 11.00 IIIA (H) 9.00- 9.30- 11.30- 9.00- 11.00 11.00 1.00 11.00 гIIB(Р & Н) .. 2.15- - 2.16- 4.15 4.15 Public Administration 4.15 4.15 Pure Mathematics I* 8.45 - 8.45 -8.4 5 - 5.1б 6.15 6.16 II (Р)* 10.00 - 10.00 9.00 12.00 10.00 6.15- - - 6.1б- 7.45 7.45 10.00 10.00 10.00 10.00 t11.00 - 12.00 9.00 - 9.00 9.00- 12.00 4. 5 - 5.15 - 5.15У 6.15 9.00 - 9.00 9.00 .15 - .15 )- .15 (Classesа to be arrangeа а

Alternative times. •й Lecture the wee groupe will be listed on the notice boards of the Mathematics Department in t Practicek elpreceding first term. а„es. 301

Sивтвст Tu. Ти. F. S. Тввмв Rationalist Metaphysics 4.15 4.15 Renaissance French Language and Literature' 2.15 10.00 11.00 Rhetoric 5.15 5.15 Russian Reading Course I 2.15 2.15 2.15 II 11.00 Russian I (P & H) 10.00 10.00 10.00 6.15 6.15 6.15 I (I) .. i i .00 11.00 11.00 II(Р & Н) 12.00 12.00 12.00 5.15 6.15 6.15 II (H) 11.00 11.00 III(Р & Н) .. 5.15 5.15 5.15 III (H) Language.. 11.00 11.00 11.00 III (H) Literature 12.00 12.00 IV Language .. 2.15 2.15 2.15 IV Literature .. 4.15 4.15 4.15 Statistical Method .. 11.00 11.00 .15 5.15 Swedieh I .. 5.15- б 5.15- 7.15 7.15 II .. . .. (Classes to be arranged) III .. (Classes to be arranged) Theory and Method of History . 2.151 - I - I - Theory of Politics I & П (Classes to be arranged) Theory of Statiвticв I(Р & Н) - 11.00- 3.1 11.00- 1.00 5.15 1.00 n (P & H) - 2.15- 10.00- 2.15- 5.15 1.00 5.15 цI(Р&Н) (Classes to be arranged)

Brown Prior Anderson Pty Ltd 5 Evans Street Burwood Victoria

Library Digitised Collections

Author/s: The University of Melbourne

Title: Handbook: Faculty of Arts and Board of Studies in Journalism 1968

Date: 1968

Persistent Link: http://hdl.handle.net/11343/128732